From 7e94657b4fbe4a7e911d606b41f233f7b67187b9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Karl Berry Date: Thu, 9 Sep 2010 23:09:53 +0000 Subject: latex2e-help-texinfo 2010/09/06 (8sep10) git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@19633 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751 --- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog | 13 + .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile | 22 +- .../texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS | 2 + .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README | 2 +- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk | 10556 ++++++------- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html | 15825 +++++++++++-------- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf | Bin 976998 -> 977098 bytes .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi | 47 +- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt | 2279 +-- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml | 14942 ++++++++--------- 10 files changed, 22226 insertions(+), 21462 deletions(-) (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist') diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog index b1309af1baa..7150bc8880f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog @@ -1,3 +1,16 @@ +2010-09-03 Karl Berry + + * latex2e-es.texi: translation to Spanish, from Nacho Pacheco, + 27 Aug 2010 19:15:47. + * Makefile: also build the Spanish. + +2010-09-03 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: update TUGboat sample. + + * Makefile (%.html): use new perl makeinfo (texi2html), so no need + for g_t kludge. + 2010-07-12 Karl Berry * July 2010 release for TL 2010. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile index 3dd2c4baaa0..a872dd54621 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile @@ -19,8 +19,6 @@ texi2xml = $(makeinfo) --xml $(texi2docbook) -o $@ $< %.html: %.texi $(texi2html) $< -# kludge in fix for missing g_t prefix in toc entries in makeinfo 4.13. - perl -pi -e 's/href="#_/href="#g_t_/' $@ || rm $@ %.info: %.texi $(texi2info) $< %.txt: %.texi @@ -28,8 +26,16 @@ texi2xml = $(makeinfo) --xml %.xml: %.texi $(texi2xml) $< -tex_output = latex2e.dvi latex2e.pdf -makeinfo_output = latex2e.info latex2e.html latex2e.txt latex2e.xml latex2e.dbk +en_tex_output = latex2e.dvi latex2e.pdf +es_tex_output = latex2e-es.dvi latex2e-es.pdf +tex_output = $(en_tex_output) $(es_tex_output) +# +en_makeinfo_output = latex2e.info latex2e.html latex2e.txt \ + latex2e.xml latex2e.dbk +es_makeinfo_output = latex2e-es.info latex2e-es.html latex2e-es.txt \ + latex2e-es.xml latex2e-es.dbk +makeinfo_output = $(en_makeinfo_output) $(es_makeinfo_output) + all: makeinfo_output tex_output makeinfo_output: $(makeinfo_output) tex_output: $(tex_output) @@ -41,8 +47,10 @@ realclean distclean: clean rm -f $(all) dist: all + rm -f spanish; ln -s . spanish tar cvzf latex2e-help-texinfo.tgz \ - ChangeLog Makefile NEWS README \ - latex2e.texi ltx-help.el \ - $(tex_output) $(makeinfo_output) + ChangeLog Makefile NEWS README ltx-help.el \ + latex2e.texi $(en_makeinfo_output) latex2e.pdf \ + $(addprefix spanish/, latex2e-es.texi $(es_makeinfo_output) latex2e-es.pdf) + rm -f spanish @ls -l latex2e-help-texinfo.tgz diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS index 73e507e8cb5..ce72bbb94c2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS @@ -1,6 +1,8 @@ NEWS for latex2e.texi, aka the latex2e-help-texinfo package. Public domain. Originally written 1995, Torsten Martinsen. +Spanish translation from Nacho Pacheco. + ---------------------------------------------------------------- Changes in July 2010 release: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README index d3d0c243be8..976eef789b6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README @@ -8,6 +8,6 @@ http://home.gna.org/latexrefman (the project home page) has more information, including links to the current output in various formats, sources, mailing lists, and other infrastructure. -Help is most definitely wanted. (Search for "xx" in the source for just +Help is most definitely wanted. (Search for "xx" in the source for only a few of the known deficiencies.) Please email any bug reports, new material, general discussion, whatever, to latexrefman-discuss@gna.org. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk index 6b6d3154370..a528d109381 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk @@ -3,1635 +3,1413 @@ ]> - - &latex;2e reference manual (July 2010) + +@LaTeX{}2e reference manual (July 2010) + + + + - - - This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version of July 2010. - This was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS + + + +This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a +document preparation system, version of July 2010. + +This was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by -George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The -&latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The +George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The +&latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The &latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and the -&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway -and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as +&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway +and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as &tex;niques number 10), as reference material (text was not -directly copied). - Copyright © 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Karl Berry. +directly copied). + +Copyright © 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Karl Berry. + Copyright © 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore. -Copyright © 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. - Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of + +Copyright © 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice -are preserved on all copies. - Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +are preserved on all copies. + + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission -notice identical to this one. - Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual -into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. - +notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. + - - &latex;2e - This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a + +* Menu: +* LaTeX2e: (latex2e). Unofficial LaTeX reference manual. + + + + + + +&latex;2e + +This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a document preparation system, version as of July 2010. It is intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of -&latex; for many years. - Knuth, Donald E.Lamport, Leslie&latex; Project team&latex; is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's +&latex; for many years. + +Knuth, Donald E.Lamport, Leslie&latex; Project team&latex; is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's &tex; typesetting program. &latex; was originally created by Leslie Lamport; it is now maintained by a group of volunteers (http://latex-project.org). The official documentation written by the &latex; project is available there. Again, the present document is unofficial and has not been reviewed by the &latex; -maintainers. - +maintainers. + + - - Overview of &latex; - overview of &latex;&latex; overview -The &latex; command typesets a file of text using the &tex; program + + +Overview of &latex; + +overview of &latex;&latex; overview +The &latex; command typesets a file of text using the &tex; program and the &latex; “macro package” for &tex;. To be more specific, it processes an input file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that describe how the text should be formatted. -It produces at least three files as output: - - - A main output file, which is one of: - - - If invoked as latex, a “Device Independent” (.dvi) +It produces at least three files as output: + + +A main output file, which is one of: + + +If invoked as latex, a “Device Independent” (.dvi) file. This contains commands that can be translated into commands for a variety of output devices. You can view such .dvi output of &latex; by using a program such as xdvi (display directly) -or dvips (convert to PostScript). - - - If invoked as pdflatex, a “Portable Document Format” +or dvips (convert to PostScript). + + + +If invoked as pdflatex, a “Portable Document Format” (.pdf) file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but it does make the output much larger than the .dvi produced from the -same document. - - - There are other less-common variants of &latex; (and &tex;) as well, -which can produce HTML, XML, and other things. - - - A “transcript” or .log file that contains summary information and -diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. - - - An “auxiliary” or .aux file. This is used by &latex; itself, for -things such as sectioning. - - - A &latex; command begins with the command name, which consists of a -\ followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a +same document. + + +There are other less-common variants of &latex; (and &tex;) as well, +which can produce HTML, XML, and other things. + + + +A “transcript” or .log file that contains summary information and +diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. + + + +An “auxiliary” or .aux file. This is used by &latex; itself, for +things such as sectioning. + + +A &latex; command begins with the command name, which consists of a +\ followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, [], are optional while arguments contained in braces, {}, are -required. - &latex; is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless -explicitly directed to do otherwise. - - - - Starting & ending - starting & endingending & starting -A minimal input file looks like the following: - -\documentclass{class} +required. + +&latex; is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless +explicitly directed to do otherwise. + + + + +Starting & ending + +starting & endingending & starting +A minimal input file looks like the following: + +\documentclass{class} \begin{document} your text \end{document} - where the class is a valid document class for &latex;. +where the class is a valid document class for &latex;. See , for details of the various document classes -available locally. - preamble, definedYou may include other &latex; commands between the \documentclass +available locally. + +preamble, definedYou may include other &latex; commands between the \documentclass and the \begin{document} commands (this area is called the -preamble). - - - - Document classes - document classesclasses of documents\documentclass -The class of a given document is defined with the command: - -\documentclass[options]{class} +preamble). + + + + +Document classes + +document classesclasses of documents\documentclass +The class of a given document is defined with the command: + +\documentclass[options]{class} - The \documentclass command must be the first command in a -&latex; source file. - article classreport classbook classletter classslides classBuilt-in &latex; document class names are (many other document -classes are available as add-ons; see ): - -article report book letter slides +The \documentclass command must be the first command in a +&latex; source file. + +article classreport classbook classletter classslides classBuilt-in &latex; document class names are (many other document +classes are available as add-ons; see ): + +article report book letter slides - Standard options are described below. - - Document class options - document class optionsoptions, document classclass optionsglobal options -You can specify so-called global options or class options +Standard options are described below. + + + + +Document class options + +document class optionsoptions, document classclass optionsglobal options +You can specify so-called global options or class options to the \documentclass command by enclosing them in square brackets as usual. To specify more than one option, separate -them with a comma: - -\documentclass[option1,option2,...]{class} +them with a comma: + +\documentclass[option1,option2,...]{class} - Here is the list of the standard class options. - 10pt option11pt option12pt optionAll of the standard classes except slides accept the following -options for selecting the typeface size (default is 10pt): - -10pt 11pt 12pt +Here is the list of the standard class options. + +10pt option11pt option12pt optionAll of the standard classes except slides accept the following +options for selecting the typeface size (default is 10pt): + +10pt 11pt 12pt - a4paper optiona5paper optionb5paper optionexecutivepaper optionlegalpaper optionletterpaper optionAll of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper -size (default is letterpaper): - -a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper +a4paper optiona5paper optionb5paper optionexecutivepaper optionlegalpaper optionletterpaper optionAll of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper +size (default is letterpaper): + +a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper - draft optionfinal optionfleqn optionlandscape optionleqno optionopenbib optiontitlepage optionnotitlepage optionMiscellaneous other options: - - - draft, final - - black boxes, omittingmark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final. - - - - fleqn - - Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. - - - - landscape - - Selects landscape format; default is portrait. - - - - leqno - - Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. - - - - openbib - - Use “open” bibliography format. - - - - titlepage, notitlepage - - Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. - - - - These options are not available with the slides class: - onecolumn optiontwocolumn optiononeside optiontwoside optionopenright optionopenany option - - - onecolumn - twocolumn - - Typeset in one or two columns; default is onecolumn. - - - - oneside - twoside - - \evensidemargin\oddsidemarginSelects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except -for the book class. - The \evensidemargin (\oddsidemargin parameter determines +draft optionfinal optionfleqn optionlandscape optionleqno optionopenbib optiontitlepage optionnotitlepage optionMiscellaneous other options: + +draft, final +black boxes, omittingmark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final. +fleqn +Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. +landscape +Selects landscape format; default is portrait. +leqno +Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. +openbib +Use “open” bibliography format. +titlepage, notitlepage +Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. + + +These options are not available with the slides class: + +onecolumn optiontwocolumn optiononeside optiontwoside optionopenright optionopenany optiononecolumn +twocolumn +Typeset in one or two columns; default is onecolumn. + +oneside +twoside +\evensidemargin\oddsidemarginSelects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except +for the book class. + +The \evensidemargin (\oddsidemargin parameter determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For one-sided printing the text is centered, for two-sided, \oddsidemargin is 40% of the difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth -with \evensidemargin the remainder. - - - - openright - openany - - Determines if a chapter should start on a -right-hand page; default is openright for book. - - - - The slides class offers the option clock for printing -the time at the bottom of each note. - packages, loadingloading additional packages\usepackageAdditional packages are loaded like this: - -\usepackage[options]{pkg} +with \evensidemargin the remainder. + +openright +openany +Determines if a chapter should start on a +right-hand page; default is openright for book. + + +The slides class offers the option clock for printing +the time at the bottom of each note. + + +packages, loadingloading additional packages\usepackageAdditional packages are loaded like this: + +\usepackage[options]{pkg} - To specify more than one pkg, you can separate them with a -comma, or use multiple \usepackage commands. - global optionsoptions, globalAny options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown +To specify more than one pkg, you can separate them with a +comma, or use multiple \usepackage commands. + +global optionsoptions, globalAny options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with -\usepackage. - - - - - Typefaces - typefacesfonts -Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size -and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. - - - Font styles - font stylestypeface stylesstyles of text -The following type style commands are supported by &latex;. - These commands are used like \textit{italic text}. The +\usepackage. + + + + + +Typefaces + +typefacesfonts +Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size +and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. + + + + +Font styles + +font stylestypeface stylesstyles of text +The following type style commands are supported by &latex;. + +These commands are used like \textit{italic text}. The corresponding command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the -next type style command or the end of the current group. - The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either +next type style command or the end of the current group. + +The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either \sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily to get bold -sans serif. - You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance, -\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. - - - \textrm (\rmfamily) - - \textrm\rmfamilyRoman. - - - - \textit (\itshape) - - \textit\itshapeItalics. - - - - \emph - - \emphemphasisEmphasis (switches between \textit and \textrm). - - - - \textmd (\mdseries) - - \textmd\mdseriesMedium weight (default). - - - - \textbf (\bfseries) - - \textbf\bfseriesBoldface. - - - - \textup (\upshape) - - \textup\upshapeUpright (default). The opposite of slanted. - - - - \textsl (\slshape) - - \textsl\slshapeSlanted. - - - - \textsf (\sffamily) - - \textsf\sffamilySans serif. - - - - \textsc (\scshape) - - \textsc\scshapeSmall caps. - - - - \texttt (\ttfamily) - - \texttt\ttfamilyTypewriter. - - - - \textnormal (\normalfont) - - \textnormal\normalfontMain document font. - - - - \mathrm - - \mathrmRoman, for use in math mode. - - - - \mathbf - - \mathbfBoldface, for use in math mode. - - - - \mathsf - - \mathsfSans serif, for use in math mode. - - - - \mathtt - - \mathttTypewriter, for use in math mode. - - - - \mathit - (\mit) - - Italics, for use in math mode. - - - - \mathnormal - - \mathnormalFor use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. - - - - \mathcal - - \mathcal`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. - - - - In addition, the command +sans serif. + +You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance, +\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. + +\textrm (\rmfamily) +\textrm\rmfamilyRoman. + +\textit (\itshape) +\textit\itshapeItalics. + +\emph +\emphemphasisEmphasis (switches between \textit and \textrm). + +\textmd (\mdseries) +\textmd\mdseriesMedium weight (default). + +\textbf (\bfseries) +\textbf\bfseriesBoldface. +\textup (\upshape) +\textup\upshapeUpright (default). The opposite of slanted. +\textsl (\slshape) +\textsl\slshapeSlanted. +\textsf (\sffamily) +\textsf\sffamilySans serif. +\textsc (\scshape) +\textsc\scshapeSmall caps. +\texttt (\ttfamily) +\texttt\ttfamilyTypewriter. +\textnormal (\normalfont) +\textnormal\normalfontMain document font. +\mathrm +\mathrmRoman, for use in math mode. +\mathbf +\mathbfBoldface, for use in math mode. +\mathsf +\mathsfSans serif, for use in math mode. +\mathtt +\mathttTypewriter, for use in math mode. + +\mathit +(\mit) +Italics, for use in math mode. + +\mathnormal +\mathnormalFor use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. +\mathcal +\mathcal`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. + + +In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} \mathversioncan be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in -formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. - &latex; also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to +formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. + +&latex; also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to the given style, that is, are not cumulative. They are used differently than the above commands, too: {\cmd ...} instead of \cmd{...}. These are two very different -things. - - - \bf - - bold fontSwitch to bold face. - - - - \cal - - script letters for mathcalligraphic letters for mathSwitch to calligraphic letters for math. - - - - \em - - emphasisEmphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). - - - - \it - - italic fontItalics. - - - - \rm - - roman fontRoman. - - - - \sc - - small caps fontSmall caps. - - - - \sf - - sans serif fontSans serif. - - - - \sl - - slanted fontoblique fontSlanted (oblique). - - - - \tt - - typewriter fontmonospace fontfixed-width fontTypewriter (monospace, fixed-width). - - - - - - - Font sizes - font sizestypeface sizessizes of text -The following standard type size commands are supported by &latex;. +things. + +\bf +bold fontSwitch to bold face. + +\cal +script letters for mathcalligraphic letters for mathSwitch to calligraphic letters for math. + +\em +emphasisEmphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). + +\it +italic fontItalics. + +\rm +roman fontRoman. + +\sc +small caps fontSmall caps. + +\sf +sans serif fontSans serif. + +\sl +slanted fontoblique fontSlanted (oblique). + +\tt +typewriter fontmonospace fontfixed-width fontTypewriter (monospace, fixed-width). + + + + + + +Font sizes +font sizestypeface sizessizes of text +The following standard type size commands are supported by &latex;. The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size used (in points) with the ‘10pt’, ‘11pt’, and -‘12pt’ document size options, respectively (see ). - \tiny\scriptsize\footnotesize\small\normalsize\large\Large\LARGE\huge\Huge - - - - - - - - - Command - 10pt - 11pt - 12pt - - - - - \tiny - 5 - 6 - 6 - - - \scriptsize - 7 - 8 - 8 - - - \footnotesize - 8 - 9 - 10 - - - \small - 9 - 10 - 10.95 - - - \normalsize (default) - 10 - 10.95 - 12 - - - \large - 12 - 12 - 14.4 - - - \Large - 14.4 - 14.4 - 17.28 - - - \LARGE - 17.28 - 17.28 - 20.74 - - - \huge - 20.74 - 20.74 - 24.88 - - - \Huge - 24.88 - 24.88 - 24.88 - - - - - The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of +‘12pt’ document size options, respectively (see ). + +\tiny\scriptsize\footnotesize\small\normalsize\large\Large\LARGE\huge\Huge + Command 10pt 11pt 12pt + \tiny + 5 6 6 + \scriptsize + 7 8 8 + \footnotesize + 8 9 10 + \small + 9 10 10.95 + \normalsize (default) + 10 10.95 12 + \large + 12 12 14.4 + \Large + 14.4 14.4 17.28 + \LARGE + 17.28 17.28 20.74 + \huge + 20.74 20.74 24.88 + \Huge + 24.88 24.88 24.88 + +The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. You can also use the environment form of -these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. - - - - Low-level font commands - low-level font commandsfont commands, low-level -These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and +these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. + + + + +Low-level font commands +low-level font commandsfont commands, low-level +These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available -ones. - - - \fontencoding{enc} - - \fontencodingSelect font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1. - - - - \fontfamily{family} - - \fontfamilySelect font family. Valid families include: - - - cmr for Computer Modern Roman - - - cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif - - - cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter - - - and numerous others. - - - - \fontseries{series} - - \fontseriesSelect font series. Valid series include: - - - m Medium (normal) - - - b Bold - - - c Condensed - - - bc Bold condensed - - - bx Bold extended - - - and various other combinations. - - - - \fontshape{shape} - - \fontshapeSelect font shape. Valid shapes are: - - - n Upright (normal) - - - it Italic - - - sl Slanted (oblique) - - - sc Small caps - - - ui Upright italics - - - ol Outline - - - The two last shapes are not available for most font families. - - - - \fontsize{size}{skip} - - \fontsize\baselineskipSet font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and +ones. + +\fontencoding{enc} +\fontencodingSelect font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1. + +\fontfamily{family} +\fontfamilySelect font family. Valid families include: + + cmr for Computer Modern Roman + + cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif + + cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter + + +and numerous others. + +\fontseries{series} +\fontseriesSelect font series. Valid series include: + + m Medium (normal) + + b Bold + + c Condensed + + bc Bold condensed + + bx Bold extended + + +and various other combinations. + +\fontshape{shape} +\fontshapeSelect font shape. Valid shapes are: + + n Upright (normal) + + it Italic + + sl Slanted (oblique) + + sc Small caps + + ui Upright italics + + ol Outline + + +The two last shapes are not available for most font families. + +\fontsize{size}{skip} +\fontsize\baselineskipSet font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a parameter named \baselineskip. The unit of both parameters defaults to pt. The default \baselineskip for the Computer Modern typeface -is 1.2 times the \fontsize. - \baselinestretchsetspace packagedouble spacingThe line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the +is 1.2 times the \fontsize. + +\baselinestretchsetspace packagedouble spacingThe line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the \baselinestretch parameter when the type size changes; the default is 1. However, the best way to “double space” a document, if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use the setspace package; see -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace. - \linespread - - - - \linespread{factor} - - Equivalent to +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace. + +\linespread\linespread{factor} +Equivalent to \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and therefore must be followed by \selectfont to have any effect. Best specified in the preamble, or use the setspace package, as -described just above. - \selectfontThe changes made by calling the font commands described above do -not come into effect until \selectfont is called. - - - - \usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} - - \usefontThe same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, +described just above. + +\selectfontThe changes made by calling the font commands described above do +not come into effect until \selectfont is called. + +\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} +\usefontThe same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape with the given parameters, -followed by \selectfont. - - - - - - - - Layout - layout commands -Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. - - - <literal>\onecolumn</literal> - \onecolumnone-column output -The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces -single-column output. This is the default. - - - - <literal>\twocolumn</literal> - \twocolumnmulticolumn texttwo-column output -Synopsis: - -\twocolumn[text1col] +followed by \selectfont. + + + + + + + +Layout +layout commands +Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. + + + + +<literal>\onecolumn</literal> +\onecolumnone-column output +The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces +single-column output. This is the default. + + + + +<literal>\twocolumn</literal> +\twocolumnmulticolumn texttwo-column output +Synopsis: + +\twocolumn[text1col] - The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces +The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces two-column output. If the optional text1col argument is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting -starts. - These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: - - - \columnsep - - The distance between columns (35pt by default). - - - - \columnseprule - - The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. - - - - \columnwidth - - The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth in -single-column text. - - - - These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: - - - \dbltopfraction - - Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied +starts. + +These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: + +\columnsep +The distance between columns (35pt by default). + +\columnseprule +The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. + +\columnwidth +The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth in +single-column text. + + + +These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: + +\dbltopfraction +Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied by floats. Default ‘.7’, can be usefully redefined to (say) -‘.9’ to avoid going to float pages so soon. - - - - \dblfloatpagefraction - - The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats, -for a two-column float page. Default ‘.5’. - - - - \dblfloatsep - - Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float +‘.9’ to avoid going to float pages so soon. + +\dblfloatpagefraction +The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats, +for a two-column float page. Default ‘.5’. + +\dblfloatsep +Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float page. Default ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for ‘10pt’ and -‘11pt’ documents, ‘14pt plus2pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. - - - - \dbltextfloatsep - - Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page -and the main text. Default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. - - - - - - - <literal>\flushbottom</literal> - \flushbottom -The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same +‘11pt’ documents, ‘14pt plus2pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. + +\dbltextfloatsep +Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page +and the main text. Default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. + + + + + + +<literal>\flushbottom</literal> + +\flushbottom +The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same height, adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the -page. - This is the default if twocolumn mode is selected -(see ). - - - - <literal>\raggedbottom</literal> - \raggedbottomstretch, omitting vertical -The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the natural +page. + +This is the default if twocolumn mode is selected +(see ). + + + + +<literal>\raggedbottom</literal> +\raggedbottomstretch, omitting vertical +The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the natural height of the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be -stretched. - - - - Page layout parameters - page layout parametersparameters, page layoutlayout, page parameters forheader, parameters forfooter, parameters forrunning header and footer - - - \headheight - - Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is +stretched. + + + + +Page layout parameters + +page layout parametersparameters, page layoutlayout, page parameters forheader, parameters forfooter, parameters forrunning header and footer +\headheight +Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is ‘30pt’, except in the book class, where it varies with the -type size. - - - - \headsep - - Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of +type size. + +\headsep +Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of the main text. Default is ‘25pt’, except in the book -class, where it varies with the type size. - - - - \footskip - - Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of +class, where it varies with the type size. + +\footskip +Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of the page footer. Default is ‘30pt’, except in the book -class, where it varies with the type size. - - - - \linewidth - - Width of the current line; the default varies with the font size, +class, where it varies with the type size. + +\linewidth +Width of the current line; the default varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode, etc. For an article document in ‘10pt’, it's set to ‘345pt’; in two-column mode, that -becomes ‘229.5pt’. - - - - \textheight - - The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with +becomes ‘229.5pt’. + +\textheight +The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with the font size, document class, etc. For an article or report document in ‘10pt’, it's set to ‘43\baselineskip’; for book, it's ‘41\baselineskip’. For ‘11pt’, it's ‘38\baselineskip’ and for ‘12pt’, -‘36\baselineskip’. - - - - \textwidth - - The normal horizontal width of the page body; the default varies as +‘36\baselineskip’. + +\textwidth +The normal horizontal width of the page body; the default varies as usual. For an article or report document, it's ‘345pt’ at ‘10pt’, ‘360pt’ at ‘11pt’, and ‘390pt’ at ‘12pt’. For a book document, it's -‘4.5in’ at ‘10pt’, and ‘5in’ at ‘11pt’ or ‘12pt’. - - - - \topmargin - - Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the +‘4.5in’ at ‘10pt’, and ‘5in’ at ‘11pt’ or ‘12pt’. + +\topmargin +Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is computed based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in − \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip, and -then divided by two. - - - - \topskip - - Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of +then divided by two. + +\topskip +Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is the -same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at ‘10pt’. - - - - - - - - Sectioning - sectioning -Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: - - - \part - \chapter - - (report and book class only) - - - - \section - \subsection - \subsubsection - \paragraph - \subparagraph - - - All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., - -\chapter[toctitle]{title} +same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at ‘10pt’. + + + + + + + +Sectioning +sectioning +Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: + +\part +\chapter +(report and book class only) +\section +\subsection +\subsubsection +\paragraph +\subparagraph + + +All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., + +\chapter[toctitle]{title} - In addition to providing the heading title in the main text, the -section title can appear in two other places: - - - The table of contents. - - - The running head at the top of the page. - - - You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. +In addition to providing the heading title in the main text, the +section title can appear in two other places: + + +The table of contents. + + +The running head at the top of the page. + + +You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument toctitle that, when given, specifies the text for these other -places. - *-form of sectioning commandsAlso, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print +places. + +*-form of sectioning commandsAlso, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print title as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an -entry in the table of contents. For instance: - -\section*{Preamble} +entry in the table of contents. For instance: + +\section*{Preamble} - \appendixappendix, creatingThe \appendix command changes the way following sectional units +\appendixappendix, creatingThe \appendix command changes the way following sectional units are numbered. The \appendix command itself generates no text and does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this -command is something like - -\chapter{A Chapter} +command is something like + +\chapter{A Chapter} … \appendix \chapter{The First Appendix} - secnumdepth countersection numbers, printingThe secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers. -The setting - -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} +secnumdepth countersection numbers, printingThe secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers. +The setting + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} - suppresses heading numbers at any depth > level, where -chapter is level zero. (See .) - - - - Cross references - cross references -One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer -the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” - - - <literal>\label</literal> - \label -Synopsis: - -\label{key} +suppresses heading numbers at any depth > level, where +chapter is level zero. (See .) + + + + +Cross references +cross references +One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer +the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” + + + + +<literal>\label</literal> +\label +Synopsis: + +\label{key} - A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to +A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to key the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing -inside a numbered environment assigns that number to key. - A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or -punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. - To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is +inside a numbered environment assigns that number to key. + +A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or +punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. + +To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by -a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: - - - ch - - for chapters - - - - sec - - for lower-level sectioning commands - - - - fig - - for figures - - - - tab - - for tables - - - - eq - - for equations - - - - Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:snark or -fig.snark. - - - - <literal>\pageref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> - \pagerefcross referencing with page numberpage number, cross referencing -Synopsis: - -\pageref{key} +a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: + +ch +for chapters +sec +for lower-level sectioning commands +fig +for figures +tab +for tables +eq +for equations + + +Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:snark or +fig.snark. + + + + +<literal>\pageref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> +\pagerefcross referencing with page numberpage number, cross referencing +Synopsis: + +\pageref{key} - The \pageref{key} command produces the page number of +The \pageref{key} command produces the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding -\label{key} command appears. - - - - <literal>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> - \refcross referencing, symbolicsection number, cross referencingequation number, cross referencingfigure number, cross referencingfootnote number, cross referencing -Synopsis: - -\ref{key} +\label{key} command appears. + + + + +<literal>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> +\refcross referencing, symbolicsection number, cross referencingequation number, cross referencingfigure number, cross referencingfootnote number, cross referencing +Synopsis: + +\ref{key} - The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit, +The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit, equation, footnote, figure, …, of the corresponding \label command (see ). It does not produce any text, -such as the word `Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself. - - - - - Environments - environments +such as the word `Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself. + + + + + +Environments +environments \begin\end -&latex; provides many environments for marking off certain text. -Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: - -\begin{envname} +&latex; provides many environments for marking off certain text. +Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: + +\begin{envname} ... \end{envname} - - <literal>abstract</literal> - abstract environmentabstracts -Synopsis: - -\begin{abstract} + + + +<literal>abstract</literal> + +abstract environmentabstracts +Synopsis: +\begin{abstract} ... \end{abstract} - Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. - - - - <literal>array</literal> - array environmentarrays, math -Synopsis: - -\begin{array}{template} +Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. + + + + +<literal>array</literal> +array environmentarrays, math +Synopsis: + +\begin{array}{template} col1 text&col1 text&coln}\\ ... \end{array} - Math arrays are produced with the array environment, normally +Math arrays are produced with the array environment, normally within an equation environment (see ). It has a single mandatory template argument describing the number of columns and the alignment within them. Each column col is specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row should -be formatted, as follows: - - - c - - centered - - - - l - - flush left - - - - r - - flush right - - - - \\ (for array)Column entries are separated by &. Column entries may include +be formatted, as follows: + +c +centered +l +flush left +r +flush right + + +\\ (for array)Column entries are separated by &. Column entries may include other &latex; commands. Each row of the array is terminated with -\\. - @{...}In the template, the construct @{text} puts text -between columns in each row. - Here's an example: - -\begin{equation} +\\. + +@{...}In the template, the construct @{text} puts text +between columns in each row. + +Here's an example: + +\begin{equation} \begin{array}{lrc} left1 & right1 & centered1 \\ left2 & right2 & centered2 \\ \end{array} \end{equation} - \arraycolsepThe \arraycolsep parameter defines half the width of the space +\arraycolsepThe \arraycolsep parameter defines half the width of the space separating columns; the default is ‘5pt’. See , for other parameters which affect formatting in array environments, -namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. - The array environment can only be used in math mode. - - - - <literal>center</literal> - center environmentcentering text, environment for -Synopsis: - -\begin{center} +namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. + +The array environment can only be used in math mode. + + + + +<literal>center</literal> + +center environmentcentering text, environment for +Synopsis: + +\begin{center} line1 \\ line2 \\ \end{center} - \\ (for center)The center environment allows you to create a paragraph +\\ (for center)The center environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the -string \\. +string \\. + + + + +<literal>\centering</literal> - - <literal>\centering</literal> - \centeringcentering text, declaration for -The \centering declaration corresponds to the center +\centeringcentering text, declaration for +The \centering declaration corresponds to the center environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on the page by putting a \centering -command at the beginning of the figure or table environment. - Unlike the center environment, the \centering command +command at the beginning of the figure or table environment. + +Unlike the center environment, the \centering command does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how &latex; formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command (of -an environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit. - Here's an example: - -\begin{quote} +an environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit. + +Here's an example: + +\begin{quote} \centering first line \\ second line \\ \end{quote} - - - - - <literal>description</literal> - description environmentlabelled lists, creatingdescription lists, creating -Synopsis: - -\begin{description} + + + + +<literal>description</literal> + +description environmentlabelled lists, creatingdescription lists, creating +Synopsis: + +\begin{description} \item [label1] item1 \item [label2] item2 ... \end{description} - \itemThe description environment is used to make labelled lists. Each +\itemThe description environment is used to make labelled lists. Each label is typeset in bold, flush right. The item text may -contain multiple paragraphs. - bold typewriter, avoidingtypewriter labels in listsAnother variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if +contain multiple paragraphs. + +bold typewriter, avoidingtypewriter labels in listsAnother variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt, you'll get bold typewriter: \item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]. This may be too bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use \tt, which resets all other style variations: \item[{\tt -plain typewriter}]. - For details about list spacing, see . - - - - <literal>displaymath</literal> - displaymath environment -Synopsis: - -\begin{displaymath} +plain typewriter}]. + +For details about list spacing, see . + + + + +<literal>displaymath</literal> + +displaymath environment +Synopsis: + +\begin{displaymath} math \end{displaymath} - or - -\[math\] +or + +\[math\] - The displaymath environment (\[...\] is a synonym) +The displaymath environment (\[...\] is a synonym) typesets the math text on its own line, centered by default. The global fleqn option makes equations flush left; see -. - No equation number is added to displaymath text; to get an -equation number, use the equation environment (see ). - - - - <literal>document</literal> - document environment -The document environment encloses the body of a document. -It is required in every &latex; document. See . - - - - <literal>enumerate</literal> - enumerate environmentlists of items, numbered -Synopsis: - -\begin{enumerate} +. + +No equation number is added to displaymath text; to get an +equation number, use the equation environment (see ). + + + + +<literal>document</literal> + +document environment +The document environment encloses the body of a document. +It is required in every &latex; document. See . + + + + +<literal>enumerate</literal> + +enumerate environmentlists of items, numbered +Synopsis: + +\begin{enumerate} \item item1 \item item2 ... \end{enumerate} - The enumerate environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations +The enumerate environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as itemize (see ) and description -(see ). - \itemEach item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command. -There must be at least one \item command within the environment. - By default, the numbering at each level is done like this: - - - 1., 2., … - - - (a), (b), … - - - i., ii., … - - - A., B., … - - - \enumi\enumii\enumiii\enumivThe enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi +(see ). + +\itemEach item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command. +There must be at least one \item command within the environment. + +By default, the numbering at each level is done like this: + + 1., 2., … + + (a), (b), … + + i., ii., … + + A., B., … + + +\enumi\enumii\enumiii\enumivThe enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi through \enumiv counters (see ). If the optional argument to \item is given, the counter is not incremented for -that item. - \labelenumi\labelenumii\labelenumiii\labelenumivThe enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi +that item. + +\labelenumi\labelenumii\labelenumiii\labelenumivThe enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi through \labelenumiv to produce the default label. So, you can -use \renewcommand to change the labels (see ). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase -letters: - \Alph example - -\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}} +use \renewcommand to change the labels (see ). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase +letters: + +\Alph example\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}} - - - <literal>eqnarray</literal> - eqnarray environmentequations, aligningaligning Equations - -\begin{eqnarray} (or eqnarray*) + + + +<literal>eqnarray</literal> + +eqnarray environmentequations, aligningaligning Equations +\begin{eqnarray} (or eqnarray*) formula1 \\ formula2 \\ ... \end{eqnarray} - \\ (for eqnarray)The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of +\\ (for eqnarray)The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ -and consecutive items within a row separated by an &. - \\* (for eqnarray)\\* can also be used to separate equations, with its normal -meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. - \nonumberequation numbers, omittingAn equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a +and consecutive items within a row separated by an &. + +\\* (for eqnarray)\\* can also be used to separate equations, with its normal +meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. + +\nonumberequation numbers, omittingAn equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a \nonumber command. Alternatively, The *-form of the environment (\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}) will omit equation numbering entirely, while otherwise being the same as -eqnarray. - \lefteqnThe command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across +eqnarray. + +\lefteqnThe command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of -zero width. - - - - <literal>equation</literal> - equation environmentequations, environment forformulas, environment for -Synopsis: - -\begin{equation} +zero width. + + + + +<literal>equation</literal> + +equation environmentequations, environment forformulas, environment for +Synopsis: + +\begin{equation} math \end{equation} - The equation environment starts a displaymath +The equation environment starts a displaymath environment (see ), e.g., centering the math text -on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin. - - - - <literal>figure</literal> - figureinserting figuresfigures, inserting - -\begin{figure[*]}[placement] +on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin. + + + + +<literal>figure</literal> +figureinserting figuresfigures, inserting +\begin{figure[*]}[placement] figbody \label{label} \caption[loftitle]{text} \end{figure} - Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are +Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are instead “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a page. -Figures will not be split between two pages. - When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a -full-width figure (across both columns). - The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try +Figures will not be split between two pages. + +When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a +full-width figure (across both columns). + +The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try to place your figure. There are four places where &latex; can possibly -put a float: - - - t - - (Top)—at the top of a text page. - - - - b - - (Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. However, b is not +put a float: + +t +(Top)—at the top of a text page. + +b +(Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. However, b is not allowed for full-width floats (figure*) with double-column output. To ameliorate this, use the stfloats or dblfloatfix package, but see the discussion at caveats in the -FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. - - - - h - - float package(Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment +FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. + +h +float package(Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, t is automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”, use the float and use its H placement letter. (That -package also provides other options.) - - - - p - - (Page of floats)—on a separate float page, which is a page -containing no text, only floats. - - - - The standard report and article classes use the default placement -tbp. - The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, etc. -you wish. - \captionThe \caption command specifies caption text for the +package also provides other options.) + +p +(Page of floats)—on a separate float page, which is a page +containing no text, only floats. + + + +The standard report and article classes use the default placement +tbp. + +The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, etc. +you wish. + +\captionThe \caption command specifies caption text for the figure. The caption is numbered by default. If loftitle is present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text -(see ). +(see ). + - - <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bottomfraction</primary></indexterm>The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats atthe bottom; default ‘<literal>.3</literal>’. - - \floatpagefraction - - The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; -default ‘.5’. - - - - \floatsep - - Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default -‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’. - - - - \intextsep - - Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default +\bottomfractionThe maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at +the bottom; default ‘.3’. + +\floatpagefraction +The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; +default ‘.5’. + +\floatsep +Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default +‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’. + +\intextsep +Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for ‘10pt’ and ‘11pt’ styles, -‘14pt plus4pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. - - - - \textfloatsep - - Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; -default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. - - - - \textfraction - - Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too +‘14pt plus4pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. + +\textfloatsep +Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; +default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. + +\textfraction +Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a -different page. The default is ‘.2’. - - - - \topfraction - - Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before -floats; default is ‘.7’. - - - - - - - <literal>flushleft</literal> - flushleft environmentleft-justifying text, environment forragged right text, environment for - -\begin{flushleft} +different page. The default is ‘.2’. + +\topfraction +Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before +floats; default is ‘.7’. + + + + + + +<literal>flushleft</literal> +flushleft environmentleft-justifying text, environment forragged right text, environment for +\begin{flushleft} line1 \\ line2 \\ ... \end{flushleft} - \\ for flushleftThe flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph +\\ for flushleftThe flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged -right Each line must be terminated with the string \\. +right Each line must be terminated with the string \\. + + - - <literal>\raggedright</literal> - \raggedrightragged right textleft-justifying textjustification, ragged right -The \raggedright declaration corresponds to the + +<literal>\raggedright</literal> +\raggedrightragged right textleft-justifying textjustification, ragged right +The \raggedright declaration corresponds to the flushleft environment. This declaration can be used inside an -environment such as quote or in a parbox. - Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright +environment such as quote or in a parbox. + +Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end -command that ends the paragraph unit. - - - - - <literal>flushright</literal> - flushright environmentragged left text, environment forright-justifying text, environment for - -\begin{flushright} +command that ends the paragraph unit. + + + + + +<literal>flushright</literal> +flushright environmentragged left text, environment forright-justifying text, environment for +\begin{flushright} line1 \\ line2 \\ ... \end{flushright} - \\ (for flushright)The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph +\\ (for flushright)The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged -left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. +left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. + + - - <literal>\raggedleft</literal> - \raggedleftragged left textjustification, ragged leftright-justifying text -The \raggedleft declaration corresponds to the + +<literal>\raggedleft</literal> +\raggedleftragged left textjustification, ragged leftright-justifying text +The \raggedleft declaration corresponds to the flushright environment. This declaration can be used inside an -environment such as quote or in a parbox. - Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft +environment such as quote or in a parbox. + +Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end -command that ends the paragraph unit. - - - - - <literal>itemize</literal> - itemize environment\itemlists of itemsunordered listsbulleted lists -Synopsis: - -\begin{itemize} +command that ends the paragraph unit. + + + + + +<literal>itemize</literal> +itemize environment\itemlists of itemsunordered listsbulleted lists +Synopsis: + +\begin{itemize} \item item1 \item item2 ... \end{itemize} - The itemize environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted” +The itemize environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted” list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making -environments, such as enumerate (see ). - Each item of an itemize list begins with an \item command. -There must be at least one \item command within the environment. - By default, the marks at each level look like this: - - - • (bullet) - - - -- (bold en-dash) - - - * (asterisk) - - - . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) - - - \labelitemi\labelitemii\labelitemiii\labelitemivThe itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi +environments, such as enumerate (see ). + +Each item of an itemize list begins with an \item command. +There must be at least one \item command within the environment. + +By default, the marks at each level look like this: + + • (bullet) + + -- (bold en-dash) + + * (asterisk) + + . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) + + +\labelitemi\labelitemii\labelitemiii\labelitemivThe itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi through \labelitemiv to produce the default label. So, you can use \renewcommand to change the labels. For instance, to have -the first level use diamonds: - -\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$} +the first level use diamonds: + +\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$} - \leftmargin\leftmargini\leftmarginii\leftmarginiii\leftmarginiv\leftmarginv\leftmarginviThe \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi parameters define +\leftmargin\leftmargini\leftmarginii\leftmarginiii\leftmarginiv\leftmarginv\leftmarginviThe \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi parameters define the distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the left margin of the list. By convention, \leftmargin is set to the appropriate \leftmarginN when a new level of -nesting is entered. - The defaults vary from ‘.5em’ (highest levels of nesting) to +nesting is entered. + +The defaults vary from ‘.5em’ (highest levels of nesting) to ‘2.5em’ (first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. -This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: - -\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em +This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: + +\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em - Some parameters that affect list formatting: - - - \itemindent - - Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. - - - - \labelsep - - Space between the label and text of an item; default ‘.5em’. - - - - \labelwidth - - Width of the label; default ‘2em’, or ‘1.5em’ in two-column mode. - - - - \listparindent - - Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a -list item; default ‘0pt’. - - - - \rightmargin - - Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the +Some parameters that affect list formatting: + +\itemindent +Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. + +\labelsep +Space between the label and text of an item; default ‘.5em’. + +\labelwidth +Width of the label; default ‘2em’, or ‘1.5em’ in two-column mode. + +\listparindent +Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a +list item; default ‘0pt’. + +\rightmargin +Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the enclosing environment; default ‘0pt’, except in the quote, quotation, and verse environments, where it is set equal -to \leftmargin. - - - - Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather -loose, by default). - - - \itemsep - - Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt +to \leftmargin. + + + +Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather +loose, by default). + +\itemsep +Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus2pt minus1pt for -11pt, and 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt for 12pt. - - - - \parsep - - Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults -are the same as \itemsep. - - - - \topsep - - Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. +11pt, and 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt for 12pt. + +\parsep +Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults +are the same as \itemsep. + +\topsep +Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. For top-level lists, the default is 8pt plus2pt minus4pt for 10pt documents, 9pt plus3pt minus5pt for 11pt, and 10pt plus4pt minus6pt for 12pt. These are reduced -for nested lists. - - - - \partopsep - - Extra space added to \topsep when the list environment starts a +for nested lists. + +\partopsep +Extra space added to \topsep when the list environment starts a paragraph. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus1pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 3pt -plus2pt minus2pt for 12pt. - - - - \parskip exampleEspecially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide +plus2pt minus2pt for 12pt. + + + +\parskip exampleEspecially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize* environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs within a single item (\parskip is not list-specific, -see ): - -\newenvironment{itemize*}% +see ): + +\newenvironment{itemize*}% {\begin{itemize}% \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}% \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}% \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}% {\end{itemize}} - - - - <literal>letter</literal> environment: writing letters - letter -This environment is used for creating letters. See . - - - - <literal>list</literal> - listlists of items, generic -The list environment is a generic environment which is used for + + + +<literal>letter</literal> environment: writing letters +letter +This environment is used for creating letters. See . + + + + +<literal>list</literal> +listlists of items, generic +The list environment is a generic environment which is used for defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in -documents, but often in macros. - -\begin{list}{labeling}{spacing} +documents, but often in macros. + +\begin{list}{labeling}{spacing} \item item1 \item item2 ... \end{list} - The mandatory labeling argument specifies how items should be +The mandatory labeling argument specifies how items should be labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to \item). This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the -label. It can and usually does contain other &latex; commands. - The mandatory spacing argument contains commands to change the +label. It can and usually does contain other &latex; commands. + +The mandatory spacing argument contains commands to change the spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be -empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. - - - - <literal>math</literal> - math environmentin-line formulas -Synopsis: - -\begin{math} +empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. + + + + +<literal>math</literal> + +math environmentin-line formulas +Synopsis: + +\begin{math} math \end{math} - The math environment inserts the given math within the +The math environment inserts the given math within the running text. \(...\)) and $...$ are synonyms. -See . - - - - <literal>minipage</literal> - minipage environmentminipage, creating a - -\begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width} +See . + + + + +<literal>minipage</literal> + +minipage environmentminipage, creating a +\begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width} text \end{minipage} - The minipage environment typesets its body text in a +The minipage environment typesets its body text in a block that will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the \parbox command (see ), but unlike \parbox, -other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage. +other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage. + - The arguments are the same as for \parbox (see ). - indentation of paragraphs, in minipageparagraph indentation, in minipage\parindentBy default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage +The arguments are the same as for \parbox (see ). + +indentation of paragraphs, in minipageparagraph indentation, in minipage\parindentBy default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as -\setlength{\parindent}{1pc} command. - footnotes in figuresfigures, footnotes inFootnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is +\setlength{\parindent}{1pc} command. + +footnotes in figuresfigures, footnotes inFootnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext command puts the footnote at the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the \mpfootnote counter instead of the ordinary -footnote counter (see ). - However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using -footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. - - - - <literal>picture</literal> - picturecreating picturespictures, creating - -\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) +footnote counter (see ). + +However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using +footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. + + + + +<literal>picture</literal> + +picturecreating picturespictures, creating +\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) … picture commands … \end{picture} - \unitlengthThe picture environment allows you to create just about any +\unitlengthThe picture environment allows you to create just about any kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell &latex; where to put things in the picture by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal @@ -1641,446 +1419,410 @@ unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters. You should only change the value of \unitlength, using the \setlength command, outside of a picture -environment. - A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5), specifying +environment. + +A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5), specifying the point with x-coordinate 2.4 and y-coordinate -5. Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; -the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. - The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is a +the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. + +The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is a position. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this -argument's x- and y-coordinates. - The picture environment also has an optional position +argument's x- and y-coordinates. + +The picture environment also has an optional position argument, following the size argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin). For example, if \unitlength -has been set to 1mm, the command - -\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) +has been set to 1mm, the command + +\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) - produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 +produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first draw a picture, you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate -optional argument. - The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the +optional argument. + +The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is; &latex; will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by &latex; in determining -how much room to leave for it. - Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put -command. The command - -\put (11.3,-.3){...} +how much room to leave for it. + +Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put +command. The command + +\put (11.3,-.3){...} - puts the object specified by ... in the +puts the object specified by ... in the picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). -The reference points for various objects will be described below. - lR boxThe \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything +The reference points for various objects will be described below. + +lR boxThe \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything that can go in an \mbox (see ) in the text argument of the \put command. When you do this, the reference point will -be the lower left corner of the box. - The picture commands are described in the following sections. - - - <literal>\circle</literal> - \circle - -\circle[*]{diameter} +be the lower left corner of the box. + +The picture commands are described in the following sections. + + + + +<literal>\circle</literal> +\circle +\circle[*]{diameter} - The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as close +The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as close to the specified one as possible. The *-form of the command -draws a solid circle. - Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. - - - - <literal>\makebox</literal> - \makebox (picture) -\makebox(width,height)[position]{...} - The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to +draws a solid circle. + +Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. + + + + +<literal>\makebox</literal> +\makebox (picture) +\makebox(width,height)[position]{...} + +The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to the normal \makebox command except that you must specify a -width and height in multiples of \unitlength. - The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that -your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: - - - t - - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. - - - - b - - Moves the item to the bottom. - - - - l - - Moves the item to the left. - - - - r - - Moves the item to the right. - - - - See . - - - - <literal>\framebox</literal> - \framebox -Synopsis: - -\framebox(width,height)[pos]{...} +width and height in multiples of \unitlength. + +The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that +your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: + +t +Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. + +b +Moves the item to the bottom. + +l +Moves the item to the left. + +r +Moves the item to the right. + + + +See . + + + + +<literal>\framebox</literal> +\framebox +Synopsis: + +\framebox(width,height)[pos]{...} - The \framebox command is like \makebox (see previous +The \framebox command is like \makebox (see previous section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box -that it creates. - \fboxrule\fboxsepThe \framebox command produces a rule of thickness +that it creates. + +\fboxrule\fboxsepThe \framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule, and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule -and the contents of the box. - - - - <literal>\dashbox</literal> - \dashbox -Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: - -\dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text} +and the contents of the box. + + + + +<literal>\dashbox</literal> + +\dashbox +Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: + +\dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text} - \dashbox creates a dashed rectangle around text in a +\dashbox creates a dashed rectangle around text in a picture environment. Dashes are dlen units long, and the rectangle has overall width rwidth and height rheight. -The text is positioned at optional pos. - -A dashed box looks best when the rwidth and rheight are -multiples of the dlen. - - - - <literal>\frame</literal> - \frame -Synopsis: - -\frame{text} +The text is positioned at optional pos. + +A dashed box looks best when the rwidth and rheight are +multiples of the dlen. + + + + +<literal>\frame</literal> +\frame +Synopsis: + +\frame{text} - The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around text. +The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around text. The reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra -space is put between the frame and the object. - - - - <literal>\line</literal> - \line -Synopsis: - -\line(xslope,yslope){length} +space is put between the frame and the object. + + + + +<literal>\line</literal> +\line +Synopsis: + +\line(xslope,yslope){length} - The \line command draws a line with the given length and -slope xslope/yslope. - Standard &latex; can only draw lines with slope = x/y, +The \line command draws a line with the given length and +slope xslope/yslope. + +Standard &latex; can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x and y have integer values from −6 -through 6. For lines of any slope, not to mention other shapes, -see the curve2e and many many other packages on CTAN. - - - - <literal>\linethickness</literal> - \linethickness -The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness +through 6. For lines of any slope, not to mention other shapes, +see the curve2e and many many other packages on CTAN. + + + + +<literal>\linethickness</literal> +\linethickness +The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be -dim, which must be a positive length. - \linethickness does not affect the thickness of slanted lines, -circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval. - - - - <literal>\thicklines</literal> - \thicklines -The \thicklines command is an alternate line thickness for +dim, which must be a positive length. + +\linethickness does not affect the thickness of slanted lines, +circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval. + + + + +<literal>\thicklines</literal> +\thicklines +The \thicklines command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; -cf.  and . - - - - <literal>\thinlines</literal> - \thinlines -The \thinlines command is the default line thickness for +cf.  and . + + + + +<literal>\thinlines</literal> +\thinlines +The \thinlines command is the default line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; -cf.  and . - - - - <literal>\multiput</literal> - \multiput -Synopsis: - -\multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj} +cf.  and . + + + + +<literal>\multiput</literal> +\multiput +Synopsis: +\multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj} - The \multiput command copies the object obj in a regular +The \multiput command copies the object obj in a regular pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position (x,y), then at (x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, -n times. - - - - <literal>\oval</literal> - \oval -Synopsis: - -\oval(width,height)[portion] +n times. + + + + +<literal>\oval</literal> +\oval +Synopsis: + +\oval(width,height)[portion] - The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. +The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument portion allows you to select part of the -oval via the following: - - - t - - selects the top portion; - - - - b - - selects the bottom portion; - - - - r - - selects the right portion; - - - - l - - selects the left portion. - - - - The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a +oval via the following: + +t +selects the top portion; +b +selects the bottom portion; +r +selects the right portion; +l +selects the left portion. + + +The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a maximum radius of 20pt, so large “ovals” will look more like -boxes with rounded corners. - - - - <literal>\put</literal> - \put -\put(x coord,y coord){ ... } - The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory -argument at the given coordinates. - - - - <literal>\shortstack</literal> - \shortstack -Synopsis: - -\shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...} +boxes with rounded corners. + + + + +<literal>\put</literal> + +\put +\put(x coord,y coord){ ... } + +The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory +argument at the given coordinates. + + + + +<literal>\shortstack</literal> +\shortstack +Synopsis: + +\shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...} - The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The valid -positions are: - - - r - - Move the objects to the right of the stack. - - - - l - - Move the objects to the left of the stack - - - - c - - Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) - - - - \\ (for \shortstack objects)Objects are separated with \\. - - - - <literal>\vector</literal> - \vector -Synopsis: - -\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length} +The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The valid +positions are: + +r +Move the objects to the right of the stack. +l +Move the objects to the left of the stack +c +Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) + + +\\ (for \shortstack objects)Objects are separated with \\. + + + + +<literal>\vector</literal> +\vector +Synopsis: + +\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length} - The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified +The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified length and slope. The x and y values must lie between -−4 and +4, inclusive. - - - - - <literal>quotation</literal> - quotationquoted text with paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text with paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text -Synopsis: - -\begin{quotation} +−4 and +4, inclusive. + + + + + +<literal>quotation</literal> + +quotationquoted text with paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text with paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text +Synopsis: + +\begin{quotation} text \end{quotation} - The margins of the quotation environment are indented on both +The margins of the quotation environment are indented on both the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. -Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph. - Unlike the quote environment, each paragraph is indented -normally. - - - - <literal>quote</literal> - quotequoted text without paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text without paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text, omitting -Snyopsis: - -\begin{quote} +Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph. + +Unlike the quote environment, each paragraph is indented +normally. + + + + +<literal>quote</literal> + +quotequoted text without paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text without paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text, omitting +Snyopsis: + +\begin{quote} text \end{quote} - The margins of the quote environment are indented on both the +The margins of the quote environment are indented on both the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a -blank line between text produces a new paragraph. - Unlike the quotation environment, paragraphs are not indented. - - - - <literal>tabbing</literal> - tabbing environmenttab stops, usinglining text up in columns using tab stopsalignment via tabbing -Synopsis: - -\begin{tabbing} +blank line between text produces a new paragraph. + +Unlike the quotation environment, paragraphs are not indented. + + + + +<literal>tabbing</literal> + +tabbing environmenttab stops, usinglining text up in columns using tab stopsalignment via tabbing +Synopsis: + +\begin{tabbing} row1col1 \= row1col2 \= row1col3 \= row1col4 \\ row2col1 \> \> row2col3 \\ ... \end{tabbing} - The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in +The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on an ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where -the width of each column is constant and known in advance. - This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular -environment. - The following commands can be used inside a tabbing enviroment: - - - \\ tabbing - - End a line. - - - - \= (tabbing) - - Sets a tab stop at the current position. - - - - \> (tabbing) - - \>Advances to the next tab stop. - - - - \< - - Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing -the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line. - - - - \+ - - Moves the left margin of the next and all the +the width of each column is constant and known in advance. + +This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular +environment. + +The following commands can be used inside a tabbing enviroment: + +\\ (tabbing) +End a line. + +\= (tabbing) +Sets a tab stop at the current position. + +\> (tabbing) +\>Advances to the next tab stop. + +\< +Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing +the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line. + +\+ +Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if -necessary. - - - - \- - - Moves the left margin of the next and all the +necessary. + +\- +Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if -necessary. - - - - \' (tabbing) - - Moves everything that you have typed so far in the +necessary. + +\' (tabbing) +Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\, or \kill command, to the right -of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop. - - - - \` (tabbing) - - Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab -stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column +of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop. + +\` (tabbing) +Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab +stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column because there's no tab stop there. The \` command moves all the text that follows it, up to the \\ or \end{tabbing} command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command between -the \` and the command that ends the line. - - - - \a (tabbing) - - \a' (acute accent in tabbing)\a` (grave accent in tabbing)\a= (macron accent in tabbing)In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and +the \` and the command that ends the line. + +\a (tabbing) +\a' (acute accent in tabbing)\a` (grave accent in tabbing)\a= (macron accent in tabbing)In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and \` do not produce accents as usual (see ). Instead, -the commands \a=, \a' and \a` are used. - - - - \kill - - Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ +the commands \a=, \a' and \a` are used. + +\kill +Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ except that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \- -commands in that line remain in effect. - - - - \poptabs - - \poptabsRestores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. - - - - \pushtabs - - Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing -tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing environment. - - - - \tabbingsep - - Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'. - - - - This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: - -\begin{tabbing} +commands in that line remain in effect. + +\poptabs +\poptabsRestores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. + +\pushtabs +Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing +tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing environment. + +\tabbingsep +Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'. + + + +This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: + +\begin{tabbing} function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ \> begin \= \+ \\ \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\ @@ -2090,121 +1832,98 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ end;\\ \end{tabbing} - - - <literal>table</literal> - tabletables, creatingcreating tables -Synopsis: - - \begin{table}[placement] + + +<literal>table</literal> + +tabletables, creatingcreating tables +Synopsis: + + \begin{table}[placement] body of the table \caption{table title} \end{table} - Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are +Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. -Tables will not be split between two pages. - The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try +Tables will not be split between two pages. + +The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try to place your table. There are four places where &latex; can possibly put a float; these are the same as that used with the figure -environment, and described there (see ). - The standard report and article classes use the default -placement [tbp]. - The body of the table is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, etc., -you wish. The \caption command allows you to title your table. - - - - <literal>tabular</literal> - tabular environmentlines in tableslining text up in tables -Synopsis: - -\begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} +environment, and described there (see ). + +The standard report and article classes use the default +placement [tbp]. + +The body of the table is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, etc., +you wish. The \caption command allows you to title your table. + + + + +<literal>tabular</literal> +tabular environmentlines in tableslining text up in tables +Synopsis: + +\begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ ... \end{tabular} - - or - -\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} + + or + +\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ ... \end{tabular*} - These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of -items, aligned vertically in columns. - \\ for tabular\\ must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, +These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of +items, aligned vertically in columns. + +\\ for tabular\\ must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except for the last, where it is optional—unless an \hline -command (to put a rule below the table) follows. - The mandatory and optional arguments consist of: - - - width - - Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There must be +command (to put a rule below the table) follows. + +The mandatory and optional arguments consist of: + +width +Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There must be rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified -width. - - - - pos - - Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of -the environment. - - - t - - align on top row - - - - b - - align on bottom row - - - - - - - cols - - Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the +width. + +pos +Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of +the environment. + +t +align on top row +b +align on bottom row + + +cols +Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and -intercolumn material. - - - l - - A column of left-aligned items. - - - - r - - A column of right-aligned items. - - - - - - A column of centred items. - - - - | - - A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. - - - - @{text} - - This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the +intercolumn material. + +l +A column of left-aligned items. + +r +A column of right-aligned items. + +c +A column of centered items. + +| +A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. + +@{text} +This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in text. An \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression @@ -2212,2928 +1931,2120 @@ causes an extra space of width wd to appear to the left of al subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An \extracolsep command can be -used only in an @-expression in the cols argument. - - - - p{wd} - - Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width +used only in an @-expression in the cols argument. + +p{wd} +Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width wd, as if it were the argument of a \parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not -appear in the item, except in the following situations: - - - inside an environment like minipage, array, or tabular. - - - inside an explicit \parbox. - - - in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft +appear in the item, except in the following situations: + + +inside an environment like minipage, array, or tabular. + + +inside an explicit \parbox. + + +in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an -environment when used in a p-column element. - - - - - - *{num}{cols} - - Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a +environment when used in a p-column element. + + +*{num}{cols} +Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a positive integer and cols is any list of column-specifiers, -which may contain another *-expression. - - - - - - - Parameters that control formatting: - - - - \arrayrulewidth - - Thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and +which may contain another *-expression. + + + + +Parameters that control formatting: + + +\arrayrulewidth +Thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and \vline in the tabular and array environments; the -default is ‘.4pt’. - - - - \arraystretch - - Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular and array -environments; default is ‘1’, for no scaling. - - - - \doublerulesep - - Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by || -in the tabular and array environments; default is ‘2pt’. - - - - \tabcolsep - - Half the width of the space between columns; default is ‘6pt’. - - - - These commands can be used inside a tabular environment: - - - <literal>\multicolumn</literal> - \multicolumn -Synopsis: - -\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text} +default is ‘.4pt’. + +\arraystretch +Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular and array +environments; default is ‘1’, for no scaling. + +\doublerulesep +Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by || +in the tabular and array environments; default is ‘2pt’. + +\tabcolsep +Half the width of the space between columns; default is ‘6pt’. + + + +These commands can be used inside a tabular environment: + + + + +<literal>\multicolumn</literal> +\multicolumn +Synopsis: +\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text} - The \multicolumn command makes an entry that spans several +The \multicolumn command makes an entry that spans several columns. The first mandatory argument, cols, specifies the number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, pos, specifies the formatting of the entry; c for centered, l for flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument, -text, specifies what text to put in the entry. - Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; -\multicolumn is used for the heading: - -\begin{tabular}{r@{--}l} +text, specifies what text to put in the entry. + +Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; +\multicolumn is used for the heading: + +\begin{tabular}{r@{--}l} \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr 0x80&0x7FF \cr 0x800&0xFFFF \cr 0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr \end{tabular} - - - - <literal>\cline</literal> - \cline -Synopsis: - -\cline{i-j} + + + +<literal>\cline</literal> +\cline +Synopsis: + +\cline{i-j} - The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns +The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j, -which are specified in the mandatory argument. - - - - <literal>\hline</literal> - \hline -The \hline command draws a horizontal line the width of the +which are specified in the mandatory argument. + + + + +<literal>\hline</literal> +\hline +The \hline command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing tabular or array environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows -of a table. - - - - <literal>\vline</literal> - \vline -The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the full +of a table. + + + + +<literal>\vline</literal> +\vline +The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the full height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an -@-expression. - - - - - <literal>thebibliography</literal> - thebibliographybibliography, creating (manually) -Synopsis: - -\begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} +@-expression. + + + + + +<literal>thebibliography</literal> + +thebibliographybibliography, creating (manually) +Synopsis: + +\begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} \bibitem[label]{cite_key} ... \end{thebibliography} - The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or -reference list. - In the article class, this reference list is labelled +The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or +reference list. + +In the article class, this reference list is labelled “References”; in the report class, it is labelled “Bibliography”. You can change the label (in the standard classes) by redefining the command \refname. For instance, this -eliminates it entirely: - -\renewcommand{\refname}{} +eliminates it entirely: + +\renewcommand{\refname}{} - The mandatory widest-label argument is text that, when typeset, +The mandatory widest-label argument is text that, when typeset, is as wide as the widest item label produced by the \bibitem commands. It is typically given as 9 for bibliographies with -less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. - - - <literal>\bibitem</literal> - \bibitem -Synopsis: - -\bibitem[label]{cite_key} +less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. + + + + +<literal>\bibitem</literal> + +\bibitem +Synopsis: +\bibitem[label]{cite_key} - The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by +The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by label. If the label argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using the enumi counter. The cite_key is any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation -symbols not containing a comma. - This command writes an entry to the .aux file containing the +symbols not containing a comma. + +This command writes an entry to the .aux file containing the item's cite_key and label. When the .aux file is read by the \begin{document} command, the item's label is associated with cite_key, causing references to cite_key with a \cite command (see next section) to produce the -associated label. - - - - <literal>\cite</literal> - \cite -Synopsis: - -\cite[subcite]{keys +associated label. + + + + +<literal>\cite</literal> + +\cite +Synopsis: + +\cite[subcite]{keys - The keys argument is a list of one or more citation keys, +The keys argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the references associated with keys by entries in the -.aux file. - The text of the optional subcite argument appears after the +.aux file. + +The text of the optional subcite argument appears after the citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might produce -`[Knuth, p. 314]'. - - - - <literal>\nocite</literal> - \nocite -\nocite{key_list} - The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list, -which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the .aux file. - - - - Using Bib&tex; - using Bib&tex;bib&tex;, usingbibliography, creating (automatically)\bibliographystyle\bibliography -If you use the Bib&tex; program by Oren Patashnik (highly +`[Knuth, p. 314]'. + + + + +<literal>\nocite</literal> +\nocite +\nocite{key_list} + +The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list, +which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the .aux file. + + + + +Using Bib&tex; + +using Bib&tex;bib&tex;, usingbibliography, creating (automatically)\bibliographystyle\bibliography +If you use the Bib&tex; program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the thebibliography environment (see ). Instead, -you include the lines - -\bibliographystyle{bibstyle} +you include the lines + +\bibliographystyle{bibstyle} \bibliography{bibfile1,bibfile2} - The \bibliographystyle command does not produce any output of +The \bibliographystyle command does not produce any output of its own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will be produced: bibstyle refers to a file bibstyle.bst, which defines how your citations will look. -The standard style names distributed with Bib&tex; are: - - - alpha - - Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of -publication. - - - - plain - - Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. - - - - unsrt - - Like plain, but entries are in order of citation. - - - - abbrv - - Like plain, but more compact labels. - - - - In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to +The standard style names distributed with Bib&tex; are: + +alpha +Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of +publication. +plain +Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. +unsrt +Like plain, but entries are in order of citation. +abbrv +Like plain, but more compact labels. + + +In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to the demands of various publications. See -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib. - The \bibliography command is what actually produces the +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib. + +The \bibliography command is what actually produces the bibliography. The argument to \bibliography refers to files named bibfile.bib, which should contain your database in Bib&tex; format. Only the entries referred to via \cite and -\nocite will be listed in the bibliography. - - - - - <literal>theorem</literal> - theorem environmenttheorems, typesetting -Synopsis: - -\begin{theorem} +\nocite will be listed in the bibliography. + + + + + +<literal>theorem</literal> + +theorem environmenttheorems, typesetting +Synopsis: + +\begin{theorem} theorem-text \end{theorem} - The theorem environment produces “Theorem n” in +The theorem environment produces “Theorem n” in boldface followed by theorem-text, where the numbering possibilities for n are described under \newtheorem -(see ). - - - - <literal>titlepage</literal> - titlepage environmentmaking a title pagetitle pages, creating -Synopsis: - -\begin{titlepage} +(see ). + + + + +<literal>titlepage</literal> + +titlepage environmentmaking a title pagetitle pages, creating +Synopsis: + +\begin{titlepage} text \end{titlepage} - The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e., a page +The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The \today command may be useful on title pages -(see ). - You can use the \maketitle command (see ) to -produce a standard title page without a titlepage environment. - - - - <literal>verbatim</literal> - verbatim environmentverbatim textsimulating typed texttyped text, simulatingcode, typesettingcomputer programs, typesetting -Synopsis: - -\begin{verbatim} +(see ). + +You can use the \maketitle command (see ) to +produce a standard title page without a titlepage environment. + + + + +<literal>verbatim</literal> + +verbatim environmentverbatim textsimulating typed texttyped text, simulatingcode, typesettingcomputer programs, typesetting +Synopsis: + +\begin{verbatim} literal-text \end{verbatim} - The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment in +The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment in which &latex; produces exactly what you type in; for instance the \ character produces a printed ‘\’. It turns &latex; into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same -effect that they would on a typewriter. - The verbatim uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt). - - - <literal>\verb</literal> - \verbverbatim text, inline -Synopsis: - -\verbcharliteral-textchar +effect that they would on a typewriter. + +The verbatim uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt). + + + +<literal>\verb</literal> + +\verbverbatim text, inline +Synopsis: + +\verbcharliteral-textchar \verb*charliteral-textchar - The \verb command typesets literal-text as it is input, +The \verb command typesets literal-text as it is input, including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter (\tt) font. No spaces are allowed between \verb or \verb* and the delimiter char, which begins and ends the -verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. - visible spaceThe *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a -“visible space” character. - - - - - <literal>verse</literal> - verse environmentpoetry, an environment for -Synopsis: - -\begin{verse} +verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. + +visible spaceThe *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a +“visible space” character. + + + + + +<literal>verse</literal> + +verse environmentpoetry, an environment for +Synopsis: + +\begin{verse} line1 \\ line2 \\ ... \end{verse} - The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find -other uses for it. - \\ for verseThe margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not +The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find +other uses for it. + +\\ for verseThe margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank lines to separate the -stanzas. - - - - - Line breaking - line breakingbreaking lines -The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to +stanzas. + + + + + +Line breaking +line breakingbreaking lines +The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines -(and these lines must be broken into pages). - &latex; usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in +(and these lines must be broken into pages). + +&latex; usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the -\\ command, and you can always manually force breaks. +\\ command, and you can always manually force breaks. + + - - <literal>\\</literal>[*][<replaceable>morespace</replaceable>] - \\ force line breaknew line, startingline break, forcing -The \\ command tells &latex; to start a new line. It has an + +<literal>\\</literal>[*][<replaceable>morespace</replaceable>] +\\ force line breaknew line, startingline break, forcing +The \\ command tells &latex; to start a new line. It has an optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a -negative amount. - The \\* command is the same as the ordinary \\ command -except that it tells &latex; not to start a new page after the line. - - - - <literal>\obeycr</literal> & <literal>\restorecr</literal> - \obeycr\restorecrnew line, output as input -The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file +negative amount. + +The \\* command is the same as the ordinary \\ command +except that it tells &latex; not to start a new page after the line. + + + + +<literal>\obeycr</literal> & <literal>\restorecr</literal> +\obeycr\restorecrnew line, output as input +The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file (‘^^M’, internally) the same as \\ (followed by \relax). So each new line in the input will also be a new line -in the output. - \restorecr restores normal line-breaking behavior. - - - - <literal>\newline</literal> - \newlinenew line, starting (paragraph mode) -The \newline command breaks the line at the present point, with +in the output. + +\restorecr restores normal line-breaking behavior. + + + + +<literal>\newline</literal> +\newlinenew line, starting (paragraph mode) +The \newline command breaks the line at the present point, with no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph -mode. - - - - <literal>\-</literal> (discretionary hyphen) - \- (hyphenation)hyphenation, forcing -The \- command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at +mode. + + + + +<literal>\-</literal> (discretionary hyphen) +\- (hyphenation)hyphenation, forcing +The \- command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point. &latex; is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an incorrect one. The \- command is used for the exceptional -cases. - When you insert \- commands in a word, the word will only be +cases. + +When you insert \- commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points -that &latex; might otherwise have chosen. - +that &latex; might otherwise have chosen. + + - - <literal>\fussy</literal> - \fussy -The declaration \fussy (which is the default) makes &tex; + + +<literal>\fussy</literal> +\fussy +The declaration \fussy (which is the default) makes &tex; picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between -words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. - This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command -(see . - - - - <literal>\sloppy</literal> - The declaration \sloppy makes &tex; less fussy about line +words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. + +This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command +(see . + + + + +<literal>\sloppy</literal> + +The declaration \sloppy makes &tex; less fussy about line breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose -interword spacing. - Lasts until a \fussy command is issued (see ). - - - - <literal>\hyphenation</literal> - \hyphenationhyphenation, defining -Synopsis: - -\hyphenation{word-one word-two} +interword spacing. + +Lasts until a \fussy command is issued (see ). + + + + +<literal>\hyphenation</literal> +\hyphenationhyphenation, defining +Synopsis: + +\hyphenation{word-one word-two} - The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points +The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points with a - character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are tried. Multiple \hyphenation commands accumulate. Some examples (the default &tex; hyphenation patterns -misses the hyphenations in these words): - -\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} +misses the hyphenations in these words): + +\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} - - - - <literal>\linebreak</literal> & <literal>\nolinebreak</literal> - \linebreak\nolinebreakline breaks, forcingline breaks, preventing -Synopses: - -\linebreak[priority] + + + +<literal>\linebreak</literal> & <literal>\nolinebreak</literal> +\linebreak\nolinebreakline breaks, forcingline breaks, preventing +Synopses: + +\linebreak[priority] \nolinebreak[priority] - By default, the \linebreak (\nolinebreak) command forces +By default, the \linebreak (\nolinebreak) command forces (prevents) a line break at the current position. For \linebreak, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it -extends to the right margin as usual. - With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command +extends to the right margin as usual. + +With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from -0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. - - - - - Page breaking - page breakingbreaking pages -&latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has +0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. + + + + + +Page breaking +page breakingbreaking pages +&latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, -but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. +but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. + + + + +<literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> - - <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> - \cleardoublepagestarting on a right-hand page -The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes all +\cleardoublepagestarting on a right-hand page +The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand -(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. - - - - <literal>\clearpage</literal> - \clearpageflushing floats and starting a pagestarting a new page and clearing floats -The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. - - - - <literal>\newpage</literal> - \newpagenew page, startingstarting a new page -The \newpage command ends the current page, but does not clear -floats (see \clearpage above). - - - - <literal>\enlargethispage</literal> - \enlargethispageenlarge current page -\enlargethispage{size} - \enlargethispage*{size} - Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified +(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. + + + + +<literal>\clearpage</literal> +\clearpageflushing floats and starting a pagestarting a new page and clearing floats +The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all +figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. + + + + +<literal>\newpage</literal> +\newpagenew page, startingstarting a new page +The \newpage command ends the current page, but does not clear +floats (see \clearpage above). + + + + +<literal>\enlargethispage</literal> +\enlargethispageenlarge current page +\enlargethispage{size} + +\enlargethispage*{size} + +Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified amount; e.g. \enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one -additional line. - The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as +additional line. + +The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit -\pagebreak. - - - - <literal>\pagebreak</literal> & <literal>\nopagebreak</literal> - \pagebreak\nopagebreakpage break, forcingpage break, preventing -Synopses: - -\pagebreak[priority] +\pagebreak. + + + + +<literal>\pagebreak</literal> & <literal>\nopagebreak</literal> +\pagebreak\nopagebreakpage break, forcingpage break, preventing +Synopses: + +\pagebreak[priority] \nopagebreak[priority] - By default, the \pagebreak (\nopagebreak) command forces +By default, the \pagebreak (\nopagebreak) command forces (prevents) a page break at the current position. For \linebreak, the vertical space on the page is stretched out -where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. - With the optional argument priority, you can convert the +where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. + +With the optional argument priority, you can convert the \pagebreak command from a demand to a request. The number must -be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more -insistent the request is. - - - - - Footnotes - footnotes, creating -Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced +be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more +insistent the request is. + + + + + +Footnotes +footnotes, creating +Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with one command, the \footnote command. They can also be produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the -\footnotetext commands. - - - <literal>\footnote</literal> - \footnote -Synopsis: - -\footnote[number]{text} +\footnotetext commands. + + + + +<literal>\footnote</literal> +\footnote +Synopsis: + +\footnote[number]{text} - The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text +The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text at the bottom of the current page. The optional argument number -changes the default footnote number. - This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you +changes the default footnote number. + +This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot use it in sectioning commands like \chapter, in figures, tables or in a tabular environment. (See following sections.) - - - - - <literal>\footnotemark</literal> - \footnotemark -With no optional argument, the \footnotemark command puts the + + + + + +<literal>\footnotemark</literal> +\footnotemark +With no optional argument, the \footnotemark command puts the current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, -with the \footnotetext command. - This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote -markers referring to the same footnote with - -\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] +with the \footnotetext command. + +This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote +markers referring to the same footnote with + +\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] - after the first \footnote command. - - - - <literal>\footnotetext</literal> - \footnotetext -Synopsis: - -\footnotetext[number]{text} +after the first \footnote command. + + + + +<literal>\footnotetext</literal> +\footnotetext +Synopsis: + +\footnotetext[number]{text} - The \footnotetext command places text at the bottom of +The \footnotetext command places text at the bottom of the page as a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the \footnotemark command. The \footnotetext command must -appear in outer paragraph mode. - The optional argument number changes the default footnote number. - - - - Symbolic footnotes - footnotes, symbolic instead of numberedIf you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing -numbers, redefine \thefootnote like this: - -\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}} +appear in outer paragraph mode. + +The optional argument number changes the default footnote number. + + + + +Symbolic footnotes + +footnotes, symbolic instead of numberedIf you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing +numbers, redefine \thefootnote like this: + +\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}} - \fnsymbol, and footnotes\@fnsymbolThe \fnsymbol command produces a predefined series of symbols +\fnsymbol, and footnotes\@fnsymbolThe \fnsymbol command produces a predefined series of symbols (see ). If you want to use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also -redefine \@fnsymbol. - - - - Footnote parameters - footnote parametersparameters, for footnotes - - - \footnoterule - - Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's +redefine \@fnsymbol. + + + + +Footnote parameters + +footnote parametersparameters, for footnotes +\footnoterule +Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's footnotes. Default dimensions: 0.4pt thick (or wide), and 0.4\columnwidth long in the standard document classes (except -slides, where it does not appear). - - - - \footnotesep - - The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By +slides, where it does not appear). + +\footnotesep +The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By default, this is set to the normal strut for \footnotesize fonts (see ), therefore there is no extra space between footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10pt’, ‘7.7pt’ for -‘11pt’, and ‘8.4pt’ for ‘12pt’. - - - - - - - - Definitions - definitions -&latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds. +‘11pt’, and ‘8.4pt’ for ‘12pt’. + + + + + + + +Definitions +definitions +&latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds. + - - <literal>\newcommand</literal> & <literal>\renewcommand</literal> - \newcommandcommands, defining new onesdefining a new commandnew commands, defining -\newcommand and \renewcommand define and redefine a -command, respectively. Synopses: - - \newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} + + + + +<literal>\newcommand</literal> & <literal>\renewcommand</literal> +\newcommandcommands, defining new onesdefining a new commandnew commands, defining +\newcommand and \renewcommand define and redefine a +command, respectively. Synopses: + + \newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} \renewcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} \newcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} \renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} - - - cmd - - The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it + +cmd +The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it must not be already defined and must not begin with \end; for -\renewcommand, it must already be defined. - - - - nargs - - An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments +\renewcommand, it must already be defined. + +nargs +An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no -arguments. - - - - default - - If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's +arguments. + +default +If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not specified -in the call) is the string ‘def’. - - - - defn - - The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a +in the call) is the string ‘def’. + +defn +The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a construct of the form #n in defn is replaced by the -text of the nth argument. - - - - - - - <literal>\newcounter</literal> - \newcountercounters, defining new -Synopsis: - -\newcounter{cnt}[countername] +text of the nth argument. + + + + + + +<literal>\newcounter</literal> +\newcountercounters, defining new +Synopsis: + +\newcounter{cnt}[countername] - The \newcounter command defines a new counter named cnt. -The new counter is initialized to zero. - Given the optional argument [countername], cnt -will be reset whenever countername is incremented. - See , for more information about counters. - - - - <literal>\newlength</literal> - \newlengthlengths, defining new -Synopsis: - -\newlength{\arg} +The \newcounter command defines a new counter named cnt. +The new counter is initialized to zero. + +Given the optional argument [countername], cnt +will be reset whenever countername is incremented. + +See , for more information about counters. + + + + +<literal>\newlength</literal> +\newlengthlengths, defining new +Synopsis: + +\newlength{\arg} - The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument as a +The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument as a length command with a value of 0in. The argument must be a control sequence, as in \newlength{\foo}. An error -occurs if \foo is already defined. - See , for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and -for more information about lengths in general. - - - - <literal>\newsavebox</literal> - \newsavebox -Synopsis: - -\newsavebox{cmd} +occurs if \foo is already defined. + +See , for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and +for more information about lengths in general. + + + + +<literal>\newsavebox</literal> +\newsavebox +Synopsis: + +\newsavebox{cmd} - Defines \cmd, which must be a command name not already -defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. - - - - <literal>\newenvironment</literal> & <literal>\renewenvironment</literal> - \newenvironment\renewenvironmentenvironments, definingdefining new environmentsredefining environments -Synopses: - - \newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} +Defines \cmd, which must be a command name not already +defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. + + + + +<literal>\newenvironment</literal> & <literal>\renewenvironment</literal> +\newenvironment\renewenvironmentenvironments, definingdefining new environmentsredefining environments +Synopses: + + \newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} \newenvironment{env}[nargs][default]{begdef}{enddef} \renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} - These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is, -\begin{env} … \end{env}. - - - env - - The name of the environment. For \newenvironment, env +These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is, +\begin{env} … \end{env}. + +env +The name of the environment. For \newenvironment, env must not be an existing environment, and the command \env must be undefined. For \renewenvironment, env must be -the name of an existing environment. - - - - nargs - - An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of -the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. - - - - default - - If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default -gives the default value for that argument. - - - - begdef - - The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}; a +the name of an existing environment. + +nargs +An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of +the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. + +default +If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default +gives the default value for that argument. + +begdef +The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}; a construct of the form #n in begdef is replaced by -the text of the nth argument. - - - - enddef - - The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}. It -may not contain any argument parameters. - - - - - - - <literal>\newtheorem</literal> - \newtheoremtheorems, definingdefining new theorems - -\newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within] +the text of the nth argument. + +enddef +The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}. It +may not contain any argument parameters. + + + + + + +<literal>\newtheorem</literal> +\newtheoremtheorems, definingdefining new theorems +\newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within] \newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label} - This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments: - - - newenv - - The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an -existing environment or otherwise defined. - - - - label - - The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the -number. For example, ‘Theorem’. - - - - numbered_like - - (Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; -the new environment will be numbered just like numbered_like. - - - - within - - (Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. +This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments: + +newenv +The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an +existing environment or otherwise defined. + +label +The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the +number. For example, ‘Theorem’. + +numbered_like +(Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; +the new environment will be numbered just like numbered_like. + +within +(Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as the -within counter. - - - - At most one of numbered_like and within can be specified, -not both. - - - - <literal>\newfont</literal> - \newfontfonts, new commands fordefining new fonts -Synopsis: - -\newfont{cmd}{fontname} +within counter. + + + +At most one of numbered_like and within can be specified, +not both. + + + + +<literal>\newfont</literal> +\newfontfonts, new commands fordefining new fonts +Synopsis: + +\newfont{cmd}{fontname} - Defines a control sequence \cmd, which must not already +Defines a control sequence \cmd, which must not already be defined, to make fontname be the current font. The file -looked for on the system is named fontname.tfm. - This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. -More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd files. - - - - <literal>\protect</literal> - \protect -fragile commandsmoving argumentsFootnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and +looked for on the system is named fontname.tfm. + +This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. +More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd files. + + + + +<literal>\protect</literal> +\protect +fragile commandsmoving argumentsFootnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and many more are so-called fragile commands. When a fragile command is used in certain contexts, called moving arguments, it must be preceded by \protect. In addition, any fragile -commands within the arguments must have their own \protect. - Some examples of moving arguments are \caption +commands within the arguments must have their own \protect. + +Some examples of moving arguments are \caption (see ), \thanks (see ), and expressions in tabular and array environments -(see ). - robust commandsCommands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not -be preceded by \protect. - See also: - -http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect +(see ). + +robust commandsCommands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not +be preceded by \protect. + +See also: + +http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect - - - - Counters - counters, a list ofvariables, a list of -Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with + + + + +Counters +counters, a list ofvariables, a list of +Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or command that produces the number, except with no \. (enumienumiv are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;'s -standard document classes to control numbering. - -part paragraph figure enumi +standard document classes to control numbering. + +part paragraph figure enumi chapter subparagraph table enumii section page footnote enumiii subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv subsubsection - - <literal>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</literal>: Printing counters - All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for -instance, \alph{enumi}. - - - \alph - - prints counter using lowercase letters: `a', `b', …. - - - - \Alph - - uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', …. - - - - \arabic - - uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', …. - - - - \roman - - uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', …. - - - - \roman - - uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', …. - - - - \fnsymbol - - prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine + + + +<literal>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</literal>: Printing counters + +All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for +instance, \alph{enumi}. + +\alph +prints counter using lowercase letters: `a', `b', …. + +\Alph +uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', …. + +\arabic +uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', …. + +\roman +uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', …. + +\roman +uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', …. + +\fnsymbol +prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of -counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. - The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: -asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel +counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. + +The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: +asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger - - - - - - - - <literal>\usecounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> - \usecounterlist items, specifying counternumbered items, specifying counter -Synopsis: - -\usecounter{counter} + + + + + + +<literal>\usecounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> +\usecounterlist items, specifying counternumbered items, specifying counter +Synopsis: + +\usecounter{counter} - The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the +The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the list environment to specify counter to be used to number -the list items. - - - - <literal>\value{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> - \valuecounters, getting value of -Synopsis: - -\value{counter} +the list items. + + + + +<literal>\value{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> +\valuecounters, getting value of +Synopsis: + +\value{counter} - The \value command produces the value of counter. It can -be used anywhere &latex; expects a number, for example: - -\setcounter{myctr}{3} +The \value command produces the value of counter. It can +be used anywhere &latex; expects a number, for example: + +\setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1} \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent} - - - - <literal>\setcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> - \setcountercounters, settingsetting counters -Synopsis: - -\setcounter{\counter}{value} + + + +<literal>\setcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> +\setcountercounters, settingsetting counters +Synopsis: + +\setcounter{\counter}{value} - The \setcounter command sets the value of \counter to the -value argument. - - - - <literal>\addtocounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> - \addtocounter -The \addtocounter command increments counter by the -amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. - - - - <literal>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> - \refstepcounter -The \refstepcounter command works in the same way as +The \setcounter command sets the value of \counter to the +value argument. + + + + +<literal>\addtocounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> +\addtocounter +The \addtocounter command increments counter by the +amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. + + + + +<literal>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> +\refstepcounter +The \refstepcounter command works in the same way as \stepcounter See , except it also defines the -current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter. - - - - <literal>\stepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> - \stepcounter -The \stepcounter command adds one to counter and -resets all subsidiary counters. - - - - <literal>\day \month \year</literal>: Predefined counters - \day\month\year -&latex; defines counters for the day of the month (\day, +current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter. + + + + +<literal>\stepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> +\stepcounter +The \stepcounter command adds one to counter and +resets all subsidiary counters. + + + + +<literal>\day \month \year</literal>: Predefined counters +\day\month\year +&latex; defines counters for the day of the month (\day, 1–31), month of the year (\month, 1–12), and year (\year, Common Era). When &tex; starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where &tex; is running. They -are not updated as the job progresses. - The related command \today produces a string representing the -current day (see ). - - - - - Lengths - lengths, defining and using -A length is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a -length as an argument. - - - <literal>\setlength{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> - \setlengthlengths, setting -The \setlength sets the value of \len to the value +are not updated as the job progresses. + +The related command \today produces a string representing the +current day (see ). + + + + + +Lengths +lengths, defining and using +A length is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a +length as an argument. + + + + +<literal>\setlength{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> +\setlengthlengths, setting +The \setlength sets the value of \len to the value argument, which can be expressed in any units that &latex; understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), points -(pt), big points (bp, etc. - - - - \addtolength{<replaceable>\len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>} - \addtolengthlengths, adding to -The \addtolength command increments a “length command” +(pt), big points (bp, etc. + + + + +\addtolength{<replaceable>\len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>} +\addtolengthlengths, adding to +The \addtolength command increments a “length command” \len by the amount specified in the amount argument, which -may be negative. - - - - <literal>\settodepth</literal> - \settodepth -\settodepth{\gnat}{text} - The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command -equal to the depth of the text argument. - - - - <literal>\settoheight</literal> - \settoheight -\settoheight{\gnat}{text} - The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command -equal to the height of the text argument. - - - - <literal>\settowidth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> - \settowidth -The \settowidth command sets the value of the command \len -to the width of the text argument. - - - - Predefined lengths - lengths, predefinedpredefined lengths -\width -\width -\height -\height -\depth -\depth -\totalheight -\totalheight -These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making +may be negative. + + + + +<literal>\settodepth</literal> +\settodepth +\settodepth{\gnat}{text} + +The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command +equal to the depth of the text argument. + + + + +<literal>\settoheight</literal> +\settoheight +\settoheight{\gnat}{text} + +The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command +equal to the height of the text argument. + + + + + +<literal>\settowidth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> +\settowidth +The \settowidth command sets the value of the command \len +to the width of the text argument. + + + + + +Predefined lengths +lengths, predefinedpredefined lengths +\width +\width +\height +\height +\depth +\depth +\totalheight +\totalheight +These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands (see ). They specify the natural width etc. of the text in the box. \totalheight equals \height + \depth. To make a box with the text stretched to double the -natural size, e.g., say - \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher} - - - - - Making paragraphs - making paragraphsparagraphs -A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not +natural size, e.g., say + +\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher} + + + + + +Making paragraphs +making paragraphsparagraphs +A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not containing even a %. A blank line should not appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of -a sectioning command. +a sectioning command. + + - - <literal>\indent</literal> - \indent\parindentindent, forcing -\indent produces a horizontal space whose width equals the + +<literal>\indent</literal> +\indent\parindentindent, forcing +\indent produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the \parindent length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it would -otherwise be suppressed. - The default value for \parindent is 1em in two-column +otherwise be suppressed. + +The default value for \parindent is 1em in two-column mode, otherwise 15pt for 10pt documents, 17pt for -11pt, and 1.5em for 12pt. - - - - <literal>\noindent</literal> - \noindentindent, suppressing -When used at the beginning of the paragraph, \noindent +11pt, and 1.5em for 12pt. + + + + +<literal>\noindent</literal> +\noindentindent, suppressing +When used at the beginning of the paragraph, \noindent suppresses any paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in -the middle of a paragraph. - - - - <literal>\parskip</literal> - \parskipvertical space before paragraphs -\parskip is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added -before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. - - - - Marginal notes - marginal notesnotes in the marginremarks in the margin\marginpar -Synopsis: - -\marginpar[left]{right} +the middle of a paragraph. + + + + +<literal>\parskip</literal> +\parskipvertical space before paragraphs +\parskip is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added +before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. + + + + +Marginal notes +marginal notesnotes in the marginremarks in the margin\marginpar +Synopsis: + +\marginpar[left]{right} - The \marginpar command creates a note in the margin. The first +The \marginpar command creates a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text -where the \marginpar occurs. - When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text -will be placed - - - in the right margin for one-sided layout; - - - in the outside margin for two-sided layout; - - - in the nearest margin for two-column layout. - - - \reversemarginpar\normalmarginparThe command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes +where the \marginpar occurs. + +When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text +will be placed + + +in the right margin for one-sided layout; + + +in the outside margin for two-sided layout; + + +in the nearest margin for two-column layout. + + +\reversemarginpar\normalmarginparThe command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes in the opposite (inside) margin. \normalmarginpar places them -in the default position. - When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left -margin, and right is used for the right margin. - The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable -hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}. - These parameters affect the formatting of the note: - - - \marginparpush - - Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for -‘12pt’ documents, ‘5pt’ else. - - - - \marginparsep - - Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default -‘11pt’ for ‘10pt’ documents, ‘10pt’ else. - - - - \marginparwidth - - Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document +in the default position. + +When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left +margin, and right is used for the right margin. + +The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable +hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}. + +These parameters affect the formatting of the note: + +\marginparpush +Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for +‘12pt’ documents, ‘5pt’ else. + +\marginparsep +Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default +‘11pt’ for ‘10pt’ documents, ‘10pt’ else. + +\marginparwidth +Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document is ‘90pt’, ‘83pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘68pt’ for ‘12pt’; ‘17pt’ more in each case for a two-sided document. -In two column mode, the default is ‘48pt’. - - - - - - - - Math formulas - math formulasformulas, mathmath mode, entering -math environmentdisplaymath environmentequation environmentThere are three environments that put &latex; in math mode: - - - math - - For formulas that appear right in the text. - - - - displaymath - - For formulas that appear on their own line. - - - - equation - - The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation -number in the right margin. - - - - \(\)\[\]The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, +In two column mode, the default is ‘48pt’. + + + +The standard &latex; routine for marginal notes does not prevent +notes from falling off the bottom of the page. + + + + + + + + +Math formulas +math formulasformulas, mathmath mode, entering +math environmentdisplaymath environmentequation environmentThere are three environments that put &latex; in math mode: + +math +For formulas that appear right in the text. +displaymath +For formulas that appear on their own line. +equation +The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation +number in the right margin. + + +\(\)\[\]The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but the displaymath and equation environments can be used only in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath -environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: - -\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} +environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: + +\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath} - $In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even -shorter form: - -$ ... $ instead of \(...\) +$In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even +shorter form: + +$ ... $ instead of \(...\) - \boldmath\unboldmathThe \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in +\boldmath\unboldmathThe \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in a bold font. It is used outside of math mode. Conversely, the \unboldmath command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; -it too is used outside of math mode. +it too is used outside of math mode. + - \displaystyleThe \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the +\displaystyleThe \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the formula to be that of displaymath, e.g., with limits above and -below summations. For example - -$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $ +below summations. For example +$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $ - - Subscripts & superscripts - superscriptsubscriptexponent_^ -To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type + + + + +Subscripts & superscripts +superscriptsubscriptexponent_^ +To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type _{exp}. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type ^{exp}. &latex; handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a -superscript. - - - - Math symbols - math symbolssymbols, mathgreek letters -&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to +superscript. + + + + +Math symbols +math symbolssymbols, mathgreek letters +&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, you will get -the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. - - - \| - - \| - - - - \aleph - - \aleph - - - - \alpha - - \alpha - - - - \amalg - - \amalg (binary operation) - - - - \angle - - \angle - - - - \approx - - \approx (relation) - - - - \ast - - \ast (binary operation) - - - - \asymp - - \asymp (relation) - - - - \backslash - - \ (delimiter) - - - - \beta - - \beta - - - - \bigcap - - \bigcap - - - - \bigcirc - - \bigcirc (binary operation) - - - - \bigcup - - \bigcup - - - - \bigodot - - \bigodot - - - - \bigoplus - - \bigoplus - - - - \bigotimes - - \bigotimes - - - - \bigtriangledown - - \bigtriangledown (binary operation) - - - - \bigtriangleup - - \bigtriangleup (binary operation) - - - - \bigsqcup - - \bigsqcup - - - - \biguplus - - \biguplus - - - - \bigcap - - \bigvee - - - - \bigwedge - - \bigwedge - - - - \bot - - \bot - - - - \bowtie - - \bowtie (relation) - - - - \Box - - (square open box symbol) - - - - - \bullet - - bullet symbol\bullet (binary operation) - - - - \cap - - \cap (binary operation) - - - - \cdot - - \cdot (binary operation) - - - - \chi - - \chi - - - - \circ - - \circ (binary operation) - - - - \clubsuit - - \clubsuit - - - - \cong - - \cong (relation) - - - - \coprod - - \coprod - - - - \cup - - \cup (binary operation) - - - - \dagger - - \dagger (binary operation) - - - - \dashv - - \dashv (relation) - - - - \ddagger - - \dagger (binary operation) - - - - \Delta - - \Delta - - - - \delta - - \delta - - - - \Diamond - - bigger \diamond - - - - - \diamond - - \diamond (binary operation) - - - - \diamondsuit - - \diamondsuit - - - - \div - - \div (binary operation) - - - - \doteq - - \doteq (relation) - - - - \downarrow - - \downarrow (delimiter) - - - - \Downarrow - - \Downarrow (delimiter) - - - - \ell - - \ell - - - - \emptyset - - \emptyset - - - - \epsilon - - \epsilon - - - - \equiv - - \equiv (relation) - - - - \eta - - \eta - - - - \exists - - \exists - - - - \flat - - \flat - - - - \forall - - \forall - - - - \frown - - \frown (relation) - - - - \Gamma - - \Gamma - - - - \gamma - - \gamma - - - - \ge - - \ge - - - - \geq - - \geq (relation) - - - - \gets - - \gets - - - - \gg - - \gg (relation) - - - - \hbar - - \hbar - - - - \heartsuit - - \heartsuit - - - - \hookleftarrow - - \hookleftarrow - - - - \hookrightarrow - - \hookrightarrow - - - - \iff - - \iff - - - - \Im - - \Im - - - - \in - - \in (relation) - - - - \infty - - \infty - - - - \int - - \int - - - - \iota - - \iota - - - - \Join - - condensed bowtie symbol (relation) - - - - - \kappa - - \kappa - - - - \Lambda - - \Lambda - - - - \lambda - - \lambda - - - - \land - - \land - - - - \langle - - \langle (delimiter) - - - - \lbrace - - \lbrace (delimiter) - - - - \lbrack - - \lbrack (delimiter) - - - - \lceil - - \lceil (delimiter) - - - - \le - - \le - - - - \leadsto - - - - - - \Leftarrow - - \Leftarrow - - - - \leftarrow - - \leftarrow - - - - \leftharpoondown - - \leftharpoondown - - - - \leftharpoonup - - \leftharpoonup - - - - \Leftrightarrow - - \Leftrightarrow - - - - \leftrightarrow - - \leftrightarrow - - - - \leq - - \leq (relation) - - - - \lfloor - - \lfloor (delimiter) - - - - \lhd - - (left-pointing arrow head) - - - - - \ll - - \ll (relation) - - - - \lnot - - \lnot - - - - \longleftarrow - - \longleftarrow - - - - \longleftrightarrow - - \longleftrightarrow - - - - \longmapsto - - \longmapsto - - - - \longrightarrow - - \longrightarrow - - - - \lor - - \lor - - - - \mapsto - - \mapsto - - - - \mho - - - - - - \mid - - \mid (relation) - - - - \models - - \models (relation) - - - - \mp - - \mp (binary operation) - - - - \mu - - \mu - - - - \nabla - - \nabla - - - - \natural - - \natural - - - - \ne - - \ne - - - - \nearrow - - \nearrow - - - - \neg - - \neg - - - - \neq - - \neq (relation) - - - - \ni - - \ni (relation) - - - - \not - - Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. - - - - \notin - - \ni - - - - \nu - - \nu - - - - \nwarrow - - \nwarrow - - - - \odot - - \odot (binary operation) - - - - \oint - - \oint - - - - \Omega - - \Omega - - - - \omega - - \omega - - - - \ominus - - \ominus (binary operation) - - - - \oplus - - \oplus (binary operation) - - - - \oslash - - \oslash (binary operation) - - - - \otimes - - \otimes (binary operation) - - - - \owns - - \owns - - - - \parallel - - \parallel (relation) - - - - \partial - - \partial - - - - \perp - - \perp (relation) - - - - \phi - - \phi - - - - \Pi - - \Pi - - - - \pi - - \pi - - - - \pm - - \pm (binary operation) - - - - \prec - - \prec (relation) - - - - \preceq - - \preceq (relation) - - - - \prime - - \prime - - - - \prod - - \prod - - - - \propto - - \propto (relation) - - - - \Psi - - \Psi - - - - \psi - - \psi - - - - \rangle - - \rangle (delimiter) - - - - \rbrace - - \rbrace (delimiter) - - - - \rbrack - - \rbrack (delimiter) - - - - \rceil - - \rceil (delimiter) - - - - \Re - - \Re - - - - \rfloor - - \rfloor - - - - \rhd - - (binary operation) - - - - - \rho - - \rho - - - - \Rightarrow - - \Rightarrow - - - - \rightarrow - - \rightarrow - - - - \rightharpoondown - - \rightharpoondown - - - - \rightharpoonup - - \rightharpoonup - - - - \rightleftharpoons - - \rightleftharpoons - - - - \searrow - - \searrow - - - - \setminus - - \setminus (binary operation) - - - - \sharp - - \sharp - - - - \Sigma - - \Sigma - - - - \sigma - - \sigma - - - - \sim - - \sim (relation) - - - - \simeq - - \simeq (relation) - - - - \smallint - - \smallint - - - - \smile - - \smile (relation) - - - - \spadesuit - - \spadesuit - - - - \sqcap - - \sqcap (binary operation) - - - - \sqcup - - \sqcup (binary operation) - - - - \sqsubset - - (relation) - - - - - \sqsubseteq - - \sqsubseteq (relation) - - - - \sqsupset - - (relation) - - - - - \sqsupseteq - - \sqsupseteq (relation) - - - - \star - - \star (binary operation) - - - - \subset - - \subset (relation) - - - - \subseteq - - \subseteq (relation) - - - - \succ - - \succ (relation) - - - - \succeq - - \succeq (relation) - - - - \sum - - \sum - - - - \supset - - \supset (relation) - - - - \supseteq - - \supseteq (relation) - - - - \surd - - \surd - - - - \swarrow - - \swarrow - - - - \tau - - \tau - - - - \theta - - \theta - - - - \times - - \times (binary operation) - - - - \to - - \to - - - - \top - - \top - - - - \triangle - - \triangle - - - - \triangleleft - - \triangleleft (binary operation) - - - - \triangleright - - \triangleright (binary operation) - - - - \unlhd - - left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) - - - - - \unrhd - - right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) - - - - - \Uparrow - - \Uparrow (delimiter) - - - - \uparrow - - \uparrow (delimiter) - - - - \Updownarrow - - \Updownarrow (delimiter) - - - - \updownarrow - - \updownarrow (delimiter) - - - - \uplus - - \uplus (binary operation) - - - - \Upsilon - - \Upsilon - - - - \upsilon - - \upsilon - - - - \varepsilon - - \varepsilon - - - - \varphi - - \varphi - - - - \varpi - - \varpi - - - - \varrho - - \varrho - - - - \varsigma - - \varsigma - - - - \vartheta - - \vartheta - - - - \vdash - - \vdash (relation) - - - - \vee - - \vee (binary operation) - - - - \Vert - - \Vert (delimiter) - - - - \vert - - \vert (delimiter) - - - - \wedge - - \wedge (binary operation) - - - - \wp - - \wp - - - - \wr - - \wr (binary operation) - - - - \Xi - - \Xi - - - - \xi - - \xi - - - - \zeta - - \zeta - - - - - - - Math functions - math functionsfunctions, math -These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper -spacing. - - - \arccos - - \arccos - - - - \arcsin - - \arcsin - - - - \arctan - - \arctan - - - - \arg - - \arg - - - - \bmod - - Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) - - - - \cos - - \cos - - - - \cosh - - \cosh - - - - \cot - - \cos - - - - \coth - - \cosh - - - - \csc - - \csc - - - - \deg - - \deg - - - - \det - - \deg - - - - \dim - - \dim - - - - \exp - - \exp - - - - \gcd - - \gcd - - - - \hom - - \hom - - - - \inf - - \inf - - - - \ker - - \ker - - - - \lg - - \lg - - - - \lim - - \lim - - - - \liminf - - \liminf - - - - \limsup - - \limsup - - - - \ln - - \ln - - - - \log - - \log - - - - \max - - \max - - - - \min - - \min - - - - \pmod - - parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) - - - - \Pr - - \Pr - - - - \sec - - \sec - - - - \sin - - \sin - - - - \sinh - - \sinh - - - - \sup - - \sup - - - - \tan - - \tan - - - - \tanh - - \tanh - - - - - - - Math accents - math accentsaccents, mathematical -&latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters +the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. + +\| +\| + +\aleph +\aleph + +\alpha +\alpha + +\amalg +\amalg (binary operation) + +\angle +\angle + +\approx +\approx (relation) + +\ast +\ast (binary operation) + +\asymp +\asymp (relation) + +\backslash +\ (delimiter) + +\beta +\beta + +\bigcap +\bigcap + +\bigcirc +\bigcirc (binary operation) + +\bigcup +\bigcup + +\bigodot +\bigodot + +\bigoplus +\bigoplus + +\bigotimes +\bigotimes + +\bigtriangledown +\bigtriangledown (binary operation) + +\bigtriangleup +\bigtriangleup (binary operation) + +\bigsqcup +\bigsqcup + +\biguplus +\biguplus + +\bigcap +\bigvee + +\bigwedge +\bigwedge + +\bot +\bot + +\bowtie +\bowtie (relation) + +\Box +(square open box symbol) + +\bullet +bullet symbol\bullet (binary operation) + +\cap +\cap (binary operation) + +\cdot +\cdot (binary operation) + +\chi +\chi + +\circ +\circ (binary operation) + +\clubsuit +\clubsuit + +\cong +\cong (relation) + +\coprod +\coprod + +\cup +\cup (binary operation) + +\dagger +\dagger (binary operation) + +\dashv +\dashv (relation) + +\ddagger +\dagger (binary operation) + +\Delta +\Delta + +\delta +\delta + +\Diamond +bigger \diamond + +\diamond +\diamond (binary operation) + +\diamondsuit +\diamondsuit + +\div +\div (binary operation) + +\doteq +\doteq (relation) + +\downarrow +\downarrow (delimiter) + +\Downarrow +\Downarrow (delimiter) + +\ell +\ell + +\emptyset +\emptyset + +\epsilon +\epsilon + +\equiv +\equiv (relation) + +\eta +\eta + +\exists +\exists + +\flat +\flat + +\forall +\forall + +\frown +\frown (relation) + +\Gamma +\Gamma + +\gamma +\gamma + +\ge +\ge + +\geq +\geq (relation) + +\gets +\gets + +\gg +\gg (relation) + +\hbar +\hbar + +\heartsuit +\heartsuit + +\hookleftarrow +\hookleftarrow + +\hookrightarrow +\hookrightarrow + +\iff +\iff + +\Im +\Im + +\in +\in (relation) + +\infty +\infty + +\int +\int + +\iota +\iota + +\Join +condensed bowtie symbol (relation) + +\kappa +\kappa + +\Lambda +\Lambda + +\lambda +\lambda + +\land +\land + +\langle +\langle (delimiter) + +\lbrace +\lbrace (delimiter) + +\lbrack +\lbrack (delimiter) + +\lceil +\lceil (delimiter) + +\le +\le + +\leadsto + + +\Leftarrow +\Leftarrow + +\leftarrow +\leftarrow + +\leftharpoondown +\leftharpoondown + +\leftharpoonup +\leftharpoonup + +\Leftrightarrow +\Leftrightarrow + +\leftrightarrow +\leftrightarrow + +\leq +\leq (relation) + +\lfloor +\lfloor (delimiter) + +\lhd +(left-pointing arrow head) + +\ll +\ll (relation) + +\lnot +\lnot + +\longleftarrow +\longleftarrow + +\longleftrightarrow +\longleftrightarrow + +\longmapsto +\longmapsto + +\longrightarrow +\longrightarrow + +\lor +\lor + +\mapsto +\mapsto + +\mho + + +\mid +\mid (relation) + +\models +\models (relation) + +\mp +\mp (binary operation) + +\mu +\mu + +\nabla +\nabla + +\natural +\natural + +\ne +\ne + +\nearrow +\nearrow + +\neg +\neg + +\neq +\neq (relation) + +\ni +\ni (relation) + +\not +Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. + +\notin +\ni + +\nu +\nu + +\nwarrow +\nwarrow + +\odot +\odot (binary operation) + +\oint +\oint + +\Omega +\Omega + +\omega +\omega + +\ominus +\ominus (binary operation) + +\oplus +\oplus (binary operation) + +\oslash +\oslash (binary operation) + +\otimes +\otimes (binary operation) + +\owns +\owns + +\parallel +\parallel (relation) + +\partial +\partial + +\perp +\perp (relation) + +\phi +\phi + +\Pi +\Pi + +\pi +\pi + +\pm +\pm (binary operation) + +\prec +\prec (relation) + +\preceq +\preceq (relation) + +\prime +\prime + +\prod +\prod + +\propto +\propto (relation) + +\Psi +\Psi + +\psi +\psi + +\rangle +\rangle (delimiter) + +\rbrace +\rbrace (delimiter) + +\rbrack +\rbrack (delimiter) + +\rceil +\rceil (delimiter) + +\Re +\Re + +\rfloor +\rfloor + +\rhd +(binary operation) + +\rho +\rho + +\Rightarrow +\Rightarrow + +\rightarrow +\rightarrow + +\rightharpoondown +\rightharpoondown + +\rightharpoonup +\rightharpoonup + +\rightleftharpoons +\rightleftharpoons + +\searrow +\searrow + +\setminus +\setminus (binary operation) + +\sharp +\sharp + +\Sigma +\Sigma + +\sigma +\sigma + +\sim +\sim (relation) + +\simeq +\simeq (relation) + +\smallint +\smallint + +\smile +\smile (relation) + +\spadesuit +\spadesuit + +\sqcap +\sqcap (binary operation) + +\sqcup +\sqcup (binary operation) + +\sqsubset +(relation) + +\sqsubseteq +\sqsubseteq (relation) + +\sqsupset +(relation) + +\sqsupseteq +\sqsupseteq (relation) + +\star +\star (binary operation) + +\subset +\subset (relation) + +\subseteq +\subseteq (relation) + +\succ +\succ (relation) + +\succeq +\succeq (relation) + +\sum +\sum + +\supset +\supset (relation) + +\supseteq +\supseteq (relation) + +\surd +\surd + +\swarrow +\swarrow + +\tau +\tau + +\theta +\theta + +\times +\times (binary operation) + +\to +\to + +\top +\top + +\triangle +\triangle + +\triangleleft +\triangleleft (binary operation) + +\triangleright +\triangleright (binary operation) + +\unlhd +left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) + +\unrhd +right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) + +\Uparrow +\Uparrow (delimiter) + +\uparrow +\uparrow (delimiter) + +\Updownarrow +\Updownarrow (delimiter) + +\updownarrow +\updownarrow (delimiter) + +\uplus +\uplus (binary operation) + +\Upsilon +\Upsilon + +\upsilon +\upsilon + +\varepsilon +\varepsilon + +\varphi +\varphi + +\varpi +\varpi + +\varrho +\varrho + +\varsigma +\varsigma + +\vartheta +\vartheta + +\vdash +\vdash (relation) + +\vee +\vee (binary operation) + +\Vert +\Vert (delimiter) + +\vert +\vert (delimiter) + +\wedge +\wedge (binary operation) + +\wp +\wp + +\wr +\wr (binary operation) + +\Xi +\Xi + +\xi +\xi + +\zeta +\zeta + + + + + + +Math functions +math functionsfunctions, math +These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper +spacing. + +\arccos +\arccos + +\arcsin +\arcsin + +\arctan +\arctan + +\arg +\arg + +\bmod +Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) + +\cos +\cos + +\cosh +\cosh + +\cot +\cos + +\coth +\cosh + +\csc +\csc + +\deg +\deg + +\det +\deg + +\dim +\dim + +\exp +\exp + +\gcd +\gcd + +\hom +\hom + +\inf +\inf + +\ker +\ker + +\lg +\lg + +\lim +\lim + +\liminf +\liminf + +\limsup +\limsup + +\ln +\ln + +\log +\log + +\max +\max + +\min +\min + +\pmod +parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) + +\Pr +\Pr + +\sec +\sec + +\sin +\sin + +\sinh +\sinh + +\sup +\sup + +\tan +\tan + +\tanh +\tanh + + + + + + +Math accents +math accentsaccents, mathematical +&latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in math. These are different from accents in normal text -(see ). - - - \acute - - acute accent, mathMath acute accent: \acutex. - - - - \bar - - bar-over accent, mathmacron accent, mathMath bar-over accent: \barx. - - - - \breve - - breve accent, mathMath breve accent: \brevex. - - - - \check - - check accent, mathhác<ek accent, mathMath hác<ek (check) accent: \checkx. - - - - \ddot - - double dot accent, mathMath dieresis accent: \ddotx. - - - - \dot - - overdot accent, mathdot over accent, mathMath dot accent: \dotx. - - - - \grave - - grave accent, mathMath grave accent: \gravex. - - - - \hat - - hat accent, mathcircumflex accent, mathMath hat (circumflex) accent: \hatx. - - - - \imath - - dotless i, mathMath dotless i. - - - - \jmath - - dotless j, mathMath dotless j. - - - - \tilde - - tilde accent, mathMath tilde accent: \tildex. - - - - \vec - - vector symbol, mathMath vector symbol: \vecx. - - - - \widehat - - wide hat accent, mathMath wide hat accent: \widehatx+y. - - - - \widehat - - wide tile accent, mathMath wide tilde accent: \widetildex+y. - - - - - - - Spacing in math mode - spacing within math modemath mode, spacing -In a math environment, &latex; ignores the spaces you type and +(see ). + +\acute +acute accent, mathMath acute accent: \acute{x}. + +\bar +bar-over accent, mathmacron accent, mathMath bar-over accent: \bar{x}. + +\breve +breve accent, mathMath breve accent: \breve{x}. + +\check +check accent, mathhác<ek accent, mathMath hác<ek (check) accent: \check{x}. + +\ddot +double dot accent, mathMath dieresis accent: \ddot{x}. + +\dot +overdot accent, mathdot over accent, mathMath dot accent: \dot{x}. + +\grave +grave accent, mathMath grave accent: \grave{x}. + +\hat +hat accent, mathcircumflex accent, mathMath hat (circumflex) accent: \hat{x}. + +\imath +dotless i, mathMath dotless i. + +\jmath +dotless j, mathMath dotless j. + +\tilde +tilde accent, mathMath tilde accent: \tilde{x}. + +\vec +vector symbol, mathMath vector symbol: \vec{x}. + +\widehat +wide hat accent, mathMath wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}. + +\widehat +wide tile accent, mathMath wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}. + + + + + + +Spacing in math mode +spacing within math modemath mode, spacing +In a math environment, &latex; ignores the spaces you type and puts in the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, &latex; provides the following -commands for use in math mode: - - - \; - - \;A thick space (5\over18\,quad). - - - - \: - \> - - \:\>Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). - - - - \, - - \,A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. - - - - \! - - A negative thin space (-1\over6\,quad). - - - - - - - Math miscellany - math miscellany - - - \* - - discretionary multiplicationmultiplication symbol, discretionary line breakA “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is -allowed. - - - - \cdots - - A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. - - - - \ddots - - A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. - - - - \frac{num}{den} - - \fracProduces the fraction num divided by den. - - - - \left delim1 ... \right delim2 - - \rightnull delimiterThe two delimiters need not match; ‘.’ acts as a null delimiter, +commands for use in math mode: + +\; +\;A thick space (5\over18\,quad). +\: +\> +\:\>Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). +\, +\,A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. +\! +A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad). + + + + + +Math miscellany +math miscellany +\* +discretionary multiplicationmultiplication symbol, discretionary line breakA “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is +allowed. + +\cdots +A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. + +\ddots +A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. + +\frac{num}{den} +\fracProduces the fraction num divided by den. + + +\left delim1 ... \right delim2 +\rightnull delimiterThe two delimiters need not match; ‘.’ acts as a null delimiter, producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math -in between. Example: \left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]. - - - - \overbrace{text} - - Generates a brace over text. -For example, \overbracex+\cdots+x^k \rm\;times. - - - - \overline{text} - - Generates a horizontal line over tex. -For exampe, \overlinex+y. - - - - \sqrt[root]{arg} - - Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The +in between. Example: \left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]. + +\overbrace{text} +Generates a brace over text. +For example, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}. + +\overline{text} +Generates a horizontal line over tex. +For exampe, \overline{x+y}. + +\sqrt[root]{arg} +Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The optional argument root determines what root to produce. For example, the cube root of x+y would be typed as -$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. - - - - \stackrel{text}{relation} - - Puts text above relation. For example, -\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}. - - - - \underbrace{math} - - Generates math with a brace underneath. - - - - \underline{text} - - Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be +$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. + +\stackrel{text}{relation} +Puts text above relation. For example, +\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}. + +\underbrace{math} +Generates math with a brace underneath. + +\underline{text} +Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of -descenders. - - - - \vdots - - \vdotsProduces a vertical ellipsis. - - - - - - - - Modes - modesparagraph modemath modeleft-to-right modelR mode - When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three -modes: - - - Paragraph mode - - - Math mode - - - Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short - - - &latex; changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a +descenders. + +\vdots +\vdotsProduces a vertical ellipsis. + + + + + + + +Modes +modesparagraph modemath modeleft-to-right modelR mode + +When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three +modes: + + +Paragraph mode + + +Math mode + + +Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short + + +&latex; changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when -&latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. - “Paragraph mode” is the most common; it's the one &latex; is in +&latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. + +“Paragraph mode” is the most common; it's the one &latex; is in when processing ordinary text. In that mode, &latex; breaks your text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. &latex; is in “math mode” when it's generating a mathematical formula. In “LR @@ -5143,8 +4054,9 @@ unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words into an \mbox, &latex; would keep typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then complain because the resulting -box was too wide to fit on the line. - &latex; is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox +box was too wide to fit on the line. + +&latex; is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. There are also several text-producing commands and environments for @@ -5152,1626 +4064,1394 @@ making a box that put &latex; in paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or environments will be called a parbox. When &latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in “inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out -in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. - - - - Page styles - styles, pagepage styles -The \documentclass command determines the size and position of -the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. - - - <literal>\maketitle</literal> - titles, making\maketitle -The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title +in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. + + + + +Page styles +styles, pagepage styles +The \documentclass command determines the size and position of +the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. + + + + +<literal>\maketitle</literal> +titles, making\maketitle +The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title page—except in the article class, where the title is placed at the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title -is obtained from the following declarations: - - - \author{name \and name2} - - author, for titlepage\\ for \author\and for \authorThe \author command declares the document author(s), where the +is obtained from the following declarations: + +\author{name \and name2} +author, for titlepage\\ for \author\and for \authorThe \author command declares the document author(s), where the argument is a list of authors separated by \and commands. Use \\ to separate lines within a single author's entry—for -example, to give the author's institution or address. - - - - \date{text} - - date, for titlepageThe \date command declares text to be the document's +example, to give the author's institution or address. + +\date{text} +date, for titlepageThe \date command declares text to be the document's date. With no \date command, the current date (see ) -is used. - - - - \thanks{text} - - thanks, for titlepagecredit footnoteThe \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, -usually used for credit acknowledgements. - - - - \title{text} - - title, for titlepage\\ for \titleThe \title command declares text to be the title of the -document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. - - - - - - - <literal>\pagenumbering</literal> - \pagenumberingpage numbering style -Synopsis: - -\pagenumbering{style} +is used. + +\thanks{text} +thanks, for titlepagecredit footnoteThe \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, +usually used for credit acknowledgements. + +\title{text} +title, for titlepage\\ for \titleThe \title command declares text to be the title of the +document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. + + + + + + +<literal>\pagenumbering</literal> +\pagenumberingpage numbering style +Synopsis: + +\pagenumbering{style} - Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style: - - - arabic - - arabic numerals - - - - roman - - lowercase Roman numerals - - - - Roman - - uppercase Roman numerals - - - - alph - - lowercase letters - - - - Alph - - uppercase letters - - - - - - - <literal>\pagestyle</literal> - \pagestyleheader stylefooter stylerunning header and footer style -Synopsis: - -\pagestyle{style} +Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style: + +arabic +arabic numerals +roman +lowercase Roman numerals +Roman +uppercase Roman numerals +alph +lowercase letters +Alph +uppercase letters + + + + + +<literal>\pagestyle</literal> +\pagestyleheader stylefooter stylerunning header and footer style +Synopsis: + +\pagestyle{style} - The \pagestyle command specifies how the headers and footers -are typeset from the current page onwards. Values for style: - - - plain - - Just a plain page number. - - - - empty - - Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. - - - - headings - - Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what -goes in the headers. - - - - myheadings - - Custom headers, specified via the \markboth or the -\markright commands. - - - - Here are the descriptions of \markboth and \markright: - - - \markboth{left}{right} - - Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” +The \pagestyle command specifies how the headers and footers +are typeset from the current page onwards. Values for style: + +plain +Just a plain page number. + +empty +Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. + +headings +Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what +goes in the headers. + +myheadings +Custom headers, specified via the \markboth or the +\markright commands. + + + +Here are the descriptions of \markboth and \markright: + +\markboth{left}{right} +Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” (left) is generated by the last \markboth command before the end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” (right is generated by the first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before -the page. - - - - \markright{right} - - Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. - - - - - - - <literal>\thispagestyle{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}</literal> - \thispagestyle -The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the +the page. + +\markright{right} +Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. + + + + + + +<literal>\thispagestyle{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}</literal> +\thispagestyle +The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the \pagestyle command (see previous section) except that it -changes to style for the current page only. - - - - - Spaces - spaces -&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. - Another space-producing command is \, to produce a “thin” +changes to style for the current page only. + + + + + +Spaces +spaces +&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. + +Another space-producing command is \, to produce a “thin” space (usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is -more often useful in math mode (see ). - - - <literal>\hspace</literal> - \hspace -Synopsis: - -\hspace[*]{length} +more often useful in math mode (see ). + + + + +<literal>\hspace</literal> +\hspace +Synopsis: + +\hspace[*]{length} - The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length +The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length argument can be expressed in any terms that &latex; understands: points, inches, etc. It is a rubber length. You can add both negative and positive space with an \hspace command; adding -negative space is like backspacing. - &latex; normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning +negative space is like backspacing. + +&latex; normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional * -form. - +form. + - - <literal>\hfill</literal> - \hfillThe \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has + + +<literal>\hfill</literal> + +\hfillThe \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as -needed. - \fillThe \fill parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, +needed. + +\fillThe \fill parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the glue value ‘0pt plus1fill’); thus, \hspace\fill is -equivalent to \hfill. - - - - <literal>\SPACE</literal> - \SPACE\TAB\NEWLINE -The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's +equivalent to \hfill. + + + + +<literal>\SPACE</literal> +\SPACE\TAB\NEWLINE +The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. It is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a -nice system. - In normal circumstances, \tab and \newline -are equivalent to \ . - - - - <literal>\@</literal> - \@ -The \@ command makes the following punctuation character end a +nice system. + +In normal circumstances, \tab and \newline +are equivalent to \ . + + + + +<literal>\@</literal> +\@ +The \@ command makes the following punctuation character end a sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without -\@: - -… in C\@. Pascal, though … +\@: + +… in C\@. Pascal, though … … in C. Pascal, though … - produces +produces + -
- … in C. Pascal, though … -… in C. Pascal, though … -
-
- - - <literal>\thinspace</literal> - \thinspace -\thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that -is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as -in '”. - +
… in C. Pascal, though … +… in C. Pascal, though … +
+ - - <literal>\/</literal> - \/ -The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a + + +<literal>\thinspace</literal> +\thinspace +\thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that +is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as +in '”. + + + + +<literal>\/</literal> +\/ +The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a small space defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows. The italic -f character typically has a large italic correction value. - If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary to +f character typically has a large italic correction value. + +If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary to insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the &tex; output, the `f's are nicely separated) -with f: f;. - Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic +with f: f;. + +Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic correction. Compare pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the `f') -with pdf&tex;. - - - - <literal>\hrulefill</literal> - \hrulefill -The \hrulefill fill command produces a “rubber length” which can +with pdf&tex;. + + + + +<literal>\hrulefill</literal> +\hrulefill +The \hrulefill fill command produces a “rubber length” which can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal -rule. - - - - <literal>\dotfill</literal> - \dotfill -The \dotfill command produces a “rubber length” that fills -with dots instead of just white space. - - +rule. + + +
+ +<literal>\dotfill</literal> - - <literal>\addvspace</literal> - \addvspacevertical spacespace, inserting vertical -\addvspace{length} - The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of height +\dotfill +The \dotfill command produces a “rubber length” that fills +with dots instead of just white space. + + + + + +<literal>\addvspace</literal> +\addvspacevertical spacespace, inserting vertical +\addvspace{length} + +The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of height length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same point in the output by a previous \addvspace command, then this command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length -of the total vertical space equal to length. - - - - <literal>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</literal> - These commands produce a given amount of space. - - - \bigskip - - \bigskip\bigskipamountThe same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line -space (with stretch and shrink). - - - - \medskip - - \medskip\medskipamountThe same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily -about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). - - - - \smallskip - - \smallskip\smallskipamountThe same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a -quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). - - - - The \...amount parameters are determined by the document class. - - - - <literal>\vfill</literal> - \vfill -The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which +of the total vertical space equal to length. + + + + +<literal>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</literal> + +These commands produce a given amount of space. + +\bigskip +\bigskip\bigskipamountThe same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line +space (with stretch and shrink). + +\medskip +\medskip\medskipamountThe same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily +about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). + +\smallskip +\smallskip\smallskipamountThe same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a +quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). + + + +The \...amount parameters are determined by the document class. + + + + +<literal>\vfill</literal> +\vfill +The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to -\vspace{\fill} (see ). - - - - <literal>\vspace[*]{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal> - \vspace -Synopsis: - -\vspace[*]{length} +\vspace{\fill} (see ). + + + + +<literal>\vspace[*]{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal> +\vspace +Synopsis: + +\vspace[*]{length} - The \vspace command adds the vertical space length, i.e., -a rubber length. length can be negative or positive. - Ordinarily, &latex; removes vertical space added by \vspace at +The \vspace command adds the vertical space length, i.e., +a rubber length. length can be negative or positive. + +Ordinarily, &latex; removes vertical space added by \vspace at the top or bottom of a page. With the optional * argument, the -space is not removed. - -
- - - Boxes - boxes -All the predefined length parameters (see ) can be -used in the arguments of the box-making commands. - - - <literal>\mbox{<replaceable>text}</replaceable></literal> - \mbox -hyphenation, preventingThe \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the +space is not removed. + + + + + +Boxes + +boxes +All the predefined length parameters (see ) can be +used in the arguments of the box-making commands. + + + + +<literal>\mbox{<replaceable>text}</replaceable></literal> +\mbox +hyphenation, preventingThe \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text created by its argument. The text is not broken into -lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. - - - - <literal>\fbox</literal> and <literal>\framebox</literal> - \fbox\framebox -Synopses: - -\fbox{text} +lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. + + + + +<literal>\fbox</literal> and <literal>\framebox</literal> + +\fbox\framebox +Synopses: + +\fbox{text} \framebox[width][position]{text} - The \fbox and \framebox commands are like \mbox, -except that they put a frame around the outside of the box being created. - In addition, the \framebox command allows for explicit +The \fbox and \framebox commands are like \mbox, +except that they put a frame around the outside of the box being created. + +In addition, the \framebox command allows for explicit specification of the box width with the optional width argument (a dimension), and positioning with the optional position -argument. - -\fboxrule\fboxsepBoth commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default +argument. + +\fboxrule\fboxsepBoth commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default ‘.4pt’), and leave a space of \fboxsep (default -‘3pt’) between the rule and the contents of the box. - See , for the \framebox command in the -picture environment. - - - - <literal>lrbox</literal> - lrbox -\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} - This is the environment form of \sbox. - The text inside the environment is saved in the box cmd, which -must have been declared with \newsavebox. - - - - <literal>\makebox</literal> - \makebox -Synopsis: - -\makebox[width][position]{text} +‘3pt’) between the rule and the contents of the box. + +See , for the \framebox command in the +picture environment. + + + + +<literal>lrbox</literal> +lrbox +\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} + +This is the environment form of \sbox. + +The text inside the environment is saved in the box cmd, which +must have been declared with \newsavebox. + + + + +<literal>\makebox</literal> +\makebox +Synopsis: + +\makebox[width][position]{text} - The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain +The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain the text specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional width argument. The position of the text within the box is determined by the optional position argument, which may take -the following values: - - - c - - Centered (default). - - - - l - - Flush left. - - - - r - - Flush right. - - - - s - - Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain -stretchable space for this to work. - - - - \makebox is also used within the picture environment -see . - - - - <literal>\parbox</literal> - \parbox -Synopsis: - -\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text} +the following values: + +c +Centered (default). +l +Flush left. +r +Flush right. +s +Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain +stretchable space for this to work. + + +\makebox is also used within the picture environment +see . + + + + +<literal>\parbox</literal> +\parbox +Synopsis: + +\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text} - The \parbox command produces a box whose contents are created +The \parbox command produces a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any paragraph-making environments inside a \parbox argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a -minipage environment (see ). - \parbox has two mandatory arguments: - - - width - - the width of the parbox; - - - - text - - the text that goes inside the parbox. - - - - The optional position argument allows you to align either the +minipage environment (see ). + +\parbox has two mandatory arguments: + +width +the width of the parbox; +text +the text that goes inside the parbox. + + +The optional position argument allows you to align either the top or bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding -text (default is top). - The optional height argument overrides the natural height of the box. - The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside -the box, as follows; if it is not specified, position is used. - - - t - - text is placed at the top of the box. - - - - c - - text is centered in the box. - - - - b - - text is placed at the bottom of the box. - - - - s - - stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space -for this to work. - - - - - - - <literal>\raisebox</literal> - \raisebox -Synopsis: - -\raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text} +text (default is top). + +The optional height argument overrides the natural height of the box. + +The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside +the box, as follows; if it is not specified, position is used. + +t +text is placed at the top of the box. +c +text is centered in the box. +b +text is placed at the bottom of the box. +s +stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space +for this to work. + + + + + +<literal>\raisebox</literal> +\raisebox +Synopsis: + +\raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text} - The \raisebox command raises or lowers text. The first +The \raisebox command raises or lowers text. The first mandatory argument specifies how high text is to be raised (or lowered if it is a negative amount). text itself is processed -in LR mode. - The optional arguments height and depth are dimensions. +in LR mode. + +The optional arguments height and depth are dimensions. If they are specified, &latex; treats text as extending a certain distance above the baseline (height) or below (depth), -ignoring its natural height and depth. - - - - <literal>\savebox</literal> - \savebox -Synopsis: - -\savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text} +ignoring its natural height and depth. + + + + +<literal>\savebox</literal> +\savebox +Synopsis: + +\savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text} - This command typeset text in a box just as with \makebox +This command typeset text in a box just as with \makebox (see ), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in the box labeled \boxcmd, which must have been -declared with \newsavebox (see ). - - - - <literal>\sbox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> - \sbox -Synopsis: - -\sbox{\boxcmd}{text} +declared with \newsavebox (see ). + + + + +<literal>\sbox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> +\sbox +Synopsis: + +\sbox{\boxcmd}{text} - \sbox types text in a box just as with \mbox +\sbox types text in a box just as with \mbox (see ) except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled \boxcmd. \boxcmd must have been previously declared with -\newsavebox (see ). - - - - <literal>\usebox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable></literal> - \usebox -Synopsis: - -\usebox{\boxcmd} +\newsavebox (see ). + + + + +<literal>\usebox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable></literal> +\usebox +Synopsis: + +\usebox{\boxcmd} - \usebox producesthe box most recently saved in the bin -\boxcmd by a \savebox command (see ). - - - - - Special insertions - &latex; provides commands for inserting characters that have a -special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. - - - Reserved characters - reserved characterscharacters, reserved -The following characters play a special role in &latex; and are called -“reserved characters” or “special characters”. - -# $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } +\usebox producesthe box most recently saved in the bin +\boxcmd by a \savebox command (see ). + + + + + +Special insertions + +&latex; provides commands for inserting characters that have a +special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. + + + + +Reserved characters +reserved characterscharacters, reserved +The following characters play a special role in &latex; and are called +“reserved characters” or “special characters”. + +# $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } - \#\$\%\&\_\{\}Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex; +\#\$\%\&\_\{\}Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex; will do something special. If you simply want the character to be printed as itself, include a \ in front of the character. For -example, \$ will produce $ in your output. - \backslashOne exception to this rule is \ itself, because \\ has +example, \$ will produce $ in your output. + +\backslashOne exception to this rule is \ itself, because \\ has its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing $\backslash$ in your file, and a typewriter \ is -produced by using ‘\’ in a verbatim command (see ). - \~\^Also, \~ and \^ place tilde and circumflex accents over +produced by using ‘\’ in a verbatim command (see ). + +\~\^Also, \~ and \^ place tilde and circumflex accents over the following letter, as in õ and ô (see ); to get a standalone ~ or ^, you can again use a verbatim -command. - \symbolaccessing any character of a font -Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you +command. + +\symbolaccessing any character of a font +Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you know its number by using the \symbol command. For example, the visible space character used in the \verb* command has the code -decimal 32, so it can be typed as \symbol{32}. - You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal numbers -with ", so the previous example could also be written as -\symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}. - - - - Text symbols - text symbolstextcomp package&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols +decimal 32, so it can be typed as \symbol{32}. + +You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal numbers +with ", so the previous example could also be written as +\symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}. + + + + +Text symbols + +text symbolstextcomp package&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are -not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp package. - - - \copyright - \textcopyright - - copyright symbolThe copyright symbol, ©. - - - - \dag - - dagger, in textThe dagger symbol (in text). - - - - \ddag - - double dagger, in textThe double dagger symbol (in text). - - - - \LaTeX - - &latex; logologo, &latex;The &latex; logo. - - - - \guillemotleft («) - \guillemotright (») - \guilsinglleft (<) - \guilsinglright (>) - - double guillemetssingle guillemetsleft angle quotation marksright angle quotation marksdouble angle quotation markssingle angle quotation marksFrench quotation marksquotation marks, FrenchDouble and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: -«, », <, >. - - - - \ldots - \dots - \textellipsis - - ellipsisAn ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `…'. \ldots -and \dots also work in math mode. - - - - \lq - - left quoteopening quoteLeft (opening) quote: `. - - - - \P - \textparagraph - - paragraph symbolpilcrowParagraph sign (pilcrow). - - - - \pounds - \textsterling - - pounds symbolsterling symbolEnglish pounds sterling: £. - - - - \quotedblbase („) - \quotesinglbase (‚) - - double low-9 quotation marksingle low-9 quotation marklow-9 quotation marks, single and doubleDouble and single quotation marks on the baseline: -„ and ‚. - - - - \rq - - right quoteclosing quoteRight (closing) quote: '. - - - - \S - - section symbolSection symbol. - - - - \TeX - - &tex; logologo, &tex;The &tex; logo. - - - - \textasciicircum - - circumflex, ASCII, in textASCII circumflex, in textASCII circumflex: ^. - - - - \textasciitilde - - tilde, ASCII, in textASCII tilde, in textASCII tilde: ~. - - - - \textasteriskcentered - - asterisk, centered, in textcentered asterisk, in textCentered asterisk: *. - - - - \textbackslash - - backslash, in textBackslash: \. - - - - \textbar - - vertical bar, in textbar, vertical, in textVertical bar: |. - - - - \textbardbl - - vertical bar, double, in textbar, double vertical, in textdouble vertical bar, in textDouble vertical bar. - - - - \textbigcircle - - big circle symbols, in textcircle symbol, big, in textBig circle symbol. - - - - \textbraceleft - - left brace, in textbrace, left, in textLeft brace: {. - - - - \textbraceright - - right brace, in textbrace, right, in textRight brace: }. - - - - \textbullet - - bullet, in textBullet: •. - - - - \textcircled{letter} - - circled letter, in textletter in a circle, as in ®. - - - - \textcompwordmark - \textcapitalwordmark - \textascenderwordmark - - composite word mark, in textcap heightascender heightComposite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form +not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp package. + +\copyright +\textcopyright +copyright symbolThe copyright symbol, ©. + +\dag +dagger, in textThe dagger symbol (in text). + +\ddag +double dagger, in textThe double dagger symbol (in text). + +\LaTeX +&latex; logologo, &latex;The &latex; logo. + +\guillemotleft («) +\guillemotright (») +\guilsinglleft (<) +\guilsinglright (>) +double guillemetssingle guillemetsleft angle quotation marksright angle quotation marksdouble angle quotation markssingle angle quotation marksFrench quotation marksquotation marks, FrenchDouble and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: +«, », <, >. + +\ldots +\dots +\textellipsis +ellipsisAn ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `…'. \ldots +and \dots also work in math mode. + +\lq +left quoteopening quoteLeft (opening) quote: `. + +\P +\textparagraph +paragraph symbolpilcrowParagraph sign (pilcrow). + +\pounds +\textsterling +pounds symbolsterling symbolEnglish pounds sterling: £. + +\quotedblbase („) +\quotesinglbase (‚) +double low-9 quotation marksingle low-9 quotation marklow-9 quotation marks, single and doubleDouble and single quotation marks on the baseline: +„ and ‚. + +\rq +right quoteclosing quoteRight (closing) quote: '. + +\S +section symbolSection symbol. + +\TeX +&tex; logologo, &tex;The &tex; logo. + +\textasciicircum +circumflex, ASCII, in textASCII circumflex, in textASCII circumflex: ^. + +\textasciitilde +tilde, ASCII, in textASCII tilde, in textASCII tilde: ~. + +\textasteriskcentered +asterisk, centered, in textcentered asterisk, in textCentered asterisk: *. + +\textbackslash +backslash, in textBackslash: \. + +\textbar +vertical bar, in textbar, vertical, in textVertical bar: |. + +\textbardbl +vertical bar, double, in textbar, double vertical, in textdouble vertical bar, in textDouble vertical bar. + +\textbigcircle +big circle symbols, in textcircle symbol, big, in textBig circle symbol. + +\textbraceleft +left brace, in textbrace, left, in textLeft brace: {. + +\textbraceright +right brace, in textbrace, right, in textRight brace: }. + +\textbullet +bullet, in textBullet: •. + +\textcircled{letter} +circled letter, in textletter in a circle, as in ®. + +\textcompwordmark +\textcapitalwordmark +\textascenderwordmark +composite word mark, in textcap heightascender heightComposite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form has the cap height of the font, while the \textascender... form -has the ascender height. - - - - \textdagger - - dagger, in textDagger: \dag. - - - - \textdaggerdbl - - dagger, double, in textdouble dagger, in textDouble dagger: \ddag. - - - - \textdollar (or $) - - dollar signcurrency, dollarDollar sign: $. - - - - \textemdash (or ---) - - em-dashEm-dash: — (for punctuation). - - - - \textendash (or --) - - e-dashEn-dash: — (for ranges). - - - - \texteuro - - euro symbolcurrency, euroThe Euro symbol: €. - - - - \textexclamdown (or !`) - - exclamation point, upside-downUpside down exclamation point: ¡. - - - - \textgreater - - greater than symbol, in textGreater than: >. - - - - \textless - - less than symbol, in textLess than: <. - - - - \textleftarrow - - arrow, left, in textleft arrow, in textLeft arrow. - - - - \textordfeminine - \textordmasculine - - feminine ordinal symbolmasculine ordinal symbolordinals, feminine and masculineSpanish ordinals, feminine and masculineFeminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. - - - - \textordfeminine - - feminine ordinal symbolFeminine ordinal symbol: ®. - - - - \textperiodcentered - - period, centered, in textcentered period, in textCentered period: \cdot. - - - - \textquestiondown (or ?`) - - questionation point, upside-downUpside down questionation point: ¿. - - - - \textquotedblleft (or ``) - - left quote, doubledouble left quoteDouble left quote: “. - - - - \textquotedblright (or ') - - right quote, doubledouble right quoteDouble right quote: ”. - - - - \textquoteleft (or `) - - left quote, singlesingle left quoteSingle left quote: `. - - - - \textquoteright (or ') - - right quote, singlesingle right quoteSingle right quote: '. - - - - \textquotestraightbase - \textquotestraightdblbase - - quote, straight basestraight quote, basedouble quote, straight basestraight double quote, baseSingle and double straight quotes on the baseline. - - - - \textregistered - - registered symbolRegistered symbol: ®. - - - - \textrightarrow - - arrow, right, in textright arrow, in textRight arrow. - - - - \textthreequartersemdash - - three-quarters em-dashem-dash, three-quarters“Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. - - - - \texttrademark - - trademark symbolTrademark symbol: ^\hboxTM. - - - - \texttwelveudash - - Xx 12u-. - - - - \textunderscore - - underscore, in textUnderscore: _. - - - - \textvisiblespace - - visible space symbol, in textVisible space symbol. - - - - - - - Accents - accentscharacters, accentedletters, accented -&latex; has wide support for many of the world's scripts and +has the ascender height. + +\textdagger +dagger, in textDagger: \dag. + +\textdaggerdbl +dagger, double, in textdouble dagger, in textDouble dagger: \ddag. + +\textdollar (or $) +dollar signcurrency, dollarDollar sign: $. + +\textemdash (or ---) +em-dashEm-dash: — (for punctuation). + +\textendash (or --) +e-dashEn-dash: — (for ranges). + +\texteuro +euro symbolcurrency, euroThe Euro symbol: €. + +\textexclamdown (or !`) +exclamation point, upside-downUpside down exclamation point: ¡. + +\textgreater +greater than symbol, in textGreater than: >. + +\textless +less than symbol, in textLess than: <. + +\textleftarrow +arrow, left, in textleft arrow, in textLeft arrow. + +\textordfeminine +\textordmasculine +feminine ordinal symbolmasculine ordinal symbolordinals, feminine and masculineSpanish ordinals, feminine and masculineFeminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. + +\textordfeminine +feminine ordinal symbolFeminine ordinal symbol: ®. + +\textperiodcentered +period, centered, in textcentered period, in textCentered period: \cdot. + +\textquestiondown (or ?`) +questionation point, upside-downUpside down questionation point: ¿. + +\textquotedblleft (or ``) +left quote, doubledouble left quoteDouble left quote: “. + +\textquotedblright (or ') +right quote, doubledouble right quoteDouble right quote: ”. + +\textquoteleft (or `) +left quote, singlesingle left quoteSingle left quote: `. + +\textquoteright (or ') +right quote, singlesingle right quoteSingle right quote: '. + +\textquotestraightbase +\textquotestraightdblbase +quote, straight basestraight quote, basedouble quote, straight basestraight double quote, baseSingle and double straight quotes on the baseline. + +\textregistered +registered symbolRegistered symbol: ®. + +\textrightarrow +arrow, right, in textright arrow, in textRight arrow. + +\textthreequartersemdash +three-quarters em-dashem-dash, three-quarters“Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. + +\texttrademark +trademark symbolTrademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}. + +\texttwelveudash +Xx 12u-. + +\textunderscore +underscore, in textUnderscore: _. + +\textvisiblespace +visible space symbol, in textVisible space symbol. + + + + + + +Accents + +accentscharacters, accentedletters, accented +&latex; has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages, through the babel package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists -the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. - The \capital... commands produce alternative forms for use with -capital letters. These are not available with OT1. - - - \" - \capitaldieresis - - \" (umlaut accent)\capitaldieresisumlaut accentdieresis accentProduces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. - - - - \' - \capitalacute - - \' (acute accent)\capitalacuteacute accentProduces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing +the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. + +The \capital... commands produce alternative forms for use with +capital letters. These are not available with OT1. + +\" +\capitaldieresis +\" (umlaut accent)\capitaldieresisumlaut accentdieresis accentProduces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. + +\' +\capitalacute +\' (acute accent)\capitalacuteacute accentProduces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column -(see ). - - - - \. - - \. (dot-over accent)dot accentdot-over accentProduces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. - - - - \= - \capitalmacron - - \= (macron accent)\capitalmacronmacron accentoverbar accentbar-over accentProduces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o¯. - - - - \^ - \capitalcircumflex - - \^ (circumflex accent)\capitalcircumflexcircumflex accenthat accentProduces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. - - - - \` - \capitalgrave - - \` (grave accent)\capitalgravegrave accentProduces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the +(see ). + +\. +\. (dot-over accent)dot accentdot-over accentProduces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. + +\= +\capitalmacron +\= (macron accent)\capitalmacronmacron accentoverbar accentbar-over accentProduces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o¯. + +\^ +\capitalcircumflex +\^ (circumflex accent)\capitalcircumflexcircumflex accenthat accentProduces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. + +\` +\capitalgrave +\` (grave accent)\capitalgravegrave accentProduces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the tabbing environment, move following text to the right margin -(see ). - - - - \~ - \capitaltilde - - \~ (tilde accent)\capitaltildetilde accentProduces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. - - - - \b - - \b (bar-under accent)bar-under accentProduces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. - - - - \c - \capitalcedilla - - \c (cedilla accent)\capitalcedillacedilla accentProduces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. - - - - \d - \capitaldotaccent - - \d (dot-under accent)\capitaldotaccentdot-under accentProduces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. - - - - \H - \capitalhungarumlaut - - \H (Hungarian umlaut accent)\capitalhungarumlauthungarian umlaut accentProduces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. - - - - \i - - \i (dotless i)dotless iProduces a dotless i, as in `i'. - - - - \j - - \j (dotless j)dotless jProduces a dotless j, as in `j'. - - - - \k - \capitalogonek - - \k (ogonek)\capitalogonekogonekProduces a letter with ogonek, as in `o'. Not available in -the OT1 encoding. - - - - \r - \capitalring - - \r (ring accent)\capitalringring accentProduces a ring accent, as in `o*'. - - - - \t - \capitaltie - \newtie - \capitalnewtie - - \t (tie-after accent)\capitaltie\newtie\capitalnewtietie-after accentProduces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The -\newtie form is centered in its box. - - - - \u - \capitalbreve - - \u (breve accent)\capitalbrevebreve accentProduces a breve accent, as in `o('. - - - - \underbar - - \underbarunderbarNot exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. +(see ). + +\~ +\capitaltilde +\~ (tilde accent)\capitaltildetilde accentProduces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. + +\b +\b (bar-under accent)bar-under accentProduces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. + +\c +\capitalcedilla +\c (cedilla accent)\capitalcedillacedilla accentProduces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. + +\d +\capitaldotaccent +\d (dot-under accent)\capitaldotaccentdot-under accentProduces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. + +\H +\capitalhungarumlaut +\H (Hungarian umlaut accent)\capitalhungarumlauthungarian umlaut accentProduces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. + +\i +\i (dotless i)dotless iProduces a dotless i, as in `i'. + +\j +\j (dotless j)dotless jProduces a dotless j, as in `j'. + +\k +\capitalogonek +\k (ogonek)\capitalogonekogonekProduces a letter with ogonek, as in `o;'. Not available in +the OT1 encoding. + +\r +\capitalring +\r (ring accent)\capitalringring accentProduces a ring accent, as in `o*'. + +\t +\capitaltie +\newtie +\capitalnewtie +\t (tie-after accent)\capitaltie\newtie\capitalnewtietie-after accentProduces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The +\newtie form is centered in its box. + +\u +\capitalbreve +\u (breve accent)\capitalbrevebreve accentProduces a breve accent, as in `o('. + +\underbar +\underbarunderbarNot exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through -descenders. See also \underline in . - - - - \v - \capitalcaron - - \v (breve accent)\capitalcaronhacek accentcheck accentcaron accentProduces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in `o<'. - - - - - - - Non-English characters - special charactersnon-English characterscharacters, non-Englishletters, non-English -Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting characters commonly -used in languages other than English. - - - \aa - \AA - - \aa (å)\AA (Å)aringå and Å. - - - - \ae - \AE - - \ae (æ)\AE (Æ)ae ligatureæ and Æ. - - - - \dh - \DH - - \dh (æ)\DH (Æ)Icelandic etheth, Icelandic letterIcelandic letter eth: and . - - - - \dj - \DJ - - \dj\DJxxxx - - - - \ij - \IJ - - \ij (ij)\IJ (IJ)ij letter, Dutchij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). - - - - \l - \L - - \l (/l)\L (/L)polish l/l and /L. - - - - \ng - \NG - - \ng\NGxxxx - - - - \o - \O - - \o (ø)\O (Ø)oslashø and Ø. - - - - \oe - \OE - - \oe (œ)\OE (Œ)oe ligatureœ and Œ. - - - - \ss - \SS - - \ss (ß)\SS (SS)es-zet German lettersharp S lettersß and SS. - - - - \th - \TH - - \th ()\TH ()Icelandic thornthorn, Icelandic letterIcelandic letter thorn: and . - - - - - - - <literal>\rule</literal> - \rule -Synopsis: - -\rule[raise]{width}{thickness} +descenders. See also \underline in . + +\v +\capitalcaron +\v (breve accent)\capitalcaronhacek accentcheck accentcaron accentProduces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in `o<'. + + + + + + +Non-English characters + +special charactersnon-English characterscharacters, non-Englishletters, non-English +Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting characters commonly +used in languages other than English. + +\aa +\AA +\aa (å)\AA (Å)aringå and Å. + +\ae +\AE +\ae (æ)\AE (Æ)ae ligatureæ and Æ. + +\dh +\DH +\dh (æ)\DH (Æ)Icelandic etheth, Icelandic letterIcelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. + +\dj +\DJ +\dj\DJxxxx + +\ij +\IJ +\ij (ij)\IJ (IJ)ij letter, Dutchij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). + +\l +\L +\l (/l)\L (/L)polish l/l and /L. + +\ng +\NG +\ng\NGxxxx + +\o +\O +\o (ø)\O (Ø)oslashø and Ø. + +\oe +\OE +\oe (œ)\OE (Œ)oe ligatureœ and Œ. + +\ss +\SS +\ss (ß)\SS (SS)es-zet German lettersharp S lettersß and SS. + +\th +\TH +\th (þ)\TH (Þ)Icelandic thornthorn, Icelandic letterIcelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. + + + + + + +<literal>\rule</literal> +\rule +Synopsis: + +\rule[raise]{width}{thickness} - The \rule command produces rules, that is, lines or -rectangles. The arguments are: - - - raise - - How high to raise the rule (optional). - - - - width - - The length of the rule (mandatory). - - - - thickness - - The thickness of the rule (mandatory). - - - - - - - <literal>\today</literal> - \today -The \today command produces today's date, in the format +The \rule command produces rules, that is, lines or +rectangles. The arguments are: + +raise +How high to raise the rule (optional). + +width +The length of the rule (mandatory). + +thickness +The thickness of the rule (mandatory). + + + + + +<literal>\today</literal> +\today +The \today command produces today's date, in the format ‘month dd, yyyy’; for example, `July 4, 1976'. It uses the predefined counters \day, \month, and \year (see ) to do this. It is not -updated as the program runs. - datetime packageThe datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety -of other date formats. - - - - - Splitting the input - splitting the input fileinput file -A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole +updated as the program runs. + +datetime packageThe datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety +of other date formats. + + + + + +Splitting the input +splitting the input fileinput file +A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type -when you run &latex;. - - - <literal>\include</literal> - \include -Synopsis: - -\include{file} +when you run &latex;. + + + + +<literal>\include</literal> +\include +Synopsis: + +\include{file} - If no \includeonly command is present, the \include +If no \includeonly command is present, the \include command executes \clearpage to start a new page (see ), then reads file, then does another -\clearpage. - Given an \includeonly command, the \include actions are +\clearpage. + +Given an \includeonly command, the \include actions are only run if file is listed as an argument to -\includeonly. See the next section. - nested \include, not allowedThe \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file -read by another \include command. - - - - \<literal>includeonly</literal> - \includeonly -Synopsis: - -\includeonly{file1,file2,...} +\includeonly. See the next section. + +nested \include, not allowedThe \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file +read by another \include command. + + + + +\<literal>includeonly</literal> +\includeonly +Synopsis: + +\includeonly{file1,file2,...} - The \includeonly command controls which files will be read by +The \includeonly command controls which files will be read by subsequent \include commands. The list of filenames is comma-separated. Each file must exactly match a filename specified in a \include command for the selection to be -effective. - This command can only appear in the preamble. - - - - \input - \input -Synopsis: - -\input{file} +effective. + +This command can only appear in the preamble. + + + + +\input +\input +Synopsis: + +\input{file} - The \input command causes the specified file to be read +The \input command causes the specified file to be read and processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current -file at that point. - If file does not end in ‘.tex’ (e.g., ‘foo’ or +file at that point. + +If file does not end in ‘.tex’ (e.g., ‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar’), it is first tried with that extension (‘foo.tex’ or ‘foo.bar.tex’). If that is not found, the original file -is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar’). - - - - - Front/back matter - - Tables of contents - table of contents, creating -\tableofcontentsA table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents +is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar’). + + + + + +Front/back matter + + + + +Tables of contents + +table of contents, creating +\tableofcontentsA table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents command. You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; &latex; does the rest for you. A previous run must -have generated a .toc file. - The \tableofcontents command produces a heading, but it does +have generated a .toc file. + +The \tableofcontents command produces a heading, but it does not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the table of contents, write a \newpage command after the -\tableofcontents command. - \listoffigures\listoftablesThe analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables +\tableofcontents command. + +\listoffigures\listoftablesThe analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. -Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. - \nofilesThe command \nofiles overrides these commands, and -prevents any of these lists from being generated. - - - \addcontentsline - \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text}table of contents entry, manually adding -The \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} -command adds an entry to the specified list or table where: - - - ext - - The extension of the file on which information is to be written, +Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. + +\nofilesThe command \nofiles overrides these commands, and +prevents any of these lists from being generated. + + + + +\addcontentsline +\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text}table of contents entry, manually adding +The \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} +command adds an entry to the specified list or table where: + +ext +The extension of the file on which information is to be written, typically one of: toc (table of contents), lof (list of -figures), or lot (list of tables). - - - - unit - - The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the -following, matching the value of the ext argument: - - - toc - - The name of the sectional unit: part, chapter, -section, subsection, subsubsection. - - - - lof - - For the list of figures. - - - - lot - - For the list of tables. - - - - - - - entry - - The actual text of the entry. - - - - \contentslineWhat is written to the .ext file is the -command \contentsline{unit}{name}. +figures), or lot (list of tables). + +unit +The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the +following, matching the value of the ext argument: + +toc +The name of the sectional unit: part, chapter, +section, subsection, subsubsection. +lof +For the list of figures. +lot +For the list of tables. + + +entry +The actual text of the entry. + + +\contentslineWhat is written to the .ext file is the +command \contentsline{unit}{name}. + - - - \addtocontents - \addtocontents{ext}{text} -The \addtocontents{ext}{text} command adds text + + + +\addtocontents +\addtocontents{ext}{text} +The \addtocontents{ext}{text} command adds text (or formatting commands) directly to the .ext file that -generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. - - - ext - - The extension of the file on which information is to be written: +generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. + +ext +The extension of the file on which information is to be written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or -lot (list of tables). - - - - text - - The text to be written. - - - - - - - - Glossaries - glossaries -\makeglossaryThe command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. - \glossary.glo fileThe command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for -text to an auxiliary file with the .glo extension. - \glossaryentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command +lot (list of tables). + +text +The text to be written. + + + + + + +Glossaries +glossaries +\makeglossaryThe command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. + +\glossary.glo fileThe command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for +text to an auxiliary file with the .glo extension. + +\glossaryentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command \glossaryentry{text}{pageno}, where -pageno is the current \thepage value. - The glossary package on CTAN provides support for fancier -glossaries. - - - - Indexes - indexes -\makeindexThe command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in -the preamble. - \index.idx fileThe command \index{text} writes an index entry for -text to an auxiliary file with the .idx extension. - \indexentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command +pageno is the current \thepage value. + +The glossary package on CTAN provides support for fancier +glossaries. + + + + +Indexes +indexes +\makeindexThe command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in +the preamble. + +\index.idx fileThe command \index{text} writes an index entry for +text to an auxiliary file with the .idx extension. + +\indexentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command \indexentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno -is the current \thepage value. - `see' and `see also' index entriesTo generate a index entry for `bar' that says `See foo', use a +is the current \thepage value. + +`see' and `see also' index entriesTo generate a index entry for `bar' that says `See foo', use a vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}. Use seealso -instead of see to make a `See also' entry. - \seename\alsonameThe text `See' is defined by the macro \seename, and `See also' +instead of see to make a `See also' entry. + +\seename\alsonameThe text `See' is defined by the macro \seename, and `See also' by the macro \alsoname. These can be redefined for other -languages. - makeindex programxindy program.ind fileThe generated .idx file is then sorted with an external +languages. + +makeindex programxindy program.ind fileThe generated .idx file is then sorted with an external command, usually either makeindex (http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex) or (the multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge.net). This results in a .ind file, which can then be read to typeset -the index. - printindexmakeidx packageThe index is usually generated with the \printindex command. +the index. + +printindexmakeidx packageThe index is usually generated with the \printindex command. This is defined in the makeidx package, so -\usepackage{makeidx} needs to be in the preamble. - indexspaceThe rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new +\usepackage{makeidx} needs to be in the preamble. + +indexspaceThe rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new letter in the printed index; its default value is ‘10pt plus5pt -minus3pt’. - showidx packageThe showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in +minus3pt’. + +showidx packageThe showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in -preparing the index. - multind packageThe multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the +preparing the index. + +multind packageThe multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic, -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. - - - - - Letters - letterscreating letters -You can use &latex; to typeset letters, both personal and business. The +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. + + + + + +Letters +letterscreating letters +You can use &latex; to typeset letters, both personal and business. The letter document class is designed to make a number of letters at -once, although you can make just one if you so desire. - Your .tex source file has the same minimum commands as the other +once, although you can make just one if you so desire. + +Your .tex source file has the same minimum commands as the other document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a -minimum: - - \documentclass{letter} +minimum: + + \documentclass{letter} \begin{document} ... letters ... \end{document} - Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the name -and address of the recipient. For example, you might have: - - \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St. +Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the name +and address of the recipient. For example, you might have: + + \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St. \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA} ... \end{letter} - The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text of +The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text of the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary &latex; input. Commands that make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not work. The letter -closes with a \closing command. - \\ for lettersAfter the closing, you can have additional material. The +closes with a \closing command. + +\\ for lettersAfter the closing, you can have additional material. The \cc command produces the usual “cc: …”. There's also a similar \encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these -commands, use \\ to separate the items. - These commands are used with the letter class. +commands, use \\ to separate the items. + +These commands are used with the letter class. + + - - \address{<replaceable>return-address}</replaceable> - \address -The \address specifies the return address of a letter, as it + +\address{<replaceable>return-address}</replaceable> +\address +The \address specifies the return address of a letter, as it should appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the -address should be separated by \\ commands. - If you do not make an \address declaration, then the letter +address should be separated by \\ commands. + +If you do not make an \address declaration, then the letter will be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard letterhead. (See , for details on your local implementation). If you give an \address declaration, then the -letter will be formatted as a personal letter. - - - - <literal>\cc</literal> - \cccc list, in letters -Synopsis: - -\cc{name1\\name2} +letter will be formatted as a personal letter. + + + + +<literal>\cc</literal> + +\cccc list, in letters +Synopsis: + +\cc{name1\\name2} - Produce a list of names the letter was copied to. Each name is -printed on a separate line. - - - - <literal>\closing</literal> - \closingletters, endingclosing letters -Synopsis: - -\closing{text} +Produce a list of names the letter was copied to. Each name is +printed on a separate line. + + + + +<literal>\closing</literal> + +\closingletters, endingclosing letters +Synopsis: + +\closing{text} - A letter closes with a \closing command, for example, - -\closing{Best Regards,} +A letter closes with a \closing command, for example, +\closing{Best Regards,} - - - - <literal>\encl</literal> - \enclenclosure list -Synopsis: - -\encl{line1\\line2} + + + +<literal>\encl</literal> + +\enclenclosure list +Synopsis: + +\encl{line1\\line2} - Declare a list of one more enclosures. - - - - <literal>\location</literal> - \location -\location{address} - This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears -if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. - - - - <literal>\makelabels</literal> - \makelabels -\makelabels{number} - If you issue this command in the preamble, &latex; will create a sheet of -address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. - - - - <literal>\name</literal> - \name -\name{June Davenport} - Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return -address. - - - - <literal>\opening{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> - \openingletters, starting -Synopsis: - -\opening{text} +Declare a list of one more enclosures. + + + + +<literal>\location</literal> +\location +\location{address} + +This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears +if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. + + + + +<literal>\makelabels</literal> +\makelabels +\makelabels{number} + +If you issue this command in the preamble, &latex; will create a sheet of +address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. + + + + + +<literal>\name</literal> +\name +\name{June Davenport} + +Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return +address. + + + + +<literal>\opening{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> +\openingletters, starting +Synopsis: + +\opening{text} - A letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory +A letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your letter. -For instance: - -\opening{Dear Joe,} +For instance: + +\opening{Dear Joe,} - - - - <literal>\ps</literal> - \pspostscript, in letters -Use the \ps command to start a postscript in a letter, after -\closing. - - - - <literal>\signature{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> - \signature -Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the + + + +<literal>\ps</literal> +\pspostscript, in letters +Use the \ps command to start a postscript in a letter, after +\closing. + + + + +<literal>\signature{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> +\signature +Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within -text as usual. - - - - <literal>\startbreaks</literal> - \startbreaks -\startbreaks - Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again. - - - - <literal>\stopbreaks</literal> - \stopbreaks -\stopbreaks - Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs. - - - - <literal>\telephone</literal> - \telephone -\telephone{number} - This is your telephone number. This only appears if the -firstpage pagestyle is selected. - - - - - Terminal input/output - input/outputterminal input/output - - - <literal>\typein[<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>]{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal> - \typein -Synopsis: - -\typein[\cmd]{msg} +text as usual. + + + + +<literal>\startbreaks</literal> +\startbreaks +\startbreaks + +Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again. + + + + + +<literal>\stopbreaks</literal> +\stopbreaks +\stopbreaks + +Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs. + + + + + +<literal>\telephone</literal> +\telephone +\telephone{number} + +This is your telephone number. This only appears if the +firstpage pagestyle is selected. + + + + + +Terminal input/output +input/outputterminal input/output + + + +<literal>\typein[<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>]{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal> +\typein +Synopsis: + +\typein[\cmd]{msg} - \typein prints msg on the terminal and causes &latex; to +\typein prints msg on the terminal and causes &latex; to stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the optional \cmd argument is omitted, the typed input is processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the \typein command. If the \cmd argument is present, it must be a command name. This command name is then defined or -redefined to be the typed input. - - - - <literal>\typeout{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal> - \typeout -Synopsis: - -\typeout{msg} +redefined to be the typed input. + + + + +<literal>\typeout{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal> +\typeout +Synopsis: + +\typeout{msg} - Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. +Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in msg that are defined with \newcommand or \renewcommand (among others) are replaced by their definitions -before being printed. - &latex;'s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space +before being printed. + +&latex;'s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg. A \space command in msg causes a single space to be printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in -msg prints a newline. - - - - - Command line - command line -The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; +msg prints a newline. + + + + + +Command line +command line +The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; &tex; uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal. You specify command options by supplying a string as a parameter to the -command; e.g. - -latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex' +command; e.g. + +latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex' - will process foo.tex without pausing after every error. - *’ promptprompt, ‘*\stopIf &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a +will process foo.tex without pausing after every error. + +*’ promptprompt, ‘*\stopIf &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a ‘*’ prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop -(and return) and it will prematurely end the document. - - - - Document templates - document templates -Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will -be useful. - - - <literal>book</literal> template - \documentclass{book} +(and return) and it will prematurely end the document. + + + +
+ +Document templates +document templates +Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will +be useful. + + + + +<literal>book</literal> template + +\documentclass{book} \title{Book Class Template} \author{Alex Author} @@ -6788,12 +5468,14 @@ Some other text. The end. \end{document} - - - <literal>beamer</literal> template - The beamer class creates slides presentations. - \documentclass{beamer} + + +<literal>beamer</literal> template + +The beamer class creates slides presentations. + +\documentclass{beamer} \title{Beamer Class template} \author{Alex Author} @@ -6816,14 +5498,15 @@ The end. \end{document} - - - <literal>tugboat</literal> template - TUGboat is the journal of the &tex; Users Group, -http://tug.org/TUGboat. - \documentclass{ltugboat} % ltugproc for proceedings + + +<literal>tugboat</literal> template +TUGboat is the journal of the &tex; Users Group, +http://tug.org/TUGboat. + +\documentclass{ltugboat} \usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{ifpdf} \ifpdf @@ -6833,9 +5516,7 @@ The end. \usepackage{url} \fi -\begin{document} - -\title{Example \TUB\ Regular Article} +\title{Example \TUB\ Article} % repeat info for each author. \author{First Last} @@ -6845,7 +5526,8 @@ The end. \maketitle -% The abstract comes after \maketitle in ltugboat. +\begin{document} + \begin{abstract} This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue. \end{abstract} @@ -6855,26 +5537,26 @@ This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue. This is an example article for \TUB, from \url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}. -We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the hyperref -package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). \TUB\ is produced -using \acro{PDF} files exclusively, nowadays. +We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the +hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). +Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others: {\small \begin{verbatim} \AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW -\BibTeX \CandT \CTAN \DTD \DVItoVDU \HTML -\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \JoT \LAMSTeX \LaTeXe -\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \pcMF \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas +\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML +\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \LaTeXe +\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas \PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS -\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG -\tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \VorTeX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE +\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG \tug +\UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE \Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag \careof \thinskip -\acro{FRED} -> {\sc fred} % please use! +\acro{FRED} -> {\small fred} % please use! \cs{fred} -> \fred \env{fred} -> \begin{fred} \meta{fred} -> <fred> @@ -6894,27 +5576,23 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. \nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty \bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX - -\makesignature % not in ltugproc +\makesignature \end{document} - - - - Concept Index - + + + +Concept Index + + + - - - - Command Index - - -
+ + +Command Index + + + + +
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html index c0c9000736d..5c19874b4f1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html @@ -1,25 +1,18 @@ - - -LaTeX2e reference manual (July 2010) - - - - - - - - +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. + --> + + +LaTeX2e reference manual (July 2010) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - -

LaTeX2e reference manual (July 2010)

+ + + +

LaTeX2e reference manual (July 2010)

+ + +

Short Table of Contents

+ - - -
-

Table of Contents

- + +

Table of Contents

+ +
+ +
-
- -


-Next: , -Up: (dir) + +
+

+Next: , Up: (dir)   [Contents][Index]

- -

LaTeX2e

+ +

LaTeX2e

This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a document preparation system, version as of July 2010. It is intended to cover LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of LaTeX for many years. - -

LaTeX is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's +

+ + + +

LaTeX is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth’s TeX typesetting program. LaTeX was originally created by Leslie Lamport; it is now maintained by a group of volunteers (http://latex-project.org). The official documentation written by the LaTeX project is available there. Again, the present document is unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX maintainers. +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - -
-


-Next: , -Previous: Top, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Top, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

1 Overview of LaTeX

-

1 Overview of LaTeX

+ + -

-The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program +

The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program and the LaTeX “macro package” for TeX. To be more specific, it processes an input file containing the text of a document with -interspersed commands that describe how the text should be formatted. +interspersed commands that describe how the text should be formatted. It produces at least three files as output: +

+
    +
  1. +A main output file, which is one of: -
      -
    1. A main output file, which is one of: - -
        -
      1. If invoked as latex, a “Device Independent” (.dvi) +
          +
        1. +If invoked as latex, a “Device Independent” (‘.dvi’) file. This contains commands that can be translated into commands for -a variety of output devices. You can view such .dvi output of -LaTeX by using a program such as xdvi (display directly) -or dvips (convert to PostScript). +a variety of output devices. You can view such ‘.dvi’ output of +LaTeX by using a program such as xdvi (display directly) +or dvips (convert to PostScript). -
        2. If invoked as pdflatex, a “Portable Document Format” -(.pdf) file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with +
        3. +If invoked as pdflatex, a “Portable Document Format” +(‘.pdf’) file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but it does -make the output much larger than the .dvi produced from the +make the output much larger than the ‘.dvi’ produced from the same document. -
        +
      -

      There are other less-common variants of LaTeX (and TeX) as well, +

      There are other less-common variants of LaTeX (and TeX) as well, which can produce HTML, XML, and other things. - -

    2. A “transcript” or .log file that contains summary information and +

      +
    3. +A “transcript” or ‘.log’ file that contains summary information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. -
    4. An “auxiliary” or .aux file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for +
    5. +An “auxiliary” or ‘.aux’ file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for things such as sectioning. -
    +
-

A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a +

A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a \ followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, [], are optional while arguments contained in braces, {}, are required. - -

LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless +

+

LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless explicitly directed to do otherwise. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: Overview, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Overview, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

2 Starting & ending

-

2 Starting & ending

+ + -

-A minimal input file looks like the following: +

A minimal input file looks like the following: +

+
+
\documentclass{class}
+\begin{document}
+your text
+\end{document}
+
-
     \documentclass{class}
-     \begin{document}
-     your text
-     \end{document}
-
-

where the class is a valid document class for LaTeX. +

where the class is a valid document class for LaTeX. See Document classes, for details of the various document classes available locally. - -

You may include other LaTeX commands between the \documentclass +

+ +

You may include other LaTeX commands between the \documentclass and the \begin{document} commands (this area is called the -preamble). +preamble). +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Starting & ending, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Starting & ending, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

3 Document classes

-

3 Document classes

+ + + -

-The class of a given document is defined with the command: +

The class of a given document is defined with the command: +

+
+
\documentclass[options]{class}
+
-
     \documentclass[options]{class}
-
-

The \documentclass command must be the first command in a +

The \documentclass command must be the first command in a LaTeX source file. - -

Built-in LaTeX document class names are (many other document +

+ + + + + +

Built-in LaTeX document class names are (many other document classes are available as add-ons; see Overview): +

+
+
article  report  book  letter  slides
+
-
     article  report  book  letter  slides
-
- -

Standard options are described below. -

+

Standard options are described below. +

+ + + -
- -


-Up: Document classes +
+ + + +

3.1 Document class options

-

3.1 Document class options

+ + + + -

-You can specify so-called global options or class options +

You can specify so-called global options or class options to the \documentclass command by enclosing them in square brackets as usual. To specify more than one option, separate them with a comma: +

+
+
\documentclass[option1,option2,...]{class}
+
-
     \documentclass[option1,option2,...]{class}
-
-

Here is the list of the standard class options. - -

All of the standard classes except slides accept the following +

Here is the list of the standard class options. +

+ + + +

All of the standard classes except slides accept the following options for selecting the typeface size (default is 10pt): - -

     10pt  11pt  12pt
-
-

All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper +

+
+
10pt  11pt  12pt
+
+ + + + + + + +

All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper size (default is letterpaper): - -

     a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
-
-

Miscellaneous other options: - -

-
draft, final
mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final. -
fleqn
Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. -
landscape
Selects landscape format; default is portrait. -
leqno
Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. -
openbib
Use “open” bibliography format. -
titlepage, notitlepage
Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. +

+
+
a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
+
+ + + + + + + + + +

Miscellaneous other options: +

+
+
draft, final
+
+

mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final. +

+
fleqn
+

Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. +

+
landscape
+

Selects landscape format; default is portrait. +

+
leqno
+

Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. +

+
openbib
+

Use “open” bibliography format. +

+
titlepage, notitlepage
+

Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. +

-

These options are not available with the slides class: - -

-

-
onecolumn
twocolumn
Typeset in one or two columns; default is onecolumn. - -
oneside
twoside
Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except +

These options are not available with the slides class: +

+ + + + + + +
+
onecolumn
+
twocolumn
+

Typeset in one or two columns; default is onecolumn. +

+
+
oneside
+
twoside
+
+ +

Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except for the book class. - -

The \evensidemargin (\oddsidemargin parameter determines +

+

The \evensidemargin (\oddsidemargin parameter determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the -page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper +page and the text’s left margin. The defaults vary with the paper size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For one-sided printing the text is centered, for two-sided, \oddsidemargin is 40% of the difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth with \evensidemargin the remainder. - -

openright
openany
Determines if a chapter should start on a -right-hand page; default is openright for book. +

+
+
openright
+
openany
+

Determines if a chapter should start on a +right-hand page; default is openright for book. +

-

The slides class offers the option clock for printing +

The slides class offers the option clock for printing the time at the bottom of each note. +

-

Additional packages are loaded like this: + + + +

Additional packages are loaded like this: +

+
+
\usepackage[options]{pkg}
+
-
     \usepackage[options]{pkg}
-
-

To specify more than one pkg, you can separate them with a +

To specify more than one pkg, you can separate them with a comma, or use multiple \usepackage commands. - -

Any options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown +

+ + +

Any options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with \usepackage. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Document classes, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Document classes, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

4 Typefaces

-

4 Typefaces

+ + -

-Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size +

Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size and a style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here. +

+ + + + + - -
+
-


-Next: , -Up: Typefaces - +
+

+Next: , Up: Typefaces   [Contents][Index]

+ +

4.1 Font styles

-

4.1 Font styles

+ + + -

-The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. - -

These commands are used like \textit{italic text}. The +

The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. +

+

These commands are used like \textit{italic text}. The corresponding command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. - -

The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either +

+

The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either \sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily to get bold sans serif. - -

You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance, +

+

You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance, \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. - -

-
\textrm (\rmfamily)
Roman. - -
\textit (\itshape)
Italics. - -
\emph
Emphasis (switches between \textit and \textrm). - -
\textmd (\mdseries)
Medium weight (default). - -
\textbf (\bfseries)
Boldface. -
\textup (\upshape)
Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. -
\textsl (\slshape)
Slanted. -
\textsf (\sffamily)
Sans serif. -
\textsc (\scshape)
Small caps. -
\texttt (\ttfamily)
Typewriter. -
\textnormal (\normalfont)
Main document font. -
\mathrm
Roman, for use in math mode. -
\mathbf
Boldface, for use in math mode. -
\mathsf
Sans serif, for use in math mode. -
\mathtt
Typewriter, for use in math mode. - -
\mathit
(\mit)
Italics, for use in math mode. - -
\mathnormal
For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. -
\mathcal
`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. +

+
+
\textrm (\rmfamily)
+
+ +

Roman. +

+
+
\textit (\itshape)
+
+ +

Italics. +

+
+
\emph
+
+ +

Emphasis (switches between \textit and \textrm). +

+
+
\textmd (\mdseries)
+
+ +

Medium weight (default). +

+
+
\textbf (\bfseries)
+
+ +

Boldface. +

+
\textup (\upshape)
+
+ +

Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. +

+
\textsl (\slshape)
+
+ +

Slanted. +

+
\textsf (\sffamily)
+
+ +

Sans serif. +

+
\textsc (\scshape)
+
+ +

Small caps. +

+
\texttt (\ttfamily)
+
+ +

Typewriter. +

+
\textnormal (\normalfont)
+
+ +

Main document font. +

+
\mathrm
+
+

Roman, for use in math mode. +

+
\mathbf
+
+

Boldface, for use in math mode. +

+
\mathsf
+
+

Sans serif, for use in math mode. +

+
\mathtt
+
+

Typewriter, for use in math mode. +

+
+
\mathit
+
(\mit)
+

Italics, for use in math mode. +

+
+
\mathnormal
+
+

For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. +

+
\mathcal
+
+

‘Calligraphic’ letters, for use in math mode. +

-

In addition, the command +

In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} -can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in + +can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. - -

LaTeX also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to +

+

LaTeX also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to the given style, that is, are not cumulative. They are used -differently than the above commands, too: {\cmd ...} -instead of \cmd{...}. These are two very different +differently than the above commands, too: {\cmd ...} +instead of \cmd{...}. These are two very different things. +

+
+
\bf + +
+
+

Switch to bold face. +

+
+
\cal + +
+
+ +

Switch to calligraphic letters for math. +

+
+
\em + +
+
+

Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). +

+
+
\it + +
+
+

Italics. +

+
+
\rm + +
+
+

Roman. +

+
+
\sc + +
+
+

Small caps. +

+
+
\sf + +
+
+

Sans serif. +

+
+
\sl + +
+
+ +

Slanted (oblique). +

+
+
\tt + +
+
+ + +

Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width). +

+
+
-
-
\bf
Switch to bold face. - -
\cal
Switch to calligraphic letters for math. - -
\em
Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). - -
\it
Italics. - -
\rm
Roman. - -
\sc
Small caps. - -
\sf
Sans serif. - -
\sl
Slanted (oblique). - -
\tt
Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width). - -
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Font styles, -Up: Typefaces - + + +

4.2 Font sizes

+ + + -

4.2 Font sizes

- -

-The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. +

The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font -size used (in points) with the ‘10pt’, ‘11pt’, and -‘12pt’ document size options, respectively (see Document class options). - -

-

Command 10pt 11pt 12pt -
\tiny -5 6 6 -
\scriptsize -7 8 8 -
\footnotesize -8 9 10 -
\small -9 10 10.95 -
\normalsize (default) -10 10.95 12 -
\large -12 12 14.4 -
\Large -14.4 14.4 17.28 -
\LARGE -17.28 17.28 20.74 -
\huge -20.74 20.74 24.88 -
\Huge -24.88 24.88 24.88 -
- -

The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of +size used (in points) with the ‘10pt’, ‘11pt’, and +‘12pt’ document size options, respectively (see Document class options). +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Command10pt11pt12pt
\tiny566
\scriptsize788
\footnotesize8910
\small91010.95
\normalsize (default)1010.9512
\large121214.4
\Large14.414.417.28
\LARGE17.2817.2820.74
\huge20.7420.7424.88
\Huge24.8824.8824.88
+ +

The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. You can also use the environment form of these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. +

-
- +
-


-Previous: Font sizes, -Up: Typefaces - +
+

+Previous: Font sizes, Up: Typefaces   [Contents][Index]

+ +

4.3 Low-level font commands

+ + -

4.3 Low-level font commands

- -

-These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and +

These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available ones. +

+
+
\fontencoding{enc}
+
+

Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1. +

+
+
\fontfamily{family}
+
+

Select font family. Valid families include: +

+
    +
  • cmr for Computer Modern Roman +
  • cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif +
  • cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter +
-
-
\fontencoding{enc}
Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1. - -
\fontfamily{family}
Select font family. Valid families include: - -
    -
  • cmr for Computer Modern Roman -
  • cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif -
  • cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter -
- -

and numerous others. - -

\fontseries{series}
Select font series. Valid series include: - -
    -
  • m Medium (normal) -
  • b Bold -
  • c Condensed -
  • bc Bold condensed -
  • bx Bold extended -
- -

and various other combinations. - -

\fontshape{shape}
Select font shape. Valid shapes are: - -
    -
  • n Upright (normal) -
  • it Italic -
  • sl Slanted (oblique) -
  • sc Small caps -
  • ui Upright italics -
  • ol Outline -
+

and numerous others. +

+
+
\fontseries{series}
+
+

Select font series. Valid series include: +

+
    +
  • m Medium (normal) +
  • b Bold +
  • c Condensed +
  • bc Bold condensed +
  • bx Bold extended +
-

The two last shapes are not available for most font families. +

and various other combinations. +

+
+
\fontshape{shape}
+
+

Select font shape. Valid shapes are: +

+
    +
  • n Upright (normal) +
  • it Italic +
  • sl Slanted (oblique) +
  • sc Small caps +
  • ui Upright italics +
  • ol Outline +
-
\fontsize{size}{skip}
Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and +

The two last shapes are not available for most font families. +

+
+
\fontsize{size}{skip}
+
+ +

Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a parameter named \baselineskip. The unit of both parameters defaults to pt. The default \baselineskip for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the \fontsize. - -

The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the +

+ + + +

The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the \baselinestretch parameter when the type size changes; the default is 1. However, the best way to “double space” a document, if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use the setspace package; see http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace. - -


\linespread{factor}
Equivalent to -\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and -therefore must be followed by \selectfont to have any effect. +

+ +
+
\linespread{factor}
+

Equivalent to +\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and +therefore must be followed by \selectfont to have any effect. Best specified in the preamble, or use the setspace package, as described just above. - -

The changes made by calling the font commands described above do +

+ +

The changes made by calling the font commands described above do not come into effect until \selectfont is called. - -

\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}
The same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, +

+
+
\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}
+
+

The same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape with the given parameters, followed by \selectfont. +

+
+
-
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Typefaces, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Typefaces, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

5 Layout

+ -

5 Layout

- -

-Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. - -

- -
- +

Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. +

+ + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Layout - +
+

+Next: , Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

+ +

5.1 \onecolumn

+ + -

5.1 \onecolumn

- -

-The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces +

The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces single-column output. This is the default. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \onecolumn, -Up: Layout - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \onecolumn, Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

+ +

5.2 \twocolumn

+ + + -

5.2 \twocolumn

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\twocolumn[text1col]
+
-
     \twocolumn[text1col]
-
-

The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces +

The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces two-column output. If the optional text1col argument is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts. +

+

These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: +

+
+
\columnsep + +
+

The distance between columns (35pt by default). +

+
+
\columnseprule + +
+

The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. +

+
+
\columnwidth + +
+

The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth in +single-column text. +

+
+
-

These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: +

These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: +

+
+
\dbltopfraction + +
+

Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied +by floats. Default ‘.7’, can be usefully redefined to (say) +‘.9’ to avoid going to float pages so soon. +

+
+
\dblfloatpagefraction + +
+

The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats, +for a two-column float page. Default ‘.5’. +

+
+
\dblfloatsep + +
+

Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float +page. Default ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for ‘10pt’ and +‘11pt’ documents, ‘14pt plus2pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. +

+
+
\dbltextfloatsep + +
+

Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page +and the main text. Default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. +

+
+
-
-
\columnsep
The distance between columns (35pt by default). -
\columnseprule
The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: \twocolumn, Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

5.3 \flushbottom

-
\columnwidth
The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth in -single-column text. + -
- -

These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: - -

-
\dbltopfraction
Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied -by floats. Default ‘.7’, can be usefully redefined to (say) -‘.9’ to avoid going to float pages so soon. - -
\dblfloatpagefraction
The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats, -for a two-column float page. Default ‘.5’. - -
\dblfloatsep
Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float -page. Default ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for ‘10pt’ and -‘11pt’ documents, ‘14pt plus2pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. - -
\dbltextfloatsep
Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page -and the main text. Default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. - -
- -
- - -


-Next: , -Previous: \twocolumn, -Up: Layout - -
- -

5.3 \flushbottom

- -

-The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same +

The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same height, adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the page. - -

This is the default if twocolumn mode is selected +

+

This is the default if twocolumn mode is selected (see Document class options). +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \flushbottom, -Up: Layout - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \flushbottom, Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

+ +

5.4 \raggedbottom

+ + -

5.4 \raggedbottom

- -

-The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the natural +

The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the natural height of the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched. +

-
+
-


-Previous: \raggedbottom, -Up: Layout - -
- -

5.5 Page layout parameters

- -

-

-
\headheight
Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is -‘30pt’, except in the book class, where it varies with the +
+

+Previous: \raggedbottom, Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

5.5 Page layout parameters

+ + + + + + + + +
+
\headheight + +
+

Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is +‘30pt’, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. - -

\headsep
Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of -the main text. Default is ‘25pt’, except in the book +

+
+
\headsep + +
+

Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of +the main text. Default is ‘25pt’, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. - -

\footskip
Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of -the page footer. Default is ‘30pt’, except in the book +

+
+
\footskip + +
+

Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of +the page footer. Default is ‘30pt’, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. - -

\linewidth
Width of the current line; the default varies with the font size, +

+
+
\linewidth + +
+

Width of the current line; the default varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode, etc. For an article document in -‘10pt’, it's set to ‘345pt’; in two-column mode, that -becomes ‘229.5pt’. - -

\textheight
The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with +‘10pt’, it’s set to ‘345pt’; in two-column mode, that +becomes ‘229.5pt’. +

+
+
\textheight + +
+

The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with the font size, document class, etc. For an article or -report document in ‘10pt’, it's set to -‘43\baselineskip’; for book, it's ‘41\baselineskip’. -For ‘11pt’, it's ‘38\baselineskip’ and for ‘12pt’, -‘36\baselineskip’. - -

\textwidth
The normal horizontal width of the page body; the default varies as -usual. For an article or report document, it's -‘345pt’ at ‘10pt’, ‘360pt’ at ‘11pt’, and -‘390pt’ at ‘12pt’. For a book document, it's -‘4.5in’ at ‘10pt’, and ‘5in’ at ‘11pt’ or ‘12pt’. - -
\topmargin
Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the +report document in ‘10pt’, it’s set to +‘43\baselineskip’; for book, it’s ‘41\baselineskip’. +For ‘11pt’, it’s ‘38\baselineskip’ and for ‘12pt’, +‘36\baselineskip’. +

+
+
\textwidth + +
+

The normal horizontal width of the page body; the default varies as +usual. For an article or report document, it’s +‘345pt’ at ‘10pt’, ‘360pt’ at ‘11pt’, and +‘390pt’ at ‘12pt’. For a book document, it’s +‘4.5in’ at ‘10pt’, and ‘5in’ at ‘11pt’ or ‘12pt’. +

+
+
\topmargin + +
+

Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is computed -based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in − -\headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip, and +based on many other parameters: \paperheight - 2in - +\headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip, and then divided by two. - -

\topskip
Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of +

+
+
\topskip + +
+

Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is the -same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at ‘10pt’. +same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at ‘10pt’. +

+
+
-
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Layout, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Layout, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

6 Sectioning

+ -

6 Sectioning

- -

-Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: - -

-
\part
\chapter
(report and book class only) -
\section
\subsection
\subsubsection
\paragraph
\subparagraph
+

Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: +

+
+
\part + +
+
\chapter + +
+

(report and book class only) +

+
\section + +
+
\subsection + +
+
\subsubsection + +
+
\paragraph + +
+
\subparagraph + +
+
-

All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., +

All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., +

+
+
\chapter[toctitle]{title}
+
-
     \chapter[toctitle]{title}
-
-

In addition to providing the heading title in the main text, the +

In addition to providing the heading title in the main text, the section title can appear in two other places: - -

    -
  1. The table of contents. -
  2. The running head at the top of the page. -
- -

You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. +

+
    +
  1. +The table of contents. +
  2. +The running head at the top of the page. +
+ +

You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument toctitle that, when given, specifies the text for these other places. - -

Also, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print +

+ +

Also, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print title as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of contents. For instance: +

+
+
\section*{Preamble}
+
-
     \section*{Preamble}
-
-

The \appendix command changes the way following sectional units + + +

The \appendix command changes the way following sectional units are numbered. The \appendix command itself generates no text and does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command is something like - -

     \chapter{A Chapter}
-     ...
-     \appendix
-     \chapter{The First Appendix}
-
-

The secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers. +

+
+
\chapter{A Chapter}
+…
+\appendix
+\chapter{The First Appendix}
+
+ + + +

The secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers. The setting +

+
+
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level}
+
-
     \setcounter{secnumdepth}{level}
-
-

suppresses heading numbers at any depth > level, where +

suppresses heading numbers at any depth > level, where chapter is level zero. (See \setcounter.) +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Sectioning, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Sectioning, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

7 Cross references

+ -

7 Cross references

- -

-One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer +

One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” +

+ + + + + - -
- +
-


-Next: , -Up: Cross references - +
+

+Next: , Up: Cross references   [Contents][Index]

+ +

7.1 \label

+ -

7.1 \label

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\label{key}
+
-
     \label{key}
-
-

A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to +

A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to key the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered environment assigns that number to key. - -

A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or +

+

A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. - -

To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is +

+

To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: - -

-
ch
for chapters -
sec
for lower-level sectioning commands -
fig
for figures -
tab
for tables -
eq
for equations +

+
+
ch
+

for chapters +

+
sec
+

for lower-level sectioning commands +

+
fig
+

for figures +

+
tab
+

for tables +

+
eq
+

for equations +

-

Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:snark or +

Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:snark or fig.snark. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \label, -Up: Cross references - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \label, Up: Cross references   [Contents][Index]

+ +

7.2 \pageref{key}

+ + + -

7.2 \pageref{key}

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\pageref{key}
+
-
     \pageref{key}
-
-

The \pageref{key} command produces the page number of +

The \pageref{key} command produces the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding \label{key} command appears. +

-
- +
-


-Previous: \pageref, -Up: Cross references - -
- -

7.3 \ref{key}

- -

-Synopsis: +

+

+Previous: \pageref, Up: Cross references   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

7.3 \ref{key}

+ + + + + + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\ref{key}
+
-
     \ref{key}
-
-

The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit, -equation, footnote, figure, ..., of the corresponding +

The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit, +equation, footnote, figure, …, of the corresponding \label command (see \label). It does not produce any text, -such as the word `Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself. +such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just the bare number itself. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Cross references, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Cross references, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8 Environments

+ -

8 Environments

+ + -

- -LaTeX provides many environments for marking off certain text. +

LaTeX provides many environments for marking off certain text. Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: - -

     \begin{envname}
-     ...
-     \end{envname}
-
- - -
+

+
+
\begin{envname}
+...
+\end{envname}
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.1 abstract

-

8.1 abstract

+ + -

-Synopsis: -

     \begin{abstract}
-     ...
-     \end{abstract}
-
-

Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. +

Synopsis: +

+
\begin{abstract}
+...
+\end{abstract}
+
-
- -


-Next: , -Previous: abstract, -Up: Environments +

Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. +

+
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: abstract, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.2 array

+ + -

8.2 array

- -

-Synopsis: - -

     \begin{array}{template}
-     col1 text&col1 text&coln}\\
-     ...
-     \end{array}
-
-

Math arrays are produced with the array environment, normally +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{array}{template}
+col1 text&col1 text&coln}\\
+...
+\end{array}
+
+ +

Math arrays are produced with the array environment, normally within an equation environment (see equation). It has a single mandatory template argument describing the number of columns and the alignment within them. Each column col is specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row should be formatted, as follows: - -

-
c
centered -
l
flush left -
r
flush right +

+
+
c
+

centered +

+
l
+

flush left +

+
r
+

flush right +

-

Column entries are separated by &. Column entries may include + +

Column entries are separated by &. Column entries may include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array is terminated with \\. - -

In the template, the construct @{text} puts text +

+ +

In the template, the construct @{text} puts text between columns in each row. - -

Here's an example: - -

     \begin{equation}
-       \begin{array}{lrc}
-       left1 & right1 & centered1 \\
-       left2 & right2 & centered2 \\
-       \end{array}
-     \end{equation}
-
-

The \arraycolsep parameter defines half the width of the space -separating columns; the default is ‘5pt’. See tabular, for other +

+

Here’s an example: +

+
+
\begin{equation}
+  \begin{array}{lrc}
+  left1 & right1 & centered1 \\
+  left2 & right2 & centered2 \\
+  \end{array}
+\end{equation}
+
+ + +

The \arraycolsep parameter defines half the width of the space +separating columns; the default is ‘5pt’. See tabular, for other parameters which affect formatting in array environments, namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. +

+

The array environment can only be used in math mode. +

-

The array environment can only be used in math mode. - -

+
-


-Next: , -Previous: array, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: array, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.3 center

-

8.3 center

+ + -

-Synopsis: - -

     \begin{center}
-     line1 \\
-     line2 \\
-     \end{center}
-
-

The center environment allows you to create a paragraph +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{center}
+line1 \\
+line2 \\
+\end{center}
+
+ + +

The center environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the string \\. +

+ + + - -
- +
-


-Up: center - +
+

+Up: center   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.3.1 \centering

-

8.3.1 \centering

+ + -

-The \centering declaration corresponds to the center +

The \centering declaration corresponds to the center environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on the page by putting a \centering command at the beginning of the figure or table environment. - -

Unlike the center environment, the \centering command +

+

Unlike the center environment, the \centering command does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats -paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of +paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command (of an environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit. +

+

Here’s an example: +

+
+
\begin{quote}
+\centering
+first line \\
+second line \\
+\end{quote}
+
-

Here's an example: -

     \begin{quote}
-     \centering
-     first line \\
-     second line \\
-     \end{quote}
-
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: center, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: center, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.4 description

-

8.4 description

+ + + -

-Synopsis: - -

     \begin{description}
-     \item [label1] item1
-     \item [label2] item2
-     ...
-     \end{description}
-
-

The description environment is used to make labelled lists. Each +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{description}
+\item [label1] item1
+\item [label2] item2
+...
+\end{description}
+
+ + +

The description environment is used to make labelled lists. Each label is typeset in bold, flush right. The item text may contain multiple paragraphs. - -

Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if -you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt, you'll get +

+ + +

Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if +you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt, you’ll get bold typewriter: \item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]. This may be too bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use \tt, which resets all other style variations: \item[{\tt plain typewriter}]. +

+

For details about list spacing, see itemize. +

-

For details about list spacing, see itemize. - -

+
-


-Next: , -Previous: description, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: description, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.5 displaymath

-

8.5 displaymath

+ -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{displaymath}
+math
+\end{displaymath}
+
-
     \begin{displaymath}
-     math
-     \end{displaymath}
-
-

or +

or +

+
+
\[math\]
+
-
     \[math\]
-
-

The displaymath environment (\[...\] is a synonym) -typesets the math text on its own line, centered by default. +

The displaymath environment (\[...\] is a synonym) +typesets the math text on its own line, centered by default. The global fleqn option makes equations flush left; see Document class options. - -

No equation number is added to displaymath text; to get an +

+

No equation number is added to displaymath text; to get an equation number, use the equation environment (see equation). +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: displaymath, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: displaymath, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.6 document

-

8.6 document

+ -

-The document environment encloses the body of a document. +

The document environment encloses the body of a document. It is required in every LaTeX document. See Starting & ending. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: document, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: document, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.7 enumerate

-

8.7 enumerate

- -

-Synopsis: + + -

     \begin{enumerate}
-     \item item1
-     \item item2
-     ...
-     \end{enumerate}
-
-

The enumerate environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{enumerate}
+\item item1
+\item item2
+...
+\end{enumerate}
+
+ +

The enumerate environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as itemize (see itemize) and description (see description). - -

Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command. +

+ +

Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command. There must be at least one \item command within the environment. - -

By default, the numbering at each level is done like this: - -

    -
  1. 1., 2., ... -
  2. (a), (b), ... -
  3. i., ii., ... -
  4. A., B., ... -
- -

The enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi +

+

By default, the numbering at each level is done like this: +

+
    +
  1. 1., 2., … +
  2. (a), (b), … +
  3. i., ii., … +
  4. A., B., … +
+ + + + + +

The enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi through \enumiv counters (see Counters). If the optional argument to \item is given, the counter is not incremented for that item. - -

The enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi +

+ + + + +

The enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi through \labelenumiv to produce the default label. So, you can use \renewcommand to change the labels (see \newcommand & \renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase letters: +

+ +
+
\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
+
-

-

     \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
-
-
- -


-Next: , -Previous: enumerate, -Up: Environments - -
-

8.8 eqnarray

-

-

     \begin{eqnarray}  (or eqnarray*)
-     formula1 \\
-     formula2 \\
-     ...
-     \end{eqnarray}
-
-

The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of +


+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: enumerate, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

8.8 eqnarray

+ + + + + +
+
\begin{eqnarray}  (or eqnarray*)
+formula1 \\
+formula2 \\
+...
+\end{eqnarray}
+
+ + +

The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ and consecutive items within a row separated by an &. - -

\\* can also be used to separate equations, with its normal +

+ +

\\* can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. - -

An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a +

+ + +

An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a \nonumber command. Alternatively, The *-form of the environment (\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}) will omit equation numbering entirely, while otherwise being the same as eqnarray. - -

The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across +

+ +

The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of zero width. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: eqnarray, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: eqnarray, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.9 equation

-

8.9 equation

+ + + -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{equation}
+math
+\end{equation}
+
-
     \begin{equation}
-     math
-     \end{equation}
-
-

The equation environment starts a displaymath +

The equation environment starts a displaymath environment (see displaymath), e.g., centering the math text on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: equation, -Up: Environments - -
- -

8.10 figure

- -

-

     \begin{figure[*]}[placement]
-     figbody
-     \label{label}
-     \caption[loftitle]{text}
-     \end{figure}
-
-

Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -instead “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a page. +

+

+Next: , Previous: equation, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

8.10 figure

+ + + + +
+
\begin{figure[*]}[placement]
+figbody
+\label{label}
+\caption[loftitle]{text}
+\end{figure}
+
+ +

Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are +instead “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a page. Figures will not be split between two pages. - -

When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a +

+

When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a full-width figure (across both columns). - -

The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try +

+

The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put a float: - -

-
t
(Top)—at the top of a text page. - -
b
(Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. However, b is not +

+
+
t
+

(Top)—at the top of a text page. +

+
+
b
+

(Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. However, b is not allowed for full-width floats (figure*) with double-column output. To ameliorate this, use the stfloats or dblfloatfix package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. - -

h
(Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment +

+
+
h
+
+

(Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, t is automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”, use the float and use its H placement letter. (That package also provides other options.) - -

p
(Page of floats)—on a separate float page, which is a page +

+
+
p
+

(Page of floats)—on a separate float page, which is a page containing no text, only floats. +

+
+
-
- -

The standard report and article classes use the default placement +

The standard report and article classes use the default placement tbp. - -

The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc. +

+

The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc. you wish. - -

The \caption command specifies caption text for the +

+ +

The \caption command specifies caption text for the figure. The caption is numbered by default. If loftitle is present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text (see Tables of contents). - - - - -

The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at -the bottom; default ‘.3’. - -
\floatpagefraction
The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; -default ‘.5’. - -
\floatsep
Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default -‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’. - -
\intextsep
Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default -‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for ‘10pt’ and ‘11pt’ styles, -‘14pt plus4pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. - -
\textfloatsep
Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; -default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. - -
\textfraction
Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too +

+
+
+

The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at +the bottom; default ‘.3’. +

+
+
\floatpagefraction + +
+

The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; +default ‘.5’. +

+
+
\floatsep + +
+

Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default +‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’. +

+
+
\intextsep + +
+

Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default +‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for ‘10pt’ and ‘11pt’ styles, +‘14pt plus4pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. +

+
+
\textfloatsep + +
+

Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; +default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. +

+
+
\textfraction + +
+

Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a -different page. The default is ‘.2’. - -

\topfraction
Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before -floats; default is ‘.7’. +different page. The default is ‘.2’. +

+
+
\topfraction + +
+

Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before +floats; default is ‘.7’. +

+
+
-
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: figure, -Up: Environments - -
- -

8.11 flushleft

- -

-

     \begin{flushleft}
-     line1 \\
-     line2 \\
-     ...
-     \end{flushleft}
-
-

The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph +

+

+Next: , Previous: figure, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

8.11 flushleft

+ + + + +
+
\begin{flushleft}
+line1 \\
+line2 \\
+...
+\end{flushleft}
+
+ + +

The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged right Each line must be terminated with the string \\. +

+ + + - -
- +
-


-Up: flushleft - -
- -

8.11.1 \raggedright

- -

-The \raggedright declaration corresponds to the +

+

+Up: flushleft   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

8.11.1 \raggedright

+ + + + + +

The \raggedright declaration corresponds to the flushleft environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. - -

Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright +

+

Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX -formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the +formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: flushleft, -Up: Environments - -
- -

8.12 flushright

- -

-

     \begin{flushright}
-     line1 \\
-     line2 \\
-     ...
-     \end{flushright}
-
-

The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph +

+

+Next: , Previous: flushleft, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

8.12 flushright

+ + + + +
+
\begin{flushright}
+line1 \\
+line2 \\
+...
+\end{flushright}
+
+ + +

The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. +

+ + + - -
- +
-


-Up: flushright - -
- -

8.12.1 \raggedleft

- -

-The \raggedleft declaration corresponds to the +

+

+Up: flushright   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

8.12.1 \raggedleft

+ + + + + +

The \raggedleft declaration corresponds to the flushright environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. - -

Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft +

+

Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX -formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the +formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: flushright, -Up: Environments - -
- -

8.13 itemize

- -

-Synopsis: - -

     \begin{itemize}
-     \item item1
-     \item item2
-     ...
-     \end{itemize}
-
-

The itemize environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted” +

+

+Next: , Previous: flushright, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

8.13 itemize

+ + + + + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{itemize}
+\item item1
+\item item2
+...
+\end{itemize}
+
+ +

The itemize environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted” list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as enumerate (see enumerate). - -

Each item of an itemize list begins with an \item command. +

+

Each item of an itemize list begins with an \item command. There must be at least one \item command within the environment. - -

By default, the marks at each level look like this: - -

    -
  1. • (bullet) -
  2. -- (bold en-dash) -
  3. * (asterisk) -
  4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) -
- -

The itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi +

+

By default, the marks at each level look like this: +

+
    +
  1. • (bullet) +
  2. -- (bold en-dash) +
  3. * (asterisk) +
  4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) +
+ + + + + +

The itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi through \labelitemiv to produce the default label. So, you can use \renewcommand to change the labels. For instance, to have the first level use diamonds: - -

     \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
-
-

The \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi parameters define +

+
+
\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
+
+ + + + + + + + +

The \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi parameters define the distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the left margin of the list. By convention, \leftmargin is set -to the appropriate \leftmarginN when a new level of +to the appropriate \leftmarginN when a new level of nesting is entered. - -

The defaults vary from ‘.5em’ (highest levels of nesting) to -‘2.5em’ (first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. +

+

The defaults vary from ‘.5em’ (highest levels of nesting) to +‘2.5em’ (first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: +

+
+
\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
+
-
     \setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
-
- -

Some parameters that affect list formatting: - -

-
\itemindent
Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. - -
\labelsep
Space between the label and text of an item; default ‘.5em’. - -
\labelwidth
Width of the label; default ‘2em’, or ‘1.5em’ in two-column mode. - -
\listparindent
Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a -list item; default ‘0pt’. - -
\rightmargin
Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the -enclosing environment; default ‘0pt’, except in the quote, +

Some parameters that affect list formatting: +

+
+
\itemindent + +
+

Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. +

+
+
\labelsep + +
+

Space between the label and text of an item; default ‘.5em’. +

+
+
\labelwidth + +
+

Width of the label; default ‘2em’, or ‘1.5em’ in two-column mode. +

+
+
\listparindent + +
+

Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a +list item; default ‘0pt’. +

+
+
\rightmargin + +
+

Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the +enclosing environment; default ‘0pt’, except in the quote, quotation, and verse environments, where it is set equal to \leftmargin. +

+
+
-
- -

Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather +

Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather loose, by default). - -

-
\itemsep
Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt +

+
+
\itemsep + +
+

Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus2pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt for 12pt. - -

\parsep
Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults +

+
+
\parsep + +
+

Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults are the same as \itemsep. - -

\topsep
Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. +

+
+
\topsep + +
+

Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. For top-level lists, the default is 8pt plus2pt minus4pt for 10pt documents, 9pt plus3pt minus5pt for 11pt, and 10pt plus4pt minus6pt for 12pt. These are reduced for nested lists. - -

\partopsep
Extra space added to \topsep when the list environment starts a +

+
+
\partopsep + +
+

Extra space added to \topsep when the list environment starts a paragraph. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus1pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 3pt plus2pt minus2pt for 12pt. +

+
+
-
- -

Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide + +

Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize* environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs within a single item (\parskip is not list-specific, see \parskip): +

+
+
\newenvironment{itemize*}%
+  {\begin{itemize}%
+    \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+    \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+    \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+  {\end{itemize}}
+
-
     \newenvironment{itemize*}%
-       {\begin{itemize}%
-         \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
-         \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
-         \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
-       {\end{itemize}}
-
-
- -


-Next: , -Previous: itemize, -Up: Environments +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: itemize, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.14 letter environment: writing letters

+ -

8.14 letter environment: writing letters

- -

-This environment is used for creating letters. See Letters. +

This environment is used for creating letters. See Letters. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: letter, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: letter, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.15 list

+ + -

8.15 list

- -

-The list environment is a generic environment which is used for +

The list environment is a generic environment which is used for defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in documents, but often in macros. - -

     \begin{list}{labeling}{spacing}
-     \item item1
-     \item item2
-     ...
-     \end{list}
-
-

The mandatory labeling argument specifies how items should be -labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to \item). +

+
+
\begin{list}{labeling}{spacing}
+\item item1
+\item item2
+...
+\end{list}
+
+ +

The mandatory labeling argument specifies how items should be +labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to \item). This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the label. It can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands. - -

The mandatory spacing argument contains commands to change the +

+

The mandatory spacing argument contains commands to change the spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: list, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: list, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.16 math

-

8.16 math

- -

-Synopsis: + + -

     \begin{math}
-     math
-     \end{math}
-
-

The math environment inserts the given math within the -running text. \(...\)) and $...$ are synonyms. +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{math}
+math
+\end{math}
+
+ +

The math environment inserts the given math within the +running text. \(...\)) and $...$ are synonyms. See Math formulas. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: math, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: math, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.17 minipage

-

8.17 minipage

+ + -

-

     \begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width}
-     text
-     \end{minipage}
-
-

The minipage environment typesets its body text in a +

+
\begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width}
+text
+\end{minipage}
+
+ +

The minipage environment typesets its body text in a block that will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the \parbox command (see \parbox), but unlike \parbox, other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage. - - -

The arguments are the same as for \parbox (see \parbox). - -

By default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage +

+

The arguments are the same as for \parbox (see \parbox). +

+ + + +

By default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as \setlength{\parindent}{1pc} command. - -

Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is +

+ + +

Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext command puts the footnote at the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the \mpfootnote counter instead of the ordinary footnote counter (see Counters). - -

However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using +

+

However, don’t put one minipage inside another if you are using footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: minipage, -Up: Environments - -
- -

8.18 picture

- -

-

     \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
-     ... picture commands ...
-     \end{picture}
-
-

The picture environment allows you to create just about any -kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. +

+

+Next: , Previous: minipage, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

8.18 picture

+ + + + + +
+
\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+… picture commands …
+\end{picture}
+
+ + +

The picture environment allows you to create just about any +kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and a minus sign—a number like 5, 0.3 or @@ -1976,638 +2619,777 @@ to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters. You should only change the value of \unitlength, using the \setlength command, outside of a picture environment. - -

A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5), specifying -the point with x-coordinate 2.4 and y-coordinate -5. +

+

A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5), specifying +the point with x-coordinate 2.4 and y-coordinate -5. Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. - -

The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is a +

+

The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is a position. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this -argument's x- and y-coordinates. - -

The picture environment also has an optional position +argument’s x- and y-coordinates. +

+

The picture environment also has an optional position argument, following the size argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin). For example, if \unitlength has been set to 1mm, the command +

+
+
\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+
-
     \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
-
-

produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 +

produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first draw a picture, you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate optional argument. - -

The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the +

+

The environment’s mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even -off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX in determining +off the page. The picture’s nominal size is used by LaTeX in determining how much room to leave for it. - -

Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put +

+

Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put command. The command +

+
+
\put (11.3,-.3){...}
+
-
     \put (11.3,-.3){...}
-
-

puts the object specified by ... in the -picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). +

puts the object specified by ... in the +picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various objects will be described below. - -

The \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything +

+ +

The \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything that can go in an \mbox (see \mbox) in the text argument of the \put command. When you do this, the reference point will be the lower left corner of the box. - -

The picture commands are described in the following sections. - -

- -
- +

+

The picture commands are described in the following sections. +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: picture - + + +

8.18.1 \circle

+ -

8.18.1 \circle

+
+
\circle[*]{diameter}
+
-

-

     \circle[*]{diameter}
-
-

The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as close +

The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as close to the specified one as possible. The *-form of the command draws a solid circle. +

+

Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. +

-

Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. - -

- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \circle, -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \circle, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.2 \makebox

+ -

8.18.2 \makebox

- -

-\makebox(width,height)[position]{...} - -

The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to +

\makebox(width,height)[position]{...} +

+

The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to the normal \makebox command except that you must specify a width and height in multiples of \unitlength. - -

The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that +

+

The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: +

+
+
t
+

Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. +

+
+
b
+

Moves the item to the bottom. +

+
+
l
+

Moves the item to the left. +

+
+
r
+

Moves the item to the right. +

+
+
-
-
t
Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. - -
b
Moves the item to the bottom. - -
l
Moves the item to the left. - -
r
Moves the item to the right. - -
- -

See \makebox. +

See \makebox. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \makebox (picture), -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \makebox (picture), Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.3 \framebox

+ -

8.18.3 \framebox

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\framebox(width,height)[pos]{...}
+
-
     \framebox(width,height)[pos]{...}
-
-

The \framebox command is like \makebox (see previous +

The \framebox command is like \makebox (see previous section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it creates. - -

The \framebox command produces a rule of thickness +

+ + +

The \framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule, and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the contents of the box. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \framebox (picture), -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \framebox (picture), Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.4 \dashbox

-

8.18.4 \dashbox

+ -

-Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: +

Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: +

+
+
\dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text}
+
-
     \dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text}
-
-

\dashbox creates a dashed rectangle around text in a +

\dashbox creates a dashed rectangle around text in a picture environment. Dashes are dlen units long, and the -rectangle has overall width rwidth and height rheight. -The text is positioned at optional pos. - -

A dashed box looks best when the rwidth and rheight are +rectangle has overall width rwidth and height rheight. +The text is positioned at optional pos.

+

A dashed box looks best when the rwidth and rheight are multiples of the dlen. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \dashbox, -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \dashbox, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.5 \frame

+ -

8.18.5 \frame

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\frame{text}
+
-
     \frame{text}
-
-

The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around text. +

The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around text. The reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the object. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \frame, -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \frame, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.6 \line

+ -

8.18.6 \line

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\line(xslope,yslope){length}
+
-
     \line(xslope,yslope){length}
-
-

The \line command draws a line with the given length and +

The \line command draws a line with the given length and slope xslope/yslope. - -

Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, -where x and y have integer values from −6 +

+

Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, +where x and y have integer values from -6 through 6. For lines of any slope, not to mention other shapes, see the curve2e and many many other packages on CTAN. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \line, -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \line, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.7 \linethickness

+ -

8.18.7 \linethickness

- -

-The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness +

The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be dim, which must be a positive length. - -

\linethickness does not affect the thickness of slanted lines, +

+

\linethickness does not affect the thickness of slanted lines, circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \linethickness, -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \linethickness, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.8 \thicklines

+ -

8.18.8 \thicklines

- -

-The \thicklines command is an alternate line thickness for +

The \thicklines command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. \linethickness and \thinlines. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \thicklines, -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \thicklines, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.9 \thinlines

+ -

8.18.9 \thinlines

- -

-The \thinlines command is the default line thickness for +

The \thinlines command is the default line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. \linethickness and \thicklines. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \thinlines, -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \thinlines, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.10 \multiput

+ -

8.18.10 \multiput

+

Synopsis: +

+
\multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj}
+
-

-Synopsis: -

     \multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj}
-
-

The \multiput command copies the object obj in a regular +

The \multiput command copies the object obj in a regular pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position -(x,y), then at (x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, +(x,y), then at (x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, n times. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \multiput, -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \multiput, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.11 \oval

+ -

8.18.11 \oval

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\oval(width,height)[portion]
+
-
     \oval(width,height)[portion]
-
-

The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. +

The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument portion allows you to select part of the oval via the following: - -

-
t
selects the top portion; -
b
selects the bottom portion; -
r
selects the right portion; -
l
selects the left portion. +

+
+
t
+

selects the top portion; +

+
b
+

selects the bottom portion; +

+
r
+

selects the right portion; +

+
l
+

selects the left portion. +

-

The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a -maximum radius of 20pt, so large “ovals” will look more like +

The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a +maximum radius of 20pt, so large “ovals” will look more like boxes with rounded corners. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \oval, -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \oval, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.12 \put

-

8.18.12 \put

+ -

-\put(x coord,y coord){ ... } - -

The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory +

\put(x coord,y coord){ ... } +

+

The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory argument at the given coordinates. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \put, -Up: picture - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \put, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.13 \shortstack

+ -

8.18.13 \shortstack

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...}
+
-
     \shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...}
-
-

The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The valid +

The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The valid positions are: - -

-
r
Move the objects to the right of the stack. -
l
Move the objects to the left of the stack -
c
Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) +

+
+
r
+

Move the objects to the right of the stack. +

+
l
+

Move the objects to the left of the stack +

+
c
+

Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) +

-

Objects are separated with \\. + +

Objects are separated with \\. +

-
- +
-


-Previous: \shortstack, -Up: picture - +
+

+Previous: \shortstack, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.18.14 \vector

+ -

8.18.14 \vector

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length}
+
-
     \vector(x-slope,y-slope){length}
-
-

The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified -length and slope. The x and y values must lie between -−4 and +4, inclusive. +

The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified +length and slope. The x and y values must lie between +-4 and +4, inclusive. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: picture, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: picture, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.19 quotation

-

8.19 quotation

+ + + + -

-Synopsis: - -

     \begin{quotation}
-     text
-     \end{quotation}
-
-

The margins of the quotation environment are indented on both -the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{quotation}
+text
+\end{quotation}
+
+ +

The margins of the quotation environment are indented on both +the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph. - -

Unlike the quote environment, each paragraph is indented +

+

Unlike the quote environment, each paragraph is indented normally. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: quotation, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: quotation, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.20 quote

-

8.20 quote

+ + + + -

-Snyopsis: +

Snyopsis: +

+
+
\begin{quote}
+text
+\end{quote}
+
-
     \begin{quote}
-     text
-     \end{quote}
-
-

The margins of the quote environment are indented on both the +

The margins of the quote environment are indented on both the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph. +

+

Unlike the quotation environment, paragraphs are not indented. +

-

Unlike the quotation environment, paragraphs are not indented. - -

+
-


-Next: , -Previous: quote, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: quote, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.21 tabbing

-

8.21 tabbing

- -

-Synopsis: + + + + -

     \begin{tabbing}
-     row1col1 \= row1col2 \= row1col3 \= row1col4 \\
-     row2col1 \>                \> row2col3 \\
-     ...
-     \end{tabbing}
-
-

The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{tabbing}
+row1col1 \= row1col2 \= row1col3 \= row1col4 \\
+row2col1 \>                \> row2col3 \\
+...
+\end{tabbing}
+
+ +

The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on an ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant and known in advance. - -

This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular +

+

This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular environment. - -

The following commands can be used inside a tabbing enviroment: - -

-
\\ tabbing
End a line. - -
\= (tabbing)
Sets a tab stop at the current position. - -
\> (tabbing)
Advances to the next tab stop. - -
\<
Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing +

+

The following commands can be used inside a tabbing enviroment: +

+
+
\\ (tabbing) + +
+

End a line. +

+
+
\= (tabbing) + +
+

Sets a tab stop at the current position. +

+
+
\> (tabbing) + +
+
+

Advances to the next tab stop. +

+
+
\< + +
+

Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line. - -

\+
Moves the left margin of the next and all the +

+
+
\+ + +
+

Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary. - -

\-
Moves the left margin of the next and all the +

+
+
\- + +
+

Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary. - -

\' (tabbing)
Moves everything that you have typed so far in the +

+
+
\' (tabbing) + +
+

Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\, or \kill command, to the right -of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop. - -

\` (tabbing)
Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab -stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column -because there's no tab stop there. The \` command moves all the +of the previous column, flush against the current column’s tab stop. +

+
+
\` (tabbing) + +
+

Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab +stop 0. However, it can’t move text to the right of the last column +because there’s no tab stop there. The \` command moves all the text that follows it, up to the \\ or \end{tabbing} command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command between the \` and the command that ends the line. - -

\a (tabbing)
In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and +

+
+
\a (tabbing) + +
+
+ + +

In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and \` do not produce accents as usual (see Accents). Instead, the commands \a=, \a' and \a` are used. - -

\kill
Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ +

+
+
\kill + +
+

Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ except that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \- commands in that line remain in effect. - -

\poptabs
Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. - -
\pushtabs
Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing +

+
+
\poptabs + +
+
+

Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. +

+
+
\pushtabs + +
+

Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing environment. +

+
+
\tabbingsep + +
+

Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'. +

+
+
-
\tabbingsep
Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'. - -
- -

This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: - -

     \begin{tabbing}
-     function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
-              \> begin \= \+ \\
-                    \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
-                             fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
-                       else \+ \\
-                             fact := 1; \-\- \\
-                 end;\\
-     \end{tabbing}
-
-
+

This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: +

+
+
\begin{tabbing}
+function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+         \> begin \= \+ \\
+               \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
+                        fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+                  else \+ \\
+                        fact := 1; \-\- \\
+            end;\\
+\end{tabbing}
+
+ + +
-


-Next: , -Previous: tabbing, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: tabbing, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.22 table

-

8.22 table

+ + + -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
 \begin{table}[placement]
 
-
      \begin{table}[placement]
-     
-       body of the table
-     
-      \caption{table title}
-      \end{table}
-
-

Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. -Tables will not be split between two pages. + body of the table -

The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try + \caption{table title} + \end{table} +

+ +

Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are +usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. +Tables will not be split between two pages. +

+

The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put a float; these are the same as that used with the figure environment, and described there (see figure). - -

The standard report and article classes use the default +

+

The standard report and article classes use the default placement [tbp]. - -

The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc., +

+

The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc., you wish. The \caption command allows you to title your table. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: table, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: table, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.23 tabular

+ + + -

8.23 tabular

- -

-Synopsis: - -

     \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
-     column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
-     ...
-     \end{tabular}
-
-

or - -

     \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
-     column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
-     ...
-     \end{tabular*}
-
-

These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
+column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+...
+\end{tabular}
+
+ +

or +

+
+
\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
+column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+...
+\end{tabular*}
+
+ +

These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. - -

\\ must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, +

+ +

\\ must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except for the last, where it is optional—unless an \hline command (to put a rule below the table) follows. - -

The mandatory and optional arguments consist of: - -

-
width
Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There must be +

+

The mandatory and optional arguments consist of: +

+
+
width
+

Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There must be rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified width. - -

pos
Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of +

+
+
pos
+

Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of the environment. - -

-
t
align on top row -
b
align on bottom row +

+
+
t
+

align on top row +

+
b
+

align on bottom row +

-
cols
Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the +
+
cols
+

Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and intercolumn material. - -

-
l
A column of left-aligned items. - -
r
A column of right-aligned items. - -
A column of centred items. - -
|
A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. - -
@{text}
This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the +

+
+
l
+

A column of left-aligned items. +

+
+
r
+

A column of right-aligned items. +

+
+
c
+

A column of centered items. +

+
+
|
+

A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. +

+
+
@{text}
+

This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in text. An \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression @@ -2616,2402 +3398,3782 @@ subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An \extracolsep command can be used only in an @-expression in the cols argument. - -

p{wd}
Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width +

+
+
p{wd}
+

Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width wd, as if it were the argument of a -\parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not +\parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not appear in the item, except in the following situations: - -

    -
  1. inside an environment like minipage, array, or tabular. -
  2. inside an explicit \parbox. -
  3. in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft +

    +
      +
    1. +inside an environment like minipage, array, or tabular. +
    2. +inside an explicit \parbox. +
    3. +in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an environment when used in a p-column element. -
    +
-
*{num}{cols}
Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a +
+
*{num}{cols}
+

Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a positive integer and cols is any list of column-specifiers, which may contain another *-expression. +

+
+
+
+
-
-
- -

Parameters that control formatting: - - -

-
\arrayrulewidth
Thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and +

Parameters that control formatting: +

+
+
\arrayrulewidth + +
+

Thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and \vline in the tabular and array environments; the -default is ‘.4pt’. - -

\arraystretch
Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular and array -environments; default is ‘1’, for no scaling. - -
\doublerulesep
Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by || -in the tabular and array environments; default is ‘2pt’. - -
\tabcolsep
Half the width of the space between columns; default is ‘6pt’. - -
- -

These commands can be used inside a tabular environment: - -

+default is ‘.4pt’. +

+
+
\arraystretch + +
+

Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular and array +environments; default is ‘1’, for no scaling. +

+
+
\doublerulesep + +
+

Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by || +in the tabular and array environments; default is ‘2pt’. +

+
+
\tabcolsep + +
+

Half the width of the space between columns; default is ‘6pt’. +

+
+
-
- +

These commands can be used inside a tabular environment: +

+ + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: tabular - +
+

+Next: , Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.23.1 \multicolumn

+ -

8.23.1 \multicolumn

+

Synopsis: +

+
\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}
+
-

-Synopsis: -

     \multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}
-
-

The \multicolumn command makes an entry that spans several +

The \multicolumn command makes an entry that spans several columns. The first mandatory argument, cols, specifies the number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, pos, specifies the formatting of the entry; c for centered, l for flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument, text, specifies what text to put in the entry. - -

Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; +

+

Here’s an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; \multicolumn is used for the heading: +

+
+
\begin{tabular}{r@{--}l}
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
+   0x80&0x7FF   \cr
+  0x800&0xFFFF  \cr
+0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr
+\end{tabular}
+
-
     \begin{tabular}{r@{--}l}
-     \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
-        0x80&0x7FF   \cr
-       0x800&0xFFFF  \cr
-     0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr
-     \end{tabular}
-
-
- - -


-Next: , -Previous: \multicolumn, -Up: tabular +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: \multicolumn, Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.23.2 \cline

+ -

8.23.2 \cline

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\cline{i-j}
+
-
     \cline{i-j}
-
-

The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns +

The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j, which are specified in the mandatory argument. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \cline, -Up: tabular - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \cline, Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.23.3 \hline

+ -

8.23.3 \hline

- -

-The \hline command draws a horizontal line the width of the -enclosing tabular or array environment. It's most +

The \hline command draws a horizontal line the width of the +enclosing tabular or array environment. It’s most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table. +

-
- +
-


-Previous: \hline, -Up: tabular - +
+

+Previous: \hline, Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.23.4 \vline

+ -

8.23.4 \vline

- -

-The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the full +

The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the full height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: tabular, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: tabular, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.24 thebibliography

-

8.24 thebibliography

+ + -

-Synopsis: - -

     \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
-     \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
-     ...
-     \end{thebibliography}
-
-

The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
+\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+...
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+ +

The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or reference list. - -

In the article class, this reference list is labelled +

+

In the article class, this reference list is labelled “References”; in the report class, it is labelled “Bibliography”. You can change the label (in the standard classes) by redefining the command \refname. For instance, this eliminates it entirely: +

+
+
\renewcommand{\refname}{}
+
-
     \renewcommand{\refname}{}
-
-

The mandatory widest-label argument is text that, when typeset, +

The mandatory widest-label argument is text that, when typeset, is as wide as the widest item label produced by the \bibitem commands. It is typically given as 9 for bibliographies with less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. - -

- -
- +

+ + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: thebibliography - +
+

+Next: , Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.24.1 \bibitem

-

8.24.1 \bibitem

+ -

-Synopsis: -

     \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
-
-

The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by +

Synopsis: +

+
\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+
+ +

The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by label. If the label argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using the enumi counter. The cite_key is any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma. - -

This command writes an entry to the .aux file containing the -item's cite_key and label. When the .aux file is read by -the \begin{document} command, the item's label is +

+

This command writes an entry to the ‘.aux’ file containing the +item’s cite_key and label. When the ‘.aux’ file is read by +the \begin{document} command, the item’s label is associated with cite_key, causing references to cite_key with a \cite command (see next section) to produce the associated label. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \bibitem, -Up: thebibliography - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.24.2 \cite

-

8.24.2 \cite

+ -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\cite[subcite]{keys
+
-
     \cite[subcite]{keys
-
-

The keys argument is a list of one or more citation keys, +

The keys argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the references associated with keys by entries in the -.aux file. - -

The text of the optional subcite argument appears after the +‘.aux’ file. +

+

The text of the optional subcite argument appears after the citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might produce -`[Knuth, p. 314]'. +‘[Knuth, p. 314]’. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \cite, -Up: thebibliography - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \cite, Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.24.3 \nocite

+ -

8.24.3 \nocite

- -

-\nocite{key_list} - -

The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list, -which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the .aux file. +

\nocite{key_list} +

+

The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list, +which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the ‘.aux’ file. +

-
+
-


-Previous: \nocite, -Up: thebibliography - +
+

+Previous: \nocite, Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.24.4 Using BibTeX

-

8.24.4 Using BibTeX

+ + + + + -

-If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly +

If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of -titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the +titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don’t use the thebibliography environment (see thebibliography). Instead, you include the lines +

+
+
\bibliographystyle{bibstyle}
+\bibliography{bibfile1,bibfile2}
+
-
     \bibliographystyle{bibstyle}
-     \bibliography{bibfile1,bibfile2}
-
-

The \bibliographystyle command does not produce any output of +

The \bibliographystyle command does not produce any output of its own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will be produced: bibstyle refers to a file -bibstyle.bst, which defines how your citations will look. +bibstyle.bst’, which defines how your citations will look. The standard style names distributed with BibTeX are: - -

-
alpha
Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of -publication. -
plain
Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. -
unsrt
Like plain, but entries are in order of citation. -
abbrv
Like plain, but more compact labels. +

+
+
alpha
+

Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of +publication. +

+
plain
+

Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. +

+
unsrt
+

Like plain, but entries are in order of citation. +

+
abbrv
+

Like plain, but more compact labels. +

-

In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to +

In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the demands of various publications. See http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib. - -

The \bibliography command is what actually produces the +

+

The \bibliography command is what actually produces the bibliography. The argument to \bibliography refers to files -named bibfile.bib, which should contain your database in +named ‘bibfile.bib’, which should contain your database in BibTeX format. Only the entries referred to via \cite and \nocite will be listed in the bibliography. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: thebibliography, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: thebibliography, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.25 theorem

-

8.25 theorem

+ + -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{theorem}
+theorem-text
+\end{theorem}
+
-
     \begin{theorem}
-     theorem-text
-     \end{theorem}
-
-

The theorem environment produces “Theorem n” in +

The theorem environment produces “Theorem n” in boldface followed by theorem-text, where the numbering possibilities for n are described under \newtheorem (see \newtheorem). +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: theorem, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: theorem, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.26 titlepage

-

8.26 titlepage

+ + + -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{titlepage}
+text
+\end{titlepage}
+
-
     \begin{titlepage}
-     text
-     \end{titlepage}
-
-

The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e., a page +

The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The \today command may be useful on title pages (see \today). - -

You can use the \maketitle command (see \maketitle) to +

+

You can use the \maketitle command (see \maketitle) to produce a standard title page without a titlepage environment. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: titlepage, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Next: , Previous: titlepage, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.27 verbatim

-

8.27 verbatim

+ + + + + + -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{verbatim}
+literal-text
+\end{verbatim}
+
-
     \begin{verbatim}
-     literal-text
-     \end{verbatim}
-
-

The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment in +

The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment in which LaTeX produces exactly what you type in; for instance the -\ character produces a printed ‘\’. It turns LaTeX +\ character produces a printed ‘\’. It turns LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that they would on a typewriter. +

+

The verbatim uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt). +

+ + + -

The verbatim uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt). - -

- -
- +
-


-Up: verbatim - +
+

+Up: verbatim   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.27.1 \verb

-

8.27.1 \verb

+ + -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\verbcharliteral-textchar
+\verb*charliteral-textchar
+
-
     \verbcharliteral-textchar
-     \verb*charliteral-textchar
-
-

The \verb command typesets literal-text as it is input, +

The \verb command typesets literal-text as it is input, including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter (\tt) font. No spaces are allowed between \verb or \verb* and the delimiter char, which begins and ends the verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. - -

The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a +

+ +

The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a “visible space” character. +

-
+
-


-Previous: verbatim, -Up: Environments - +
+

+Previous: verbatim, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

+ +

8.28 verse

-

8.28 verse

+ + -

-Synopsis: - -

     \begin{verse}
-     line1 \\
-     line2 \\
-     ...
-     \end{verse}
-
-

The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\begin{verse}
+line1 \\
+line2 \\
+...
+\end{verse}
+
+ +

The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find other uses for it. - -

The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not +

+ +

The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Environments, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Environments, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

9 Line breaking

+ + -

9 Line breaking

- -

-The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to +

The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these lines must be broken into pages). - -

LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in +

+

LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the \\ command, and you can always manually force breaks. - -

- -
- +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Line breaking - + + +

9.1 \\[*][morespace]

+ + + -

9.1 \\[*][morespace]

- -

-The \\ command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an +

The \\ command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount. - -

The \\* command is the same as the ordinary \\ command +

+

The \\* command is the same as the ordinary \\ command except that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \\, -Up: Line breaking - -
- -

9.2 \obeycr & \restorecr

- -

-The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file -(‘^^M’, internally) the same as \\ (followed by +

+

+Next: , Previous: \\, Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

9.2 \obeycr & \restorecr

+ + + + +

The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file +(‘^^M’, internally) the same as \\ (followed by \relax). So each new line in the input will also be a new line in the output. +

+

\restorecr restores normal line-breaking behavior. +

-

\restorecr restores normal line-breaking behavior. - -

- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \obeycr & \restorecr, -Up: Line breaking - + + +

9.3 \newline

+ + -

9.3 \newline

- -

-The \newline command breaks the line at the present point, with +

The \newline command breaks the line at the present point, with no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph mode. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \newline, -Up: Line breaking - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \newline, Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

+ +

9.4 \- (discretionary hyphen)

+ + -

9.4 \- (discretionary hyphen)

- -

-The \- command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at +

The \- command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an incorrect one. The \- command is used for the exceptional cases. - -

When you insert \- commands in a word, the word will only be +

+

When you insert \- commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. +

-
- - -


-Next: , -Previous: \- (hyphenation), -Up: Line breaking +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

+ +

9.5 \fussy

+ -

9.5 \fussy

- -

-The declaration \fussy (which is the default) makes TeX +

The declaration \fussy (which is the default) makes TeX picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. - -

This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command +

+

This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command (see \sloppy. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \fussy, -Up: Line breaking - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \fussy, Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

- -

9.6 \sloppy

+ +

9.6 \sloppy

The declaration \sloppy makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. +

+

Lasts until a \fussy command is issued (see \fussy). +

-

Lasts until a \fussy command is issued (see \fussy). - -

- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \sloppy, -Up: Line breaking - + + +

9.7 \hyphenation

+ + -

9.7 \hyphenation

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\hyphenation{word-one word-two}
+
-
     \hyphenation{word-one word-two}
-
-

The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points +

The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points with a - character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are tried. Multiple \hyphenation commands accumulate. Some examples (the default TeX hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these words): +

+
+
\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases}
+
-
     \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases}
-
-
- - -


-Previous: \hyphenation, -Up: Line breaking - -
- -

9.8 \linebreak & \nolinebreak

-

-Synopses: +


+ +
+

+Previous: \hyphenation, Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

9.8 \linebreak & \nolinebreak

+ + + + + +

Synopses: +

+
+
\linebreak[priority]
+\nolinebreak[priority]
+
-
     \linebreak[priority]
-     \nolinebreak[priority]
-
-

By default, the \linebreak (\nolinebreak) command forces +

By default, the \linebreak (\nolinebreak) command forces (prevents) a line break at the current position. For \linebreak, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right margin as usual. - -

With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command +

+

With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Line breaking, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Line breaking, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

10 Page breaking

+ + -

10 Page breaking

- -

-LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has +

LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. - -

- -
- +

+ + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Page breaking - +
+

+Next: , Up: Page breaking   [Contents][Index]

+ +

10.1 \cleardoublepage

-

10.1 \cleardoublepage

+ + -

-The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. +

The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes all +figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \cleardoublepage, -Up: Page breaking - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \cleardoublepage, Up: Page breaking   [Contents][Index]

+ +

10.2 \clearpage

+ + + -

10.2 \clearpage

- -

-The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all +

The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \clearpage, -Up: Page breaking - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \clearpage, Up: Page breaking   [Contents][Index]

+ +

10.3 \newpage

+ + + -

10.3 \newpage

- -

-The \newpage command ends the current page, but does not clear +

The \newpage command ends the current page, but does not clear floats (see \clearpage above). +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \newpage, -Up: Page breaking - + + +

10.4 \enlargethispage

+ + -

10.4 \enlargethispage

- -

-\enlargethispage{size} - -

\enlargethispage*{size} - -

Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified +

\enlargethispage{size} +

+

\enlargethispage*{size} +

+

Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified amount; e.g. \enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one additional line. - -

The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as +

+

The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit \pagebreak. +

-
- +
-


-Previous: \enlargethispage, -Up: Page breaking - -
- -

10.5 \pagebreak & \nopagebreak

- -

-Synopses: +

+

+Previous: \enlargethispage, Up: Page breaking   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

10.5 \pagebreak & \nopagebreak

+ + + + + +

Synopses: +

+
+
\pagebreak[priority]
+\nopagebreak[priority]
+
-
     \pagebreak[priority]
-     \nopagebreak[priority]
-
-

By default, the \pagebreak (\nopagebreak) command forces +

By default, the \pagebreak (\nopagebreak) command forces (prevents) a page break at the current position. For \linebreak, the vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. - -

With the optional argument priority, you can convert the +

+

With the optional argument priority, you can convert the \pagebreak command from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request is. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Page breaking, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Page breaking, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

11 Footnotes

+ -

11 Footnotes

- -

-Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced +

Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with one command, the \footnote command. They can also be produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the \footnotetext commands. - -

- -
- +

+ + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Footnotes - +
+

+Next: , Up: Footnotes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

11.1 \footnote

+ -

11.1 \footnote

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\footnote[number]{text}
+
-
     \footnote[number]{text}
-
-

The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text +

The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text at the bottom of the current page. The optional argument number changes the default footnote number. - -

This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you +

+

This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot use it in sectioning commands like \chapter, in figures, -tables or in a tabular environment. (See following sections.) - +tables or in a tabular environment. (See following sections.) +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \footnote, -Up: Footnotes - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \footnote, Up: Footnotes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

11.2 \footnotemark

+ -

11.2 \footnotemark

- -

-With no optional argument, the \footnotemark command puts the +

With no optional argument, the \footnotemark command puts the current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, with the \footnotetext command. - -

This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote +

+

This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote markers referring to the same footnote with +

+
+
\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
-
     \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
-
-

after the first \footnote command. +

after the first \footnote command. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \footnotemark, -Up: Footnotes - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

11.3 \footnotetext

+ -

11.3 \footnotetext

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\footnotetext[number]{text}
+
-
     \footnotetext[number]{text}
-
-

The \footnotetext command places text at the bottom of +

The \footnotetext command places text at the bottom of the page as a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the \footnotemark command. The \footnotetext command must appear in outer paragraph mode. +

+

The optional argument number changes the default footnote number. +

-

The optional argument number changes the default footnote number. - -

+
-


-Next: , -Previous: \footnotetext, -Up: Footnotes - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \footnotetext, Up: Footnotes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

11.4 Symbolic footnotes

-

11.4 Symbolic footnotes

- -

If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing + +

If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing numbers, redefine \thefootnote like this: +

+
+
\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+
-
     \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
-
-

The \fnsymbol command produces a predefined series of symbols + + +

The \fnsymbol command produces a predefined series of symbols (see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). If you want to -use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also +use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you’ll need to also redefine \@fnsymbol. +

-
+
-


-Previous: Symbolic footnotes, -Up: Footnotes - +
+

+Previous: Symbolic footnotes, Up: Footnotes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

11.5 Footnote parameters

-

11.5 Footnote parameters

+ + -

-

-
\footnoterule
Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's +
+
\footnoterule + +
+

Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page’s footnotes. Default dimensions: 0.4pt thick (or wide), and 0.4\columnwidth long in the standard document classes (except slides, where it does not appear). - -

\footnotesep
The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By +

+
+
\footnotesep + +
+

The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By default, this is set to the normal strut for \footnotesize fonts (see Font sizes), therefore there is no extra space between -footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10pt’, ‘7.7pt’ for -‘11pt’, and ‘8.4pt’ for ‘12pt’. +footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10pt’, ‘7.7pt’ for +‘11pt’, and ‘8.4pt’ for ‘12pt’. +

+
+
-
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Footnotes, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Footnotes, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

12 Definitions

+ -

12 Definitions

- -

-LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds. - - -

+

LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds. +

-
- + + + + + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Definitions - -
- -

12.1 \newcommand & \renewcommand

- -

-\newcommand and \renewcommand define and redefine a +

+

+Next: , Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

12.1 \newcommand & \renewcommand

+ + + + + +

\newcommand and \renewcommand define and redefine a command, respectively. Synopses: +

+
+
  \newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn}
+\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn}
+  \newcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn}
+\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn}
+
-
       \newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn}
-     \renewcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn}
-       \newcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn}
-     \renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn}
-
-
-
cmd
The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it + +
+
cmd
+

The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it must not be already defined and must not begin with \end; for \renewcommand, it must already be defined. - -

nargs
An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments +

+
+
nargs
+

An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no arguments. - -

default
If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's +

+
+
default
+

If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command’s first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not specified -in the call) is the string ‘def’. - -

defn
The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a -construct of the form #n in defn is replaced by the +in the call) is the string ‘def’. +

+
+
defn
+

The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a +construct of the form #n in defn is replaced by the text of the nth argument. +

+
+
-
-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \newcommand & \renewcommand, -Up: Definitions - + + +

12.2 \newcounter

+ + -

12.2 \newcounter

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\newcounter{cnt}[countername]
+
-
     \newcounter{cnt}[countername]
-
-

The \newcounter command defines a new counter named cnt. +

The \newcounter command defines a new counter named cnt. The new counter is initialized to zero. - -

Given the optional argument [countername], cnt +

+

Given the optional argument [countername], cnt will be reset whenever countername is incremented. +

+

See Counters, for more information about counters. +

-

See Counters, for more information about counters. - -

- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \newcounter, -Up: Definitions - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \newcounter, Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

+ +

12.3 \newlength

+ + -

12.3 \newlength

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\newlength{\arg}
+
-
     \newlength{\arg}
-
-

The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument as a +

The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument as a length command with a value of 0in. The argument must be a control sequence, as in \newlength{\foo}. An error occurs if \foo is already defined. - -

See Lengths, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and +

+

See Lengths, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and for more information about lengths in general. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \newlength, -Up: Definitions - + + +

12.4 \newsavebox

+ -

12.4 \newsavebox

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\newsavebox{cmd}
+
-
     \newsavebox{cmd}
-
-

Defines \cmd, which must be a command name not already +

Defines \cmd, which must be a command name not already defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \newsavebox, -Up: Definitions - -
- -

12.5 \newenvironment & \renewenvironment

- -

-Synopses: - -

       \newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef}
-       \newenvironment{env}[nargs][default]{begdef}{enddef}
-     \renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef}
-
-

These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is, -\begin{env} ... \end{env}. - -

-
env
The name of the environment. For \newenvironment, env -must not be an existing environment, and the command \env +
+

+Next: , Previous: \newsavebox, Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

12.5 \newenvironment & \renewenvironment

+ + + + + + +

Synopses: +

+
+
  \newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef}
+  \newenvironment{env}[nargs][default]{begdef}{enddef}
+\renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef}
+
+ +

These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is, +\begin{env} … \end{env}. +

+
+
env
+

The name of the environment. For \newenvironment, env +must not be an existing environment, and the command \env must be undefined. For \renewenvironment, env must be the name of an existing environment. - -

nargs
An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of +

+
+
nargs
+

An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. - -

default
If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default +

+
+
default
+

If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default gives the default value for that argument. - -

begdef
The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}; a -construct of the form #n in begdef is replaced by +

+
+
begdef
+

The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}; a +construct of the form #n in begdef is replaced by the text of the nth argument. - -

enddef
The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}. It +

+
+
enddef
+

The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}. It may not contain any argument parameters. +

+
+
-
-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, -Up: Definitions - -
- -

12.6 \newtheorem

- -

-

     \newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within]
-     \newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label}
-
-

This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments: - -

-
newenv
The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an + + +

12.6 \newtheorem

+ + + + +
+
\newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within]
+\newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label}
+
+ +

This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments: +

+
+
newenv
+

The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an existing environment or otherwise defined. - -

label
The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the -number. For example, ‘Theorem’. - -
numbered_like
(Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; +

+
+
label
+

The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the +number. For example, ‘Theorem’. +

+
+
numbered_like
+

(Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; the new environment will be numbered just like numbered_like. - -

within
(Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. +

+
+
within
+

(Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as the within counter. +

+
+
-
- -

At most one of numbered_like and within can be specified, +

At most one of numbered_like and within can be specified, not both. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \newtheorem, -Up: Definitions - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \newtheorem, Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

+ +

12.7 \newfont

+ + + -

12.7 \newfont

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\newfont{cmd}{fontname}
+
-
     \newfont{cmd}{fontname}
-
-

Defines a control sequence \cmd, which must not already +

Defines a control sequence \cmd, which must not already be defined, to make fontname be the current font. The file -looked for on the system is named fontname.tfm. - -

This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. -More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd files. +looked for on the system is named ‘fontname.tfm’. +

+

This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. +More commonly, fonts are defined in families through ‘.fd’ files. +

-
- +
-


-Previous: \newfont, -Up: Definitions - -
- -

12.8 \protect

- -

-Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and -many more are so-called fragile commands. When a fragile -command is used in certain contexts, called moving arguments, it +

+

+Previous: \newfont, Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

12.8 \protect

+ + + + +

Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and +many more are so-called fragile commands. When a fragile +command is used in certain contexts, called moving arguments, it must be preceded by \protect. In addition, any fragile commands within the arguments must have their own \protect. - -

Some examples of moving arguments are \caption +

+

Some examples of moving arguments are \caption (see figure), \thanks (see \maketitle), and expressions in tabular and array environments (see tabular). - -

Commands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not +

+ +

Commands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not be preceded by \protect. +

+

See also: +

+ -

See also: -


http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html
-
http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect
-
- -
- -


-Next: , -Previous: Definitions, -Up: Top +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: Definitions, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

13 Counters

+ + -

13 Counters

- -

-Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with +

Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment -or command that produces the number, except with no \. +or command that produces the number, except with no \. (enumienumiv are used for the nested enumerate -environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's +environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX’s standard document classes to control numbering. - -

     part            paragraph       figure          enumi
-     chapter         subparagraph    table           enumii
-     section         page            footnote        enumiii
-     subsection      equation        mpfootnote      enumiv
-     subsubsection
-
- - -
- +

+
+
part            paragraph       figure          enumi
+chapter         subparagraph    table           enumii
+section         page            footnote        enumiii
+subsection      equation        mpfootnote      enumiv
+subsubsection
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Counters - +
+

+Next: , Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

- -

13.1 \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol: Printing counters

+ +

13.1 \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol: Printing counters

All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for instance, \alph{enumi}. - -

-
\alph
prints counter using lowercase letters: `a', `b', ... - -
\Alph
uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', ... - -
\arabic
uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', ... - -
\roman
uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', ... - -
\roman
uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', ... - -
\fnsymbol
prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine +

+
+
\alph + +
+

prints counter using lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, ... +

+
+
\Alph + +
+

uses uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, ... +

+
+
\arabic + +
+

uses Arabic numbers: ‘1’, ‘2’, ... +

+
+
\roman + +
+

uses lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ... +

+
+
\roman + +
+

uses uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ... +

+
+
\fnsymbol + +
+

prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. +

+

The symbols mostly aren’t supported in Info, but here are the names: +

+
asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel
+double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
+
-

The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: -

          asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel
-          double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
-
-
+
+
-
- - -


-Next: , -Previous: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, -Up: Counters +
+ + + +

13.2 \usecounter{counter}

+ + + -

13.2 \usecounter{counter}

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\usecounter{counter}
+
-
     \usecounter{counter}
-
-

The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the +

The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the list environment to specify counter to be used to number the list items. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \usecounter, -Up: Counters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \usecounter, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

13.3 \value{counter}

+ + -

13.3 \value{counter}

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\value{counter}
+
-
     \value{counter}
-
-

The \value command produces the value of counter. It can +

The \value command produces the value of counter. It can be used anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example: +

+
+
\setcounter{myctr}{3}
+\addtocounter{myctr}{1}
+\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
+
-
     \setcounter{myctr}{3}
-     \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
-     \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
-
-
- - -


-Next: , -Previous: \value, -Up: Counters +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: \value, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

13.4 \setcounter{counter}{value}

+ + + -

13.4 \setcounter{counter}{value}

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\setcounter{\counter}{value}
+
-
     \setcounter{\counter}{value}
-
-

The \setcounter command sets the value of \counter to the +

The \setcounter command sets the value of \counter to the value argument. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \setcounter, -Up: Counters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \setcounter, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

13.5 \addtocounter{counter}{value}

+ -

13.5 \addtocounter{counter}{value}

- -

-The \addtocounter command increments counter by the +

The \addtocounter command increments counter by the amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \addtocounter, -Up: Counters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \addtocounter, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

13.6 \refstepcounter{counter}

+ -

13.6 \refstepcounter{counter}

- -

-The \refstepcounter command works in the same way as +

The \refstepcounter command works in the same way as \stepcounter See \stepcounter, except it also defines the current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \refstepcounter, -Up: Counters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \refstepcounter, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

13.7 \stepcounter{counter}

+ -

13.7 \stepcounter{counter}

- -

-The \stepcounter command adds one to counter and +

The \stepcounter command adds one to counter and resets all subsidiary counters. +

-
- +
-


-Previous: \stepcounter, -Up: Counters - +
+

+Previous: \stepcounter, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

13.8 \day \month \year: Predefined counters

+ + + -

13.8 \day \month \year: Predefined counters

- -

-LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month (\day, +

LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month (\day, 1–31), month of the year (\month, 1–12), and year (\year, Common Era). When TeX starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where TeX is running. They are not updated as the job progresses. - -

The related command \today produces a string representing the +

+

The related command \today produces a string representing the current day (see \today). +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Counters, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Counters, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

14 Lengths

+ -

14 Lengths

- -

-A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a +

A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length as an argument. - -

- -
- +

+ + + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Lengths - +
+

+Next: , Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

+ +

14.1 \setlength{\len}{value}

+ + -

14.1 \setlength{\len}{value}

- -

-The \setlength sets the value of \len to the value +

The \setlength sets the value of \len to the value argument, which can be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), points (pt), big points (bp, etc. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \setlength, -Up: Lengths - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \setlength, Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

+ +

14.2 \addtolength{\len}{amount}

+ + -

14.2 \addtolength{\len}{amount}

- -

-The \addtolength command increments a “length command” +

The \addtolength command increments a “length command” \len by the amount specified in the amount argument, which may be negative. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \addtolength, -Up: Lengths - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \addtolength, Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

+ +

14.3 \settodepth

+ -

14.3 \settodepth

- -

-\settodepth{\gnat}{text} - -

The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command +

\settodepth{\gnat}{text} +

+

The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command equal to the depth of the text argument. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \settodepth, -Up: Lengths - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \settodepth, Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

+ +

14.4 \settoheight

+ -

14.4 \settoheight

- -

-\settoheight{\gnat}{text} - -

The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command +

\settoheight{\gnat}{text} +

+

The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command equal to the height of the text argument. +

-
- - -


-Next: , -Previous: \settoheight, -Up: Lengths +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: \settoheight, Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

+ +

14.5 \settowidth{\len}{text}

+ -

14.5 \settowidth{\len}{text}

- -

-The \settowidth command sets the value of the command \len +

The \settowidth command sets the value of the command \len to the width of the text argument. +

-
- -


-Previous: \settowidth, -Up: Lengths +
+ +
+

+Previous: \settowidth, Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

+ +

14.6 Predefined lengths

+ + -

14.6 Predefined lengths

- -

-\width - -\height - -\depth - -\totalheight - -These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making +

\width + +

+

\height + +

+

\depth + +

+

\totalheight + +

+

These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width etc. of the text in the box. \totalheight equals \height + \depth. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say +

+

\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher} +

-

\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher} - -

+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Lengths, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Lengths, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

15 Making paragraphs

+ + -

15 Making paragraphs

- -

-A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not +

A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not containing even a %. A blank line should not appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of a sectioning command. - -

- -
- +

+ + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Making paragraphs - + + +

15.1 \indent

+ + + -

15.1 \indent

- -

-\indent produces a horizontal space whose width equals the +

\indent produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the \parindent length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed. - -

The default value for \parindent is 1em in two-column +

+

The default value for \parindent is 1em in two-column mode, otherwise 15pt for 10pt documents, 17pt for 11pt, and 1.5em for 12pt. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \indent, -Up: Making paragraphs - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \indent, Up: Making paragraphs   [Contents][Index]

+ +

15.2 \noindent

+ + -

15.2 \noindent

- -

-When used at the beginning of the paragraph, \noindent +

When used at the beginning of the paragraph, \noindent suppresses any paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \noindent, -Up: Making paragraphs - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs   [Contents][Index]

+ +

15.3 \parskip

+ + -

15.3 \parskip

- -

-\parskip is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added +

\parskip is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. +

-
+
-


-Previous: \parskip, -Up: Making paragraphs - -
- -

15.4 Marginal notes

- -

-Synopsis: +

+

+Previous: \parskip, Up: Making paragraphs   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

15.4 Marginal notes

+ + + + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\marginpar[left]{right}
+
-
     \marginpar[left]{right}
-
-

The \marginpar command creates a note in the margin. The first +

The \marginpar command creates a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text where the \marginpar occurs. - -

When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text +

+

When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text will be placed +

+
    +
  • +in the right margin for one-sided layout; +
  • +in the outside margin for two-sided layout; +
  • +in the nearest margin for two-column layout. +
-
    -
  • in the right margin for one-sided layout; -
  • in the outside margin for two-sided layout; -
  • in the nearest margin for two-column layout. -
- -

The command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes + + +

The command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes in the opposite (inside) margin. \normalmarginpar places them in the default position. - -

When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left +

+

When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left margin, and right is used for the right margin. - -

The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable +

+

The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}. +

+

These parameters affect the formatting of the note: +

+
+
\marginparpush + +
+

Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for +‘12pt’ documents, ‘5pt’ else. +

+
+
\marginparsep + +
+

Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default +‘11pt’ for ‘10pt’ documents, ‘10pt’ else. +

+
+
\marginparwidth + +
+

Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document +is ‘90pt’, ‘83pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘68pt’ for +‘12pt’; ‘17pt’ more in each case for a two-sided document. +In two column mode, the default is ‘48pt’. +

+
+
-

These parameters affect the formatting of the note: - -

-
\marginparpush
Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for -‘12pt’ documents, ‘5pt’ else. - -
\marginparsep
Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default -‘11pt’ for ‘10pt’ documents, ‘10pt’ else. - -
\marginparwidth
Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document -is ‘90pt’, ‘83pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘68pt’ for -‘12pt’; ‘17pt’ more in each case for a two-sided document. -In two column mode, the default is ‘48pt’. - -
+

The standard LaTeX routine for marginal notes does not prevent +notes from falling off the bottom of the page. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Making paragraphs, -Up: Top - -
- -

16 Math formulas

- -

-There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode: - -

-
math
For formulas that appear right in the text. -
displaymath
For formulas that appear on their own line. -
equation
The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation -number in the right margin. +
+

+Next: , Previous: Making paragraphs, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

16 Math formulas

+ + + + + + + +

There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode: +

+
+
math
+

For formulas that appear right in the text. +

+
displaymath
+

For formulas that appear on their own line. +

+
equation
+

The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation +number in the right margin. +

-

The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, + + + + +

The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but the displaymath and equation environments can be used only in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: +

+
+
\(...\)   instead of   \begin{math}...\end{math}
+\[...\]   instead of   \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+
-
     \(...\)   instead of   \begin{math}...\end{math}
-     \[...\]   instead of   \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
-
-

In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even + +

In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even shorter form: +

+
+
$ ... $   instead of   \(...\)
+
-
     $ ... $   instead of   \(...\)
-
-

The \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in + + +

The \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in a bold font. It is used outside of math mode. Conversely, the \unboldmath command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too is used outside of math mode. - - -

The \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the +

+ +

The \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the formula to be that of displaymath, e.g., with limits above and below summations. For example -

     $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
-
- - - -
- +

+
$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Math formulas - -
- -

16.1 Subscripts & superscripts

- -

-To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type +

+

+Next: , Up: Math formulas   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

16.1 Subscripts & superscripts

+ + + + + + +

To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type _{exp}. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type ^{exp}. LaTeX handles -superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way. +superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a superscript. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Subscripts & superscripts, -Up: Math formulas - -
- -

16.2 Math symbols

- -

-LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to -need. The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. +

+ +

16.2 Math symbols

+ + + + +

LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you’re likely to +need. The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, you will get -the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. - -

-
\|
\| - -
\aleph
\aleph - -
\alpha
\alpha - -
\amalg
\amalg (binary operation) - -
\angle
\angle - -
\approx
\approx (relation) - -
\ast
\ast (binary operation) - -
\asymp
\asymp (relation) - -
\backslash
\ (delimiter) - -
\beta
\beta - -
\bigcap
\bigcap - -
\bigcirc
\bigcirc (binary operation) - -
\bigcup
\bigcup - -
\bigodot
\bigodot - -
\bigoplus
\bigoplus - -
\bigotimes
\bigotimes - -
\bigtriangledown
\bigtriangledown (binary operation) - -
\bigtriangleup
\bigtriangleup (binary operation) - -
\bigsqcup
\bigsqcup - -
\biguplus
\biguplus - -
\bigcap
\bigvee - -
\bigwedge
\bigwedge - -
\bot
\bot - -
\bowtie
\bowtie (relation) - -
\Box
(square open box symbol) - -
\bullet
\bullet (binary operation) - -
\cap
\cap (binary operation) - -
\cdot
\cdot (binary operation) - -
\chi
\chi - -
\circ
\circ (binary operation) - -
\clubsuit
\clubsuit - -
\cong
\cong (relation) - -
\coprod
\coprod - -
\cup
\cup (binary operation) - -
\dagger
\dagger (binary operation) - -
\dashv
\dashv (relation) - -
\ddagger
\dagger (binary operation) - -
\Delta
\Delta - -
\delta
\delta - -
\Diamond
bigger \diamond - -
\diamond
\diamond (binary operation) - -
\diamondsuit
\diamondsuit - -
\div
\div (binary operation) - -
\doteq
\doteq (relation) - -
\downarrow
\downarrow (delimiter) - -
\Downarrow
\Downarrow (delimiter) - -
\ell
\ell - -
\emptyset
\emptyset - -
\epsilon
\epsilon - -
\equiv
\equiv (relation) - -
\eta
\eta - -
\exists
\exists - -
\flat
\flat - -
\forall
\forall - -
\frown
\frown (relation) - -
\Gamma
\Gamma - -
\gamma
\gamma - -
\ge
\ge - -
\geq
\geq (relation) - -
\gets
\gets - -
\gg
\gg (relation) - -
\hbar
\hbar - -
\heartsuit
\heartsuit - -
\hookleftarrow
\hookleftarrow - -
\hookrightarrow
\hookrightarrow - -
\iff
\iff - -
\Im
\Im - -
\in
\in (relation) - -
\infty
\infty - -
\int
\int - -
\iota
\iota - -
\Join
condensed bowtie symbol (relation) - -
\kappa
\kappa - -
\Lambda
\Lambda - -
\lambda
\lambda - -
\land
\land - -
\langle
\langle (delimiter) - -
\lbrace
\lbrace (delimiter) - -
\lbrack
\lbrack (delimiter) - -
\lceil
\lceil (delimiter) - -
\le
\le - -
\leadsto
- -
\Leftarrow
\Leftarrow - -
\leftarrow
\leftarrow - -
\leftharpoondown
\leftharpoondown - -
\leftharpoonup
\leftharpoonup - -
\Leftrightarrow
\Leftrightarrow - -
\leftrightarrow
\leftrightarrow - -
\leq
\leq (relation) - -
\lfloor
\lfloor (delimiter) - -
\lhd
(left-pointing arrow head) - -
\ll
\ll (relation) - -
\lnot
\lnot - -
\longleftarrow
\longleftarrow - -
\longleftrightarrow
\longleftrightarrow - -
\longmapsto
\longmapsto - -
\longrightarrow
\longrightarrow - -
\lor
\lor - -
\mapsto
\mapsto - -
\mho
- -
\mid
\mid (relation) - -
\models
\models (relation) - -
\mp
\mp (binary operation) - -
\mu
\mu - -
\nabla
\nabla - -
\natural
\natural - -
\ne
\ne - -
\nearrow
\nearrow - -
\neg
\neg - -
\neq
\neq (relation) - -
\ni
\ni (relation) - -
\not
Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. - -
\notin
\ni - -
\nu
\nu - -
\nwarrow
\nwarrow - -
\odot
\odot (binary operation) - -
\oint
\oint - -
\Omega
\Omega - -
\omega
\omega - -
\ominus
\ominus (binary operation) - -
\oplus
\oplus (binary operation) - -
\oslash
\oslash (binary operation) - -
\otimes
\otimes (binary operation) - -
\owns
\owns - -
\parallel
\parallel (relation) - -
\partial
\partial - -
\perp
\perp (relation) - -
\phi
\phi - -
\Pi
\Pi - -
\pi
\pi - -
\pm
\pm (binary operation) - -
\prec
\prec (relation) - -
\preceq
\preceq (relation) - -
\prime
\prime - -
\prod
\prod - -
\propto
\propto (relation) - -
\Psi
\Psi - -
\psi
\psi - -
\rangle
\rangle (delimiter) - -
\rbrace
\rbrace (delimiter) - -
\rbrack
\rbrack (delimiter) - -
\rceil
\rceil (delimiter) - -
\Re
\Re - -
\rfloor
\rfloor - -
\rhd
(binary operation) - -
\rho
\rho - -
\Rightarrow
\Rightarrow - -
\rightarrow
\rightarrow - -
\rightharpoondown
\rightharpoondown - -
\rightharpoonup
\rightharpoonup - -
\rightleftharpoons
\rightleftharpoons - -
\searrow
\searrow - -
\setminus
\setminus (binary operation) - -
\sharp
\sharp - -
\Sigma
\Sigma - -
\sigma
\sigma - -
\sim
\sim (relation) - -
\simeq
\simeq (relation) - -
\smallint
\smallint - -
\smile
\smile (relation) - -
\spadesuit
\spadesuit - -
\sqcap
\sqcap (binary operation) - -
\sqcup
\sqcup (binary operation) - -
\sqsubset
(relation) - -
\sqsubseteq
\sqsubseteq (relation) - -
\sqsupset
(relation) - -
\sqsupseteq
\sqsupseteq (relation) - -
\star
\star (binary operation) - -
\subset
\subset (relation) - -
\subseteq
\subseteq (relation) - -
\succ
\succ (relation) - -
\succeq
\succeq (relation) - -
\sum
\sum - -
\supset
\supset (relation) - -
\supseteq
\supseteq (relation) - -
\surd
\surd - -
\swarrow
\swarrow - -
\tau
\tau - -
\theta
\theta - -
\times
\times (binary operation) - -
\to
\to - -
\top
\top - -
\triangle
\triangle - -
\triangleleft
\triangleleft (binary operation) - -
\triangleright
\triangleright (binary operation) - -
\unlhd
left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) - -
\unrhd
right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) - -
\Uparrow
\Uparrow (delimiter) - -
\uparrow
\uparrow (delimiter) - -
\Updownarrow
\Updownarrow (delimiter) - -
\updownarrow
\updownarrow (delimiter) - -
\uplus
\uplus (binary operation) - -
\Upsilon
\Upsilon - -
\upsilon
\upsilon - -
\varepsilon
\varepsilon - -
\varphi
\varphi - -
\varpi
\varpi - -
\varrho
\varrho - -
\varsigma
\varsigma - -
\vartheta
\vartheta - -
\vdash
\vdash (relation) - -
\vee
\vee (binary operation) - -
\Vert
\Vert (delimiter) - -
\vert
\vert (delimiter) - -
\wedge
\wedge (binary operation) - -
\wp
\wp - -
\wr
\wr (binary operation) - -
\Xi
\Xi - -
\xi
\xi - -
\zeta
\zeta +the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. +

+
+
\| + +
+

\| +

+
+
\aleph + +
+

\aleph +

+
+
\alpha + +
+

\alpha +

+
+
\amalg + +
+

\amalg (binary operation) +

+
+
\angle + +
+

\angle +

+
+
\approx + +
+

\approx (relation) +

+
+
\ast + +
+

\ast (binary operation) +

+
+
\asymp + +
+

\asymp (relation) +

+
+
\backslash + +
+

\ (delimiter) +

+
+
\beta + +
+

\beta +

+
+
\bigcap + +
+

\bigcap +

+
+
\bigcirc + +
+

\bigcirc (binary operation) +

+
+
\bigcup + +
+

\bigcup +

+
+
\bigodot + +
+

\bigodot +

+
+
\bigoplus + +
+

\bigoplus +

+
+
\bigotimes + +
+

\bigotimes +

+
+
\bigtriangledown + +
+

\bigtriangledown (binary operation) +

+
+
\bigtriangleup + +
+

\bigtriangleup (binary operation) +

+
+
\bigsqcup + +
+

\bigsqcup +

+
+
\biguplus + +
+

\biguplus +

+
+
\bigcap + +
+

\bigvee +

+
+
\bigwedge + +
+

\bigwedge +

+
+
\bot + +
+

\bot +

+
+
\bowtie + +
+

\bowtie (relation) +

+
+
\Box + +
+

(square open box symbol)

+
+
\bullet + +
+
+

\bullet (binary operation) +

+
+
\cap + +
+

\cap (binary operation) +

+
+
\cdot + +
+

\cdot (binary operation) +

+
+
\chi + +
+

\chi +

+
+
\circ + +
+

\circ (binary operation) +

+
+
\clubsuit + +
+

\clubsuit +

+
+
\cong + +
+

\cong (relation) +

+
+
\coprod + +
+

\coprod +

+
+
\cup + +
+

\cup (binary operation) +

+
+
\dagger + +
+

\dagger (binary operation) +

+
+
\dashv + +
+

\dashv (relation) +

+
+
\ddagger + +
+

\dagger (binary operation) +

+
+
\Delta + +
+

\Delta +

+
+
\delta + +
+

\delta +

+
+
\Diamond + +
+

bigger \diamond

+
+
\diamond + +
+

\diamond (binary operation) +

+
+
\diamondsuit + +
+

\diamondsuit +

+
+
\div + +
+

\div (binary operation) +

+
+
\doteq + +
+

\doteq (relation) +

+
+
\downarrow + +
+

\downarrow (delimiter) +

+
+
\Downarrow + +
+

\Downarrow (delimiter) +

+
+
\ell + +
+

\ell +

+
+
\emptyset + +
+

\emptyset +

+
+
\epsilon + +
+

\epsilon +

+
+
\equiv + +
+

\equiv (relation) +

+
+
\eta + +
+

\eta +

+
+
\exists + +
+

\exists +

+
+
\flat + +
+

\flat +

+
+
\forall + +
+

\forall +

+
+
\frown + +
+

\frown (relation) +

+
+
\Gamma + +
+

\Gamma +

+
+
\gamma + +
+

\gamma +

+
+
\ge + +
+

\ge +

+
+
\geq + +
+

\geq (relation) +

+
+
\gets + +
+

\gets +

+
+
\gg + +
+

\gg (relation) +

+
+
\hbar + +
+

\hbar +

+
+
\heartsuit + +
+

\heartsuit +

+
+
\hookleftarrow + +
+

\hookleftarrow +

+
+
\hookrightarrow + +
+

\hookrightarrow +

+
+
\iff + +
+

\iff +

+
+
\Im + +
+

\Im +

+
+
\in + +
+

\in (relation) +

+
+
\infty + +
+

\infty +

+
+
\int + +
+

\int +

+
+
\iota + +
+

\iota +

+
+
\Join + +
+

condensed bowtie symbol (relation)

+
+
\kappa + +
+

\kappa +

+
+
\Lambda + +
+

\Lambda +

+
+
\lambda + +
+

\lambda +

+
+
\land + +
+

\land +

+
+
\langle + +
+

\langle (delimiter) +

+
+
\lbrace + +
+

\lbrace (delimiter) +

+
+
\lbrack + +
+

\lbrack (delimiter) +

+
+
\lceil + +
+

\lceil (delimiter) +

+
+
\le + +
+

\le +

+
+
\leadsto + +
+
\Leftarrow + +
+

\Leftarrow +

+
+
\leftarrow + +
+

\leftarrow +

+
+
\leftharpoondown + +
+

\leftharpoondown +

+
+
\leftharpoonup + +
+

\leftharpoonup +

+
+
\Leftrightarrow + +
+

\Leftrightarrow +

+
+
\leftrightarrow + +
+

\leftrightarrow +

+
+
\leq + +
+

\leq (relation) +

+
+
\lfloor + +
+

\lfloor (delimiter) +

+
+
\lhd + +
+

(left-pointing arrow head)

+
+
\ll + +
+

\ll (relation) +

+
+
\lnot + +
+

\lnot +

+
+
\longleftarrow + +
+

\longleftarrow +

+
+
\longleftrightarrow + +
+

\longleftrightarrow +

+
+
\longmapsto + +
+

\longmapsto +

+
+
\longrightarrow + +
+

\longrightarrow +

+
+
\lor + +
+

\lor +

+
+
\mapsto + +
+

\mapsto +

+
+
\mho + +
+
\mid + +
+

\mid (relation) +

+
+
\models + +
+

\models (relation) +

+
+
\mp + +
+

\mp (binary operation) +

+
+
\mu + +
+

\mu +

+
+
\nabla + +
+

\nabla +

+
+
\natural + +
+

\natural +

+
+
\ne + +
+

\ne +

+
+
\nearrow + +
+

\nearrow +

+
+
\neg + +
+

\neg +

+
+
\neq + +
+

\neq (relation) +

+
+
\ni + +
+

\ni (relation) +

+
+
\not + +
+

Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. +

+
+
\notin + +
+

\ni +

+
+
\nu + +
+

\nu +

+
+
\nwarrow + +
+

\nwarrow +

+
+
\odot + +
+

\odot (binary operation) +

+
+
\oint + +
+

\oint +

+
+
\Omega + +
+

\Omega +

+
+
\omega + +
+

\omega +

+
+
\ominus + +
+

\ominus (binary operation) +

+
+
\oplus + +
+

\oplus (binary operation) +

+
+
\oslash + +
+

\oslash (binary operation) +

+
+
\otimes + +
+

\otimes (binary operation) +

+
+
\owns + +
+

\owns +

+
+
\parallel + +
+

\parallel (relation) +

+
+
\partial + +
+

\partial +

+
+
\perp + +
+

\perp (relation) +

+
+
\phi + +
+

\phi +

+
+
\Pi + +
+

\Pi +

+
+
\pi + +
+

\pi +

+
+
\pm + +
+

\pm (binary operation) +

+
+
\prec + +
+

\prec (relation) +

+
+
\preceq + +
+

\preceq (relation) +

+
+
\prime + +
+

\prime +

+
+
\prod + +
+

\prod +

+
+
\propto + +
+

\propto (relation) +

+
+
\Psi + +
+

\Psi +

+
+
\psi + +
+

\psi +

+
+
\rangle + +
+

\rangle (delimiter) +

+
+
\rbrace + +
+

\rbrace (delimiter) +

+
+
\rbrack + +
+

\rbrack (delimiter) +

+
+
\rceil + +
+

\rceil (delimiter) +

+
+
\Re + +
+

\Re +

+
+
\rfloor + +
+

\rfloor +

+
+
\rhd + +
+

(binary operation)

+
+
\rho + +
+

\rho +

+
+
\Rightarrow + +
+

\Rightarrow +

+
+
\rightarrow + +
+

\rightarrow +

+
+
\rightharpoondown + +
+

\rightharpoondown +

+
+
\rightharpoonup + +
+

\rightharpoonup +

+
+
\rightleftharpoons + +
+

\rightleftharpoons +

+
+
\searrow + +
+

\searrow +

+
+
\setminus + +
+

\setminus (binary operation) +

+
+
\sharp + +
+

\sharp +

+
+
\Sigma + +
+

\Sigma +

+
+
\sigma + +
+

\sigma +

+
+
\sim + +
+

\sim (relation) +

+
+
\simeq + +
+

\simeq (relation) +

+
+
\smallint + +
+

\smallint +

+
+
\smile + +
+

\smile (relation) +

+
+
\spadesuit + +
+

\spadesuit +

+
+
\sqcap + +
+

\sqcap (binary operation) +

+
+
\sqcup + +
+

\sqcup (binary operation) +

+
+
\sqsubset + +
+

(relation)

+
+
\sqsubseteq + +
+

\sqsubseteq (relation) +

+
+
\sqsupset + +
+

(relation)

+
+
\sqsupseteq + +
+

\sqsupseteq (relation) +

+
+
\star + +
+

\star (binary operation) +

+
+
\subset + +
+

\subset (relation) +

+
+
\subseteq + +
+

\subseteq (relation) +

+
+
\succ + +
+

\succ (relation) +

+
+
\succeq + +
+

\succeq (relation) +

+
+
\sum + +
+

\sum +

+
+
\supset + +
+

\supset (relation) +

+
+
\supseteq + +
+

\supseteq (relation) +

+
+
\surd + +
+

\surd +

+
+
\swarrow + +
+

\swarrow +

+
+
\tau + +
+

\tau +

+
+
\theta + +
+

\theta +

+
+
\times + +
+

\times (binary operation) +

+
+
\to + +
+

\to +

+
+
\top + +
+

\top +

+
+
\triangle + +
+

\triangle +

+
+
\triangleleft + +
+

\triangleleft (binary operation) +

+
+
\triangleright + +
+

\triangleright (binary operation) +

+
+
\unlhd + +
+

left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)

+
+
\unrhd + +
+

right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)

+
+
\Uparrow + +
+

\Uparrow (delimiter) +

+
+
\uparrow + +
+

\uparrow (delimiter) +

+
+
\Updownarrow + +
+

\Updownarrow (delimiter) +

+
+
\updownarrow + +
+

\updownarrow (delimiter) +

+
+
\uplus + +
+

\uplus (binary operation) +

+
+
\Upsilon + +
+

\Upsilon +

+
+
\upsilon + +
+

\upsilon +

+
+
\varepsilon + +
+

\varepsilon +

+
+
\varphi + +
+

\varphi +

+
+
\varpi + +
+

\varpi +

+
+
\varrho + +
+

\varrho +

+
+
\varsigma + +
+

\varsigma +

+
+
\vartheta + +
+

\vartheta +

+
+
\vdash + +
+

\vdash (relation) +

+
+
\vee + +
+

\vee (binary operation) +

+
+
\Vert + +
+

\Vert (delimiter) +

+
+
\vert + +
+

\vert (delimiter) +

+
+
\wedge + +
+

\wedge (binary operation) +

+
+
\wp + +
+

\wp +

+
+
\wr + +
+

\wr (binary operation) +

+
+
\Xi + +
+

\Xi +

+
+
\xi + +
+

\xi +

+
+
\zeta + +
+

\zeta +

+
+
-
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Math symbols, -Up: Math formulas - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas   [Contents][Index]

+ +

16.3 Math functions

+ + -

16.3 Math functions

- -

-These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper +

These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper spacing. +

+
+
\arccos + +
+

\arccos +

+
+
\arcsin + +
+

\arcsin +

+
+
\arctan + +
+

\arctan +

+
+
\arg + +
+

\arg +

+
+
\bmod + +
+

Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) +

+
+
\cos + +
+

\cos +

+
+
\cosh + +
+

\cosh +

+
+
\cot + +
+

\cos +

+
+
\coth + +
+

\cosh +

+
+
\csc + +
+

\csc +

+
+
\deg + +
+

\deg +

+
+
\det + +
+

\deg +

+
+
\dim + +
+

\dim +

+
+
\exp + +
+

\exp +

+
+
\gcd + +
+

\gcd +

+
+
\hom + +
+

\hom +

+
+
\inf + +
+

\inf +

+
+
\ker + +
+

\ker +

+
+
\lg + +
+

\lg +

+
+
\lim + +
+

\lim +

+
+
\liminf + +
+

\liminf +

+
+
\limsup + +
+

\limsup +

+
+
\ln + +
+

\ln +

+
+
\log + +
+

\log +

+
+
\max + +
+

\max +

+
+
\min + +
+

\min +

+
+
\pmod + +
+

parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) +

+
+
\Pr + +
+

\Pr +

+
+
\sec + +
+

\sec +

+
+
\sin + +
+

\sin +

+
+
\sinh + +
+

\sinh +

+
+
\sup + +
+

\sup +

+
+
\tan + +
+

\tan +

+
+
\tanh + +
+

\tanh +

+
+
-
-
\arccos
\arccos - -
\arcsin
\arcsin - -
\arctan
\arctan - -
\arg
\arg - -
\bmod
Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) - -
\cos
\cos - -
\cosh
\cosh - -
\cot
\cos - -
\coth
\cosh - -
\csc
\csc - -
\deg
\deg - -
\det
\deg - -
\dim
\dim - -
\exp
\exp - -
\gcd
\gcd - -
\hom
\hom - -
\inf
\inf - -
\ker
\ker - -
\lg
\lg - -
\lim
\lim - -
\liminf
\liminf - -
\limsup
\limsup - -
\ln
\ln - -
\log
\log - -
\max
\max - -
\min
\min - -
\pmod
parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) - -
\Pr
\Pr - -
\sec
\sec - -
\sin
\sin - -
\sinh
\sinh - -
\sup
\sup - -
\tan
\tan - -
\tanh
\tanh - -
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Math functions, -Up: Math formulas - + + +

16.4 Math accents

+ + -

16.4 Math accents

- -

-LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters +

LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in math. These are different from accents in normal text (see Accents). +

+
+
\acute + +
+
+

Math acute accent: \acute{x}. +

+
+
\bar + +
+
+ +

Math bar-over accent: \bar{x}. +

+
+
\breve + +
+
+

Math breve accent: \breve{x}. +

+
+
\check + +
+
+ +

Math hác<ek (check) accent: \check{x}. +

+
+
\ddot + +
+
+

Math dieresis accent: \ddot{x}. +

+
+
\dot + +
+
+ +

Math dot accent: \dot{x}. +

+
+
\grave + +
+
+

Math grave accent: \grave{x}. +

+
+
\hat + +
+
+ +

Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hat{x}. +

+
+
\imath + +
+
+

Math dotless i. +

+
+
\jmath + +
+
+

Math dotless j. +

+
+
\tilde + +
+
+

Math tilde accent: \tilde{x}. +

+
+
\vec + +
+
+

Math vector symbol: \vec{x}. +

+
+
\widehat + +
+
+

Math wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}. +

+
+
\widehat + +
+
+

Math wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}. +

+
+
-
-
\acute
Math acute accent: \acutex. - -
\bar
Math bar-over accent: \barx. - -
\breve
Math breve accent: \brevex. - -
\check
Math hác<ek (check) accent: \checkx. - -
\ddot
Math dieresis accent: \ddotx. - -
\dot
Math dot accent: \dotx. - -
\grave
Math grave accent: \gravex. - -
\hat
Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hatx. - -
\imath
Math dotless i. - -
\jmath
Math dotless j. - -
\tilde
Math tilde accent: \tildex. - -
\vec
Math vector symbol: \vecx. - -
\widehat
Math wide hat accent: \widehatx+y. - -
\widehat
Math wide tilde accent: \widetildex+y. - -
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Math accents, -Up: Math formulas - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Math accents, Up: Math formulas   [Contents][Index]

+ +

16.5 Spacing in math mode

+ + -

16.5 Spacing in math mode

- -

-In a math environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and +

In a math environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following commands for use in math mode: - -

-
\;
A thick space (5\over18\,quad). -
\:
\>
Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). -
\,
A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. -
\!
A negative thin space (-1\over6\,quad). +

+
+
\;
+
+

A thick space (5\over18\,quad). +

+
\:
+
\>
+
+ +

Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). +

+
\,
+
+

A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. +

+
\!
+

A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad). +

-
- -


-Previous: Spacing in math mode, -Up: Math formulas - -
- -

16.6 Math miscellany

-

-

-
\*
A “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is +
+ + + +

16.6 Math miscellany

+ + +
+
\* + +
+
+ +

A “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is allowed. +

+
+
\cdots + +
+

A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. +

+
+
\ddots + +
+

A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. +

+
+
\frac{num}{den} + +
+
+

Produces the fraction num divided by den. +

-
\cdots
A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. - -
\ddots
A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. - -
\frac{num}{den}
Produces the fraction num divided by den. - -
\left delim1 ... \right delim2
The two delimiters need not match; ‘.’ acts as a null delimiter, +
+
\left delim1 ... \right delim2 + +
+
+ +

The two delimiters need not match; ‘.’ acts as a null delimiter, producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math in between. Example: \left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]. - -

\overbrace{text}
Generates a brace over text. -For example, \overbracex+\cdots+x^k \rm\;times. - -
\overline{text}
Generates a horizontal line over tex. -For exampe, \overlinex+y. - -
\sqrt[root]{arg}
Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The +

+
+
\overbrace{text} + +
+

Generates a brace over text. +For example, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}. +

+
+
\overline{text} + +
+

Generates a horizontal line over tex. +For exampe, \overline{x+y}. +

+
+
\sqrt[root]{arg} + +
+

Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The optional argument root determines what root to produce. For example, the cube root of x+y would be typed as $\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. - -

\stackrel{text}{relation}
Puts text above relation. For example, +

+
+
\stackrel{text}{relation} + +
+

Puts text above relation. For example, \stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}. - -

\underbrace{math}
Generates math with a brace underneath. - -
\underline{text}
Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be +

+
+
\underbrace{math} + +
+

Generates math with a brace underneath. +

+
+
\underline{text} + +
+

Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of descenders. +

+
+
\vdots + +
+
+

Produces a vertical ellipsis. +

+
+
-
\vdots
Produces a vertical ellipsis. - -
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Math formulas, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Math formulas, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

17 Modes

+ + + + + -

17 Modes

-

- -

When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three +

When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three modes: +

+
    +
  • +Paragraph mode +
  • +Math mode +
  • +Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short +
-
    -
  • Paragraph mode -
  • Math mode -
  • Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short -
- -

LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a -different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. +

LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a +different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. - -

“Paragraph mode” is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in +

+

“Paragraph mode” is the most common; it’s the one LaTeX is in when processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in -“math mode” when it's generating a mathematical formula. In “LR +“math mode” when it’s generating a mathematical formula. In “LR mode”, as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from left to right; it @@ -5019,1808 +7181,2529 @@ never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words into an \mbox, LaTeX would keep typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line. - -

LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox +

+

LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for -example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. +example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. There are also several text-producing commands and environments for making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or environments will be called a parbox. When LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in “inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Modes, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Modes, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

18 Page styles

+ + -

18 Page styles

- -

-The \documentclass command determines the size and position of -the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. - -

- -
- +

The \documentclass command determines the size and position of +the page’s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. +

+ + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Page styles - + + +

18.1 \maketitle

+ + -

18.1 \maketitle

- -

-The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title +

The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title page—except in the article class, where the title is placed at the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is obtained from the following declarations: - -

-
\author{name \and name2}
The \author command declares the document author(s), where the +

+
+
\author{name \and name2} + +
+
+ + +

The \author command declares the document author(s), where the argument is a list of authors separated by \and commands. Use -\\ to separate lines within a single author's entry—for -example, to give the author's institution or address. - -

\date{text}
The \date command declares text to be the document's +\\ to separate lines within a single author’s entry—for +example, to give the author’s institution or address. +

+
+
\date{text} + +
+
+

The \date command declares text to be the document’s date. With no \date command, the current date (see \today) is used. - -

\thanks{text}
The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, +

+
+
\thanks{text} + +
+
+ +

The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, usually used for credit acknowledgements. - -

\title{text}
The \title command declares text to be the title of the +

+
+
\title{text} + +
+
+ +

The \title command declares text to be the title of the document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. +

+
+
-
-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \maketitle, -Up: Page styles - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \maketitle, Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

+ +

18.2 \pagenumbering

+ + -

18.2 \pagenumbering

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\pagenumbering{style}
+
-
     \pagenumbering{style}
-
-

Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style: - -

-
arabic
arabic numerals -
roman
lowercase Roman numerals -
Roman
uppercase Roman numerals -
alph
lowercase letters -
Alph
uppercase letters +

Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style: +

+
+
arabic
+

arabic numerals +

+
roman
+

lowercase Roman numerals +

+
Roman
+

uppercase Roman numerals +

+
alph
+

lowercase letters +

+
Alph
+

uppercase letters +

-
- - -


-Next: , -Previous: \pagenumbering, -Up: Page styles - -
- -

18.3 \pagestyle

-

-Synopsis: +


+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: \pagenumbering, Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

18.3 \pagestyle

+ + + + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\pagestyle{style}
+
-
     \pagestyle{style}
-
-

The \pagestyle command specifies how the headers and footers +

The \pagestyle command specifies how the headers and footers are typeset from the current page onwards. Values for style: - -

-
plain
Just a plain page number. - -
empty
Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. - -
headings
Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what +

+
+
plain
+

Just a plain page number. +

+
+
empty
+

Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. +

+
+
headings
+

Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what goes in the headers. - -

myheadings
Custom headers, specified via the \markboth or the +

+
+
myheadings
+

Custom headers, specified via the \markboth or the \markright commands. +

+
+
-
- -

Here are the descriptions of \markboth and \markright: - -

-
\markboth{left}{right}
Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” +

Here are the descriptions of \markboth and \markright: +

+
+
\markboth{left}{right} + +
+

Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” (left) is generated by the last \markboth command before the end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” (right is generated by the first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page. +

+
+
\markright{right} + +
+

Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. +

+
+
-
\markright{right}
Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. - -
-
- +
-


-Previous: \pagestyle, -Up: Page styles - +
+

+Previous: \pagestyle, Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

+ +

18.4 \thispagestyle{style}

+ -

18.4 \thispagestyle{style}

- -

-The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the +

The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the \pagestyle command (see previous section) except that it changes to style for the current page only. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Page styles, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Page styles, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

19 Spaces

+ -

19 Spaces

- -

-LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. - -

Another space-producing command is \, to produce a “thin” -space (usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is +

LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. +

+

Another space-producing command is \, to produce a “thin” +space (usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is more often useful in math mode (see Spacing in math mode). - - -

Horizontal space -

-

Vertical space

- - -
- + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Spaces - +
+

+Next: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

+ +

19.1 \hspace

+ -

19.1 \hspace

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\hspace[*]{length}
+
-
     \hspace[*]{length}
-
-

The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length +

The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length argument can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands: points, inches, etc. It is a rubber length. You can add both negative and positive space with an \hspace command; adding negative space is like backspacing. - -

LaTeX normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning +

+

LaTeX normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional * form. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \hspace, -Up: Spaces - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \hspace, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

+ +

19.2 \hfill

-

19.2 \hfill

- -

The \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has + +

The \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. - -

The \fill parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, -the glue value ‘0pt plus1fill’); thus, \hspace\fill is +

+ +

The \fill parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, +the glue value ‘0pt plus1fill’); thus, \hspace\fill is equivalent to \hfill. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \hfill, -Up: Spaces - -
- -

19.3 \SPACE

- -

-The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's -useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example -Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. +

+

+Next: , Previous: \hfill, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

19.3 \SPACE

+ + + + +

The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It’s +useful after punctuation which shouldn’t end a sentence. For example +Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. It is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a nice system. - -

In normal circumstances, \<tab> and \<newline> +

+

In normal circumstances, \<tab> and \<newline> are equivalent to \ . +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \SPACE, -Up: Spaces - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \SPACE, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

+ +

19.4 \@

+ -

19.4 \@

- -

-The \@ command makes the following punctuation character end a +

The \@ command makes the following punctuation character end a sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without \@: +

+
+
… in C\@.  Pascal, though …
+… in C.  Pascal, though …
+
-
     ... in C\@.  Pascal, though ...
-     ... in C.  Pascal, though ...
-
-

produces +

produces +

+
+

… in C. Pascal, though … +… in C. Pascal, though … +

- -
-... in C. Pascal, though ... -... in C. Pascal, though ... -
-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \AT, -Up: Spaces - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \AT, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

+ +

19.5 \thinspace

+ -

19.5 \thinspace

- -

-\thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that +

\thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as -in '. +in ’”. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \thinspace, -Up: Spaces - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \thinspace, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

+ +

19.6 \/

+ -

19.6 \/

- -

-The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a +

The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a small space defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows. The italic f character typically has a large italic correction value. - -

If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary to +

+

If the following character is a period or comma, it’s not necessary to insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as normal letters, it can help. Compare -f: f; (in the TeX output, the `f's are nicely separated) +f: f; (in the TeX output, the ‘f’s are nicely separated) with f: f;. - -

Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic +

+

Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic correction. Compare -pdfTeX (in the TeX output, there is a small space after the `f') +pdfTeX (in the TeX output, there is a small space after the ‘f’) with pdfTeX. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \/, -Up: Spaces - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \/, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

+ +

19.7 \hrulefill

+ -

19.7 \hrulefill

- -

-The \hrulefill fill command produces a “rubber length” which can +

The \hrulefill fill command produces a “rubber length” which can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal rule. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \hrulefill, -Up: Spaces - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \hrulefill, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

+ +

19.8 \dotfill

-

19.8 \dotfill

+ -

-The \dotfill command produces a “rubber length” that fills +

The \dotfill command produces a “rubber length” that fills with dots instead of just white space. +

- -
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \dotfill, -Up: Spaces - -
- -

19.9 \addvspace

- -

-\addvspace{length} +

+

+Next: , Previous: \dotfill, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

19.9 \addvspace

+ + + -

The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of height +

\addvspace{length} +

+

The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of height length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same point in the output by a previous \addvspace command, then this command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length of the total vertical space equal to length. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \addvspace, -Up: Spaces - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \addvspace, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.10 \bigskip \medskip \smallskip

+ +

19.10 \bigskip \medskip \smallskip

These commands produce a given amount of space. - -

-
\bigskip
The same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line +

+
+
\bigskip
+
+ +

The same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line space (with stretch and shrink). - -

\medskip
The same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily +

+
+
\medskip
+
+ +

The same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). - -

\smallskip
The same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a +

+
+
\smallskip
+
+ +

The same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). +

+
+
-
- -

The \...amount parameters are determined by the document class. +

The \...amount parameters are determined by the document class. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, -Up: Spaces - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

+ +

19.11 \vfill

+ -

19.11 \vfill

- -

-The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which -can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to +

The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which +can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It’s equivalent to \vspace{\fill} (see \hfill). +

-
- +
-


-Previous: \vfill, -Up: Spaces - +
+

+Previous: \vfill, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

+ +

19.12 \vspace[*]{length}

+ -

19.12 \vspace[*]{length}

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\vspace[*]{length}
+
-
     \vspace[*]{length}
-
-

The \vspace command adds the vertical space length, i.e., +

The \vspace command adds the vertical space length, i.e., a rubber length. length can be negative or positive. - -

Ordinarily, LaTeX removes vertical space added by \vspace at +

+

Ordinarily, LaTeX removes vertical space added by \vspace at the top or bottom of a page. With the optional * argument, the space is not removed. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Spaces, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Spaces, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

20 Boxes

-

20 Boxes

+ -

-All the predefined length parameters (see Predefined lengths) can be +

All the predefined length parameters (see Predefined lengths) can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands. - -

- -
- +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Boxes - +
+

+Next: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

20.1 \mbox{text}

+ -

20.1 \mbox{text}

- -

-The \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the + +

The \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text created by its argument. The text is not broken into lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \mbox, -Up: Boxes - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \mbox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

20.2 \fbox and \framebox

-

20.2 \fbox and \framebox

+ + -

-Synopses: +

Synopses: +

+
+
\fbox{text}
+\framebox[width][position]{text}
+
-
     \fbox{text}
-     \framebox[width][position]{text}
-
-

The \fbox and \framebox commands are like \mbox, +

The \fbox and \framebox commands are like \mbox, except that they put a frame around the outside of the box being created. - -

In addition, the \framebox command allows for explicit +

+

In addition, the \framebox command allows for explicit specification of the box width with the optional width argument (a dimension), and positioning with the optional position -argument. - -

Both commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default -‘.4pt’), and leave a space of \fboxsep (default -‘3pt’) between the rule and the contents of the box. - -

See \framebox (picture), for the \framebox command in the +argument.

+ + +

Both commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default +‘.4pt’), and leave a space of \fboxsep (default +‘3pt’) between the rule and the contents of the box. +

+

See \framebox (picture), for the \framebox command in the picture environment. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: \fbox and \framebox, -Up: Boxes - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \fbox and \framebox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

20.3 lrbox

+ -

20.3 lrbox

- -

-\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} - -

This is the environment form of \sbox. - -

The text inside the environment is saved in the box cmd, which +

\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} +

+

This is the environment form of \sbox. +

+

The text inside the environment is saved in the box cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: lrbox, -Up: Boxes - +
+

+Next: , Previous: lrbox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

20.4 \makebox

+ -

20.4 \makebox

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\makebox[width][position]{text}
+
-
     \makebox[width][position]{text}
-
-

The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain +

The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain the text specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional width argument. The position of the text within the box is determined by the optional position argument, which may take the following values: - -

-
c
Centered (default). -
l
Flush left. -
r
Flush right. -
s
Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain -stretchable space for this to work. +

+
+
c
+

Centered (default). +

+
l
+

Flush left. +

+
r
+

Flush right. +

+
s
+

Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain +stretchable space for this to work. +

-

\makebox is also used within the picture environment +

\makebox is also used within the picture environment see \makebox (picture). +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \makebox, -Up: Boxes - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \makebox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

20.5 \parbox

+ -

20.5 \parbox

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}
+
-
     \parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}
-
-

The \parbox command produces a box whose contents are created +

The \parbox command produces a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you -shouldn't use any paragraph-making environments inside a +shouldn’t use any paragraph-making environments inside a \parbox argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a minipage environment (see minipage). - -

\parbox has two mandatory arguments: - -

-
width
the width of the parbox; -
text
the text that goes inside the parbox. +

+

\parbox has two mandatory arguments: +

+
+
width
+

the width of the parbox; +

+
text
+

the text that goes inside the parbox. +

-

The optional position argument allows you to align either the +

The optional position argument allows you to align either the top or bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text (default is top). - -

The optional height argument overrides the natural height of the box. - -

The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside +

+

The optional height argument overrides the natural height of the box. +

+

The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside the box, as follows; if it is not specified, position is used. - -

-
t
text is placed at the top of the box. -
c
text is centered in the box. -
b
text is placed at the bottom of the box. -
s
stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space -for this to work. +

+
+
t
+

text is placed at the top of the box. +

+
c
+

text is centered in the box. +

+
b
+

text is placed at the bottom of the box. +

+
s
+

stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space +for this to work. +

-
- - -


-Next: , -Previous: \parbox, -Up: Boxes +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: \parbox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

20.6 \raisebox

+ -

20.6 \raisebox

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text}
+
-
     \raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text}
-
-

The \raisebox command raises or lowers text. The first +

The \raisebox command raises or lowers text. The first mandatory argument specifies how high text is to be raised (or lowered if it is a negative amount). text itself is processed in LR mode. - -

The optional arguments height and depth are dimensions. +

+

The optional arguments height and depth are dimensions. If they are specified, LaTeX treats text as extending a certain distance above the baseline (height) or below (depth), ignoring its natural height and depth. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \raisebox, -Up: Boxes - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \raisebox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

20.7 \savebox

+ -

20.7 \savebox

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text}
+
-
     \savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text}
-
-

This command typeset text in a box just as with \makebox +

This command typeset text in a box just as with \makebox (see \makebox), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in the box labeled \boxcmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox (see \newsavebox). +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \savebox, -Up: Boxes - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \savebox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

20.8 \sbox{\boxcmd}{text}

+ -

20.8 \sbox{\boxcmd}{text}

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\sbox{\boxcmd}{text}
+
-
     \sbox{\boxcmd}{text}
-
-

\sbox types text in a box just as with \mbox +

\sbox types text in a box just as with \mbox (see \mbox) except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled \boxcmd. \boxcmd must have been previously declared with \newsavebox (see \newsavebox). +

-
- +
-


-Previous: \sbox, -Up: Boxes - +
+

+Previous: \sbox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

+ +

20.9 \usebox{\boxcmd

+ -

20.9 \usebox{\boxcmd

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\usebox{\boxcmd}
+
-
     \usebox{\boxcmd}
-
-

\usebox producesthe box most recently saved in the bin +

\usebox producesthe box most recently saved in the bin \boxcmd by a \savebox command (see \savebox). +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Boxes, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Boxes, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

21 Special insertions

+ +

21 Special insertions

LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. - -

- -
+

+ + + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Special insertions - + + +

21.1 Reserved characters

+ + -

21.1 Reserved characters

- -

-The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called +

The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called “reserved characters” or “special characters”. - -

     # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-
-

Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX +

+
+
# $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+
+ + + + + + + + +

Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX will do something special. If you simply want the character to be printed as itself, include a \ in front of the character. For example, \$ will produce $ in your output. - -

One exception to this rule is \ itself, because \\ has +

+ +

One exception to this rule is \ itself, because \\ has its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing $\backslash$ in your file, and a typewriter \ is -produced by using ‘\’ in a verbatim command (see verbatim). - -

Also, \~ and \^ place tilde and circumflex accents over +produced by using ‘\’ in a verbatim command (see verbatim). +

+ + +

Also, \~ and \^ place tilde and circumflex accents over the following letter, as in õ and ô (see Accents); to get a standalone ~ or ^, you can again use a verbatim command. +

+ + -

-Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you +

Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you know its number by using the \symbol command. For example, the visible space character used in the \verb* command has the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as \symbol{32}. +

+

You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal numbers +with ", so the previous example could also be written as +\symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}. +

-

You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal numbers -with ", so the previous example could also be written as -\symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}. - -

+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Reserved characters, -Up: Special insertions - + + +

21.2 Text symbols

-

21.2 Text symbols

- -

LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols + + +

LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp package. - -

-
\copyright
\textcopyright
The copyright symbol, ©. - -
\dag
The dagger symbol (in text). - -
\ddag
The double dagger symbol (in text). - -
\LaTeX
The LaTeX logo. - -
\guillemotleft («)
\guillemotright (»)
\guilsinglleft (‹)
\guilsinglright (›)
Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: +

+
+
\copyright + +
+
\textcopyright + +
+
+

The copyright symbol, ©. +

+
+
\dag + +
+
+

The dagger symbol (in text). +

+
+
\ddag + +
+
+

The double dagger symbol (in text). +

+
+
\LaTeX + +
+
+ +

The LaTeX logo. +

+
+
\guillemotleft («) + +
+
\guillemotright (») + +
+
\guilsinglleft (‹) + +
+
\guilsinglright (›) + +
+
+ + + + + + + +

Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: «, », ‹, ›. - -

\ldots
\dots
\textellipsis
An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `...'. \ldots +

+
+
\ldots + +
+
\dots + +
+
\textellipsis + +
+
+

An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): ‘…’. \ldots and \dots also work in math mode. - -

\lq
Left (opening) quote: `. - -
\P
\textparagraph
Paragraph sign (pilcrow). - -
\pounds
\textsterling
English pounds sterling: £. - -
\quotedblbase („)
\quotesinglbase (‚)
Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: +

+
+
\lq + +
+
+ +

Left (opening) quote: ‘. +

+
+
\P + +
+
\textparagraph + +
+
+ +

Paragraph sign (pilcrow). +

+
+
\pounds + +
+
\textsterling + +
+
+ +

English pounds sterling: £. +

+
+
\quotedblbase („) + +
+
\quotesinglbase (‚) + +
+
+ + +

Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: „ and ‚. - -

\rq
Right (closing) quote: '. - -
\S
Section symbol. - -
\TeX
The TeX logo. - -
\textasciicircum
ASCII circumflex: ^. - -
\textasciitilde
ASCII tilde: ~. - -
\textasteriskcentered
Centered asterisk: *. - -
\textbackslash
Backslash: \. - -
\textbar
Vertical bar: |. - -
\textbardbl
Double vertical bar. - -
\textbigcircle
Big circle symbol. - -
\textbraceleft
Left brace: {. - -
\textbraceright
Right brace: }. - -
\textbullet
Bullet: •. - -
\textcircled{letter}
letter in a circle, as in ®. - -
\textcompwordmark
\textcapitalwordmark
\textascenderwordmark
Composite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form +

+
+
\rq + +
+
+ +

Right (closing) quote: ’. +

+
+
\S + +
+
+

Section symbol. +

+
+
\TeX + +
+
+ +

The TeX logo. +

+
+
\textasciicircum + +
+
+ +

ASCII circumflex: ^. +

+
+
\textasciitilde + +
+
+ +

ASCII tilde: ~. +

+
+
\textasteriskcentered + +
+
+ +

Centered asterisk: *. +

+
+
\textbackslash + +
+
+

Backslash: \. +

+
+
\textbar + +
+
+ +

Vertical bar: |. +

+
+
\textbardbl + +
+
+ + +

Double vertical bar. +

+
+
\textbigcircle + +
+
+ +

Big circle symbol. +

+
+
\textbraceleft + +
+
+ +

Left brace: {. +

+
+
\textbraceright + +
+
+ +

Right brace: }. +

+
+
\textbullet + +
+
+

Bullet: •. +

+
+
\textcircled{letter} + +
+
+

letter in a circle, as in ®. +

+
+
\textcompwordmark + +
+
\textcapitalwordmark + +
+
\textascenderwordmark + +
+
+ + +

Composite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form has the cap height of the font, while the \textascender... form has the ascender height. +

+
+
\textdagger + +
+
+

Dagger: \dag. +

+
+
\textdaggerdbl + +
+
+ +

Double dagger: \ddag. +

+
+
\textdollar (or $) + +
+
+ +

Dollar sign: $. +

+
+
\textemdash (or ---) + +
+
+

Em-dash: — (for punctuation). +

+
+
\textendash (or --) + +
+
+

En-dash: — (for ranges). +

+
+
\texteuro + +
+
+ +

The Euro symbol: €. +

+
+
\textexclamdown (or !`) + +
+
+

Upside down exclamation point: ¡. +

+
+
\textgreater + +
+
+

Greater than: >. +

+
+
\textless + +
+
+

Less than: <. +

+
+
\textleftarrow + +
+
+ +

Left arrow. +

+
+
\textordfeminine + +
+
\textordmasculine + +
+
+ + + +

Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. +

+
+
\textordfeminine + +
+
+

Feminine ordinal symbol: ®. +

+
+
\textperiodcentered + +
+
+ +

Centered period: \cdot. +

+
+
\textquestiondown (or ?`) + +
+
+

Upside down questionation point: ¿. +

+
+
\textquotedblleft (or ``) + +
+
+ +

Double left quote: “. +

+
+
\textquotedblright (or ') + +
+
+ +

Double right quote: ”. +

+
+
\textquoteleft (or `) + +
+
+ +

Single left quote: ‘. +

+
+
\textquoteright (or ') + +
+
+ +

Single right quote: ’. +

+
+
\textquotestraightbase + +
+
\textquotestraightdblbase + +
+
+ + + +

Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. +

+
+
\textregistered + +
+
+

Registered symbol: ®. +

+
+
\textrightarrow + +
+
+ +

Right arrow. +

+
+
\textthreequartersemdash + +
+
+ +

“Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. +

+
+
\texttrademark + +
+
+

Trademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}. +

+
+
\texttwelveudash + +
+

Xx 12u-. +

+
+
\textunderscore + +
+
+

Underscore: _. +

+
+
\textvisiblespace + +
+
+

Visible space symbol. +

+
+
-
\textdagger
Dagger: \dag. - -
\textdaggerdbl
Double dagger: \ddag. - -
\textdollar (or $)
Dollar sign: $. - -
\textemdash (or ---)
Em-dash: — (for punctuation). - -
\textendash (or --)
En-dash: — (for ranges). - -
\texteuro
The Euro symbol: €. - -
\textexclamdown (or !`)
Upside down exclamation point: ¡. - -
\textgreater
Greater than: >. - -
\textless
Less than: <. - -
\textleftarrow
Left arrow. - -
\textordfeminine
\textordmasculine
Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. - -
\textordfeminine
Feminine ordinal symbol: ®. - -
\textperiodcentered
Centered period: \cdot. - -
\textquestiondown (or ?`)
Upside down questionation point: ¿. - -
\textquotedblleft (or ``)
Double left quote: “. - -
\textquotedblright (or ')
Double right quote: ”. - -
\textquoteleft (or `)
Single left quote: `. - -
\textquoteright (or ')
Single right quote: '. - -
\textquotestraightbase
\textquotestraightdblbase
Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. - -
\textregistered
Registered symbol: ®. - -
\textrightarrow
Right arrow. - -
\textthreequartersemdash
“Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. - -
\texttrademark
Trademark symbol: ^\hboxTM. - -
\texttwelveudash
Xx 12u-. - -
\textunderscore
Underscore: _. - -
\textvisiblespace
Visible space symbol. - -
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Text symbols, -Up: Special insertions - + + +

21.3 Accents

-

21.3 Accents

+ + + -

-LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and +

LaTeX has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and languages, through the babel package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists the core LaTeX commands for creating accented characters. - -

The \capital... commands produce alternative forms for use with +

+

The \capital... commands produce alternative forms for use with capital letters. These are not available with OT1. - -

-
\"
\capitaldieresis
Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. - -
\'
\capitalacute
Produces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing +

+
+
\"
+
\capitaldieresis
+
+ + + +

Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. +

+
+
\'
+
\capitalacute
+
+ + +

Produces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column (see tabbing). - -

\.
Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. - -
\=
\capitalmacron
Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o¯. - -
\^
\capitalcircumflex
Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. - -
\`
\capitalgrave
Produces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the +

+
+
\.
+
+ + +

Produces a dot accent over the following, as in ȯ. +

+
+
\=
+
\capitalmacron
+
+ + + + +

Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in ō. +

+
+
\^
+
\capitalcircumflex
+
+ + + +

Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. +

+
+
\`
+
\capitalgrave
+
+ + +

Produces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the tabbing environment, move following text to the right margin (see tabbing). - -

\~
\capitaltilde
Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. - -
\b
Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. - -
\c
\capitalcedilla
Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. - -
\d
\capitaldotaccent
Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. - -
\H
\capitalhungarumlaut
Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. - -
\i
Produces a dotless i, as in `i'. - -
\j
Produces a dotless j, as in `j'. - -
\k
\capitalogonek
Produces a letter with ogonek, as in `o'. Not available in +

+
+
\~
+
\capitaltilde
+
+ + +

Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. +

+
+
\b
+
+ +

Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. +

+
+
\c
+
\capitalcedilla
+
+ + +

Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. +

+
+
\d
+
\capitaldotaccent
+
+ + +

Produces a dot accent under the following, as in ọ. +

+
+
\H
+
\capitalhungarumlaut
+
+ + +

Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in ő. +

+
+
\i
+
+ +

Produces a dotless i, as in ‘i’. +

+
+
\j
+
+ +

Produces a dotless j, as in ‘j’. +

+
+
\k
+
\capitalogonek
+
+ + +

Produces a letter with ogonek, as in ‘ǫ’. Not available in the OT1 encoding. - -

\r
\capitalring
Produces a ring accent, as in `o*'. - -
\t
\capitaltie
\newtie
\capitalnewtie
Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The -\newtie form is centered in its box. - -
\u
\capitalbreve
Produces a breve accent, as in `o('. - -
\underbar
Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. +

+
+
\r
+
\capitalring
+
+ + +

Produces a ring accent, as in ‘o*’. +

+
+
\t
+
\capitaltie
+
\newtie
+
\capitalnewtie
+
+ + + + +

Produces a tie-after accent, as in ‘oo[’. The +\newtie form is centered in its box. +

+
+
\u
+
\capitalbreve
+
+ + +

Produces a breve accent, as in ‘ŏ’. +

+
+
\underbar
+
+ +

Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through descenders. See also \underline in Math miscellany. +

+
+
\v
+
\capitalcaron
+
+ + + + +

Produces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in ‘o<’. +

+
+
-
\v
\capitalcaron
Produces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in `o<'. - -
-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: Accents, -Up: Special insertions - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Accents, Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

+ +

21.4 Non-English characters

-

21.4 Non-English characters

+ + + + -

-Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting characters commonly +

Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting characters commonly used in languages other than English. +

+
+
\aa
+
\AA
+
+ + +

å and Å. +

+
+
\ae
+
\AE
+
+ + +

æ and Æ. +

+
+
\dh
+
\DH
+
+ + + +

Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. +

+
+
\dj
+
\DJ
+
+ +

xxxx +

+
+
\ij
+
\IJ
+
+ + +

ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). +

+
+
\l
+
\L
+
+ + +

ł and Ł. +

+
+
\ng
+
\NG
+
+ +

xxxx +

+
+
\o
+
\O
+
+ + +

ø and Ø. +

+
+
\oe
+
\OE
+
+ + +

œ and Œ. +

+
+
\ss
+
\SS
+
+ + + +

ß and SS. +

+
+
\th
+
\TH
+
+ + + +

Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. +

+
+
-
-
\aa
\AA
å and Å. - -
\ae
\AE
æ and Æ. - -
\dh
\DH
Icelandic letter eth: and . - -
\dj
\DJ
xxxx - -
\ij
\IJ
ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). - -
\l
\L
/l and /L. - -
\ng
\NG
xxxx - -
\o
\O
ø and Ø. - -
\oe
\OE
œ and Œ. - -
\ss
\SS
ß and SS. - -
\th
\TH
Icelandic letter thorn: and . - -
-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: Non-English characters, -Up: Special insertions - + + +

21.5 \rule

+ -

21.5 \rule

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\rule[raise]{width}{thickness}
+
-
     \rule[raise]{width}{thickness}
-
-

The \rule command produces rules, that is, lines or +

The \rule command produces rules, that is, lines or rectangles. The arguments are: - -

-
raise
How high to raise the rule (optional). - -
width
The length of the rule (mandatory). - -
thickness
The thickness of the rule (mandatory). +

+
+
raise
+

How high to raise the rule (optional). +

+
+
width
+

The length of the rule (mandatory). +

+
+
thickness
+

The thickness of the rule (mandatory). +

-
- - -


-Previous: \rule, -Up: Special insertions +
+ +
+

+Previous: \rule, Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

+ +

21.6 \today

+ -

21.6 \today

- -

-The \today command produces today's date, in the format -‘month dd, yyyy’; for example, `July 4, 1976'. +

The \today command produces today’s date, in the format +‘month dd, yyyy’; for example, ‘July 4, 1976’. It uses the predefined counters \day, \month, and \year (see \day \month \year) to do this. It is not updated as the program runs. - -

The datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety +

+ +

The datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety of other date formats. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Special insertions, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Special insertions, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

22 Splitting the input

+ + -

22 Splitting the input

- -

-A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole -input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into +

A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole +input in a single large file, it’s more efficient to split it into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type when you run LaTeX. +

+ + + + + - -
- +
-


-Next: , -Up: Splitting the input - + + +

22.1 \include

+ -

22.1 \include

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\include{file}
+
-
     \include{file}
-
-

If no \includeonly command is present, the \include +

If no \includeonly command is present, the \include command executes \clearpage to start a new page (see \clearpage), then reads file, then does another \clearpage. - -

Given an \includeonly command, the \include actions are +

+

Given an \includeonly command, the \include actions are only run if file is listed as an argument to \includeonly. See the next section. - -

The \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file +

+ +

The \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file read by another \include command. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \include, -Up: Splitting the input - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \include, Up: Splitting the input   [Contents][Index]

+ +

22.2 \includeonly

+ -

22.2 \includeonly

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\includeonly{file1,file2,...}
+
-
     \includeonly{file1,file2,...}
-
-

The \includeonly command controls which files will be read by +

The \includeonly command controls which files will be read by subsequent \include commands. The list of filenames is comma-separated. Each file must exactly match a filename specified in a \include command for the selection to be effective. +

+

This command can only appear in the preamble. +

-

This command can only appear in the preamble. - -

- +
-


-Previous: \includeonly, -Up: Splitting the input - + + +

22.3 \input

+ -

22.3 \input

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\input{file}
+
-
     \input{file}
-
-

The \input command causes the specified file to be read +

The \input command causes the specified file to be read and processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at that point. +

+

If file does not end in ‘.tex’ (e.g., ‘foo’ or +‘foo.bar’), it is first tried with that extension (‘foo.tex’ +or ‘foo.bar.tex’). If that is not found, the original file +is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar’). +

-

If file does not end in ‘.tex’ (e.g., ‘foo’ or -‘foo.bar’), it is first tried with that extension (‘foo.tex’ -or ‘foo.bar.tex’). If that is not found, the original file -is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar’). - -

- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: Splitting the input, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Splitting the input, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

23 Front/back matter

-

23 Front/back matter

+ + + + + - -
+
-


-Next: , -Up: Front/back matter - + + +

23.1 Tables of contents

-

23.1 Tables of contents

+ -

-A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents + +

A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents command. You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. A previous run must -have generated a .toc file. - -

The \tableofcontents command produces a heading, but it does +have generated a ‘.toc’ file. +

+

The \tableofcontents command produces a heading, but it does not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the table of contents, write a \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command. - -

The analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables -produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. +

+ + +

The analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables +produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. - -

The command \nofiles overrides these commands, and +

+ +

The command \nofiles overrides these commands, and prevents any of these lists from being generated. +

+ + + + - -
- +
-


-Next: , -Up: Tables of contents - + + +

23.1.1 \addcontentsline

+ + -

23.1.1 \addcontentsline

- -

-The \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} +

The \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} command adds an entry to the specified list or table where: - -

-
ext
The extension of the file on which information is to be written, +

+
+
ext
+

The extension of the file on which information is to be written, typically one of: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables). - -

unit
The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the +

+
+
unit
+

The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the following, matching the value of the ext argument: - -

-
toc
The name of the sectional unit: part, chapter, -section, subsection, subsubsection. -
lof
For the list of figures. -
lot
For the list of tables. +

+
+
toc
+

The name of the sectional unit: part, chapter, +section, subsection, subsubsection. +

+
lof
+

For the list of figures. +

+
lot
+

For the list of tables. +

-
entry
The actual text of the entry. +
+
entry
+

The actual text of the entry. +

-

What is written to the .ext file is the -command \contentsline{unit}{name}. + +

What is written to the ‘.ext’ file is the +command \contentsline{unit}{name}. +

- -
- - -


-Previous: \addcontentsline, -Up: Tables of contents +
+ + + +

23.1.2 \addtocontents

+ -

23.1.2 \addtocontents

- -

-The \addtocontents{ext}{text} command adds text -(or formatting commands) directly to the .ext file that +

The \addtocontents{ext}{text} command adds text +(or formatting commands) directly to the ‘.ext’ file that generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. - -

-
ext
The extension of the file on which information is to be written: -toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or -lot (list of tables). - -
text
The text to be written. +

+
+
ext
+

The extension of the file on which information is to be written: +‘toc’ (table of contents), ‘lof’ (list of figures), or +‘lot’ (list of tables). +

+
+
text
+

The text to be written. +

-
- -


-Next: , -Previous: Tables of contents, -Up: Front/back matter +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: Tables of contents, Up: Front/back matter   [Contents][Index]

+ +

23.2 Glossaries

+ -

23.2 Glossaries

- -

-The command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. - -

The command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for -text to an auxiliary file with the .glo extension. - -

Specifically, what gets written is the command -\glossaryentry{text}{pageno}, where + +

The command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. +

+ + +

The command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for +text to an auxiliary file with the ‘.glo’ extension. +

+ +

Specifically, what gets written is the command +\glossaryentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno is the current \thepage value. - -

The glossary package on CTAN provides support for fancier +

+

The glossary package on CTAN provides support for fancier glossaries. +

-
+
-


-Previous: Glossaries, -Up: Front/back matter - +
+

+Previous: Glossaries, Up: Front/back matter   [Contents][Index]

+ +

23.3 Indexes

+ -

23.3 Indexes

- -

-The command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in + +

The command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in the preamble. - -

The command \index{text} writes an index entry for -text to an auxiliary file with the .idx extension. - -

Specifically, what gets written is the command -\indexentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno +

+ + +

The command \index{text} writes an index entry for +text to an auxiliary file with the ‘.idx’ extension. +

+ +

Specifically, what gets written is the command +\indexentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno is the current \thepage value. - -

To generate a index entry for `bar' that says `See foo', use a +

+ +

To generate a index entry for ‘bar’ that says ‘See foo’, use a vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}. Use seealso -instead of see to make a `See also' entry. - -

The text `See' is defined by the macro \seename, and `See also' +instead of see to make a ‘See also’ entry. +

+ + +

The text ‘See’ is defined by the macro \seename, and ‘See also’ by the macro \alsoname. These can be redefined for other languages. - -

The generated .idx file is then sorted with an external -command, usually either makeindex +

+ + + +

The generated ‘.idx’ file is then sorted with an external +command, usually either makeindex (http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex) or (the -multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge.net). -This results in a .ind file, which can then be read to typeset +multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge.net). +This results in a ‘.ind’ file, which can then be read to typeset the index. - -

The index is usually generated with the \printindex command. +

+ + +

The index is usually generated with the \printindex command. This is defined in the makeidx package, so \usepackage{makeidx} needs to be in the preamble. - -

The rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new -letter in the printed index; its default value is ‘10pt plus5pt -minus3pt’. - -

The showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in +

+ +

The rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new +letter in the printed index; its default value is ‘10pt plus5pt +minus3pt’. +

+ +

The showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index. - -

The multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the +

+ +

The multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the TeX FAQ entry on this topic, http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Front/back matter, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Front/back matter, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24 Letters

+ + -

24 Letters

- -

-You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The +

You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The letter document class is designed to make a number of letters at once, although you can make just one if you so desire. - -

Your .tex source file has the same minimum commands as the other +

+

Your ‘.tex’ source file has the same minimum commands as the other document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a minimum: - -

      \documentclass{letter}
-      \begin{document}
-       ... letters ...
-      \end{document}
-
-

Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the name +

+
+
 \documentclass{letter}
+ \begin{document}
+  ... letters ...
+ \end{document}
+
+ +

Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the name and address of the recipient. For example, you might have: - -

      \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
-           \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
-        ...
-      \end{letter}
-
-

The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text of +

+
+
 \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
+      \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+   ...
+ \end{letter}
+
+ +

The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text of the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not work. The letter closes with a \closing command. - -

After the closing, you can have additional material. The -\cc command produces the usual “cc: ...”. There's also a +

+ +

After the closing, you can have additional material. The +\cc command produces the usual “cc: …”. There’s also a similar \encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, use \\ to separate the items. - -

These commands are used with the letter class. - -

- -
- +

+

These commands are used with the letter class. +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
-


-Next: , -Up: Letters - +
+

+Next: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.1 \address{return-address}

+ -

24.1 \address{return-address}

- -

-The \address specifies the return address of a letter, as it +

The \address specifies the return address of a letter, as it should appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by \\ commands. - -

If you do not make an \address declaration, then the letter -will be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard +

+

If you do not make an \address declaration, then the letter +will be formatted for copying onto your organisation’s standard letterhead. (See Overview, for details on your local implementation). If you give an \address declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a personal letter. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \address, -Up: Letters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \address, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.2 \cc

-

24.2 \cc

+ + -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\cc{name1\\name2}
+
-
     \cc{name1\\name2}
-
-

Produce a list of names the letter was copied to. Each name is +

Produce a list of names the letter was copied to. Each name is printed on a separate line. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \cc, -Up: Letters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \cc, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.3 \closing

-

24.3 \closing

+ + + -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\closing{text}
+
-
     \closing{text}
-
-

A letter closes with a \closing command, for example, -

     \closing{Best Regards,}
-
-
- - -


-Next: , -Previous: \closing, -Up: Letters +

A letter closes with a \closing command, for example, +

+
\closing{Best Regards,}
+
+ +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: \closing, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.4 \encl

-

24.4 \encl

+ + -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\encl{line1\\line2}
+
-
     \encl{line1\\line2}
-
-

Declare a list of one more enclosures. +

Declare a list of one more enclosures. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \encl, -Up: Letters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \encl, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.5 \location

+ -

24.5 \location

- -

-\location{address} - -

This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears +

\location{address} +

+

This modifies your organisation’s standard address. This only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \location, -Up: Letters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \location, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.6 \makelabels

+ -

24.6 \makelabels

- -

-\makelabels{number} - -

If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet of +

\makelabels{number} +

+

If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet of address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. +

-
- - -


-Next: , -Previous: \makelabels, -Up: Letters +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: \makelabels, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.7 \name

+ -

24.7 \name

- -

-\name{June Davenport} - -

Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return +

\name{June Davenport} +

+

Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return address. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \name, -Up: Letters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \name, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.8 \opening{text}

+ + -

24.8 \opening{text}

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\opening{text}
+
-
     \opening{text}
-
-

A letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory -argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your letter. +

A letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory +argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your letter. For instance: +

+
+
\opening{Dear Joe,}
+
-
     \opening{Dear Joe,}
-
-
- - -


-Next: , -Previous: \opening, -Up: Letters +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: \opening, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.9 \ps

+ + -

24.9 \ps

- -

-Use the \ps command to start a postscript in a letter, after +

Use the \ps command to start a postscript in a letter, after \closing. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \ps, -Up: Letters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \ps, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.10 \signature{text}

+ -

24.10 \signature{text}

- -

-Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the +

Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within text as usual. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \signature, -Up: Letters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \signature, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.11 \startbreaks

+ -

24.11 \startbreaks

- -

-\startbreaks +

\startbreaks +

+

Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again. +

-

Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again. -

- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: \startbreaks, -Up: Letters - +
+

+Next: , Previous: \startbreaks, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.12 \stopbreaks

+ -

24.12 \stopbreaks

- -

-\stopbreaks +

\stopbreaks +

+

Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs. +

-

Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs. -

- +
-


-Previous: \stopbreaks, -Up: Letters - +
+

+Previous: \stopbreaks, Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+ +

24.13 \telephone

+ -

24.13 \telephone

- -

-\telephone{number} - -

This is your telephone number. This only appears if the +

\telephone{number} +

+

This is your telephone number. This only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. +

-
- +
-


-Next: , -Previous: Letters, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Letters, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

25 Terminal input/output

+ + -

25 Terminal input/output

+ + + + -

-

- -
- +
-


-Next: , -Up: Terminal input/output - + + +

25.1 \typein[cmd]{msg}

+ -

25.1 \typein[cmd]{msg}

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\typein[\cmd]{msg}
+
-
     \typein[\cmd]{msg}
-
-

\typein prints msg on the terminal and causes LaTeX to +

\typein prints msg on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the optional \cmd argument is omitted, the typed input is processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the \typein command. If the \cmd argument is present, it must be a command name. This command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input. +

-
- +
-


-Previous: \typein, -Up: Terminal input/output - +
+

+Previous: \typein, Up: Terminal input/output   [Contents][Index]

+ +

25.2 \typeout{msg}

+ -

25.2 \typeout{msg}

- -

-Synopsis: +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\typeout{msg}
+
-
     \typeout{msg}
-
-

Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. +

Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in msg that are defined with \newcommand or \renewcommand (among others) are replaced by their definitions before being printed. - -

LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space +

+

LaTeX’s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg. A \space command in msg causes a single space to be printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in msg prints a newline. +

-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Terminal input/output, -Up: Top - +
+

+Next: , Previous: Terminal input/output, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

26 Command line

+ -

26 Command line

- -

-The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; -TeX uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the +

The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; +TeX uses ‘.tex’ as a default file extension. If you omit the input file entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You specify command options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g. +

+
+
latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
+
-
     latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
-
-

will process foo.tex without pausing after every error. - -

If LaTeX stops in the middle of the document and gives you a -‘*’ prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop +

will process ‘foo.tex’ without pausing after every error. +

+ + + +

If LaTeX stops in the middle of the document and gives you a +‘*’ prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop (and return) and it will prematurely end the document. +

-
- -


-Next: , -Previous: Command line, -Up: Top +
+ +
+

+Next: , Previous: Command line, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+ +

Appendix A Document templates

+ -

Appendix A Document templates

- -

-Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will +

Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will be useful. +

+ + + + + - -
+
-


-Next: , -Up: Document templates - + - -

A.1 book template

+ +

A.1 book template

\documentclass{book}
 \title{Book Class Template}
@@ -6840,19 +9723,17 @@ The end.
 \end{document}
 
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: book template, -Up: Document templates - + - -

A.2 beamer template

+ +

A.2 beamer template

The beamer class creates slides presentations. - +

\documentclass{beamer}
 
 \title{Beamer Class template}
@@ -6877,21 +9758,19 @@ Up: Document templates
 
 
-
+
-


-Previous: beamer template, -Up: Document templates - + - -

A.3 tugboat template

+ +

A.3 tugboat template

TUGboat is the journal of the TeX Users Group, http://tug.org/TUGboat. - -

\documentclass{ltugboat}  % ltugproc for proceedings
-
+

+
\documentclass{ltugboat}
 \usepackage{graphicx}
 \usepackage{ifpdf}
 \ifpdf
@@ -6901,9 +9780,7 @@ Up: Document templates
   \usepackage{url}
 \fi
 
-\begin{document}
-
-\title{Example \TUB\ Regular Article}
+\title{Example \TUB\ Article}
 
 % repeat info for each author.
 \author{First Last}
@@ -6913,7 +9790,8 @@ Up: Document templates
 
 \maketitle
 
-% The abstract comes after \maketitle in ltugboat.
+\begin{document}
+
 \begin{abstract}
 This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue.
 \end{abstract}
@@ -6923,31 +9801,31 @@ This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue.
 This is an example article for \TUB, from
 \url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
 
-We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the hyperref
-package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output).  \TUB\ is produced
-using \acro{PDF} files exclusively, nowadays.
+We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the
+hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output).
+Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
 
 The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others:
 
 {\small
 \begin{verbatim}
 \AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
-\BibTeX \CandT \CTAN \DTD \DVItoVDU \HTML
-\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \JoT \LAMSTeX \LaTeXe
-\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \pcMF \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas
+\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \LaTeXe
+\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas
 \PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
-\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG
-\tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \VorTeX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG \tug
+\UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
 
 \Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
 \careof \thinskip
 
-\acro{FRED} -> {\sc fred}  % please use!
-\cs{fred}   -> \fred
-\env{fred}  -> \begin{fred}
-\meta{fred} -> <fred>
-\nth{n}     -> 1st, 2nd, ...
-\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
+\acro{FRED} -> {\small fred}  % please use!
+\cs{fred}   -> \fred
+\env{fred}  -> \begin{fred}
+\meta{fred} -> <fred>
+\nth{n}     -> 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
 \booktitle{Book of Fred}
 \end{verbatim}
 }
@@ -6962,1284 +9840,1609 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
 \nocite{book-minimal}      % just making the bibliography non-empty
 \bibliography{xampl}       % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
 
-
-\makesignature  % not in ltugproc
+\makesignature
 \end{document}
 
-
+
-


-Next: , -Previous: Document templates, -Up: Top - -
- -

Concept Index

- - -
+
+

+Next: , Previous: Document templates, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

Concept Index

+ +
Jump to:   * +   +. +   +` +   +
+A +   +B +   +C +   +D +   +E +   +F +   +G +   +H +   +I +   +J +   +K +   +L +   +M +   +N +   +O +   +P +   +Q +   +R +   +S +   +T +   +U +   +V +   +W +   +X +   +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Index Entry  Section

*
*’ prompt: Command line
*-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning

.
.glo’ file: Glossaries
.idx’ file: Indexes
.ind’ file: Indexes

‘see’ and ‘see also’ index entries: Indexes

A
abstracts: abstract
accents: Accents
accents, mathematical: Math accents
accessing any character of a font: Reserved characters
acute accent: Accents
acute accent, math: Math accents
ae ligature: Non-English characters
aligning Equations: eqnarray
alignment via tabbing: tabbing
appendix, creating: Sectioning
aring: Non-English characters
arrays, math: array
arrow, left, in text: Text symbols
arrow, right, in text: Text symbols
ascender height: Text symbols
ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols
ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols
asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols
author, for titlepage: \maketitle

B
backslash, in text: Text symbols
bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols
bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols
bar-over accent: Accents
bar-over accent, math: Math accents
bar-under accent: Accents
bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX
bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography
bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX
big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols
black boxes, omitting: Document class options
bold font: Font styles
bold typewriter, avoiding: description
boxes: Boxes
brace, left, in text: Text symbols
brace, right, in text: Text symbols
breaking lines: Line breaking
breaking pages: Page breaking
breve accent: Accents
breve accent, math: Math accents
bullet symbol: Math symbols
bullet, in text: Text symbols
bulleted lists: itemize

C
calligraphic letters for math: Font styles
cap height: Text symbols
caron accent: Accents
cc list, in letters: \cc
cedilla accent: Accents
centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols
centered period, in text: Text symbols
centering text, declaration for: \centering
centering text, environment for: center
characters, accented: Accents
characters, non-English: Non-English characters
characters, reserved: Reserved characters
check accent: Accents
check accent, math: Math accents
circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols
circled letter, in text: Text symbols
circumflex accent: Accents
circumflex accent, math: Math accents
circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols
class options: Document class options
classes of documents: Document classes
closing letters: \closing
closing quote: Text symbols
code, typesetting: verbatim
command line: Command line
commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand
composite word mark, in text: Text symbols
computer programs, typesetting: verbatim
copyright symbol: Text symbols
counters, a list of: Counters
counters, defining new: \newcounter
counters, getting value of: \value
counters, setting: \setcounter
creating letters: Letters
creating pictures: picture
creating tables: table
credit footnote: \maketitle
cross references: Cross references
cross referencing with page number: \pageref
cross referencing, symbolic: \ref
currency, dollar: Text symbols
currency, euro: Text symbols

D
dagger, double, in text: Text symbols
dagger, in text: Text symbols
dagger, in text: Text symbols
date, for titlepage: \maketitle
datetime package: \today
defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand
defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
defining new fonts: \newfont
defining new theorems: \newtheorem
definitions: Definitions
description lists, creating: description
dieresis accent: Accents
discretionary multiplication: Math miscellany
displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation
displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quote
document class options: Document class options
document classes: Document classes
document templates: Document templates
dollar sign: Text symbols
dot accent: Accents
dot over accent, math: Math accents
dot-over accent: Accents
dot-under accent: Accents
dotless i: Accents
dotless i, math: Math accents
dotless j: Accents
dotless j, math: Math accents
double angle quotation marks: Text symbols
double dagger, in text: Text symbols
double dagger, in text: Text symbols
double dot accent, math: Math accents
double guillemets: Text symbols
double left quote: Text symbols
double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols
double quote, straight base: Text symbols
double right quote: Text symbols
double spacing: Low-level font commands
double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols

E
e-dash: Text symbols
ellipsis: Text symbols
em-dash: Text symbols
em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols
emphasis: Font styles
emphasis: Font styles
enclosure list: \encl
ending & starting: Starting & ending
enlarge current page: \enlargethispage
environments: Environments
environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
equation number, cross referencing: \ref
equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray
equations, aligning: eqnarray
equations, environment for: equation
es-zet German letter: Non-English characters
eth, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters
euro symbol: Text symbols
exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols
exponent: Subscripts & superscripts

F
feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols
feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols
figure number, cross referencing: \ref
figures, footnotes in: minipage
figures, inserting: figure
fixed-width font: Font styles
float package: figure
flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage
font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands
font sizes: Font sizes
font styles: Font styles
fonts: Typefaces
fonts, new commands for: \newfont
footer style: \pagestyle
footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters
footnote number, cross referencing: \ref
footnote parameters: Footnote parameters
footnotes in figures: minipage
footnotes, creating: Footnotes
footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered: Symbolic footnotes
formulas, environment for: equation
formulas, math: Math formulas
fragile commands: \protect
French quotation marks: Text symbols
functions, math: Math functions

G
global options: Document class options
global options: Document class options
glossaries: Glossaries
grave accent: Accents
grave accent, math: Math accents
greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols
greek letters: Math symbols

H
hác<ek accent, math: Math accents
hacek accent: Accents
hat accent: Accents
hat accent, math: Math accents
header style: \pagestyle
header, parameters for: Page layout parameters
hungarian umlaut accent: Accents
hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation
hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation)
hyphenation, preventing: \mbox

I
Icelandic eth: Non-English characters
Icelandic thorn: Non-English characters
ij letter, Dutch: Non-English characters
in-line formulas: math
indent, forcing: \indent
indent, suppressing: \noindent
indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage
indexes: Indexes
input file: Splitting the input
input/output: Terminal input/output
inserting figures: figure
italic font: Font styles

J
justification, ragged left: \raggedleft
justification, ragged right: \raggedright

K
Knuth, Donald E.: Top

L
labelled lists, creating: description
Lamport, Leslie: Top
LaTeX logo: Text symbols
LaTeX overview: Overview
LaTeX Project team: Top
layout commands: Layout
layout, page parameters for: Page layout parameters
left angle quotation marks: Text symbols
left arrow, in text: Text symbols
left brace, in text: Text symbols
left quote: Text symbols
left quote, double: Text symbols
left quote, single: Text symbols
left-justifying text: \raggedright
left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft
left-to-right mode: Modes
lengths, adding to: \addtolength
lengths, defining and using: Lengths
lengths, defining new: \newlength
lengths, predefined: Predefined lengths
lengths, setting: \setlength
less than symbol, in text: Text symbols
letters: Letters
letters, accented: Accents
letters, ending: \closing
letters, non-English: Non-English characters
letters, starting: \opening
line break, forcing: \\
line breaking: Line breaking
line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak
line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak
lines in tables: tabular
lining text up in columns using tab stops: tabbing
lining text up in tables: tabular
list items, specifying counter: \usecounter
lists of items: itemize
lists of items, generic: list
lists of items, numbered: enumerate
loading additional packages: Document class options
logo, LaTeX: Text symbols
logo, TeX: Text symbols
low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols
low-level font commands: Low-level font commands
lR mode: Modes

M
macron accent: Accents
macron accent, math: Math accents
makeidx package: Indexes
makeindex program: Indexes
making a title page: titlepage
making paragraphs: Making paragraphs
marginal notes: Marginal notes
masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols
math accents: Math accents
math formulas: Math formulas
math functions: Math functions
math miscellany: Math miscellany
math mode: Modes
math mode, entering: Math formulas
math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode
math symbols: Math symbols
minipage, creating a: minipage
modes: Modes
monospace font: Font styles
moving arguments: \protect
multicolumn text: \twocolumn
multind package: Indexes
multiplication symbol, discretionary line break: Math miscellany

N
nested \include, not allowed: \include
new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand
new line, output as input: \obeycr & \restorecr
new line, starting: \\
new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline
new page, starting: \newpage
non-English characters: Non-English characters
notes in the margin: Marginal notes
null delimiter: Math miscellany
numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter

O
oblique font: Font styles
oe ligature: Non-English characters
ogonek: Accents
one-column output: \onecolumn
opening quote: Text symbols
options, document class: Document class options
options, global: Document class options
ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols
oslash: Non-English characters
overbar accent: Accents
overdot accent, math: Math accents
overview of LaTeX: Overview

P
packages, loading: Document class options
page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak
page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak
page breaking: Page breaking
page layout parameters: Page layout parameters
page number, cross referencing: \pageref
page numbering style: \pagenumbering
page styles: Page styles
paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage
paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation
paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quote
paragraph mode: Modes
paragraph symbol: Text symbols
paragraphs: Making paragraphs
parameters, for footnotes: Footnote parameters
parameters, page layout: Page layout parameters
period, centered, in text: Text symbols
pictures, creating: picture
pilcrow: Text symbols
poetry, an environment for: verse
polish l: Non-English characters
postscript, in letters: \ps
pounds symbol: Text symbols
preamble, defined: Starting & ending
predefined lengths: Predefined lengths
prompt, ‘*: Command line

Q
questionation point, upside-down: Text symbols
quotation marks, French: Text symbols
quote, straight base: Text symbols
quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation
quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quote

R
ragged left text: \raggedleft
ragged left text, environment for: flushright
ragged right text: \raggedright
ragged right text, environment for: flushleft
redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
registered symbol: Text symbols
remarks in the margin: Marginal notes
reserved characters: Reserved characters
right angle quotation marks: Text symbols
right arrow, in text: Text symbols
right brace, in text: Text symbols
right quote: Text symbols
right quote, double: Text symbols
right quote, single: Text symbols
right-justifying text: \raggedleft
right-justifying text, environment for: flushright
ring accent: Accents
robust commands: \protect
roman font: Font styles
running header and footer: Page layout parameters
running header and footer style: \pagestyle

S
sans serif font: Font styles
script letters for math: Font styles
section number, cross referencing: \ref
section numbers, printing: Sectioning
section symbol: Text symbols
sectioning: Sectioning
setspace package: Low-level font commands
setting counters: \setcounter
sharp S letters: Non-English characters
showidx package: Indexes
simulating typed text: verbatim
single angle quotation marks: Text symbols
single guillemets: Text symbols
single left quote: Text symbols
single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols
single right quote: Text symbols
sizes of text: Font sizes
slanted font: Font styles
small caps font: Font styles
space, inserting vertical: \addvspace
spaces: Spaces
spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode
Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols
special characters: Non-English characters
splitting the input file: Splitting the input
starting & ending: Starting & ending
starting a new page: \newpage
starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage
starting on a right-hand page: \cleardoublepage
sterling symbol: Text symbols
straight double quote, base: Text symbols
straight quote, base: Text symbols
stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom
styles of text: Font styles
styles, page: Page styles
subscript: Subscripts & superscripts
superscript: Subscripts & superscripts
symbols, math: Math symbols

T
tab stops, using: tabbing
table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline
table of contents, creating: Tables of contents
tables, creating: table
terminal input/output: Terminal input/output
TeX logo: Text symbols
text symbols: Text symbols
thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle
theorems, defining: \newtheorem
theorems, typesetting: theorem
thorn, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters
three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols
tie-after accent: Accents
tilde accent: Accents
tilde accent, math: Math accents
tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols
title pages, creating: titlepage
title, for titlepage: \maketitle
titles, making: \maketitle
trademark symbol: Text symbols
two-column output: \twocolumn
typed text, simulating: verbatim
typeface sizes: Font sizes
typeface styles: Font styles
typefaces: Typefaces
typewriter font: Font styles
typewriter labels in lists: description

U
umlaut accent: Accents
underbar: Accents
underscore, in text: Text symbols
unordered lists: itemize
using BibTeX: Using BibTeX

V
variables, a list of: Counters
vector symbol, math: Math accents
verbatim text: verbatim
verbatim text, inline: \verb
vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols
vertical bar, in text: Text symbols
vertical space: \addvspace
vertical space before paragraphs: \parskip
visible space: \verb
visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols

W
wide hat accent, math: Math accents
wide tile accent, math: Math accents

X
xindy program: Indexes

+
Jump to:   * +   +. +   +` +   +
+A +   +B +   +C +   +D +   +E +   +F +   +G +   +H +   +I +   +J +   +K +   +L +   +M +   +N +   +O +   +P +   +Q +   +R +   +S +   +T +   +U +   +V +   +W +   +X +   +
+ +
-


-Previous: Concept Index, -Up: Top - -
- -

Command Index

- - - - +
+

+Previous: Concept Index, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+
+ +

Command Index

+ +
Jump to:   $ +   +1 +   +@ +   +\ +   +^ +   +_ +   +
+A +   +B +   +C +   +D +   +E +   +F +   +I +   +L +   +M +   +N +   +O +   +P +   +Q +   +R +   +S +   +T +   +V +   +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Index Entry  Section

$
$: Math formulas

1
10pt option: Document class options
11pt option: Document class options
12pt option: Document class options

@
@{...}: array

\
\" (umlaut accent): Accents
\#: Reserved characters
\$: Reserved characters
\%: Reserved characters
\&: Reserved characters
\' (acute accent): Accents
\' (tabbing): tabbing
\(: Math formulas
\): Math formulas
\*: Math miscellany
\+: tabbing
\,: Spacing in math mode
\-: tabbing
\- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation)
\. (dot-over accent): Accents
\/: \/
\:: Spacing in math mode
\;: Spacing in math mode
\<: tabbing
\= (macron accent): Accents
\= (tabbing): tabbing
\>: tabbing
\>: Spacing in math mode
\> (tabbing): tabbing
\@: \AT
\@fnsymbol: Symbolic footnotes
\a (tabbing): tabbing
\a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing
\a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing
\aa (å): Non-English characters
\AA (Å): Non-English characters
\acute: Math accents
\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text}: \addcontentsline
\address: \address
\addtocontents{ext}{text}: \addtocontents
\addtocounter: \addtocounter
\addtolength: \addtolength
\addvspace: \addvspace
\ae (æ): Non-English characters
\AE (Æ): Non-English characters
\aleph: Math symbols
\alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
\Alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
\Alph example: enumerate
\alpha: Math symbols
\alsoname: Indexes
\amalg: Math symbols
\and for \author: \maketitle
\angle: Math symbols
\appendix: Sectioning
\approx: Math symbols
\arabic: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
\arccos: Math functions
\arcsin: Math functions
\arctan: Math functions
\arg: Math functions
\arraycolsep: array
\arrayrulewidth: tabular
\arraystretch: tabular
\ast: Math symbols
\asymp: Math symbols
\author{name \and name2}: \maketitle
\a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing
\b (bar-under accent): Accents
\backslash: Math symbols
\backslash: Reserved characters
\bar: Math accents
\baselineskip: Low-level font commands
\baselinestretch: Low-level font commands
\begin: Environments
\beta: Math symbols
\bf: Font styles
\bfseries: Font styles
\bibitem: \bibitem
\bibliography: Using BibTeX
\bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX
\bigcap: Math symbols
\bigcap: Math symbols
\bigcirc: Math symbols
\bigcup: Math symbols
\bigodot: Math symbols
\bigoplus: Math symbols
\bigotimes: Math symbols
\bigskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip
\bigskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip
\bigsqcup: Math symbols
\bigtriangledown: Math symbols
\bigtriangleup: Math symbols
\biguplus: Math symbols
\bigwedge: Math symbols
\bmod: Math functions
\boldmath: Math formulas
\bot: Math symbols
\bottomfraction: figure
\bowtie: Math symbols
\Box: Math symbols
\breve: Math accents
\bullet: Math symbols
\c (cedilla accent): Accents
\cal: Font styles
\cap: Math symbols
\capitalacute: Accents
\capitalbreve: Accents
\capitalcaron: Accents
\capitalcedilla: Accents
\capitalcircumflex: Accents
\capitaldieresis: Accents
\capitaldotaccent: Accents
\capitalgrave: Accents
\capitalhungarumlaut: Accents
\capitalmacron: Accents
\capitalnewtie: Accents
\capitalogonek: Accents
\capitalring: Accents
\capitaltie: Accents
\capitaltilde: Accents
\caption: figure
\cc: \cc
\cdot: Math symbols
\cdots: Math miscellany
\centering: \centering
\chapter: Sectioning
\check: Math accents
\chi: Math symbols
\circ: Math symbols
\circle: \circle
\cite: \cite
\cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage
\clearpage: \clearpage
\cline: \cline
\closing: \closing
\clubsuit: Math symbols
\columnsep: \twocolumn
\columnseprule: \twocolumn
\columnwidth: \twocolumn
\cong: Math symbols
\contentsline: \addcontentsline
\coprod: Math symbols
\copyright: Text symbols
\cos: Math functions
\cosh: Math functions
\cot: Math functions
\coth: Math functions
\csc: Math functions
\cup: Math symbols
\d (dot-under accent): Accents
\dag: Text symbols
\dagger: Math symbols
\dashbox: \dashbox
\dashv: Math symbols
\date{text}: \maketitle
\day: \day \month \year
\dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn
\dblfloatsep: \twocolumn
\dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn
\dbltopfraction: \twocolumn
\ddag: Text symbols
\ddagger: Math symbols
\ddot: Math accents
\ddots: Math miscellany
\deg: Math functions
\Delta: Math symbols
\delta: Math symbols
\depth: Predefined lengths
\det: Math functions
\dh (æ): Non-English characters
\DH (Æ): Non-English characters
\Diamond: Math symbols
\diamond: Math symbols
\diamondsuit: Math symbols
\dim: Math functions
\displaystyle: Math formulas
\div: Math symbols
\dj: Non-English characters
\DJ: Non-English characters
\documentclass: Document classes
\dot: Math accents
\doteq: Math symbols
\dotfill: \dotfill
\dots: Text symbols
\doublerulesep: tabular
\downarrow: Math symbols
\Downarrow: Math symbols
\ell: Math symbols
\em: Font styles
\emph: Font styles
\emptyset: Math symbols
\encl: \encl
\end: Environments
\enlargethispage: \enlargethispage
\enumi: enumerate
\enumii: enumerate
\enumiii: enumerate
\enumiv: enumerate
\epsilon: Math symbols
\equiv: Math symbols
\eta: Math symbols
\evensidemargin: Document class options
\exists: Math symbols
\exp: Math functions
\fbox: \fbox and \framebox
\fboxrule: \framebox (picture)
\fboxrule: \fbox and \framebox
\fboxsep: \framebox (picture)
\fboxsep: \fbox and \framebox
\fill: \hfill
\flat: Math symbols
\floatpagefraction: figure
\floatsep: figure
\flushbottom: \flushbottom
\fnsymbol: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
\fnsymbol, and footnotes: Symbolic footnotes
\fontencoding: Low-level font commands
\fontfamily: Low-level font commands
\fontseries: Low-level font commands
\fontshape: Low-level font commands
\fontsize: Low-level font commands
\footnote: \footnote
\footnotemark: \footnotemark
\footnoterule: Footnote parameters
\footnotesep: Footnote parameters
\footnotesize: Font sizes
\footnotetext: \footnotetext
\footskip: Page layout parameters
\forall: Math symbols
\frac: Math miscellany
\frac{num}{den}: Math miscellany
\frame: \frame
\framebox: \framebox (picture)
\framebox: \fbox and \framebox
\frown: Math symbols
\fussy: \fussy
\Gamma: Math symbols
\gamma: Math symbols
\gcd: Math functions
\ge: Math symbols
\geq: Math symbols
\gets: Math symbols
\gg: Math symbols
\glossary: Glossaries
\glossaryentry: Glossaries
\grave: Math accents
\guillemotleft («): Text symbols
\guillemotright (»): Text symbols
\guilsinglleft (‹): Text symbols
\guilsinglright (›): Text symbols
\H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents
\hat: Math accents
\hbar: Math symbols
\headheight: Page layout parameters
\headsep: Page layout parameters
\heartsuit: Math symbols
\height: Predefined lengths
\hfill: \hfill
\hline: \hline
\hom: Math functions
\hookleftarrow: Math symbols
\hookrightarrow: Math symbols
\hrulefill: \hrulefill
\hspace: \hspace
\huge: Font sizes
\Huge: Font sizes
\hyphenation: \hyphenation
\i (dotless i): Accents
\iff: Math symbols
\ij (ij): Non-English characters
\IJ (IJ): Non-English characters
\Im: Math symbols
\imath: Math accents
\in: Math symbols
\include: \include
\includeonly: \includeonly
\indent: \indent
\index: Indexes
\indexentry: Indexes
\inf: Math functions
\infty: Math symbols
\input: \input
\int: Math symbols
\intextsep: figure
\iota: Math symbols
\it: Font styles
\item: description
\item: enumerate
\item: itemize
\itemindent: itemize
\itemsep: itemize
\itshape: Font styles
\j (dotless j): Accents
\jmath: Math accents
\Join: Math symbols
\k (ogonek): Accents
\kappa: Math symbols
\ker: Math functions
\kill: tabbing
\l (ł): Non-English characters
\L (Ł): Non-English characters
\label: \label
\labelenumi: enumerate
\labelenumii: enumerate
\labelenumiii: enumerate
\labelenumiv: enumerate
\labelitemi: itemize
\labelitemii: itemize
\labelitemiii: itemize
\labelitemiv: itemize
\labelsep: itemize
\labelwidth: itemize
\Lambda: Math symbols
\lambda: Math symbols
\land: Math symbols
\langle: Math symbols
\large: Font sizes
\Large: Font sizes
\LARGE: Font sizes
\LaTeX: Text symbols
\lbrace: Math symbols
\lbrack: Math symbols
\lceil: Math symbols
\ldots: Text symbols
\le: Math symbols
\leadsto: Math symbols
\left delim1 ... \right delim2: Math miscellany
\Leftarrow: Math symbols
\leftarrow: Math symbols
\lefteqn: eqnarray
\leftharpoondown: Math symbols
\leftharpoonup: Math symbols
\leftmargin: itemize
\leftmargini: itemize
\leftmarginii: itemize
\leftmarginiii: itemize
\leftmarginiv: itemize
\leftmarginv: itemize
\leftmarginvi: itemize
\Leftrightarrow: Math symbols
\leftrightarrow: Math symbols
\leq: Math symbols
\lfloor: Math symbols
\lg: Math functions
\lhd: Math symbols
\lim: Math functions
\liminf: Math functions
\limsup: Math functions
\line: \line
\linebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak
\linespread: Low-level font commands
\linethickness: \linethickness
\linewidth: Page layout parameters
\listoffigures: Tables of contents
\listoftables: Tables of contents
\listparindent: itemize
\ll: Math symbols
\ln: Math functions
\lnot: Math symbols
\location: \location
\log: Math functions
\longleftarrow: Math symbols
\longleftrightarrow: Math symbols
\longmapsto: Math symbols
\longrightarrow: Math symbols
\lor: Math symbols
\lq: Text symbols
\makebox: \makebox
\makebox (picture): \makebox (picture)
\makeglossary: Glossaries
\makeindex: Indexes
\makelabels: \makelabels
\maketitle: \maketitle
\mapsto: Math symbols
\marginpar: Marginal notes
\marginparpush: Marginal notes
\marginparsep: Marginal notes
\marginparwidth: Marginal notes
\markboth{left}{right}: \pagestyle
\markright{right}: \pagestyle
\mathbf: Font styles
\mathcal: Font styles
\mathnormal: Font styles
\mathrm: Font styles
\mathsf: Font styles
\mathtt: Font styles
\mathversion: Font styles
\max: Math functions
\mbox: \mbox
\mdseries: Font styles
\medskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip
\medskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip
\mho: Math symbols
\mid: Math symbols
\min: Math functions
\models: Math symbols
\month: \day \month \year
\mp: Math symbols
\mu: Math symbols
\multicolumn: \multicolumn
\multiput: \multiput
\nabla: Math symbols
\name: \name
\natural: Math symbols
\ne: Math symbols
\nearrow: Math symbols
\neg: Math symbols
\neq: Math symbols
\newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand
\newcounter: \newcounter
\newenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
\newfont: \newfont
\newlength: \newlength
\newline: \newline
\NEWLINE: \SPACE
\newpage: \newpage
\newsavebox: \newsavebox
\newtheorem: \newtheorem
\newtie: Accents
\ng: Non-English characters
\NG: Non-English characters
\ni: Math symbols
\nocite: \nocite
\nofiles: Tables of contents
\noindent: \noindent
\nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak
\nonumber: eqnarray
\nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak
\normalfont: Font styles
\normalmarginpar: Marginal notes
\normalsize: Font sizes
\not: Math symbols
\notin: Math symbols
\nu: Math symbols
\nwarrow: Math symbols
\o (ø): Non-English characters
\O (Ø): Non-English characters
\obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr
\oddsidemargin: Document class options
\odot: Math symbols
\oe (œ): Non-English characters
\OE (Œ): Non-English characters
\oint: Math symbols
\Omega: Math symbols
\omega: Math symbols
\ominus: Math symbols
\onecolumn: \onecolumn
\opening: \opening
\oplus: Math symbols
\oslash: Math symbols
\otimes: Math symbols
\oval: \oval
\overbrace{text}: Math miscellany
\overline{text}: Math miscellany
\owns: Math symbols
\P: Text symbols
\pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak
\pagenumbering: \pagenumbering
\pageref: \pageref
\pagestyle: \pagestyle
\paragraph: Sectioning
\parallel: Math symbols
\parbox: \parbox
\parindent: minipage
\parindent: \indent
\parsep: itemize
\parskip: \parskip
\parskip example: itemize
\part: Sectioning
\partial: Math symbols
\partopsep: itemize
\perp: Math symbols
\phi: Math symbols
\Pi: Math symbols
\pi: Math symbols
\pm: Math symbols
\pmod: Math functions
\poptabs: tabbing
\poptabs: tabbing
\pounds: Text symbols
\Pr: Math functions
\prec: Math symbols
\preceq: Math symbols
\prime: Math symbols
\prod: Math symbols
\propto: Math symbols
\protect: \protect
\ps: \ps
\Psi: Math symbols
\psi: Math symbols
\pushtabs: tabbing
\put: \put
\quotedblbase („): Text symbols
\quotesinglbase (‚): Text symbols
\r (ring accent): Accents
\raggedbottom: \raggedbottom
\raggedleft: \raggedleft
\raggedright: \raggedright
\raisebox: \raisebox
\rangle: Math symbols
\rbrace: Math symbols
\rbrack: Math symbols
\rceil: Math symbols
\Re: Math symbols
\ref: \ref
\refstepcounter: \refstepcounter
\renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
\restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr
\reversemarginpar: Marginal notes
\rfloor: Math symbols
\rhd: Math symbols
\rho: Math symbols
\right: Math miscellany
\Rightarrow: Math symbols
\rightarrow: Math symbols
\rightharpoondown: Math symbols
\rightharpoonup: Math symbols
\rightleftharpoons: Math symbols
\rightmargin: itemize
\rm: Font styles
\rmfamily: Font styles
\roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
\roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
\rq: Text symbols
\rule: \rule
\S: Text symbols
\savebox: \savebox
\sbox: \sbox
\sc: Font styles
\scriptsize: Font sizes
\scshape: Font styles
\searrow: Math symbols
\sec: Math functions
\section: Sectioning
\seename: Indexes
\selectfont: Low-level font commands
\setcounter: \setcounter
\setlength: \setlength
\setminus: Math symbols
\settodepth: \settodepth
\settoheight: \settoheight
\settowidth: \settowidth
\sf: Font styles
\sffamily: Font styles
\sharp: Math symbols
\shortstack: \shortstack
\Sigma: Math symbols
\sigma: Math symbols
\signature: \signature
\sim: Math symbols
\simeq: Math symbols
\sin: Math functions
\sinh: Math functions
\sl: Font styles
\slshape: Font styles
\small: Font sizes
\smallint: Math symbols
\smallskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip
\smallskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip
\smile: Math symbols
\SPACE: \SPACE
\spadesuit: Math symbols
\sqcap: Math symbols
\sqcup: Math symbols
\sqrt[root]{arg}: Math miscellany
\sqsubset: Math symbols
\sqsubseteq: Math symbols
\sqsupset: Math symbols
\sqsupseteq: Math symbols
\ss (ß): Non-English characters
\SS (SS): Non-English characters
\stackrel{text}{relation}: Math miscellany
\star: Math symbols
\startbreaks: \startbreaks
\stepcounter: \stepcounter
\stop: Command line
\stopbreaks: \stopbreaks
\subparagraph: Sectioning
\subsection: Sectioning
\subset: Math symbols
\subseteq: Math symbols
\subsubsection: Sectioning
\succ: Math symbols
\succeq: Math symbols
\sum: Math symbols
\sup: Math functions
\supset: Math symbols
\supseteq: Math symbols
\surd: Math symbols
\swarrow: Math symbols
\symbol: Reserved characters
\t (tie-after accent): Accents
\TAB: \SPACE
\tabbingsep: tabbing
\tabcolsep: tabular
\tableofcontents: Tables of contents
\tan: Math functions
\tanh: Math functions
\tau: Math symbols
\telephone: \telephone
\TeX: Text symbols
\textascenderwordmark: Text symbols
\textasciicircum: Text symbols
\textasciitilde: Text symbols
\textasteriskcentered: Text symbols
\textbackslash: Text symbols
\textbar: Text symbols
\textbardbl: Text symbols
\textbf: Font styles
\textbigcircle: Text symbols
\textbraceleft: Text symbols
\textbraceright: Text symbols
\textbullet: Text symbols
\textcapitalwordmark: Text symbols
\textcircled{letter}: Text symbols
\textcompwordmark: Text symbols
\textcopyright: Text symbols
\textdagger: Text symbols
\textdaggerdbl: Text symbols
\textdollar (or $): Text symbols
\textellipsis: Text symbols
\textemdash (or ---): Text symbols
\textendash (or --): Text symbols
\texteuro: Text symbols
\textexclamdown (or !`): Text symbols
\textfloatsep: figure
\textfraction: figure
\textgreater: Text symbols
\textheight: Page layout parameters
\textit: Font styles
\textleftarrow: Text symbols
\textless: Text symbols
\textmd: Font styles
\textnormal: Font styles
\textordfeminine: Text symbols
\textordfeminine: Text symbols
\textordmasculine: Text symbols
\textparagraph: Text symbols
\textperiodcentered: Text symbols
\textquestiondown (or ?`): Text symbols
\textquotedblleft (or ``): Text symbols
\textquotedblright (or '): Text symbols
\textquoteleft (or `): Text symbols
\textquoteright (or '): Text symbols
\textquotestraightbase: Text symbols
\textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols
\textregistered: Text symbols
\textrightarrow: Text symbols
\textrm: Font styles
\textsc: Font styles
\textsf: Font styles
\textsl: Font styles
\textsterling: Text symbols
\textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols
\texttrademark: Text symbols
\texttt: Font styles
\texttwelveudash: Text symbols
\textunderscore: Text symbols
\textup: Font styles
\textvisiblespace: Text symbols
\textwidth: Page layout parameters
\th (þ): Non-English characters
\TH (Þ): Non-English characters
\thanks{text}: \maketitle
\theta: Math symbols
\thicklines: \thicklines
\thinlines: \thinlines
\thinspace: \thinspace
\thispagestyle: \thispagestyle
\tilde: Math accents
\times: Math symbols
\tiny: Font sizes
\title{text}: \maketitle
\to: Math symbols
\today: \today
\top: Math symbols
\topfraction: figure
\topmargin: Page layout parameters
\topsep: itemize
\topskip: Page layout parameters
\totalheight: Predefined lengths
\triangle: Math symbols
\triangleleft: Math symbols
\triangleright: Math symbols
\tt: Font styles
\ttfamily: Font styles
\twocolumn: \twocolumn
\typein: \typein
\typeout: \typeout
\u (breve accent): Accents
\unboldmath: Math formulas
\underbar: Accents
\underbrace{math}: Math miscellany
\underline{text}: Math miscellany
\unitlength: picture
\unlhd: Math symbols
\unrhd: Math symbols
\Uparrow: Math symbols
\uparrow: Math symbols
\Updownarrow: Math symbols
\updownarrow: Math symbols
\uplus: Math symbols
\upshape: Font styles
\Upsilon: Math symbols
\upsilon: Math symbols
\usebox: \usebox
\usecounter: \usecounter
\usefont: Low-level font commands
\usepackage: Document class options
\v (breve accent): Accents
\value: \value
\varepsilon: Math symbols
\varphi: Math symbols
\varpi: Math symbols
\varrho: Math symbols
\varsigma: Math symbols
\vartheta: Math symbols
\vdash: Math symbols
\vdots: Math miscellany
\vdots: Math miscellany
\vec: Math accents
\vector: \vector
\vee: Math symbols
\verb: \verb
\Vert: Math symbols
\vert: Math symbols
\vfill: \vfill
\vline: \vline
\vspace: \vspace
\wedge: Math symbols
\widehat: Math accents
\widehat: Math accents
\width: Predefined lengths
\wp: Math symbols
\wr: Math symbols
\Xi: Math symbols
\xi: Math symbols
\year: \day \month \year
\zeta: Math symbols
\[: Math formulas
\\ (for array): array
\\ (for center): center
\\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray
\\ (for flushright): flushright
\\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack
\\ (tabbing): tabbing
\\ for flushleft: flushleft
\\ for letters: Letters
\\ for tabular: tabular
\\ for verse: verse
\\ for \author: \maketitle
\\ for \title: \maketitle
\\ force line break: \\
\\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray
\]: Math formulas
\^: Reserved characters
\^ (circumflex accent): Accents
\_: Reserved characters
\` (grave accent): Accents
\` (tabbing): tabbing
\{: Reserved characters
\|: Math symbols
\}: Reserved characters
\~: Reserved characters
\~ (tilde accent): Accents

^
^: Subscripts & superscripts

_
_: Subscripts & superscripts

A
a4paper option: Document class options
a5paper option: Document class options
abstract environment: abstract
array environment: array
article class: Document classes

B
b5paper option: Document class options
book class: Document classes

C
center environment: center

D
description environment: description
displaymath environment: displaymath
displaymath environment: Math formulas
document environment: document
draft option: Document class options

E
enumerate environment: enumerate
eqnarray environment: eqnarray
equation environment: equation
equation environment: Math formulas
executivepaper option: Document class options

F
figure: figure
final option: Document class options
fleqn option: Document class options
flushleft environment: flushleft
flushright environment: flushright

I
indexspace: Indexes
itemize environment: itemize

L
landscape option: Document class options
legalpaper option: Document class options
leqno option: Document class options
letter: letter
letter class: Document classes
letterpaper option: Document class options
list: list
lR box: picture
lrbox: lrbox

M
math environment: math
math environment: Math formulas
minipage environment: minipage

N
notitlepage option: Document class options

O
onecolumn option: Document class options
oneside option: Document class options
openany option: Document class options
openbib option: Document class options
openright option: Document class options

P
picture: picture
printindex: Indexes

Q
quotation: quotation
quote: quote

R
report class: Document classes

S
secnumdepth counter: Sectioning
slides class: Document classes

T
tabbing environment: tabbing
table: table
tabular environment: tabular
textcomp package: Text symbols
thebibliography: thebibliography
theorem environment: theorem
titlepage environment: titlepage
titlepage option: Document class options
twocolumn option: Document class options
twoside option: Document class options

V
verbatim environment: verbatim
verse environment: verse

+
Jump to:   $ +   +1 +   +@ +   +\ +   +^ +   +_ +   +
+A +   +B +   +C +   +D +   +E +   +F +   +I +   +L +   +M +   +N +   +O +   +P +   +Q +   +R +   +S +   +T +   +V +   +
+ +
+

+ +

+ + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf index b20b27703af..2b09e7c4a01 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi index b70996d1b16..4b90945f28f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ \input texinfo -@c $Id: latex2e.texi 255 2010-07-12 17:37:55Z karl $ +@c $Id: latex2e.texi 257 2010-09-04 02:03:07Z karl $ @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) @setfilename latex2e.info @set UPDATED July 2010 @@ -1043,7 +1043,7 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: @menu * abstract:: Produce an abstract. * array:: Math arrays. -* center:: Centred lines. +* center:: Centered lines. * description:: Labelled lists. * displaymath:: Formulas that appear on their own line. * document:: Enclose the whole document. @@ -2236,7 +2236,7 @@ environment. The following commands can be used inside a @code{tabbing} enviroment: @ftable @code -@item \\ @r{tabbing} +@item \\ @r{(tabbing)} End a line. @item \= @r{(tabbing)} @@ -2415,8 +2415,8 @@ A column of left-aligned items. @item r A column of right-aligned items. -@item -A column of centred items. +@item c +A column of centered items. @item | A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. @@ -3816,6 +3816,12 @@ In two column mode, the default is @samp{48pt}. @end ftable +The standard @LaTeX{} routine for marginal notes does not prevent +notes from falling off the bottom of the page. +@c @TeX{} FAQ entry on this topic (xx when there): +@c @url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=marginparside}. +@c (+marginfix) + @node Math formulas @chapter Math formulas @@ -6785,8 +6791,7 @@ The @code{beamer} class creates slides presentations. @url{http://tug.org/TUGboat}. @verbatim -\documentclass{ltugboat} % ltugproc for proceedings - +\documentclass{ltugboat} \usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{ifpdf} \ifpdf @@ -6796,9 +6801,7 @@ The @code{beamer} class creates slides presentations. \usepackage{url} \fi -\begin{document} - -\title{Example \TUB\ Regular Article} +\title{Example \TUB\ Article} % repeat info for each author. \author{First Last} @@ -6808,7 +6811,8 @@ The @code{beamer} class creates slides presentations. \maketitle -% The abstract comes after \maketitle in ltugboat. +\begin{document} + \begin{abstract} This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue. \end{abstract} @@ -6818,26 +6822,26 @@ This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue. This is an example article for \TUB, from \url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}. -We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the hyperref -package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). \TUB\ is produced -using \acro{PDF} files exclusively, nowadays. +We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the +hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). +Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others: {\small \begin{verbatim} \AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW -\BibTeX \CandT \CTAN \DTD \DVItoVDU \HTML -\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \JoT \LAMSTeX \LaTeXe -\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \pcMF \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas +\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML +\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \LaTeXe +\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas \PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS -\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG -\tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \VorTeX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE +\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG \tug +\UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE \Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag \careof \thinskip -\acro{FRED} -> {\sc fred} % please use! +\acro{FRED} -> {\small fred} % please use! \cs{fred} -> \fred \env{fred} -> \begin{fred} \meta{fred} -> @@ -6857,8 +6861,7 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. \nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty \bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX - -\makesignature % not in ltugproc +\makesignature \end{document} @end verbatim diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt index 1445a1b7266..8c9a6e28506 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt @@ -1,246 +1,3 @@ -Short Contents -************** - -LaTeX2e -1 Overview of LaTeX -2 Starting & ending -3 Document classes -4 Typefaces -5 Layout -6 Sectioning -7 Cross references -8 Environments -9 Line breaking -10 Page breaking -11 Footnotes -12 Definitions -13 Counters -14 Lengths -15 Making paragraphs -16 Math formulas -17 Modes -18 Page styles -19 Spaces -20 Boxes -21 Special insertions -22 Splitting the input -23 Front/back matter -24 Letters -25 Terminal input/output -26 Command line -Appendix A Document templates -Concept Index -Command Index - - -Table of Contents -***************** - -LaTeX2e -1 Overview of LaTeX -2 Starting & ending -3 Document classes - 3.1 Document class options -4 Typefaces - 4.1 Font styles - 4.2 Font sizes - 4.3 Low-level font commands -5 Layout - 5.1 `\onecolumn' - 5.2 `\twocolumn' - 5.3 `\flushbottom' - 5.4 `\raggedbottom' - 5.5 Page layout parameters -6 Sectioning -7 Cross references - 7.1 `\label' - 7.2 `\pageref{KEY}' - 7.3 `\ref{KEY}' -8 Environments - 8.1 `abstract' - 8.2 `array' - 8.3 `center' - 8.3.1 `\centering' - 8.4 `description' - 8.5 `displaymath' - 8.6 `document' - 8.7 `enumerate' - 8.8 `eqnarray' - 8.9 `equation' - 8.10 `figure' - 8.11 `flushleft' - 8.11.1 `\raggedright' - 8.12 `flushright' - 8.12.1 `\raggedleft' - 8.13 `itemize' - 8.14 `letter' environment: writing letters - 8.15 `list' - 8.16 `math' - 8.17 `minipage' - 8.18 `picture' - 8.18.1 `\circle' - 8.18.2 `\makebox' - 8.18.3 `\framebox' - 8.18.4 `\dashbox' - 8.18.5 `\frame' - 8.18.6 `\line' - 8.18.7 `\linethickness' - 8.18.8 `\thicklines' - 8.18.9 `\thinlines' - 8.18.10 `\multiput' - 8.18.11 `\oval' - 8.18.12 `\put' - 8.18.13 `\shortstack' - 8.18.14 `\vector' - 8.19 `quotation' - 8.20 `quote' - 8.21 `tabbing' - 8.22 `table' - 8.23 `tabular' - 8.23.1 `\multicolumn' - 8.23.2 `\cline' - 8.23.3 `\hline' - 8.23.4 `\vline' - 8.24 `thebibliography' - 8.24.1 `\bibitem' - 8.24.2 `\cite' - 8.24.3 `\nocite' - 8.24.4 Using BibTeX - 8.25 `theorem' - 8.26 `titlepage' - 8.27 `verbatim' - 8.27.1 `\verb' - 8.28 `verse' -9 Line breaking - 9.1 `\\'[*][MORESPACE] - 9.2 `\obeycr' & `\restorecr' - 9.3 `\newline' - 9.4 `\-' (discretionary hyphen) - 9.5 `\fussy' - 9.6 `\sloppy' - 9.7 `\hyphenation' - 9.8 `\linebreak' & `\nolinebreak' -10 Page breaking - 10.1 `\cleardoublepage' - 10.2 `\clearpage' - 10.3 `\newpage' - 10.4 `\enlargethispage' - 10.5 `\pagebreak' & `\nopagebreak' -11 Footnotes - 11.1 `\footnote' - 11.2 `\footnotemark' - 11.3 `\footnotetext' - 11.4 Symbolic footnotes - 11.5 Footnote parameters -12 Definitions - 12.1 `\newcommand' & `\renewcommand' - 12.2 `\newcounter' - 12.3 `\newlength' - 12.4 `\newsavebox' - 12.5 `\newenvironment' & `\renewenvironment' - 12.6 `\newtheorem' - 12.7 `\newfont' - 12.8 `\protect' -13 Counters - 13.1 `\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters - 13.2 `\usecounter{COUNTER}' - 13.3 `\value{COUNTER}' - 13.4 `\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' - 13.5 `\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' - 13.6 `\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' - 13.7 `\stepcounter{COUNTER}' - 13.8 `\day \month \year': Predefined counters -14 Lengths - 14.1 `\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' - 14.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} - 14.3 `\settodepth' - 14.4 `\settoheight' - 14.5 `\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' - 14.6 Predefined lengths -15 Making paragraphs - 15.1 `\indent' - 15.2 `\noindent' - 15.3 `\parskip' - 15.4 Marginal notes -16 Math formulas - 16.1 Subscripts & superscripts - 16.2 Math symbols - 16.3 Math functions - 16.4 Math accents - 16.5 Spacing in math mode - 16.6 Math miscellany -17 Modes -18 Page styles - 18.1 `\maketitle' - 18.2 `\pagenumbering' - 18.3 `\pagestyle' - 18.4 `\thispagestyle{STYLE}' -19 Spaces - 19.1 `\hspace' - 19.2 `\hfill' - 19.3 `\SPACE' - 19.4 `\@' - 19.5 `\thinspace' - 19.6 `\/' - 19.7 `\hrulefill' - 19.8 `\dotfill' - 19.9 `\addvspace' - 19.10 `\bigskip \medskip \smallskip' - 19.11 `\vfill' - 19.12 `\vspace[*]{LENGTH}' -20 Boxes - 20.1 `\mbox{TEXT}' - 20.2 `\fbox' and `\framebox' - 20.3 `lrbox' - 20.4 `\makebox' - 20.5 `\parbox' - 20.6 `\raisebox' - 20.7 `\savebox' - 20.8 `\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}' - 20.9 `\usebox{\BOXCMD' -21 Special insertions - 21.1 Reserved characters - 21.2 Text symbols - 21.3 Accents - 21.4 Non-English characters - 21.5 `\rule' - 21.6 `\today' -22 Splitting the input - 22.1 `\include' - 22.2 \`includeonly' - 22.3 \input -23 Front/back matter - 23.1 Tables of contents - 23.1.1 \addcontentsline - 23.1.2 \addtocontents - 23.2 Glossaries - 23.3 Indexes -24 Letters - 24.1 \address{RETURN-ADDRESS} - 24.2 `\cc' - 24.3 `\closing' - 24.4 `\encl' - 24.5 `\location' - 24.6 `\makelabels' - 24.7 `\name' - 24.8 `\opening{TEXT}' - 24.9 `\ps' - 24.10 `\signature{TEXT}' - 24.11 `\startbreaks' - 24.12 `\stopbreaks' - 24.13 `\telephone' -25 Terminal input/output - 25.1 `\typein[CMD]{MSG}' - 25.2 `\typeout{MSG}' -26 Command line -Appendix A Document templates - A.1 `book' template - A.2 `beamer' template - A.3 `tugboat' template -Concept Index -Command Index - - LaTeX2e ******* @@ -249,11 +6,11 @@ preparation system, version as of July 2010. It is intended to cover LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of LaTeX for many years. LaTeX is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's TeX -typesetting program. LaTeX was originally created by Leslie Lamport; -it is now maintained by a group of volunteers -(`http://latex-project.org'). The official documentation written by -the LaTeX project is available there. Again, the present document is -unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX maintainers. +typesetting program. LaTeX was originally created by Leslie Lamport; it +is now maintained by a group of volunteers (`http://latex-project.org'). +The official documentation written by the LaTeX project is available +there. Again, the present document is unofficial and has not been +reviewed by the LaTeX maintainers. 1 Overview of LaTeX ******************* @@ -287,10 +44,10 @@ three files as output: 3. An "auxiliary" or `.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for things such as sectioning. - A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a -`\' followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single -non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, `[]', are optional -while arguments contained in braces, `{}', are required. + A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a `\' +followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter. +Arguments contained in square brackets, `[]', are optional while +arguments contained in braces, `{}', are required. LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless explicitly directed to do otherwise. @@ -309,9 +66,8 @@ where the CLASS is a valid document class for LaTeX. *Note Document classes::, for details of the various document classes available locally. - You may include other LaTeX commands between the `\documentclass' -and the `\begin{document}' commands (this area is called the -"preamble"). + You may include other LaTeX commands between the `\documentclass' and +the `\begin{document}' commands (this area is called the "preamble"). 3 Document classes ****************** @@ -320,8 +76,8 @@ The class of a given document is defined with the command: \documentclass[OPTIONS]{CLASS} -The `\documentclass' command must be the first command in a LaTeX -source file. +The `\documentclass' command must be the first command in a LaTeX source +file. Built-in LaTeX document CLASS names are (many other document classes are available as add-ons; *note Overview::): @@ -390,16 +146,16 @@ paper size (default is `letterpaper'): page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For one-sided printing the text is centered, for two-sided, - `\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference between `\paperwidth' - and `\textwidth' with `\evensidemargin' the remainder. + `\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference between `\paperwidth' and + `\textwidth' with `\evensidemargin' the remainder. `openright' `openany' Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default is `openright' for book. - The `slides' class offers the option `clock' for printing the time -at the bottom of each note. + The `slides' class offers the option `clock' for printing the time at +the bottom of each note. Additional packages are loaded like this: @@ -408,8 +164,8 @@ at the bottom of each note. To specify more than one PKG, you can separate them with a comma, or use multiple `\usepackage' commands. - Any options given in the `\documentclass' command that are unknown -by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with + Any options given in the `\documentclass' command that are unknown by +the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with `\usepackage'. 4 Typefaces @@ -525,17 +281,16 @@ differently than the above commands, too: `{\CMD ...}' instead of `\tt' Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width). - 4.2 Font sizes ============== The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The -table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size -used (in points) with the `10pt', `11pt', and `12pt' document size -options, respectively (*note Document class options::). +table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size used +(in points) with the `10pt', `11pt', and `12pt' document size options, +respectively (*note Document class options::). Command `10pt' `11pt' `12pt' --------------------------------------------------- +-------------------------------------------------- `\tiny' 5 6 6 `\scriptsize' 7 8 8 `\footnotesize' 8 9 10 @@ -547,9 +302,9 @@ Command `10pt' `11pt' `12pt' `\huge' 20.74 20.74 24.88 `\Huge' 24.88 24.88 24.88 - The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of -the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end -of the current group. You can also use the environment form of these + The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of the +declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of +the current group. You can also use the environment form of these commands; for instance, `\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'. 4.3 Low-level font commands @@ -633,7 +388,6 @@ ones. and `\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by `\selectfont'. - 5 Layout ******** @@ -662,14 +416,13 @@ typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts. The distance between columns (35pt by default). `\columnseprule' - The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so - there is no rule. + The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there + is no rule. `\columnwidth' The width of the current column; this is equal to `\textwidth' in single-column text. - These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: `\dbltopfraction' @@ -690,7 +443,6 @@ typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts. Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page and the main text. Default `20pt plus2pt minus4pt'. - 5.3 `\flushbottom' ================== @@ -715,14 +467,14 @@ the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched. size. `\headsep' - Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the - top of the main text. Default is `25pt', except in the `book' - class, where it varies with the type size. + Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top + of the main text. Default is `25pt', except in the `book' class, + where it varies with the type size. `\footskip' - Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the - baseline of the page footer. Default is `30pt', except in the - `book' class, where it varies with the type size. + Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline + of the page footer. Default is `30pt', except in the `book' class, + where it varies with the type size. `\linewidth' Width of the current line; the default varies with the font size, @@ -734,8 +486,8 @@ the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched. The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with the font size, document class, etc. For an `article' or `report' document in `10pt', it's set to `43\baselineskip'; for - `book', it's `41\baselineskip'. For `11pt', it's - `38\baselineskip' and for `12pt', `36\baselineskip'. + `book', it's `41\baselineskip'. For `11pt', it's `38\baselineskip' + and for `12pt', `36\baselineskip'. `\textwidth' The normal horizontal width of the page body; the default varies as @@ -747,14 +499,13 @@ the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched. Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is computed based on many other parameters: `\paperheight - 2in - - \headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then - divided by two. + \headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then divided + by two. `\topskip' Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline - of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default - is the same as the font size, e.g., `10pt' at `10pt'. - + of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is + the same as the font size, e.g., `10pt' at `10pt'. 6 Sectioning ************ @@ -792,15 +543,15 @@ To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument TOCTITLE that, when given, specifies the text for these other places. Also, all sectioning commands have `*'-forms that print TITLE as -usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the -table of contents. For instance: +usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table +of contents. For instance: \section*{Preamble} - The `\appendix' command changes the way following sectional units -are numbered. The `\appendix' command itself generates no text and -does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command -is something like + The `\appendix' command changes the way following sectional units are +numbered. The `\appendix' command itself generates no text and does not +affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command is +something like \chapter{A Chapter} ... @@ -928,8 +679,8 @@ that tells how items in that row should be formatted, as follows: Column entries are separated by `&'. Column entries may include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array is terminated with `\\'. - In the template, the construct `@{TEXT}' puts TEXT between columns -in each row. + In the template, the construct `@{TEXT}' puts TEXT between columns in +each row. Here's an example: @@ -965,10 +716,10 @@ current page. Each line is terminated with the string `\\'. ------------------ The `\centering' declaration corresponds to the `center' environment. -This declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or -in a `parbox'. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on -the page by putting a `\centering' command at the beginning of the -figure or table environment. +This declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or in +a `parbox'. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on the +page by putting a `\centering' command at the beginning of the figure or +table environment. Unlike the `center' environment, the `\centering' command does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph @@ -1024,8 +775,8 @@ or MATH text on its own line, centered by default. The global `fleqn' option makes equations flush left; see *note Document class options::. - No equation number is added to `displaymath' text; to get an -equation number, use the `equation' environment (*note equation::). + No equation number is added to `displaymath' text; to get an equation +number, use the `equation' environment (*note equation::). 8.6 `document' ============== @@ -1083,13 +834,13 @@ letters: ... \end{eqnarray} - The `eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of -equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column `array' + The `eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of equations +or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column `array' environment, with consecutive rows separated by `\\' and consecutive items within a row separated by an `&'. - `\\*' can also be used to separate equations, with its normal -meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. + `\\*' can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning +of not allowing a page break at that line. An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a `\nonumber' command. Alternatively, The `*'-form of the environment @@ -1154,7 +905,6 @@ put a float: (Page of floats)--on a separate float page, which is a page containing no text, only floats. - The standard report and article classes use the default placement `tbp'. @@ -1178,8 +928,8 @@ the list of figures instead of TEXT (*note Tables of contents::). `\intextsep' Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; - default `12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' and `11pt' styles, - `14pt plus4pt minus4pt' for `12pt'. + default `12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' and `11pt' styles, `14pt + plus4pt minus4pt' for `12pt'. `\textfloatsep' Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; @@ -1194,7 +944,6 @@ the list of figures instead of TEXT (*note Tables of contents::). Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before floats; default is `.7'. - 8.11 `flushleft' ================ @@ -1212,8 +961,8 @@ right Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'. --------------------- The `\raggedright' declaration corresponds to the `flushleft' -environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such -as `quote' or in a `parbox'. +environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as +`quote' or in a `parbox'. Unlike the `flushleft' environment, the `\raggedright' command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph @@ -1238,8 +987,8 @@ left. Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'. -------------------- The `\raggedleft' declaration corresponds to the `flushright' -environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such -as `quote' or in a `parbox'. +environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as +`quote' or in a `parbox'. Unlike the `flushright' environment, the `\raggedleft' command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph @@ -1260,11 +1009,11 @@ Synopsis: The `itemize' environment produces an "unordered", "bulleted" list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. -They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, -such as `enumerate' (*note enumerate::). +They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such +as `enumerate' (*note enumerate::). - Each item of an `itemize' list begins with an `\item' command. -There must be at least one `\item' command within the environment. + Each item of an `itemize' list begins with an `\item' command. There +must be at least one `\item' command within the environment. By default, the marks at each level look like this: @@ -1315,7 +1064,6 @@ greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: `quotation', and `verse' environments, where it is set equal to `\leftmargin'. - Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather loose, by default). @@ -1340,7 +1088,6 @@ loose, by default). documents, `3pt plus1pt minus1pt' for `11pt', and `3pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `12pt'. - Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide space between items. Here is an example defining an `itemize*' environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs @@ -1374,8 +1121,8 @@ documents, but often in macros. The mandatory LABELING argument specifies how items should be labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to `\item'). This -argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the -label. It can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands. +argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the label. +It can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands. The mandatory SPACING argument contains commands to change the spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be @@ -1428,11 +1175,11 @@ footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. ... PICTURE COMMANDS ... \end{picture} - The `picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind -of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You -tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their -coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point -and a minus sign--a number like `5', `0.3' or `-3.1416'. A coordinate + The `picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind of +picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell +LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their +coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and +a minus sign--a number like `5', `0.3' or `-3.1416'. A coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the unit length `\unitlength', so if `\unitlength' has been set to `1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters. You should only change the value of @@ -1462,16 +1209,16 @@ For example, if `\unitlength' has been set to `1mm', the command produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose upper-right -corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first draw a -picture, you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the origin -at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by -shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate optional argument. +corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first draw a picture, +you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the origin at the +lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by shifting +everything, you can just add the appropriate optional argument. The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of -the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture -really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the -picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by -LaTeX in determining how much room to leave for it. +the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really +is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or +even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX in +determining how much room to leave for it. Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the `\put' command. The command @@ -1509,8 +1256,8 @@ solid circle. normal `\makebox' command except that you must specify a `width' and `height' in multiples of `\unitlength'. - The optional argument, `[position]', specifies the quadrant that -your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: + The optional argument, `[position]', specifies the quadrant that your +text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: `t' Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. @@ -1524,7 +1271,6 @@ your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: `r' Moves the item to the right. - *Note \makebox::. 8.18.3 `\framebox' @@ -1538,9 +1284,8 @@ Synopsis: except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it creates. - The `\framebox' command produces a rule of thickness `\fboxrule', -and leaves a space `\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the -box. + The `\framebox' command produces a rule of thickness `\fboxrule', and +leaves a space `\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box. 8.18.4 `\dashbox' ----------------- @@ -1552,8 +1297,10 @@ Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: `\dashbox' creates a dashed rectangle around TEXT in a `picture' environment. Dashes are DLEN units long, and the rectangle has overall width RWIDTH and height RHEIGHT. The TEXT is positioned at optional -POS. A dashed box looks best when the `rwidth' and `rheight' are -multiples of the `dlen'. +POS. + + A dashed box looks best when the `rwidth' and `rheight' are multiples +of the `dlen'. 8.18.5 `\frame' --------------- @@ -1724,8 +1471,8 @@ Synopsis: \end{tabbing} The `tabbing' environment provides a way to align text in columns. -It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on -an ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where the width of +It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on an +ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant and known in advance. This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the `tabular' @@ -1733,7 +1480,7 @@ environment. The following commands can be used inside a `tabbing' enviroment: -`\\ tabbing' +`\\ (tabbing)' End a line. `\= (tabbing)' @@ -1757,8 +1504,8 @@ environment. `\' (tabbing)' Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e. everything from the most recent `\>', `\<', `\'', `\\', or - `\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush - against the current column's tab stop. + `\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush against + the current column's tab stop. `\` (tabbing)' Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including @@ -1770,15 +1517,15 @@ environment. `\`' and the command that ends the line. `\a (tabbing)' - In a `tabbing' environment, the commands `\=', `\'' and `\`' do - not produce accents as usual (*note Accents::). Instead, the - commands `\a=', `\a'' and `\a`' are used. + In a `tabbing' environment, the commands `\=', `\'' and `\`' do not + produce accents as usual (*note Accents::). Instead, the commands + `\a=', `\a'' and `\a`' are used. `\kill' - Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like `\\' - except that it throws away the current line instead of producing - output for it. The effect of any `\=', `\+' or `\-' commands in - that line remain in effect. + Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like `\\' except + that it throws away the current line instead of producing output + for it. The effect of any `\=', `\+' or `\-' commands in that line + remain in effect. `\poptabs' Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last `\pushtabs'. @@ -1791,7 +1538,6 @@ environment. `\tabbingsep' Distance to left of tab stop moved by `\''. - This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: \begin{tabbing} @@ -1817,16 +1563,16 @@ Synopsis: \end{table} Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. -Tables will not be split between two pages. +usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. Tables +will not be split between two pages. The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put a float; these are the same as that used with the `figure' environment, and described there (*note figure::). - The standard `report' and `article' classes use the default -placement `[tbp]'. + The standard `report' and `article' classes use the default placement +`[tbp]'. The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc., you wish. The `\caption' command allows you to title your table. @@ -1851,9 +1597,9 @@ Synopsis: These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. - `\\' must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, -except for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command -(to put a rule below the table) follows. + `\\' must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except +for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command (to put a +rule below the table) follows. The mandatory and optional arguments consist of: @@ -1863,13 +1609,13 @@ except for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command specified width. `pos' - Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the - centre of the environment. + Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre + of the environment. - `t' + `t' align on top row - `b' + `b' align on bottom row `cols' @@ -1877,31 +1623,31 @@ except for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and intercolumn material. - `l' + `l' A column of left-aligned items. - `r' + `r' A column of right-aligned items. - `' - A column of centred items. + `c' + A column of centered items. - `|' + `|' A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. - `@{TEXT}' + `@{TEXT}' This inserts TEXT in every row. An @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any - desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent - items must be included in TEXT. An `\extracolsep{wd}' - command in an @-expression causes an extra space of width - `wd' to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until - countermanded by another `\extracolsep' command. Unlike - ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not - suppressed by an @-expression. An `\extracolsep' command can - be used only in an @-expression in the `cols' argument. - - `p{WD}' + desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items + must be included in TEXT. An `\extracolsep{wd}' command in an + @-expression causes an extra space of width `wd' to appear to + the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by + another `\extracolsep' command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn + space, this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. + An `\extracolsep' command can be used only in an @-expression + in the `cols' argument. + + `p{WD}' Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width WD, as if it were the argument of a `\parbox[t]{WD}' command. However, a `\\' may not appear in the item, except in the @@ -1917,17 +1663,16 @@ except for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command appear inside braces or an environment when used in a `p'-column element. - `*{NUM}{COLS}' + `*{NUM}{COLS}' Equivalent to NUM copies of COLS, where NUM is a positive integer and COLS is any list of column-specifiers, which may contain another `*-expression'. - Parameters that control formatting: `\arrayrulewidth' - Thickness of the rule created by `|', `\hline', and `\vline' in - the `tabular' and `array' environments; the default is `.4pt'. + Thickness of the rule created by `|', `\hline', and `\vline' in the + `tabular' and `array' environments; the default is `.4pt'. `\arraystretch' Scaling of spacing between rows in the `tabular' and `array' @@ -1940,7 +1685,6 @@ except for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command `\tabcolsep' Half the width of the space between columns; default is `6pt'. - These commands can be used inside a `tabular' environment: 8.23.1 `\multicolumn' @@ -1949,12 +1693,11 @@ except for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command Synopsis: \multicolumn{COLS}{POS}{TEXT} - The `\multicolumn' command makes an entry that spans several -columns. The first mandatory argument, COLS, specifies the number of -columns to span. The second mandatory argument, POS, specifies the -formatting of the entry; `c' for centered, `l' for flushleft, `r' for -flushright. The third mandatory argument, TEXT, specifies what text to -put in the entry. + The `\multicolumn' command makes an entry that spans several columns. +The first mandatory argument, COLS, specifies the number of columns to +span. The second mandatory argument, POS, specifies the formatting of +the entry; `c' for centered, `l' for flushleft, `r' for flushright. The +third mandatory argument, TEXT, specifies what text to put in the entry. Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; `\multicolumn' is used for the heading: @@ -1987,10 +1730,9 @@ line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table. 8.23.4 `\vline' --------------- -The `\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full -height and depth of its row. An `\hfill' command can be used to move -the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an -@-expression. +The `\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full height +and depth of its row. An `\hfill' command can be used to move the line +to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression. 8.24 `thebibliography' ====================== @@ -2005,16 +1747,16 @@ Synopsis: The `thebibliography' environment produces a bibliography or reference list. - In the `article' class, this reference list is labelled -"References"; in the `report' class, it is labelled "Bibliography". -You can change the label (in the standard classes) by redefining the -command `\refname'. For instance, this eliminates it entirely: + In the `article' class, this reference list is labelled "References"; +in the `report' class, it is labelled "Bibliography". You can change +the label (in the standard classes) by redefining the command +`\refname'. For instance, this eliminates it entirely: \renewcommand{\refname}{} - The mandatory WIDEST-LABEL argument is text that, when typeset, is -as wide as the widest item label produced by the `\bibitem' commands. -It is typically given as `9' for bibliographies with less than 10 + The mandatory WIDEST-LABEL argument is text that, when typeset, is as +wide as the widest item label produced by the `\bibitem' commands. It +is typically given as `9' for bibliographies with less than 10 references, `99' for ones with less than 100, etc. 8.24.1 `\bibitem' @@ -2024,12 +1766,12 @@ Synopsis: \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY} The `\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL. If the -LABEL argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using -the `enumi' counter. The CITE_KEY is any sequence of letters, numbers, -and punctuation symbols not containing a comma. +LABEL argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using the +`enumi' counter. The CITE_KEY is any sequence of letters, numbers, and +punctuation symbols not containing a comma. - This command writes an entry to the `.aux' file containing the -item's CITE_KEY and label. When the `.aux' file is read by the + This command writes an entry to the `.aux' file containing the item's +CITE_KEY and label. When the `.aux' file is read by the `\begin{document}' command, the item's `label' is associated with `cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a `\cite' command (see next section) to produce the associated label. @@ -2042,12 +1784,11 @@ Synopsis: \cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS The KEYS argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated -by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the -references associated with KEYS by entries in the `.aux' file. +by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the references +associated with KEYS by entries in the `.aux' file. - The text of the optional SUBCITE argument appears after the -citation. For example, `\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce `[Knuth, -p. 314]'. + The text of the optional SUBCITE argument appears after the citation. +For example, `\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce `[Knuth, p. 314]'. 8.24.3 `\nocite' ---------------- @@ -2094,8 +1835,8 @@ demands of various publications. See The `\bibliography' command is what actually produces the bibliography. The argument to `\bibliography' refers to files named `BIBFILE.bib', which should contain your database in BibTeX format. -Only the entries referred to via `\cite' and `\nocite' will be listed -in the bibliography. +Only the entries referred to via `\cite' and `\nocite' will be listed in +the bibliography. 8.25 `theorem' ============== @@ -2120,9 +1861,9 @@ Synopsis: \end{titlepage} The `titlepage' environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with -no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page -to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. -The `\today' command may be useful on title pages (*note \today::). +no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to +be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The +`\today' command may be useful on title pages (*note \today::). You can use the `\maketitle' command (*note \maketitle::) to produce a standard title page without a `titlepage' environment. @@ -2136,11 +1877,11 @@ Synopsis: LITERAL-TEXT \end{verbatim} - The `verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment in -which LaTeX produces exactly what you type in; for instance the `\' -character produces a printed `\'. It turns LaTeX into a typewriter -with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that they would -on a typewriter. + The `verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment in which +LaTeX produces exactly what you type in; for instance the `\' character +produces a printed `\'. It turns LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage +returns and blanks having the same effect that they would on a +typewriter. The `verbatim' uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (`\tt'). @@ -2183,10 +1924,10 @@ stanzas. 9 Line breaking *************** -The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to -translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To -produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines -(and these lines must be broken into pages). +The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to translate +your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a +printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these +lines must be broken into pages). LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the `\\' command, @@ -2222,20 +1963,20 @@ mode. =============================== The `\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that -point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find -most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an -incorrect one. The `\-' command is used for the exceptional cases. +point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find most +of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an incorrect +one. The `\-' command is used for the exceptional cases. When you insert `\-' commands in a word, the word will only be -hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points -that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. +hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that +LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. 9.5 `\fussy' ============ The declaration `\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about -line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at -the cost of an occasional overfull box. +line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at the +cost of an occasional overfull box. This command cancels the effect of a previous `\sloppy' command (*note \sloppy::. @@ -2243,8 +1984,8 @@ the cost of an occasional overfull box. 9.6 `\sloppy' ============= -The declaration `\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. -This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. +The declaration `\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This +will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. Lasts until a `\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::). @@ -2255,11 +1996,11 @@ Synopsis: \hyphenation{WORD-ONE WORD-TWO} - The `\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with -a `-' character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. + The `\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with a +`-' character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are -tried. Multiple `\hyphenation' commands accumulate. Some examples -(the default TeX hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these +tried. Multiple `\hyphenation' commands accumulate. Some examples (the +default TeX hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these words): \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} @@ -2277,9 +2018,9 @@ Synopses: spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right margin as usual. - With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the command -from a demand to a request. The PRIORITY must be a number from 0 to 4. -The higher the number, the more insistent the request. + With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the command from +a demand to a request. The PRIORITY must be a number from 0 to 4. The +higher the number, the more insistent the request. 10 Page breaking **************** @@ -2316,8 +2057,8 @@ The `\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats `\enlargethispage*{size}' Enlarge the `\textheight' for the current page by the specified -amount; e.g. `\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one -additional line. +amount; e.g. `\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one additional +line. The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit @@ -2336,17 +2077,16 @@ Synopses: vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. - With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the -`\pagebreak' command from a demand to a request. The number must be a -number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the -request is. + With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the `\pagebreak' +command from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 +to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request is. 11 Footnotes ************ -Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced -with one command, the `\footnote' command. They can also be produced -with two commands, the `\footnotemark' and the `\footnotetext' commands. +Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with +one command, the `\footnote' command. They can also be produced with +two commands, the `\footnotemark' and the `\footnotetext' commands. 11.1 `\footnote' ================ @@ -2360,8 +2100,8 @@ bottom of the current page. The optional argument NUMBER changes the default footnote number. This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you -cannot use it in sectioning commands like `\chapter', in figures, -tables or in a `tabular' environment. (See following sections.) +cannot use it in sectioning commands like `\chapter', in figures, tables +or in a `tabular' environment. (See following sections.) 11.2 `\footnotemark' ==================== @@ -2421,7 +2161,6 @@ redefine `\@fnsymbol'. between footnotes. This is `6.65pt' for `10pt', `7.7pt' for `11pt', and `8.4pt' for `12pt'. - 12 Definitions ************** @@ -2445,8 +2184,8 @@ CMD NARGS An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments - that the command will take. The default is for the command to - have no arguments. + that the command will take. The default is for the command to have + no arguments. DEFAULT If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's @@ -2459,7 +2198,6 @@ DEFN construct of the form `#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the Nth argument. - 12.2 `\newcounter' ================== @@ -2482,10 +2220,9 @@ Synopsis: \newlength{\ARG} - The `\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a -`length' command with a value of `0in'. The argument must be a control -sequence, as in `\newlength{\foo}'. An error occurs if `\foo' is -already defined. + The `\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a `length' +command with a value of `0in'. The argument must be a control sequence, +as in `\newlength{\foo}'. An error occurs if `\foo' is already defined. *Note Lengths::, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and for more information about lengths in general. @@ -2527,15 +2264,14 @@ DEFAULT gives the default value for that argument. BEGDEF - The text expanded at every occurrence of `\begin{ENV}'; a - construct of the form `#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of - the Nth argument. + The text expanded at every occurrence of `\begin{ENV}'; a construct + of the form `#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of the Nth + argument. ENDDEF The text expanded at every occurrence of `\end{ENV}'. It may not contain any argument parameters. - 12.6 `\newtheorem' ================== @@ -2562,7 +2298,6 @@ WITHIN unit. The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as the WITHIN counter. - At most one of NUMBERED_LIKE and WITHIN can be specified, not both. 12.7 `\newfont' @@ -2572,9 +2307,9 @@ Synopsis: \newfont{CMD}{FONTNAME} - Defines a control sequence `\CMD', which must not already be -defined, to make FONTNAME be the current font. The file looked for on -the system is named `FONTNAME.tfm'. + Defines a control sequence `\CMD', which must not already be defined, +to make FONTNAME be the current font. The file looked for on the system +is named `FONTNAME.tfm'. This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. More commonly, fonts are defined in families through `.fd' files. @@ -2584,32 +2319,30 @@ More commonly, fonts are defined in families through `.fd' files. Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and many more are so-called "fragile" commands. When a fragile command is -used in certain contexts, called "moving arguments", it must be -preceded by `\protect'. In addition, any fragile commands within the -arguments must have their own `\protect'. +used in certain contexts, called "moving arguments", it must be preceded +by `\protect'. In addition, any fragile commands within the arguments +must have their own `\protect'. Some examples of moving arguments are `\caption' (*note figure::), -`\thanks' (*note \maketitle::), and expressions in `tabular' and -`array' environments (*note tabular::). +`\thanks' (*note \maketitle::), and expressions in `tabular' and `array' +environments (*note tabular::). - Commands which are not fragile are called "robust". They must not -be preceded by `\protect'. + Commands which are not fragile are called "robust". They must not be +preceded by `\protect'. See also: `http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html' `http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect' - 13 Counters *********** Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or -command that produces the number, except with no `\'. -(`enumi'-`enumiv' are used for the nested enumerate environment.) -Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document -classes to control numbering. +command that produces the number, except with no `\'. (`enumi'-`enumiv' +are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the +counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering. part paragraph figure enumi chapter subparagraph table enumii @@ -2640,15 +2373,15 @@ instance, `\alph{enumi}'. `\fnsymbol' prints the value of COUNTER in a specific sequence of nine symbols - (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of - COUNTER must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. + (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of COUNTER + must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: + asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger - 13.2 `\usecounter{COUNTER}' =========================== @@ -2694,22 +2427,22 @@ by the VALUE argument, which may be negative. =============================== The `\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as `\stepcounter' -*Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current `\ref' value -to be the result of `\thecounter'. +*Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current `\ref' value to +be the result of `\thecounter'. 13.7 `\stepcounter{COUNTER}' ============================ -The `\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all -subsidiary counters. +The `\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all subsidiary +counters. 13.8 `\day \month \year': Predefined counters ============================================= -LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month (`\day', 1-31), month -of the year (`\month', 1-12), and year (`\year', Common Era). When TeX -starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where TeX -is running. They are not updated as the job progresses. +LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month (`\day', 1-31), month of +the year (`\month', 1-12), and year (`\year', Common Era). When TeX +starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where TeX is +running. They are not updated as the job progresses. The related command `\today' produces a string representing the current day (*note \today::). @@ -2723,9 +2456,9 @@ as an argument. 14.1 `\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' ============================== -The `\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which -can be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches -(`in'), millimeters (`mm'), points (`pt'), big points (`bp', etc. +The `\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which can +be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (`in'), +millimeters (`mm'), points (`pt'), big points (`bp', etc. 14.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} =============================== @@ -2746,8 +2479,8 @@ to the depth of the `text' argument. `\settoheight{\gnat}{text}' - The `\settoheight' command sets the value of a `length' command -equal to the height of the `text' argument. + The `\settoheight' command sets the value of a `length' command equal +to the height of the `text' argument. 14.5 `\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' ============================== @@ -2758,19 +2491,18 @@ width of the TEXT argument. 14.6 Predefined lengths ======================= -`\width' +`\width' - `\height' + `\height' - `\depth' + `\depth' - `\totalheight' + `\totalheight' These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the -box-making commands (*note Boxes::). They specify the natural width -etc. of the text in the box. `\totalheight' equals `\height' + -`\depth'. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural -size, e.g., say +box-making commands (*note Boxes::). They specify the natural width etc. +of the text in the box. `\totalheight' equals `\height' + `\depth'. To +make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say `\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}' @@ -2803,8 +2535,8 @@ paragraph. 15.3 `\parskip' =============== -`\parskip' is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added -before each paragraph. The default is `0pt plus1pt'. +`\parskip' is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before +each paragraph. The default is `0pt plus1pt'. 15.4 Marginal notes =================== @@ -2843,15 +2575,17 @@ hyphenation there by beginning the node with `\hspace{0pt}'. documents, `5pt' else. `\marginparsep' - Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default - `11pt' for `10pt' documents, `10pt' else. + Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default `11pt' + for `10pt' documents, `10pt' else. `\marginparwidth' Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided `10pt' document - is `90pt', `83pt' for `11pt', and `68pt' for `12pt'; `17pt' more - in each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the + is `90pt', `83pt' for `11pt', and `68pt' for `12pt'; `17pt' more in + each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the default is `48pt'. + The standard LaTeX routine for marginal notes does not prevent notes +from falling off the bottom of the page. 16 Math formulas **************** @@ -2868,8 +2602,8 @@ There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode: The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation number in the right margin. - The `math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, -but the `displaymath' and `equation' environments can be used only in + The `math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but +the `displaymath' and `equation' environments can be used only in paragraph mode. The `math' and `displaymath' environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: @@ -2883,8 +2617,8 @@ shorter form: The `\boldmath' command changes math letters and symbols to be in a bold font. It is used _outside_ of math mode. Conversely, the -`\unboldmath' command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it -too is used _outside_ of math mode. +`\unboldmath' command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too +is used _outside_ of math mode. The `\displaystyle' declaration forces the size and style of the formula to be that of `displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below @@ -2895,16 +2629,16 @@ summations. For example ============================== To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type -`_{'exp`}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type -`^{'exp`}'. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that -stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something -has both a subscript and a superscript. +`_{'exp`}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type `^{'exp`}'. +LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the +natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a +subscript and a superscript. 16.2 Math symbols ================= -LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. -The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For +LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. The +commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For example, if you include `$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. @@ -3536,7 +3270,6 @@ symbol (\pi) in your output. `\zeta' \zeta - 16.3 Math functions =================== @@ -3645,7 +3378,6 @@ spacing. `\tanh' \tanh - 16.4 Math accents ================= @@ -3654,28 +3386,28 @@ math. These are different from accents in normal text (*note Accents::). `\acute' - Math acute accent: \acutex. + Math acute accent: \acute{x}. `\bar' - Math bar-over accent: \barx. + Math bar-over accent: \bar{x}. `\breve' - Math breve accent: \brevex. + Math breve accent: \breve{x}. `\check' - Math ha'c and `\' are equivalent to `\ '. @@ -3966,20 +3692,19 @@ capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without `\@': produces - ... in C. Pascal, though ... ... in C. Pascal, though ... + ... in C. Pascal, though ... ... in C. Pascal, though ... 19.5 `\thinspace' ================= -`\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is -1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as in -'". +`\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6 +of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as in '". 19.6 `\/' ========= -The `\/' command produces an "italic correction". This is a small -space defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the +The `\/' command produces an "italic correction". This is a small space +defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows. The italic f character typically has a large italic correction value. @@ -4034,7 +3759,6 @@ These commands produce a given amount of space. The same as `\vspace{smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). - The `\...amount' parameters are determined by the document class. 19.11 `\vfill' @@ -4084,10 +3808,11 @@ they put a frame around the outside of the box being created. In addition, the `\framebox' command allows for explicit specification of the box width with the optional WIDTH argument (a -dimension), and positioning with the optional POSITION argument. Both -commands produce a rule of thickness `\fboxrule' (default `.4pt'), and -leave a space of `\fboxsep' (default `3pt') between the rule and the -contents of the box. +dimension), and positioning with the optional POSITION argument. + + Both commands produce a rule of thickness `\fboxrule' (default +`.4pt'), and leave a space of `\fboxsep' (default `3pt') between the +rule and the contents of the box. *Note \framebox (picture)::, for the `\framebox' command in the `picture' environment. @@ -4099,8 +3824,8 @@ contents of the box. This is the environment form of `\sbox'. - The text inside the environment is saved in the box `cmd', which -must have been declared with `\newsavebox'. + The text inside the environment is saved in the box `cmd', which must +have been declared with `\newsavebox'. 20.4 `\makebox' =============== @@ -4110,9 +3835,9 @@ Synopsis: \makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT} The `\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the -TEXT specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional -WIDTH argument. The position of the text within the box is determined -by the optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values: +TEXT specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional WIDTH +argument. The position of the text within the box is determined by the +optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values: `c' Centered (default). @@ -4127,8 +3852,8 @@ by the optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values: Stretch (justify) across entire WIDTH; TEXT must contain stretchable space for this to work. - `\makebox' is also used within the picture environment *note -\makebox (picture)::. + `\makebox' is also used within the picture environment *note \makebox +(picture)::. 20.5 `\parbox' ============== @@ -4138,8 +3863,8 @@ Synopsis: \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}{TEXT} The `\parbox' command produces a box whose contents are created in -`paragraph' mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of -text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any +`paragraph' mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of text, +with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any paragraph-making environments inside a `\parbox' argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a `minipage' environment (*note minipage::). @@ -4198,8 +3923,8 @@ Synopsis: \savebox{\BOXCMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT} This command typeset TEXT in a box just as with `\makebox' (*note -\makebox::), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it -saves it in the box labeled \BOXCMD, which must have been declared with +\makebox::), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it saves +it in the box labeled \BOXCMD, which must have been declared with `\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). 20.8 `\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}' @@ -4221,8 +3946,8 @@ Synopsis: \usebox{\BOXCMD} - `\usebox' producesthe box most recently saved in the bin \BOXCMD by -a `\savebox' command (*note \savebox::). + `\usebox' producesthe box most recently saved in the bin \BOXCMD by a +`\savebox' command (*note \savebox::). 21 Special insertions ********************* @@ -4238,10 +3963,10 @@ The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } - Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX -will do something special. If you simply want the character to be -printed as itself, include a `\' in front of the character. For -example, `\$' will produce `$' in your output. + Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX will +do something special. If you simply want the character to be printed as +itself, include a `\' in front of the character. For example, `\$' will +produce `$' in your output. One exception to this rule is `\' itself, because `\\' has its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing @@ -4249,13 +3974,13 @@ special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing `\' in a verbatim command (*note verbatim::). Also, `\~' and `\^' place tilde and circumflex accents over the -following letter, as in o~ and o^ (*note Accents::); to get a -standalone `~' or `^', you can again use a verbatim command. +following letter, as in o~ and o^ (*note Accents::); to get a standalone +`~' or `^', you can again use a verbatim command. Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you -know its number by using the `\symbol' command. For example, the -visible space character used in the `\verb*' command has the code -decimal 32, so it can be typed as `\symbol{32}'. +know its number by using the `\symbol' command. For example, the visible +space character used in the `\verb*' command has the code decimal 32, so +it can be typed as `\symbol{32}'. You can also specify octal numbers with `'' or hexadecimal numbers with `"', so the previous example could also be written as @@ -4305,9 +4030,9 @@ available in OT1; you may need to load the `textcomp' package. `\textsterling' English pounds sterling: #. -`\quotedblbase (")' +`\quotedblbase (,,)' `\quotesinglbase (,)' - Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: " and ,. + Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: ,, and ,. `\rq' Right (closing) quote: '. @@ -4374,7 +4099,7 @@ available in OT1; you may need to load the `textcomp' package. En-dash: -- (for ranges). `\texteuro' - The Euro symbol: Euro . + The Euro symbol: Euro. `\textexclamdown (or `!`')' Upside down exclamation point: !. @@ -4427,7 +4152,7 @@ available in OT1; you may need to load the `textcomp' package. "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. `\texttrademark' - Trademark symbol: ^\hboxTM. + Trademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}. `\texttwelveudash' Xx 12u-. @@ -4438,7 +4163,6 @@ available in OT1; you may need to load the `textcomp' package. `\textvisiblespace' Visible space symbol. - 21.3 Accents ============ @@ -4505,7 +4229,7 @@ capital letters. These are not available with OT1. `\k' `\capitalogonek' - Produces a letter with ogonek, as in `o'. Not available in the + Produces a letter with ogonek, as in `o;'. Not available in the OT1 encoding. `\r' @@ -4533,12 +4257,11 @@ capital letters. These are not available with OT1. `\capitalcaron' Produces a ha'c {\sc fred} % please use! +\acro{FRED} -> {\small fred} % please use! \cs{fred} -> \fred \env{fred} -> \begin{fred} \meta{fred} -> @@ -5125,1267 +4843,12 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. \nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty \bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX - -\makesignature % not in ltugproc +\makesignature \end{document} Concept Index ************* -* prompt: See 26. (line 4993) -*-form of sectioning commands: See 6. (line 794) -.glo file: See 23.2. (line 4748) -.idx file: See 23.3. (line 4764) -.ind file: See 23.3. (line 4778) -`see' and `see also' index entries: See 23.3. (line 4771) -abstracts: See 8.1. (line 895) -accents: See 21.3. (line 4445) -accents, mathematical: See 16.4. (line 3652) -accessing any character of a font: See 21.1. (line 4255) -acute accent: See 21.3. (line 4459) -acute accent, math: See 16.4. (line 3657) -ae ligature: See 21.4. (line 4549) -aligning Equations: See 8.8. (line 1080) -alignment via tabbing: See 8.21. (line 1718) -appendix, creating: See 6. (line 800) -aring: See 21.4. (line 4545) -arrays, math: See 8.2. (line 906) -arrow, left, in text: See 21.2. (line 4389) -arrow, right, in text: See 21.2. (line 4424) -ascender height: See 21.2. (line 4357) -ASCII circumflex, in text: See 21.2. (line 4322) -ASCII tilde, in text: See 21.2. (line 4325) -asterisk, centered, in text: See 21.2. (line 4328) -author, for titlepage: See 18.1. (line 3824) -backslash, in text: See 21.2. (line 4331) -bar, double vertical, in text: See 21.2. (line 4337) -bar, vertical, in text: See 21.2. (line 4334) -bar-over accent: See 21.3. (line 4468) -bar-over accent, math: See 16.4. (line 3660) -bar-under accent: See 21.3. (line 4485) -bibliography, creating (automatically): See 8.24.4. (line 2063) -bibliography, creating (manually): See 8.24. (line 1998) -bibTeX, using: See 8.24.4. (line 2063) -big circle symbols, in text: See 21.2. (line 4340) -black boxes, omitting: See 3.1. (line 357) -bold font: See 4.1. (line 502) -bold typewriter, avoiding: See 8.4. (line 1002) -boxes: See 20. (line 4064) -brace, left, in text: See 21.2. (line 4343) -brace, right, in text: See 21.2. (line 4346) -breaking lines: See 9. (line 2186) -breaking pages: See 10. (line 2287) -breve accent: See 21.3. (line 4524) -breve accent, math: See 16.4. (line 3663) -bullet symbol: See 16.2. (line 2987) -bullet, in text: See 21.2. (line 4349) -bulleted lists: See 8.13. (line 1253) -calligraphic letters for math: See 4.1. (line 505) -cap height: See 21.2. (line 4357) -caron accent: See 21.3. (line 4534) -cc list, in letters: See 24.2. (line 4851) -cedilla accent: See 21.3. (line 4489) -centered asterisk, in text: See 21.2. (line 4328) -centered period, in text: See 21.2. (line 4399) -centering text, declaration for: See 8.3.1. (line 967) -centering text, environment for: See 8.3. (line 953) -characters, accented: See 21.3. (line 4445) -characters, non-English: See 21.4. (line 4540) -characters, reserved: See 21.1. (line 4236) -check accent: See 21.3. (line 4534) -check accent, math: See 16.4. (line 3666) -circle symbol, big, in text: See 21.2. (line 4340) -circled letter, in text: See 21.2. (line 4352) -circumflex accent: See 21.3. (line 4472) -circumflex accent, math: See 16.4. (line 3678) -circumflex, ASCII, in text: See 21.2. (line 4322) -class options: See 3.1. (line 336) -classes of documents: See 3. (line 319) -closing letters: See 24.3. (line 4861) -closing quote: See 21.2. (line 4313) -code, typesetting: See 8.27. (line 2133) -command line: See 26. (line 4984) -commands, defining new ones: See 12.1. (line 2433) -composite word mark, in text: See 21.2. (line 4357) -computer programs, typesetting: See 8.27. (line 2133) -copyright symbol: See 21.2. (line 4273) -counters, a list of: See 13. (line 2607) -counters, defining new: See 12.2. (line 2466) -counters, getting value of: See 13.3. (line 2666) -counters, setting: See 13.4. (line 2680) -creating letters: See 24. (line 4802) -creating pictures: See 8.18. (line 1427) -creating tables: See 8.22. (line 1810) -credit footnote: See 18.1. (line 3834) -cross references: See 7. (line 821) -cross referencing with page number: See 7.2. (line 863) -cross referencing, symbolic: See 7.3. (line 873) -currency, dollar: See 21.2. (line 4368) -currency, euro: See 21.2. (line 4377) -dagger, double, in text: See 21.2. (line 4365) -dagger, in text: See 21.2. (line 4276) -date, for titlepage: See 18.1. (line 3830) -datetime package: See 21.6. (line 4615) -defining a new command: See 12.1. (line 2433) -defining new environments: See 12.5. (line 2506) -defining new fonts: See 12.7. (line 2571) -defining new theorems: See 12.6. (line 2542) -definitions: See 12. (line 2428) -description lists, creating: See 8.4. (line 990) -dieresis accent: See 21.3. (line 4455) -discretionary multiplication: See 16.6. (line 3724) -displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation:See 8.19. (line 1688) -displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation:See 8.20. - (line 1703) -document class options: See 3.1. (line 336) -document classes: See 3. (line 319) -document templates: See Appendix A. - (line 5000) -dollar sign: See 21.2. (line 4368) -dot accent: See 21.3. (line 4464) -dot over accent, math: See 16.4. (line 3672) -dot-over accent: See 21.3. (line 4464) -dot-under accent: See 21.3. (line 4493) -dotless i: See 21.3. (line 4501) -dotless i, math: See 16.4. (line 3681) -dotless j: See 21.3. (line 4504) -dotless j, math: See 16.4. (line 3684) -double angle quotation marks: See 21.2. (line 4288) -double dagger, in text: See 21.2. (line 4279) -double dot accent, math: See 16.4. (line 3669) -double guillemets: See 21.2. (line 4288) -double left quote: See 21.2. (line 4405) -double low-9 quotation mark: See 21.2. (line 4310) -double quote, straight base: See 21.2. (line 4418) -double right quote: See 21.2. (line 4408) -double spacing: See 4.3. (line 615) -double vertical bar, in text: See 21.2. (line 4337) -e-dash: See 21.2. (line 4374) -ellipsis: See 21.2. (line 4294) -em-dash: See 21.2. (line 4371) -em-dash, three-quarters: See 21.2. (line 4427) -emphasis: See 4.1. (line 444) -enclosure list: See 24.4. (line 4871) -ending & starting: See 2. (line 301) -enlarge current page: See 10.4. (line 2314) -environments: See 8. (line 885) -environments, defining: See 12.5. (line 2506) -equation number, cross referencing: See 7.3. (line 873) -equation numbers, omitting: See 8.8. (line 1094) -equations, aligning: See 8.8. (line 1080) -equations, environment for: See 8.9. (line 1106) -es-zet German letter: See 21.4. (line 4581) -eth, Icelandic letter: See 21.4. (line 4553) -euro symbol: See 21.2. (line 4377) -exclamation point, upside-down: See 21.2. (line 4380) -exponent: See 16.1. (line 2897) -feminine ordinal symbol: See 21.2. (line 4393) -figure number, cross referencing: See 7.3. (line 873) -figures, footnotes in: See 8.17. (line 1414) -figures, inserting: See 8.10. (line 1119) -fixed-width font: See 4.1. (line 526) -float package: See 8.10. (line 1147) -flushing floats and starting a page: See 10.2. (line 2302) -font commands, low-level: See 4.3. (line 558) -font sizes: See 4.2. (line 532) -font styles: See 4.1. (line 424) -fonts: See 4. (line 418) -fonts, new commands for: See 12.7. (line 2571) -footer style: See 18.3. (line 3869) -footer, parameters for: See 5.5. (line 712) -footnote number, cross referencing: See 7.3. (line 873) -footnote parameters: See 11.5. (line 2411) -footnotes in figures: See 8.17. (line 1414) -footnotes, creating: See 11. (line 2347) -footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered: See 11.4. (line 2398) -formulas, environment for: See 8.9. (line 1106) -formulas, math: See 16. (line 2859) -fragile commands: See 12.8. (line 2585) -French quotation marks: See 21.2. (line 4288) -functions, math: See 16.3. (line 3543) -global options: See 3.1. (line 336) -glossaries: See 23.2. (line 4746) -grave accent: See 21.3. (line 4476) -grave accent, math: See 16.4. (line 3675) -greater than symbol, in text: See 21.2. (line 4383) -greek letters: See 16.2. (line 2906) -ha'c <1>: See 16.5. (line 3712) -\>: See 8.21. (line 1743) -\> (tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1742) -\@: See 19.4. (line 3960) -\@fnsymbol: See 11.4. (line 2403) -\[: See 16. (line 2871) -\\ (for \shortstack objects): See 8.18.13. (line 1672) -\\ (for array): See 8.2. (line 928) -\\ (for center): See 8.3. (line 960) -\\ (for eqnarray): See 8.8. (line 1086) -\\ (for flushright): See 8.12. (line 1233) -\\ for \author: See 18.1. (line 3824) -\\ for \title: See 18.1. (line 3838) -\\ for flushleft: See 8.11. (line 1207) -\\ for letters: See 24. (line 4828) -\\ for tabular: See 8.23. (line 1854) -\\ for verse: See 8.28. (line 2178) -\\ force line break: See 9.1. (line 2198) -\\ tabbing: See 8.21. (line 1736) -\\* (for eqnarray): See 8.8. (line 1091) -\]: See 16. (line 2871) -\^: See 21.1. (line 4251) -\^ (circumflex accent): See 21.3. (line 4472) -\_: See 21.1. (line 4241) -\` (grave accent): See 21.3. (line 4476) -\` (tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1763) -\a (tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1772) -\a' (acute accent in tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1773) -\a= (macron accent in tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1773) -\a` (grave accent in tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1773) -\AA (AA): See 21.4. (line 4545) -\aa (aa): See 21.4. (line 4545) -\acute: See 16.4. (line 3656) -\addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: See 23.1.1. (line 4700) -\address: See 24.1. (line 4838) -\addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: See 23.1.2. (line 4731) -\addtocounter: See 13.5. (line 2690) -\addtolength: See 14.2. (line 2733) -\addvspace: See 19.9. (line 4012) -\AE (AE): See 21.4. (line 4549) -\ae (ae): See 21.4. (line 4549) -\aleph: See 16.2. (line 2914) -\Alph: See 13.1. (line 2629) -\alph: See 13.1. (line 2626) -\Alph example: See 8.7. (line 1075) -\alpha: See 16.2. (line 2917) -\alsoname: See 23.3. (line 4775) -\amalg: See 16.2. (line 2920) -\and for \author: See 18.1. (line 3824) -\angle: See 16.2. (line 2923) -\appendix: See 6. (line 800) -\approx: See 16.2. (line 2926) -\arabic: See 13.1. (line 2632) -\arccos: See 16.3. (line 3546) -\arcsin: See 16.3. (line 3549) -\arctan: See 16.3. (line 3552) -\arg: See 16.3. (line 3555) -\arraycolsep: See 8.2. (line 943) -\arrayrulewidth: See 8.23. (line 1928) -\arraystretch: See 8.23. (line 1932) -\ast: See 16.2. (line 2929) -\asymp: See 16.2. (line 2932) -\author{NAME \and NAME2}: See 18.1. (line 3823) -\b (bar-under accent): See 21.3. (line 4485) -\backslash <1>: See 21.1. (line 4246) -\backslash: See 16.2. (line 2935) -\bar: See 16.4. (line 3659) -\baselineskip: See 4.3. (line 609) -\baselinestretch: See 4.3. (line 615) -\begin: See 8. (line 885) -\beta: See 16.2. (line 2938) -\bf: See 4.1. (line 501) -\bfseries: See 4.1. (line 450) -\bibitem: See 8.24.1. (line 2023) -\bibliography: See 8.24.4. (line 2063) -\bibliographystyle: See 8.24.4. (line 2063) -\bigcap: See 16.2. (line 2941) -\bigcirc: See 16.2. (line 2944) -\bigcup: See 16.2. (line 2947) -\bigodot: See 16.2. (line 2950) -\bigoplus: See 16.2. (line 2953) -\bigotimes: See 16.2. (line 2956) -\bigskip: See 19.10. (line 4026) -\bigskipamount: See 19.10. (line 4026) -\bigsqcup: See 16.2. (line 2965) -\bigtriangledown: See 16.2. (line 2959) -\bigtriangleup: See 16.2. (line 2962) -\biguplus: See 16.2. (line 2968) -\bigwedge: See 16.2. (line 2974) -\bmod: See 16.3. (line 3558) -\boldmath: See 16. (line 2884) -\bot: See 16.2. (line 2977) -\bottomfraction: See 8.10. (line 1168) -\bowtie: See 16.2. (line 2980) -\Box: See 16.2. (line 2983) -\breve: See 16.4. (line 3662) -\bullet: See 16.2. (line 2986) -\c (cedilla accent): See 21.3. (line 4489) -\cal: See 4.1. (line 504) -\cap: See 16.2. (line 2989) -\capitalacute: See 21.3. (line 4459) -\capitalbreve: See 21.3. (line 4524) -\capitalcaron: See 21.3. (line 4534) -\capitalcedilla: See 21.3. (line 4489) -\capitalcircumflex: See 21.3. (line 4472) -\capitaldieresis: See 21.3. (line 4455) -\capitaldotaccent: See 21.3. (line 4493) -\capitalgrave: See 21.3. (line 4476) -\capitalhungarumlaut: See 21.3. (line 4497) -\capitalmacron: See 21.3. (line 4468) -\capitalnewtie: See 21.3. (line 4519) -\capitalogonek: See 21.3. (line 4508) -\capitalring: See 21.3. (line 4513) -\capitaltie: See 21.3. (line 4519) -\capitaltilde: See 21.3. (line 4482) -\caption: See 8.10. (line 1164) -\cc: See 24.2. (line 4851) -\cdot: See 16.2. (line 2992) -\cdots: See 16.6. (line 3727) -\centering: See 8.3.1. (line 967) -\chapter: See 6. (line 766) -\check: See 16.4. (line 3665) -\chi: See 16.2. (line 2995) -\circ: See 16.2. (line 2998) -\circle: See 8.18.1. (line 1495) -\cite: See 8.24.2. (line 2040) -\cleardoublepage: See 10.1. (line 2294) -\clearpage: See 10.2. (line 2302) -\cline: See 8.23.2. (line 1972) -\closing: See 24.3. (line 4861) -\clubsuit: See 16.2. (line 3001) -\columnsep: See 5.2. (line 661) -\columnseprule: See 5.2. (line 664) -\columnwidth: See 5.2. (line 668) -\cong: See 16.2. (line 3004) -\contentsline: See 23.1.1. (line 4725) -\coprod: See 16.2. (line 3007) -\copyright: See 21.2. (line 4271) -\cos: See 16.3. (line 3561) -\cosh: See 16.3. (line 3564) -\cot: See 16.3. (line 3567) -\coth: See 16.3. (line 3570) -\csc: See 16.3. (line 3573) -\cup: See 16.2. (line 3010) -\d (dot-under accent): See 21.3. (line 4493) -\dag: See 21.2. (line 4275) -\dagger: See 16.2. (line 3013) -\dashbox: See 8.18.4. (line 1548) -\dashv: See 16.2. (line 3016) -\date{TEXT}: See 18.1. (line 3829) -\day: See 13.8. (line 2709) -\dblfloatpagefraction: See 5.2. (line 680) -\dblfloatsep: See 5.2. (line 684) -\dbltextfloatsep: See 5.2. (line 689) -\dbltopfraction: See 5.2. (line 675) -\ddag: See 21.2. (line 4278) -\ddagger: See 16.2. (line 3019) -\ddot: See 16.4. (line 3668) -\ddots: See 16.6. (line 3731) -\deg: See 16.3. (line 3576) -\delta: See 16.2. (line 3025) -\Delta: See 16.2. (line 3022) -\depth: See 14.6. (line 2765) -\det: See 16.3. (line 3579) -\DH (AE): See 21.4. (line 4553) -\dh (ae): See 21.4. (line 4553) -\diamond: See 16.2. (line 3031) -\Diamond: See 16.2. (line 3028) -\diamondsuit: See 16.2. (line 3034) -\dim: See 16.3. (line 3582) -\displaystyle: See 16. (line 2889) -\div: See 16.2. (line 3037) -\DJ: See 21.4. (line 4557) -\dj: See 21.4. (line 4557) -\documentclass: See 3. (line 319) -\dot: See 16.4. (line 3671) -\doteq: See 16.2. (line 3040) -\dotfill: See 19.8. (line 4006) -\dots: See 21.2. (line 4292) -\doublerulesep: See 8.23. (line 1936) -\Downarrow: See 16.2. (line 3046) -\downarrow: See 16.2. (line 3043) -\ell: See 16.2. (line 3049) -\em: See 4.1. (line 507) -\emph: See 4.1. (line 444) -\emptyset: See 16.2. (line 3052) -\encl: See 24.4. (line 4871) -\end: See 8. (line 885) -\enlargethispage: See 10.4. (line 2314) -\enumi: See 8.7. (line 1065) -\enumii: See 8.7. (line 1065) -\enumiii: See 8.7. (line 1065) -\enumiv: See 8.7. (line 1065) -\epsilon: See 16.2. (line 3055) -\equiv: See 16.2. (line 3058) -\eta: See 16.2. (line 3061) -\evensidemargin: See 3.1. (line 385) -\exists: See 16.2. (line 3064) -\exp: See 16.3. (line 3585) -\fbox: See 20.2. (line 4077) -\fboxrule <1>: See 20.2. (line 4087) -\fboxrule: See 8.18.3. (line 1541) -\fboxsep <1>: See 20.2. (line 4087) -\fboxsep: See 8.18.3. (line 1541) -\fill: See 19.2. (line 3942) -\flat: See 16.2. (line 3067) -\floatpagefraction: See 8.10. (line 1171) -\floatsep: See 8.10. (line 1175) -\flushbottom: See 5.3. (line 697) -\fnsymbol: See 13.1. (line 2641) -\fnsymbol, and footnotes: See 11.4. (line 2403) -\fontencoding: See 4.3. (line 563) -\fontfamily: See 4.3. (line 566) -\fontseries: See 4.3. (line 577) -\fontshape: See 4.3. (line 592) -\fontsize: See 4.3. (line 609) -\footnote: See 11.1. (line 2354) -\footnotemark: See 11.2. (line 2369) -\footnoterule: See 11.5. (line 2411) -\footnotesep: See 11.5. (line 2417) -\footnotesize: See 4.2. (line 537) -\footnotetext: See 11.3. (line 2384) -\footskip: See 5.5. (line 722) -\forall: See 16.2. (line 3070) -\frac: See 16.6. (line 3735) -\frac{num}{den}: See 16.6. (line 3734) -\frame: See 8.18.5. (line 1561) -\framebox <1>: See 20.2. (line 4077) -\framebox: See 8.18.3. (line 1533) -\frown: See 16.2. (line 3073) -\fussy: See 9.5. (line 2236) -\gamma: See 16.2. (line 3079) -\Gamma: See 16.2. (line 3076) -\gcd: See 16.3. (line 3588) -\ge: See 16.2. (line 3082) -\geq: See 16.2. (line 3085) -\gets: See 16.2. (line 3088) -\gg: See 16.2. (line 3091) -\glossary: See 23.2. (line 4748) -\glossaryentry: See 23.2. (line 4751) -\grave: See 16.4. (line 3674) -\guillemotleft (<<): See 21.2. (line 4284) -\guillemotright (>>): See 21.2. (line 4285) -\guilsinglleft (<): See 21.2. (line 4286) -\guilsinglright (>): See 21.2. (line 4287) -\H (Hungarian umlaut accent): See 21.3. (line 4497) -\hat: See 16.4. (line 3677) -\hbar: See 16.2. (line 3094) -\headheight: See 5.5. (line 712) -\headsep: See 5.5. (line 717) -\heartsuit: See 16.2. (line 3097) -\height: See 14.6. (line 2763) -\hfill: See 19.2. (line 3939) -\hline: See 8.23.3. (line 1983) -\hom: See 16.3. (line 3591) -\hookleftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3100) -\hookrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3103) -\hrulefill: See 19.7. (line 3999) -\hspace: See 19.1. (line 3923) -\Huge: See 4.2. (line 537) -\huge: See 4.2. (line 537) -\hyphenation: See 9.7. (line 2254) -\i (dotless i): See 21.3. (line 4501) -\iff: See 16.2. (line 3106) -\IJ (IJ): See 21.4. (line 4561) -\ij (ij): See 21.4. (line 4561) -\Im: See 16.2. (line 3109) -\imath: See 16.4. (line 3680) -\in: See 16.2. (line 3112) -\include: See 22.1. (line 4630) -\includeonly: See 22.2. (line 4648) -\indent: See 15.1. (line 2788) -\index: See 23.3. (line 4764) -\indexentry: See 23.3. (line 4767) -\inf: See 16.3. (line 3594) -\infty: See 16.2. (line 3115) -\input: See 22.3. (line 4662) -\int: See 16.2. (line 3118) -\intextsep: See 8.10. (line 1179) -\iota: See 16.2. (line 3121) -\it: See 4.1. (line 510) -\item <1>: See 8.13. (line 1253) -\item <2>: See 8.7. (line 1052) -\item: See 8.4. (line 998) -\itemindent: See 8.13. (line 1299) -\itemsep: See 8.13. (line 1322) -\itshape: See 4.1. (line 441) -\j (dotless j): See 21.3. (line 4504) -\jmath: See 16.4. (line 3683) -\Join: See 16.2. (line 3124) -\k (ogonek): See 21.3. (line 4508) -\kappa: See 16.2. (line 3127) -\ker: See 16.3. (line 3597) -\kill: See 8.21. (line 1777) -\L (/L): See 21.4. (line 4565) -\l (/l): See 21.4. (line 4565) -\label: See 7.1. (line 827) -\labelenumi: See 8.7. (line 1069) -\labelenumii: See 8.7. (line 1069) -\labelenumiii: See 8.7. (line 1069) -\labelenumiv: See 8.7. (line 1069) -\labelitemi: See 8.13. (line 1279) -\labelitemii: See 8.13. (line 1279) -\labelitemiii: See 8.13. (line 1279) -\labelitemiv: See 8.13. (line 1279) -\labelsep: See 8.13. (line 1302) -\labelwidth: See 8.13. (line 1305) -\lambda: See 16.2. (line 3133) -\Lambda: See 16.2. (line 3130) -\land: See 16.2. (line 3136) -\langle: See 16.2. (line 3139) -\LARGE: See 4.2. (line 537) -\Large: See 4.2. (line 537) -\large: See 4.2. (line 537) -\LaTeX: See 21.2. (line 4281) -\lbrace: See 16.2. (line 3142) -\lbrack: See 16.2. (line 3145) -\lceil: See 16.2. (line 3148) -\ldots: See 21.2. (line 4291) -\le: See 16.2. (line 3151) -\leadsto: See 16.2. (line 3154) -\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: See 16.6. (line 3737) -\leftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3159) -\Leftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3156) -\lefteqn: See 8.8. (line 1099) -\leftharpoondown: See 16.2. (line 3162) -\leftharpoonup: See 16.2. (line 3165) -\leftmargin: See 8.13. (line 1286) -\leftmargini: See 8.13. (line 1286) -\leftmarginii: See 8.13. (line 1286) -\leftmarginiii: See 8.13. (line 1286) -\leftmarginiv: See 8.13. (line 1286) -\leftmarginv: See 8.13. (line 1286) -\leftmarginvi: See 8.13. (line 1286) -\leftrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3171) -\Leftrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3168) -\leq: See 16.2. (line 3174) -\lfloor: See 16.2. (line 3177) -\lg: See 16.3. (line 3600) -\lhd: See 16.2. (line 3180) -\lim: See 16.3. (line 3603) -\liminf: See 16.3. (line 3606) -\limsup: See 16.3. (line 3609) -\line: See 8.18.6. (line 1572) -\linebreak: See 9.8. (line 2270) -\linespread: See 4.3. (line 622) -\linethickness: See 8.18.7. (line 1587) -\linewidth: See 5.5. (line 727) -\listoffigures: See 23.1. (line 4690) -\listoftables: See 23.1. (line 4690) -\listparindent: See 8.13. (line 1308) -\ll: See 16.2. (line 3183) -\ln: See 16.3. (line 3612) -\lnot: See 16.2. (line 3186) -\location: See 24.5. (line 4880) -\log: See 16.3. (line 3615) -\longleftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3189) -\longleftrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3192) -\longmapsto: See 16.2. (line 3195) -\longrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3198) -\lor: See 16.2. (line 3201) -\lq: See 21.2. (line 4297) -\makebox: See 20.4. (line 4108) -\makebox (picture): See 8.18.2. (line 1506) -\makeglossary: See 23.2. (line 4746) -\makeindex: See 23.3. (line 4761) -\makelabels: See 24.6. (line 4888) -\maketitle: See 18.1. (line 3818) -\mapsto: See 16.2. (line 3204) -\marginpar: See 15.4. (line 2812) -\marginparpush: See 15.4. (line 2841) -\marginparsep: See 15.4. (line 2845) -\marginparwidth: See 15.4. (line 2849) -\markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}: See 18.3. (line 3893) -\markright{RIGHT}: See 18.3. (line 3900) -\mathbf: See 4.1. (line 474) -\mathcal: See 4.1. (line 490) -\mathnormal: See 4.1. (line 487) -\mathrm: See 4.1. (line 471) -\mathsf: See 4.1. (line 477) -\mathtt: See 4.1. (line 480) -\mathversion: See 4.1. (line 492) -\max: See 16.3. (line 3618) -\mbox: See 20.1. (line 4070) -\mdseries: See 4.1. (line 447) -\medskip: See 19.10. (line 4030) -\medskipamount: See 19.10. (line 4030) -\mho: See 16.2. (line 3207) -\mid: See 16.2. (line 3209) -\min: See 16.3. (line 3621) -\models: See 16.2. (line 3212) -\month: See 13.8. (line 2709) -\mp: See 16.2. (line 3215) -\mu: See 16.2. (line 3218) -\multicolumn: See 8.23.1. (line 1949) -\multiput: See 8.18.10. (line 1611) -\nabla: See 16.2. (line 3221) -\name: See 24.7. (line 4896) -\natural: See 16.2. (line 3224) -\ne: See 16.2. (line 3227) -\nearrow: See 16.2. (line 3230) -\neg: See 16.2. (line 3233) -\neq: See 16.2. (line 3236) -\newcommand: See 12.1. (line 2433) -\newcounter: See 12.2. (line 2466) -\newenvironment: See 12.5. (line 2506) -\newfont: See 12.7. (line 2571) -\newlength: See 12.3. (line 2481) -\NEWLINE: See 19.3. (line 3949) -\newline: See 9.3. (line 2217) -\newpage: See 10.3. (line 2308) -\newsavebox: See 12.4. (line 2496) -\newtheorem: See 12.6. (line 2542) -\newtie: See 21.3. (line 4519) -\NG: See 21.4. (line 4569) -\ng: See 21.4. (line 4569) -\ni: See 16.2. (line 3239) -\nocite: See 8.24.3. (line 2055) -\nofiles: See 23.1. (line 4694) -\noindent: See 15.2. (line 2799) -\nolinebreak: See 9.8. (line 2270) -\nonumber: See 8.8. (line 1094) -\nopagebreak: See 10.5. (line 2329) -\normalfont: See 4.1. (line 468) -\normalmarginpar: See 15.4. (line 2829) -\normalsize: See 4.2. (line 537) -\not: See 16.2. (line 3242) -\notin: See 16.2. (line 3245) -\nu: See 16.2. (line 3248) -\nwarrow: See 16.2. (line 3251) -\O (/O): See 21.4. (line 4573) -\o (/o): See 21.4. (line 4573) -\obeycr: See 9.2. (line 2208) -\oddsidemargin: See 3.1. (line 385) -\odot: See 16.2. (line 3254) -\OE (OE): See 21.4. (line 4577) -\oe (oe): See 21.4. (line 4577) -\oint: See 16.2. (line 3257) -\omega: See 16.2. (line 3263) -\Omega: See 16.2. (line 3260) -\ominus: See 16.2. (line 3266) -\onecolumn: See 5.1. (line 645) -\opening: See 24.8. (line 4904) -\oplus: See 16.2. (line 3269) -\oslash: See 16.2. (line 3272) -\otimes: See 16.2. (line 3275) -\oval: See 8.18.11. (line 1621) -\overbrace{TEXT}: See 16.6. (line 3742) -\overline{TEXT}: See 16.6. (line 3746) -\owns: See 16.2. (line 3278) -\P: See 21.2. (line 4300) -\pagebreak: See 10.5. (line 2329) -\pagenumbering: See 18.2. (line 3845) -\pageref: See 7.2. (line 863) -\pagestyle: See 18.3. (line 3869) -\paragraph: See 6. (line 775) -\parallel: See 16.2. (line 3281) -\parbox: See 20.5. (line 4136) -\parindent <1>: See 15.1. (line 2788) -\parindent: See 8.17. (line 1410) -\parsep: See 8.13. (line 1327) -\parskip: See 15.3. (line 2806) -\parskip example: See 8.13. (line 1344) -\part: See 6. (line 764) -\partial: See 16.2. (line 3284) -\partopsep: See 8.13. (line 1337) -\perp: See 16.2. (line 3287) -\phi: See 16.2. (line 3290) -\pi: See 16.2. (line 3296) -\Pi: See 16.2. (line 3293) -\pm: See 16.2. (line 3299) -\pmod: See 16.3. (line 3624) -\poptabs: See 8.21. (line 1783) -\pounds: See 21.2. (line 4304) -\Pr: See 16.3. (line 3627) -\prec: See 16.2. (line 3302) -\preceq: See 16.2. (line 3305) -\prime: See 16.2. (line 3308) -\prod: See 16.2. (line 3311) -\propto: See 16.2. (line 3314) -\protect: See 12.8. (line 2585) -\ps: See 24.9. (line 4917) -\psi: See 16.2. (line 3320) -\Psi: See 16.2. (line 3317) -\pushtabs: See 8.21. (line 1786) -\put: See 8.18.12. (line 1648) -\quotedblbase ("): See 21.2. (line 4308) -\quotesinglbase (,): See 21.2. (line 4309) -\r (ring accent): See 21.3. (line 4513) -\raggedbottom: See 5.4. (line 706) -\raggedleft: See 8.12.1. (line 1240) -\raggedright: See 8.11.1. (line 1214) -\raisebox: See 20.6. (line 4180) -\rangle: See 16.2. (line 3323) -\rbrace: See 16.2. (line 3326) -\rbrack: See 16.2. (line 3329) -\rceil: See 16.2. (line 3332) -\Re: See 16.2. (line 3335) -\ref: See 7.3. (line 873) -\refstepcounter: See 13.6. (line 2696) -\renewenvironment: See 12.5. (line 2506) -\restorecr: See 9.2. (line 2208) -\reversemarginpar: See 15.4. (line 2829) -\rfloor: See 16.2. (line 3338) -\rhd: See 16.2. (line 3341) -\rho: See 16.2. (line 3344) -\right: See 16.6. (line 3738) -\rightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3350) -\Rightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3347) -\rightharpoondown: See 16.2. (line 3353) -\rightharpoonup: See 16.2. (line 3356) -\rightleftharpoons: See 16.2. (line 3359) -\rightmargin: See 8.13. (line 1312) -\rm: See 4.1. (line 513) -\rmfamily: See 4.1. (line 438) -\roman: See 13.1. (line 2635) -\rq: See 21.2. (line 4312) -\rule: See 21.5. (line 4591) -\S: See 21.2. (line 4315) -\savebox: See 20.7. (line 4196) -\sbox: See 20.8. (line 4208) -\sc: See 4.1. (line 516) -\scriptsize: See 4.2. (line 537) -\scshape: See 4.1. (line 462) -\searrow: See 16.2. (line 3362) -\sec: See 16.3. (line 3630) -\section: See 6. (line 769) -\seename: See 23.3. (line 4775) -\selectfont: See 4.3. (line 628) -\setcounter: See 13.4. (line 2680) -\setlength: See 14.1. (line 2726) -\setminus: See 16.2. (line 3365) -\settodepth: See 14.3. (line 2739) -\settoheight: See 14.4. (line 2747) -\settowidth: See 14.5. (line 2755) -\sf: See 4.1. (line 519) -\sffamily: See 4.1. (line 459) -\sharp: See 16.2. (line 3368) -\shortstack: See 8.18.13. (line 1656) -\sigma: See 16.2. (line 3374) -\Sigma: See 16.2. (line 3371) -\signature: See 24.10. (line 4923) -\sim: See 16.2. (line 3377) -\simeq: See 16.2. (line 3380) -\sin: See 16.3. (line 3633) -\sinh: See 16.3. (line 3636) -\sl: See 4.1. (line 522) -\slshape: See 4.1. (line 456) -\small: See 4.2. (line 537) -\smallint: See 16.2. (line 3383) -\smallskip: See 19.10. (line 4034) -\smallskipamount: See 19.10. (line 4034) -\smile: See 16.2. (line 3386) -\SPACE: See 19.3. (line 3949) -\spadesuit: See 16.2. (line 3389) -\sqcap: See 16.2. (line 3392) -\sqcup: See 16.2. (line 3395) -\sqrt[ROOT]{arg}: See 16.6. (line 3749) -\sqsubset: See 16.2. (line 3398) -\sqsubseteq: See 16.2. (line 3401) -\sqsupset: See 16.2. (line 3404) -\sqsupseteq: See 16.2. (line 3407) -\SS (SS): See 21.4. (line 4581) -\ss (ss): See 21.4. (line 4581) -\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: See 16.6. (line 3755) -\star: See 16.2. (line 3410) -\startbreaks: See 24.11. (line 4929) -\stepcounter: See 13.7. (line 2703) -\stop: See 26. (line 4993) -\stopbreaks: See 24.12. (line 4936) -\subparagraph: See 6. (line 777) -\subsection: See 6. (line 771) -\subset: See 16.2. (line 3413) -\subseteq: See 16.2. (line 3416) -\subsubsection: See 6. (line 773) -\succ: See 16.2. (line 3419) -\succeq: See 16.2. (line 3422) -\sum: See 16.2. (line 3425) -\sup: See 16.3. (line 3639) -\supset: See 16.2. (line 3428) -\supseteq: See 16.2. (line 3431) -\surd: See 16.2. (line 3434) -\swarrow: See 16.2. (line 3437) -\symbol: See 21.1. (line 4255) -\t (tie-after accent): See 21.3. (line 4519) -\TAB: See 19.3. (line 3949) -\tabbingsep: See 8.21. (line 1791) -\tabcolsep: See 8.23. (line 1940) -\tableofcontents: See 23.1. (line 4680) -\tan: See 16.3. (line 3642) -\tanh: See 16.3. (line 3645) -\tau: See 16.2. (line 3440) -\telephone: See 24.13. (line 4943) -\TeX: See 21.2. (line 4318) -\textascenderwordmark: See 21.2. (line 4356) -\textasciicircum: See 21.2. (line 4321) -\textasciitilde: See 21.2. (line 4324) -\textasteriskcentered: See 21.2. (line 4327) -\textbackslash: See 21.2. (line 4330) -\textbar: See 21.2. (line 4333) -\textbardbl: See 21.2. (line 4336) -\textbf: See 4.1. (line 450) -\textbigcircle: See 21.2. (line 4339) -\textbraceleft: See 21.2. (line 4342) -\textbraceright: See 21.2. (line 4345) -\textbullet: See 21.2. (line 4348) -\textcapitalwordmark: See 21.2. (line 4355) -\textcircled{LETTER}: See 21.2. (line 4351) -\textcompwordmark: See 21.2. (line 4354) -\textcopyright: See 21.2. (line 4272) -\textdagger: See 21.2. (line 4361) -\textdaggerdbl: See 21.2. (line 4364) -\textdollar (or $): See 21.2. (line 4367) -\textellipsis: See 21.2. (line 4293) -\textemdash (or ---): See 21.2. (line 4370) -\textendash (or --): See 21.2. (line 4373) -\texteuro: See 21.2. (line 4376) -\textexclamdown (or !`): See 21.2. (line 4379) -\textfloatsep: See 8.10. (line 1184) -\textfraction: See 8.10. (line 1188) -\textgreater: See 21.2. (line 4382) -\textheight: See 5.5. (line 733) -\textit: See 4.1. (line 441) -\textleftarrow: See 21.2. (line 4388) -\textless: See 21.2. (line 4385) -\textmd: See 4.1. (line 447) -\textnormal: See 4.1. (line 468) -\textordfeminine: See 21.2. (line 4391) -\textordmasculine: See 21.2. (line 4392) -\textparagraph: See 21.2. (line 4301) -\textperiodcentered: See 21.2. (line 4398) -\textquestiondown (or ?`): See 21.2. (line 4401) -\textquotedblleft (or ``): See 21.2. (line 4404) -\textquotedblright (or '): See 21.2. (line 4407) -\textquoteleft (or `): See 21.2. (line 4410) -\textquoteright (or '): See 21.2. (line 4413) -\textquotestraightbase: See 21.2. (line 4416) -\textquotestraightdblbase: See 21.2. (line 4417) -\textregistered: See 21.2. (line 4420) -\textrightarrow: See 21.2. (line 4423) -\textrm: See 4.1. (line 438) -\textsc: See 4.1. (line 462) -\textsf: See 4.1. (line 459) -\textsl: See 4.1. (line 456) -\textsterling: See 21.2. (line 4305) -\textthreequartersemdash: See 21.2. (line 4426) -\texttrademark: See 21.2. (line 4429) -\texttt: See 4.1. (line 465) -\texttwelveudash: See 21.2. (line 4432) -\textunderscore: See 21.2. (line 4435) -\textup: See 4.1. (line 453) -\textvisiblespace: See 21.2. (line 4438) -\textwidth: See 5.5. (line 740) -\TH (): See 21.4. (line 4585) -\th (): See 21.4. (line 4585) -\thanks{TEXT}: See 18.1. (line 3833) -\theta: See 16.2. (line 3443) -\thicklines: See 8.18.8. (line 1597) -\thinlines: See 8.18.9. (line 1604) -\thinspace: See 19.5. (line 3974) -\thispagestyle: See 18.4. (line 3907) -\tilde: See 16.4. (line 3686) -\times: See 16.2. (line 3446) -\tiny: See 4.2. (line 537) -\title{TEXT}: See 18.1. (line 3837) -\to: See 16.2. (line 3449) -\today: See 21.6. (line 4610) -\top: See 16.2. (line 3452) -\topfraction: See 8.10. (line 1193) -\topmargin: See 5.5. (line 746) -\topsep: See 8.13. (line 1331) -\topskip: See 5.5. (line 753) -\totalheight: See 14.6. (line 2767) -\triangle: See 16.2. (line 3455) -\triangleleft: See 16.2. (line 3458) -\triangleright: See 16.2. (line 3461) -\tt: See 4.1. (line 525) -\ttfamily: See 4.1. (line 465) -\twocolumn: See 5.2. (line 651) -\typein: See 25.1. (line 4954) -\typeout: See 25.2. (line 4968) -\u (breve accent): See 21.3. (line 4524) -\unboldmath: See 16. (line 2884) -\underbar: See 21.3. (line 4527) -\underbrace{math}: See 16.6. (line 3759) -\underline{text}: See 16.6. (line 3762) -\unitlength: See 8.18. (line 1431) -\unlhd: See 16.2. (line 3464) -\unrhd: See 16.2. (line 3467) -\uparrow: See 16.2. (line 3473) -\Uparrow: See 16.2. (line 3470) -\updownarrow: See 16.2. (line 3479) -\Updownarrow: See 16.2. (line 3476) -\uplus: See 16.2. (line 3482) -\upshape: See 4.1. (line 453) -\upsilon: See 16.2. (line 3488) -\Upsilon: See 16.2. (line 3485) -\usebox: See 20.9. (line 4220) -\usecounter: See 13.2. (line 2655) -\usefont: See 4.3. (line 632) -\usepackage: See 3.1. (line 404) -\v (breve accent): See 21.3. (line 4534) -\value: See 13.3. (line 2666) -\varepsilon: See 16.2. (line 3491) -\varphi: See 16.2. (line 3494) -\varpi: See 16.2. (line 3497) -\varrho: See 16.2. (line 3500) -\varsigma: See 16.2. (line 3503) -\vartheta: See 16.2. (line 3506) -\vdash: See 16.2. (line 3509) -\vdots: See 16.6. (line 3767) -\vec: See 16.4. (line 3689) -\vector: See 8.18.14. (line 1677) -\vee: See 16.2. (line 3512) -\verb: See 8.27.1. (line 2150) -\vert: See 16.2. (line 3518) -\Vert: See 16.2. (line 3515) -\vfill: See 19.11. (line 4043) -\vline: See 8.23.4. (line 1990) -\vspace: See 19.12. (line 4050) -\wedge: See 16.2. (line 3521) -\widehat: See 16.4. (line 3692) -\width: See 14.6. (line 2761) -\wp: See 16.2. (line 3524) -\wr: See 16.2. (line 3527) -\xi: See 16.2. (line 3533) -\Xi: See 16.2. (line 3530) -\year: See 13.8. (line 2709) -\zeta: See 16.2. (line 3536) -\{: See 21.1. (line 4241) -\|: See 16.2. (line 2911) -\}: See 21.1. (line 4241) -\~: See 21.1. (line 4251) -\~ (tilde accent): See 21.3. (line 4482) -^: See 16.1. (line 2897) -_: See 16.1. (line 2897) -a4paper option: See 3.1. (line 349) -a5paper option: See 3.1. (line 349) -abstract environment: See 8.1. (line 895) -array environment: See 8.2. (line 906) -article class: See 3. (line 326) -b5paper option: See 3.1. (line 349) -book class: See 3. (line 326) -center environment: See 8.3. (line 953) -description environment: See 8.4. (line 990) -displaymath environment <1>: See 16. (line 2859) -displaymath environment: See 8.5. (line 1013) -document environment: See 8.6. (line 1033) -draft option: See 3.1. (line 354) -enumerate environment: See 8.7. (line 1039) -eqnarray environment: See 8.8. (line 1080) -equation environment <1>: See 16. (line 2859) -equation environment: See 8.9. (line 1106) -executivepaper option: See 3.1. (line 349) -figure: See 8.10. (line 1119) -final option: See 3.1. (line 354) -fleqn option: See 3.1. (line 354) -flushleft environment: See 8.11. (line 1201) -flushright environment: See 8.12. (line 1227) -indexspace: See 23.3. (line 4788) -itemize environment: See 8.13. (line 1253) -landscape option: See 3.1. (line 354) -legalpaper option: See 3.1. (line 349) -leqno option: See 3.1. (line 354) -letter: See 8.14. (line 1360) -letter class: See 3. (line 326) -letterpaper option: See 3.1. (line 349) -list: See 8.15. (line 1365) -lR box: See 8.18. (line 1485) -lrbox: See 20.3. (line 4098) -math environment <1>: See 16. (line 2859) -math environment: See 8.16. (line 1387) -minipage environment: See 8.17. (line 1399) -notitlepage option: See 3.1. (line 354) -onecolumn option: See 3.1. (line 379) -oneside option: See 3.1. (line 379) -openany option: See 3.1. (line 379) -openbib option: See 3.1. (line 354) -openright option: See 3.1. (line 379) -picture: See 8.18. (line 1427) -printindex: See 23.3. (line 4784) -quotation: See 8.19. (line 1688) -quote: See 8.20. (line 1703) -report class: See 3. (line 326) -secnumdepth counter: See 6. (line 810) -slides class: See 3. (line 326) -tabbing environment: See 8.21. (line 1718) -table: See 8.22. (line 1810) -tabular environment: See 8.23. (line 1837) -textcomp package: See 21.2. (line 4267) -thebibliography: See 8.24. (line 1998) -theorem environment: See 8.25. (line 2103) -titlepage environment: See 8.26. (line 2116) -titlepage option: See 3.1. (line 354) -twocolumn option: See 3.1. (line 379) -twoside option: See 3.1. (line 379) -verbatim environment: See 8.27. (line 2133) -verse environment: See 8.28. (line 2167) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml index 6ca9b0e9b2a..f2d62157bbb 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml @@ -1,2235 +1,2666 @@ - + - latex2e.xml - July 2010 - &latex;2e reference manual (July 2010) + +latex2e.xml +July 2010 +&latex;2e reference manual (July 2010) + + + + - This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a document preparation system, version of July 2010. - This was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The &latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The &latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and the &latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as &tex;niques number 10), as reference material (text was not directly copied). - Copyright ©right; 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Karl Berry.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. - Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. - Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. - Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. - TeX - - &latex;: Structured documents for &tex; - unofficial &latex; reference manual - July 2010 - - This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a document preparation system, version of July 2010. - This was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The &latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The &latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and the &latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as &tex;niques number 10), as reference material (text was not directly copied). - Copyright ©right; 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Karl Berry.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. - Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. - Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. - Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. - - - - - Top - Overview - (dir) - - &latex;2e - This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a document preparation system, version as of July 2010. It is intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of &latex; for many years. - Knuth, Donald E.Lamport, Leslie&latex; Project team&latex; is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's &tex; typesetting program. &latex; was originally created by Leslie Lamport; it is now maintained by a group of volunteers (http://latex-project.org). The official documentation written by the &latex; project is available there. Again, the present document is unofficial and has not been reviewed by the &latex; maintainers. - - - Overview - Overview - What is &latex;? - - - Starting & ending - Starting & ending - The standard beginning and end of a document. - - - Document classes - Document classes - Some of the various classes available. - - - Typefaces - Typefaces - And fonts, such as bold, italics etc. - - - Layout - Layout - Controlling the page layout. - - - Sectioning - Sectioning - How to section properly. - - - Cross references - Cross references - Automatic referencing. - - - Environments - Environments - Such as enumerate & itemize. - - - Line breaking - Line breaking - Influencing line breaks. - - - Page breaking - Page breaking - Influencing page breaks. - - - Footnotes - Footnotes - How to produce footnotes. - - - Definitions - Definitions - Define your own commands etc. - - - Counters - Counters - Internal counters used by &latex;. - - - Lengths - Lengths - The length commands. - - - Making paragraphs - Making paragraphs - Paragraph commands. - - - Math formulas - Math formulas - How to create mathematical formulas. - - - Modes - Modes - Paragraph, Math or LR modes. - - - Page styles - Page styles - Various styles of page layout. - - - Spaces - Spaces - Horizontal and vertical space. - - - Boxes - Boxes - Making boxes. - - - Special insertions - Special insertions - Inserting reserved and special characters. - - - Splitting the input - Splitting the input - Dealing with big files by splitting. - - - Front/back matter - Front/back matter - Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes. - - - Letters - Letters - The letter class. - - - Terminal input/output - Terminal input/output - User interaction. - - - Command line - Command line - System-independent command-line behavior. - - - Document templates - Document templates - Starter templates for various document classes. - - - Concept Index - Concept Index - General index. - - - Command Index - Command Index - Alphabetical list of &latex; commands. - - - - - - Overview - Starting & ending - Top - Top - - Overview of &latex; - overview of &latex;&latex; overview The &latex; command typesets a file of text using the &tex; program and the &latex; “macro package” for &tex;. To be more specific, it processes an input file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that describe how the text should be formatted. It produces at least three files as output: - - - A main output file, which is one of: - - - If invoked as latex, a “Device Independent” (.dvi) file. This contains commands that can be translated into commands for a variety of output devices. You can view such .dvi output of &latex; by using a program such as xdvi (display directly) or dvips (convert to PostScript). - - - If invoked as pdflatex, a “Portable Document Format” (.pdf) file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but it does make the output much larger than the .dvi produced from the same document. - - - There are other less-common variants of &latex; (and &tex;) as well, which can produce HTML, XML, and other things. - - - A “transcript” or .log file that contains summary information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. - - - An “auxiliary” or .aux file. This is used by &latex; itself, for things such as sectioning. - - - A &latex; command begins with the command name, which consists of a \ followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, [], are optional while arguments contained in braces, {}, are required. - &latex; is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless explicitly directed to do otherwise. - - - - Starting & ending - Document classes - Overview - Top - - Starting & ending - starting & endingending & starting A minimal input file looks like the following: - \documentclass{class} + +This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a +document preparation system, version of July 2010. + +This was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS +Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by +George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The +&latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The +&latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl +Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges +using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and the +&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway +and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as +&tex;niques number 10), as reference material (text was not +directly copied). + +Copyright ©right; 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Karl Berry.&linebreak; +Copyright ©right; 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak; +Copyright ©right; 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of +this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice +are preserved on all copies. + + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire +resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission +notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. + +TeX + + +(latex2e) + LaTeX2e + Unofficial LaTeX reference manual. + + + + + +&latex;: Structured documents for &tex; +unofficial &latex; reference manual +July 2010 + + +This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a +document preparation system, version of July 2010. + +This was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS +Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by +George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The +&latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The +&latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl +Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges +using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and the +&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway +and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as +&tex;niques number 10), as reference material (text was not +directly copied). + +Copyright ©right; 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Karl Berry.&linebreak; +Copyright ©right; 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak; +Copyright ©right; 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of +this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice +are preserved on all copies. + + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire +resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission +notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. + + + + + + +Top +Overview +(dir) + + +&latex;2e + +This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a +document preparation system, version as of July 2010. It is +intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of +&latex; for many years. + +Knuth, Donald E.Lamport, Leslie&latex; Project team&latex; is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's +&tex; typesetting program. &latex; was originally created by Leslie +Lamport; it is now maintained by a group of volunteers +(http://latex-project.org). The official documentation written +by the &latex; project is available there. Again, the present +document is unofficial and has not been reviewed by the &latex; +maintainers. + + + +Overview +Overview + What is &latex;? + + +Starting & ending +Starting & ending + The standard beginning and end of a document. + + +Document classes +Document classes + Some of the various classes available. + + +Typefaces +Typefaces + And fonts, such as bold, italics etc. + + +Layout +Layout + Controlling the page layout. + + +Sectioning +Sectioning + How to section properly. + + +Cross references +Cross references + Automatic referencing. + + +Environments +Environments + Such as enumerate & itemize. + + +Line breaking +Line breaking + Influencing line breaks. + + +Page breaking +Page breaking + Influencing page breaks. + + +Footnotes +Footnotes + How to produce footnotes. + + +Definitions +Definitions + Define your own commands etc. + + +Counters +Counters + Internal counters used by &latex;. + + +Lengths +Lengths + The length commands. + + +Making paragraphs +Making paragraphs + Paragraph commands. + + +Math formulas +Math formulas + How to create mathematical formulas. + + +Modes +Modes + Paragraph, Math or LR modes. + + +Page styles +Page styles + Various styles of page layout. + + +Spaces +Spaces + Horizontal and vertical space. + + +Boxes +Boxes + Making boxes. + + +Special insertions +Special insertions + Inserting reserved and special characters. + + +Splitting the input +Splitting the input + Dealing with big files by splitting. + + +Front/back matter +Front/back matter + Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes. + + +Letters +Letters + The letter class. + + +Terminal input/output +Terminal input/output + User interaction. + + +Command line +Command line + System-independent command-line behavior. + + +Document templates +Document templates + Starter templates for various document classes. + + +Concept Index +Concept Index + General index. + + +Command Index +Command Index + Alphabetical list of &latex; commands. + + + + + + +Overview +Starting & ending +Top +Top + + +Overview of &latex; + +overview of &latex;&latex; overview +The &latex; command typesets a file of text using the &tex; program +and the &latex; “macro package” for &tex;. To be more specific, +it processes an input file containing the text of a document with +interspersed commands that describe how the text should be formatted. +It produces at least three files as output: + + +A main output file, which is one of: + + +If invoked as latex, a “Device Independent” (.dvi) +file. This contains commands that can be translated into commands for +a variety of output devices. You can view such .dvi output of +&latex; by using a program such as xdvi (display directly) +or dvips (convert to PostScript). + + + +If invoked as pdflatex, a “Portable Document Format” +(.pdf) file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with +all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but it does +make the output much larger than the .dvi produced from the +same document. + + + +There are other less-common variants of &latex; (and &tex;) as well, +which can produce HTML, XML, and other things. + + + +A “transcript” or .log file that contains summary information and +diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. + + + +An “auxiliary” or .aux file. This is used by &latex; itself, for +things such as sectioning. + + + +A &latex; command begins with the command name, which consists of a +\ followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a +single non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, [], +are optional while arguments contained in braces, {}, are +required. + +&latex; is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless +explicitly directed to do otherwise. + + + + +Starting & ending +Document classes +Overview +Top + + +Starting & ending + +starting & endingending & starting +A minimal input file looks like the following: + +\documentclass{class} \begin{document} your text -\end{document} - where the class is a valid document class for &latex;. See Document classes, for details of the various document classes available locally. - preamble, definedYou may include other &latex; commands between the \documentclass and the \begin{document} commands (this area is called the preamble). - - - - Document classes - Typefaces - Starting & ending - Top - - Document classes - document classesclasses of documents\documentclass The class of a given document is defined with the command: - \documentclass[options]{class} - The \documentclass command must be the first command in a &latex; source file. - article classreport classbook classletter classslides classBuilt-in &latex; document class names are (many other document classes are available as add-ons; see Overview): - article report book letter slides +\end{document} + +where the class is a valid document class for &latex;. +See Document classes, for details of the various document classes +available locally. + +preamble, definedYou may include other &latex; commands between the \documentclass +and the \begin{document} commands (this area is called the +preamble). + + + + +Document classes +Typefaces +Starting & ending +Top + + +Document classes + +document classesclasses of documents\documentclass +The class of a given document is defined with the command: + +\documentclass[options]{class} + +The \documentclass command must be the first command in a +&latex; source file. + +article classreport classbook classletter classslides classBuilt-in &latex; document class names are (many other document +classes are available as add-ons; see Overview): + +article report book letter slides + - Standard options are described below. - - - Document class options - Document class options - Global options. - - - - - - Document class options - Document classes -
- Document class options - document class optionsoptions, document classclass optionsglobal options You can specify so-called global options or class options to the \documentclass command by enclosing them in square brackets as usual. To specify more than one option, separate them with a comma: - \documentclass[option1,option2,...]{class} - Here is the list of the standard class options. - 10pt option11pt option12pt optionAll of the standard classes except slides accept the following options for selecting the typeface size (default is 10pt): - 10pt 11pt 12pt - a4paper optiona5paper optionb5paper optionexecutivepaper optionlegalpaper optionletterpaper optionAll of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper size (default is letterpaper): - a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper - draft optionfinal optionfleqn optionlandscape optionleqno optionopenbib optiontitlepage optionnotitlepage optionMiscellaneous other options: - - - draft, finalblack boxes, omitting - - mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final. - - - - fleqn - - Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. - - - - landscape - - Selects landscape format; default is portrait. - - - - leqno - - Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. - - - - openbib - - Use “open” bibliography format. - - - - titlepage, notitlepage - - Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. - - -
- These options are not available with the slides class: - onecolumn optiontwocolumn optiononeside optiontwoside optionopenright optionopenany option - - - onecolumn - twocolumn - - Typeset in one or two columns; default is onecolumn. - - - - oneside - twoside\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin - - Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except for the book class. - The \evensidemargin (\oddsidemargin parameter determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For one-sided printing the text is centered, for two-sided, \oddsidemargin is 40% of the difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth with \evensidemargin the remainder. - - - - openright - openany - - Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default is openright for book. - - -
- The slides class offers the option clock for printing the time at the bottom of each note. - packages, loadingloading additional packages\usepackageAdditional packages are loaded like this: - \usepackage[options]{pkg} - To specify more than one pkg, you can separate them with a comma, or use multiple \usepackage commands. - global optionsoptions, globalAny options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with \usepackage. -
-
- - Typefaces - Layout - Document classes - Top - - Typefaces - typefacesfonts Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. - - - Font styles - Font styles - Select roman, italics etc. - - - Font sizes - Font sizes - Select point size. - - - Low-level font commands - Low-level font commands - Select encoding, family, series, shape. - - - - - - Font styles - Font sizes - Typefaces -
- Font styles - font stylestypeface stylesstyles of text The following type style commands are supported by &latex;. - These commands are used like \textit{italic text}. The corresponding command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. - The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either \sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily to get bold sans serif. - You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance, \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. - - - \textrm (\rmfamily)\textrm\rmfamily - - Roman. - - - - \textit (\itshape)\textit\itshape - - Italics. - - - - \emph\emphemphasis - - Emphasis (switches between \textit and \textrm). - - - - \textmd (\mdseries)\textmd\mdseries - - Medium weight (default). - - - - \textbf (\bfseries)\textbf\bfseries - - Boldface. - - - - \textup (\upshape)\textup\upshape - - Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. - - - - \textsl (\slshape)\textsl\slshape - - Slanted. - - - - \textsf (\sffamily)\textsf\sffamily - - Sans serif. - - - - \textsc (\scshape)\textsc\scshape - - Small caps. - - - - \texttt (\ttfamily)\texttt\ttfamily - - Typewriter. - - - - \textnormal (\normalfont)\textnormal\normalfont - - Main document font. - - - - \mathrm\mathrm - - Roman, for use in math mode. - - - - \mathbf\mathbf - - Boldface, for use in math mode. - - - - \mathsf\mathsf - - Sans serif, for use in math mode. - - - - \mathtt\mathtt - - Typewriter, for use in math mode. - - - - \mathit - (\mit) - - Italics, for use in math mode. - - - - \mathnormal\mathnormal - - For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. - - - - \mathcal\mathcal - - `Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. - - -
- In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} \mathversioncan be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. - &latex; also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to the given style, that is, are not cumulative. They are used differently than the above commands, too: {\cmd ...} instead of \cmd{...}. These are two very different things. - - - \bf\bfbold font - - Switch to bold face. - - - - \cal\calscript letters for mathcalligraphic letters for math - - Switch to calligraphic letters for math. - - - - \em\ememphasis - - Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). - - - - \it\ititalic font - - Italics. - - - - \rm\rmroman font - - Roman. - - - - \sc\scsmall caps font - - Small caps. - - - - \sf\sfsans serif font - - Sans serif. - - - - \sl\slslanted fontoblique font - - Slanted (oblique). - - - - \tt\tttypewriter fontmonospace fontfixed-width font - - Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width). - - -
-
-
- - Font sizes - Low-level font commands - Font styles - Typefaces -
- Font sizes - font sizestypeface sizessizes of text The following standard type size commands are supported by &latex;. The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size used (in points) with the 10pt, 11pt, and 12pt document size options, respectively (see Document class options). - \tiny\scriptsize\footnotesize\small\normalsize\large\Large\LARGE\huge\Huge - - 36 - 7 - 7 - 7 - - - Command - 10pt - 11pt - 12pt - - - - - \tiny - 5 - 6 - 6 - - - \scriptsize - 7 - 8 - 8 - - - \footnotesize - 8 - 9 - 10 - - - \small - 9 - 10 - 10.95 - - - \normalsize (default) - 10 - 10.95 - 12 - - - \large - 12 - 12 - 14.4 - - - \Large - 14.4 - 14.4 - 17.28 - - - \LARGE - 17.28 - 17.28 - 20.74 - - - \huge - 20.74 - 20.74 - 24.88 - - - \Huge - 24.88 - 24.88 - 24.88 - - - - The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. You can also use the environment form of these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. -
-
- - Low-level font commands - Font sizes - Typefaces -
- Low-level font commands - low-level font commandsfont commands, low-level These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available ones. - - - \fontencoding{enc}\fontencoding - - Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1. - - - - \fontfamily{family}\fontfamily - - Select font family. Valid families include: - - - - cmr for Computer Modern Roman - - - cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif - - - cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter - - - and numerous others. - - - - \fontseries{series}\fontseries - - Select font series. Valid series include: - - - - m Medium (normal) - - - b Bold - - - c Condensed - - - bc Bold condensed - - - bx Bold extended - - - and various other combinations. - - - - \fontshape{shape}\fontshape - - Select font shape. Valid shapes are: - - - - n Upright (normal) - - - it Italic - - - sl Slanted (oblique) - - - sc Small caps - - - ui Upright italics - - - ol Outline - - - The two last shapes are not available for most font families. - - - - \fontsize{size}{skip}\fontsize\baselineskip - - Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a parameter named \baselineskip. The unit of both parameters defaults to pt. The default \baselineskip for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the \fontsize. - \baselinestretchsetspace packagedouble spacingThe line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the \baselinestretch parameter when the type size changes; the default is 1. However, the best way to “double space” a document, if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use the setspace package; see http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace. - \linespread - - - - \linespread{factor} - - Equivalent to \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and therefore must be followed by \selectfont to have any effect. Best specified in the preamble, or use the setspace package, as described just above. - \selectfontThe changes made by calling the font commands described above do not come into effect until \selectfont is called. - - - - \usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}\usefont - - The same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape with the given parameters, followed by \selectfont. - - -
-
-
- - Layout - Sectioning - Typefaces - Top - - Layout - layout commands Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. - - - \onecolumn - \onecolumn - Use one-column layout. - - - \twocolumn - \twocolumn - Use two-column layout. - - - \flushbottom - \flushbottom - Make all text pages the same height. - - - \raggedbottom - \raggedbottom - Allow text pages of differing height. - - - Page layout parameters - Page layout parameters - \headheight \footskip. - - - - - - \onecolumn - \twocolumn - Layout -
- <code>\onecolumn</code> - \onecolumnone-column output The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces single-column output. This is the default. -
-
- - \twocolumn - \flushbottom - \onecolumn - Layout -
- <code>\twocolumn</code> - \twocolumnmulticolumn texttwo-column output Synopsis: - \twocolumn[text1col] - The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces two-column output. If the optional text1col argument is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts. - These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: - - - \columnsep\columnsep - - The distance between columns (35pt by default). - - - - \columnseprule\columnseprule - - The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. - - - - \columnwidth\columnwidth - - The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth in single-column text. - - -
- These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: - - - \dbltopfraction\dbltopfraction - - Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied by floats. Default .7, can be usefully redefined to (say) .9 to avoid going to float pages so soon. - - - - \dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction - - The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats, for a two-column float page. Default .5. - - - - \dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep - - Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float page. Default 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for 10pt and 11pt documents, 14pt plus2pt minus4pt for 12pt. - - - - \dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep - - Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page and the main text. Default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. - - -
-
-
- - \flushbottom - \raggedbottom - \twocolumn - Layout -
- <code>\flushbottom</code> - \flushbottom The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same height, adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the page. - This is the default if twocolumn mode is selected (see Document class options). -
-
- - \raggedbottom - Page layout parameters - \flushbottom - Layout -
- <code>\raggedbottom</code> - \raggedbottomstretch, omitting vertical The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the natural height of the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched. -
-
- - Page layout parameters - \raggedbottom - Layout -
- Page layout parameters - page layout parametersparameters, page layoutlayout, page parameters forheader, parameters forfooter, parameters forrunning header and footer - - - \headheight\headheight - - Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is 30pt, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. - - - - \headsep\headsep - - Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of the main text. Default is 25pt, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. - - - - \footskip\footskip - - Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of the page footer. Default is 30pt, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. - - - - \linewidth\linewidth - - Width of the current line; the default varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode, etc. For an article document in 10pt, it's set to 345pt; in two-column mode, that becomes 229.5pt. - - - - \textheight\textheight - - The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with the font size, document class, etc. For an article or report document in 10pt, it's set to 43\baselineskip; for book, it's 41\baselineskip. For 11pt, it's 38\baselineskip and for 12pt, 36\baselineskip. - - - - \textwidth\textwidth - - The normal horizontal width of the page body; the default varies as usual. For an article or report document, it's 345pt at 10pt, 360pt at 11pt, and 390pt at 12pt. For a book document, it's 4.5in at 10pt, and 5in at 11pt or 12pt. - - - - \topmargin\topmargin - - Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is computed based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in − \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip, and then divided by two. - - - - \topskip\topskip - - Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is the same as the font size, e.g., 10pt at 10pt. - - -
-
-
- - Sectioning - Cross references - Layout - Top - - Sectioning - sectioning Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: - - - \part\part - \chapter\chapter - - (report and book class only) - - - - \section\section - \subsection\subsection - \subsubsection\subsubsection - \paragraph\paragraph - \subparagraph\subparagraph - -
- All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., - \chapter[toctitle]{title} - In addition to providing the heading title in the main text, the section title can appear in two other places: - - - The table of contents. - - - The running head at the top of the page. - - - You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument toctitle that, when given, specifies the text for these other places. - *-form of sectioning commandsAlso, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print title as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of contents. For instance: - \section*{Preamble} - \appendixappendix, creatingThe \appendix command changes the way following sectional units are numbered. The \appendix command itself generates no text and does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command is something like - \chapter{A Chapter} + +Standard options are described below. + + + +Document class options +Document class options + Global options. + + + + + +Document class options +Document classes + +
+Document class options + +document class optionsoptions, document classclass optionsglobal options +You can specify so-called global options or class options +to the \documentclass command by enclosing them in square +brackets as usual. To specify more than one option, separate +them with a comma: + +\documentclass[option1,option2,...]{class} + +Here is the list of the standard class options. + +10pt option11pt option12pt optionAll of the standard classes except slides accept the following +options for selecting the typeface size (default is 10pt): + +10pt 11pt 12pt + +a4paper optiona5paper optionb5paper optionexecutivepaper optionlegalpaper optionletterpaper optionAll of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper +size (default is letterpaper): + +a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper + +draft optionfinal optionfleqn optionlandscape optionleqno optionopenbib optiontitlepage optionnotitlepage optionMiscellaneous other options: + +draft, final +black boxes, omittingmark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final. +fleqn +Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. +landscape +Selects landscape format; default is portrait. +leqno +Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. +openbib +Use “open” bibliography format. +titlepage, notitlepage +Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. +
+ +These options are not available with the slides class: + +onecolumn optiontwocolumn optiononeside optiontwoside optionopenright optionopenany optiononecolumn +twocolumn +Typeset in one or two columns; default is onecolumn. + +oneside +twoside +\evensidemargin\oddsidemarginSelects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except +for the book class. + +The \evensidemargin (\oddsidemargin parameter determines +the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the +page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper +size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For one-sided +printing the text is centered, for two-sided, \oddsidemargin is +40% of the difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth +with \evensidemargin the remainder. + +openright +openany +Determines if a chapter should start on a +right-hand page; default is openright for book. +
+ +The slides class offers the option clock for printing +the time at the bottom of each note. + + +packages, loadingloading additional packages\usepackageAdditional packages are loaded like this: + +\usepackage[options]{pkg} + +To specify more than one pkg, you can separate them with a +comma, or use multiple \usepackage commands. + +global optionsoptions, globalAny options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown +by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with +\usepackage. + + +
+
+ +Typefaces +Layout +Document classes +Top + + +Typefaces + +typefacesfonts +Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size +and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. + + + +Font styles +Font styles + Select roman, italics etc. + + +Font sizes +Font sizes + Select point size. + + +Low-level font commands +Low-level font commands + Select encoding, family, series, shape. + + + + + +Font styles +Font sizes +Typefaces + +
+Font styles + +font stylestypeface stylesstyles of text +The following type style commands are supported by &latex;. + +These commands are used like \textit{italic text}. The +corresponding command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which +takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the +next type style command or the end of the current group. + +The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either +\sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily to get bold +sans serif. + +You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance, +\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. + +\textrm (\rmfamily) +\textrm\rmfamilyRoman. + +\textit (\itshape) +\textit\itshapeItalics. + +\emph +\emphemphasisEmphasis (switches between \textit and \textrm). + +\textmd (\mdseries) +\textmd\mdseriesMedium weight (default). + +\textbf (\bfseries) +\textbf\bfseriesBoldface. +\textup (\upshape) +\textup\upshapeUpright (default). The opposite of slanted. +\textsl (\slshape) +\textsl\slshapeSlanted. +\textsf (\sffamily) +\textsf\sffamilySans serif. +\textsc (\scshape) +\textsc\scshapeSmall caps. +\texttt (\ttfamily) +\texttt\ttfamilyTypewriter. +\textnormal (\normalfont) +\textnormal\normalfontMain document font. +\mathrm +\mathrmRoman, for use in math mode. +\mathbf +\mathbfBoldface, for use in math mode. +\mathsf +\mathsfSans serif, for use in math mode. +\mathtt +\mathttTypewriter, for use in math mode. + +\mathit +(\mit) +Italics, for use in math mode. + +\mathnormal +\mathnormalFor use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. +\mathcal +\mathcal`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. +
+ +In addition, the command +\mathversion{bold} +\mathversioncan be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in +formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. + +&latex; also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to +the given style, that is, are not cumulative. They are used +differently than the above commands, too: {\cmd ...} +instead of \cmd{...}. These are two very different +things. + +\bf\bf +bold fontSwitch to bold face. + +\cal\cal +script letters for mathcalligraphic letters for mathSwitch to calligraphic letters for math. + +\em\em +emphasisEmphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). + +\it\it +italic fontItalics. + +\rm\rm +roman fontRoman. + +\sc\sc +small caps fontSmall caps. + +\sf\sf +sans serif fontSans serif. + +\sl\sl +slanted fontoblique fontSlanted (oblique). + +\tt\tt +typewriter fontmonospace fontfixed-width fontTypewriter (monospace, fixed-width). + +
+ + +
+ +Font sizes +Low-level font commands +Font styles +Typefaces + +
+Font sizes +font sizestypeface sizessizes of text +The following standard type size commands are supported by &latex;. +The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font +size used (in points) with the 10pt, 11pt, and +12pt document size options, respectively (see Document class options). + +\tiny\scriptsize\footnotesize\small\normalsize\large\Large\LARGE\huge\Huge +36 +7 +7 +7 + Command 10pt 11pt 12pt + \tiny + 5 6 6 + \scriptsize + 7 8 8 + \footnotesize + 8 9 10 + \small + 9 10 10.95 + \normalsize (default) + 10 10.95 12 + \large + 12 12 14.4 + \Large + 14.4 14.4 17.28 + \LARGE + 17.28 17.28 20.74 + \huge + 20.74 20.74 24.88 + \Huge + 24.88 24.88 24.88 + + +The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of +the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the +end of the current group. You can also use the environment form of +these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. + + +
+ +Low-level font commands +Font sizes +Typefaces + +
+Low-level font commands +low-level font commandsfont commands, low-level +These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and +packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available +ones. + +\fontencoding{enc} +\fontencodingSelect font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1. + +\fontfamily{family} +\fontfamilySelect font family. Valid families include: + + cmr for Computer Modern Roman + + cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif + + cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter + + + +and numerous others. + +\fontseries{series} +\fontseriesSelect font series. Valid series include: + + m Medium (normal) + + b Bold + + c Condensed + + bc Bold condensed + + bx Bold extended + + + +and various other combinations. + +\fontshape{shape} +\fontshapeSelect font shape. Valid shapes are: + + n Upright (normal) + + it Italic + + sl Slanted (oblique) + + sc Small caps + + ui Upright italics + + ol Outline + + + +The two last shapes are not available for most font families. + +\fontsize{size}{skip} +\fontsize\baselineskipSet font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and +the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a parameter +named \baselineskip. The unit of both parameters defaults to +pt. The default \baselineskip for the Computer Modern typeface +is 1.2 times the \fontsize. + +\baselinestretchsetspace packagedouble spacingThe line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the +\baselinestretch parameter when the type size changes; the +default is 1. However, the best way to “double space” a document, +if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use the +setspace package; see +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace. + +\linespread\linespread{factor} +Equivalent to +\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and +therefore must be followed by \selectfont to have any effect. +Best specified in the preamble, or use the setspace package, as +described just above. + +\selectfontThe changes made by calling the font commands described above do +not come into effect until \selectfont is called. + +\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} +\usefontThe same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, +\fontseries and \fontshape with the given parameters, +followed by \selectfont. + +
+ + +
+
+ +Layout +Sectioning +Typefaces +Top + + +Layout +layout commands +Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. + + + +\onecolumn +\onecolumn + Use one-column layout. + + +\twocolumn +\twocolumn + Use two-column layout. + + +\flushbottom +\flushbottom + Make all text pages the same height. + + +\raggedbottom +\raggedbottom + Allow text pages of differing height. + + +Page layout parameters +Page layout parameters + \headheight \footskip. + + + + + +\onecolumn +\twocolumn +Layout + +
+<code>\onecolumn</code> +\onecolumnone-column output +The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces +single-column output. This is the default. + + +
+ +\twocolumn +\flushbottom +\onecolumn +Layout + +
+<code>\twocolumn</code> +\twocolumnmulticolumn texttwo-column output +Synopsis: + +\twocolumn[text1col] + +The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces +two-column output. If the optional text1col argument is present, +it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting +starts. + +These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: + +\columnsep\columnsep +The distance between columns (35pt by default). + +\columnseprule\columnseprule +The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. + +\columnwidth\columnwidth +The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth in +single-column text. + +
+ +These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: + +\dbltopfraction\dbltopfraction +Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied +by floats. Default .7, can be usefully redefined to (say) +.9 to avoid going to float pages so soon. + +\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction +The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats, +for a two-column float page. Default .5. + +\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep +Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float +page. Default 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for 10pt and +11pt documents, 14pt plus2pt minus4pt for 12pt. + +\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep +Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page +and the main text. Default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. + +
+ + +
+ +\flushbottom +\raggedbottom +\twocolumn +Layout + +
+<code>\flushbottom</code> + +\flushbottom +The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same +height, adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the +page. + +This is the default if twocolumn mode is selected +(see Document class options). + + +
+ +\raggedbottom +Page layout parameters +\flushbottom +Layout + +
+<code>\raggedbottom</code> +\raggedbottomstretch, omitting vertical +The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the natural +height of the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be +stretched. + + +
+ +Page layout parameters +\raggedbottom +Layout + +
+Page layout parameters + +page layout parametersparameters, page layoutlayout, page parameters forheader, parameters forfooter, parameters forrunning header and footer +\headheight\headheight +Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is +30pt, except in the book class, where it varies with the +type size. + +\headsep\headsep +Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of +the main text. Default is 25pt, except in the book +class, where it varies with the type size. + +\footskip\footskip +Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of +the page footer. Default is 30pt, except in the book +class, where it varies with the type size. + +\linewidth\linewidth +Width of the current line; the default varies with the font size, +paper width, two-column mode, etc. For an article document in +10pt, it's set to 345pt; in two-column mode, that +becomes 229.5pt. + +\textheight\textheight +The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with +the font size, document class, etc. For an article or +report document in 10pt, it's set to +43\baselineskip; for book, it's 41\baselineskip. +For 11pt, it's 38\baselineskip and for 12pt, +36\baselineskip. + +\textwidth\textwidth +The normal horizontal width of the page body; the default varies as +usual. For an article or report document, it's +345pt at 10pt, 360pt at 11pt, and +390pt at 12pt. For a book document, it's +4.5in at 10pt, and 5in at 11pt or 12pt. + +\topmargin\topmargin +Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the +paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is computed +based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in − +\headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip, and +then divided by two. + +\topskip\topskip +Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of +the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is the +same as the font size, e.g., 10pt at 10pt. + +
+ + +
+
+ +Sectioning +Cross references +Layout +Top + + +Sectioning +sectioning +Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: + +\part\part +\chapter\chapter +(report and book class only) +\section\section +\subsection\subsection +\subsubsection\subsubsection +\paragraph\paragraph +\subparagraph\subparagraph +
+ +All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., + +\chapter[toctitle]{title} + +In addition to providing the heading title in the main text, the +section title can appear in two other places: + + +The table of contents. + + +The running head at the top of the page. + + + +You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. +To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument +toctitle that, when given, specifies the text for these other +places. + +*-form of sectioning commandsAlso, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print +title as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an +entry in the table of contents. For instance: + +\section*{Preamble} + +\appendixappendix, creatingThe \appendix command changes the way following sectional units +are numbered. The \appendix command itself generates no text +and does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this +command is something like + +\chapter{A Chapter} &dots; \appendix -\chapter{The First Appendix} - secnumdepth countersection numbers, printingThe secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers. The setting - \setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} - suppresses heading numbers at any depth > level, where chapter is level zero. (See \setcounter.) -
-
- - Cross references - Environments - Sectioning - Top - - Cross references - cross references One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” - - - \label - \label - Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text. - - - \pageref - \pageref - Refer to a page number. - - - \ref - \ref - Refer to a section, figure or similar. - - - - - - \label - \pageref - Cross references -
- <code>\label</code> - \label Synopsis: - \label{key} - A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to key the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered environment assigns that number to key. - A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. - To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: - - - ch - - for chapters - - - - sec - - for lower-level sectioning commands - - - - fig - - for figures - - - - tab - - for tables - - - - eq - - for equations - - -
- Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:snark or fig.snark. -
-
- - \pageref - \ref - \label - Cross references -
- <code>\pageref{<var>key</var>}</code> - \pagerefcross referencing with page numberpage number, cross referencing Synopsis: - \pageref{key} - The \pageref{key} command produces the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding \label{key} command appears. -
-
- - \ref - \pageref - Cross references -
- <code>\ref{<var>key</var>}</code> - \refcross referencing, symbolicsection number, cross referencingequation number, cross referencingfigure number, cross referencingfootnote number, cross referencing Synopsis: - \ref{key} - The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit, equation, footnote, figure, &dots;, of the corresponding \label command (see \label). It does not produce any text, such as the word `Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself. -
-
- - Environments - Line breaking - Cross references - Top - - Environments - environments \begin\end &latex; provides many environments for marking off certain text. Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: - \begin{envname} +\chapter{The First Appendix} + +secnumdepth countersection numbers, printingThe secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers. +The setting + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} + +suppresses heading numbers at any depth > level, where +chapter is level zero. (See \setcounter.) + + + + +Cross references +Environments +Sectioning +Top + + +Cross references +cross references +One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer +the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” + + + +\label +\label + Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text. + + +\pageref +\pageref + Refer to a page number. + + +\ref +\ref + Refer to a section, figure or similar. + + + + + +\label +\pageref +Cross references + +
+<code>\label</code> +\label +Synopsis: + +\label{key} + +A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to +key the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing +inside a numbered environment assigns that number to key. + +A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or +punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. + +To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is +common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by +a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: + +ch +for chapters +sec +for lower-level sectioning commands +fig +for figures +tab +for tables +eq +for equations +
+ +Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:snark or +fig.snark. + + +
+ +\pageref +\ref +\label +Cross references + +
+<code>\pageref{<var>key</var>}</code> +\pagerefcross referencing with page numberpage number, cross referencing +Synopsis: + +\pageref{key} + +The \pageref{key} command produces the page number of +the place in the text where the corresponding +\label{key} command appears. + + +
+ +\ref +\pageref +Cross references + +
+<code>\ref{<var>key</var>}</code> +\refcross referencing, symbolicsection number, cross referencingequation number, cross referencingfigure number, cross referencingfootnote number, cross referencing +Synopsis: + +\ref{key} + +The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit, +equation, footnote, figure, &dots;, of the corresponding +\label command (see \label). It does not produce any text, +such as the word `Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself. + + +
+
+ +Environments +Line breaking +Cross references +Top + + +Environments +environments +\begin\end +&latex; provides many environments for marking off certain text. +Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: + +\begin{envname} ... -\end{envname} - - - abstract - abstract - Produce an abstract. - - - array - array - Math arrays. - - - center - center - Centred lines. - - - description - description - Labelled lists. - - - displaymath - displaymath - Formulas that appear on their own line. - - - document - document - Enclose the whole document. - - - enumerate - enumerate - Numbered lists. - - - eqnarray - eqnarray - Sequences of aligned equations. - - - equation - equation - Displayed equation. - - - figure - figure - Floating figures. - - - flushleft - flushleft - Flushed left lines. - - - flushright - flushright - Flushed right lines. - - - itemize - itemize - Bulleted lists. - - - letter - letter - Letters. - - - list - list - Generic list environment. - - - math - math - In-line math. - - - minipage - minipage - Miniature page. - - - picture - picture - Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles. - - - quotation - quotation - Indented environment with paragraph indentation. - - - quote - quote - Indented environment with no paragraph indentation. - - - tabbing - tabbing - Align text arbitrarily. - - - table - table - Floating tables. - - - tabular - tabular - Align text in columns. - - - thebibliography - thebibliography - Bibliography or reference list. - - - theorem - theorem - Theorems, lemmas, etc. - - - titlepage - titlepage - For hand crafted title pages. - - - verbatim - verbatim - Simulating typed input. - - - verse - verse - For poetry and other things. - - - -
- - abstract - array - Environments -
- <code>abstract</code> - abstract environmentabstracts Synopsis: - \begin{abstract} +\end{envname} + + + +abstract +abstract + Produce an abstract. + + +array +array + Math arrays. + + +center +center + Centered lines. + + +description +description + Labelled lists. + + +displaymath +displaymath + Formulas that appear on their own line. + + +document +document + Enclose the whole document. + + +enumerate +enumerate + Numbered lists. + + +eqnarray +eqnarray + Sequences of aligned equations. + + +equation +equation + Displayed equation. + + +figure +figure + Floating figures. + + +flushleft +flushleft + Flushed left lines. + + +flushright +flushright + Flushed right lines. + + +itemize +itemize + Bulleted lists. + + +letter +letter + Letters. + + +list +list + Generic list environment. + + +math +math + In-line math. + + +minipage +minipage + Miniature page. + + +picture +picture + Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles. + + +quotation +quotation + Indented environment with paragraph indentation. + + +quote +quote + Indented environment with no paragraph indentation. + + +tabbing +tabbing + Align text arbitrarily. + + +table +table + Floating tables. + + +tabular +tabular + Align text in columns. + + +thebibliography +thebibliography + Bibliography or reference list. + + +theorem +theorem + Theorems, lemmas, etc. + + +titlepage +titlepage + For hand crafted title pages. + + +verbatim +verbatim + Simulating typed input. + + +verse +verse + For poetry and other things. + + + + + +abstract +array +Environments + +
+<code>abstract</code> + +abstract environmentabstracts +Synopsis: +\begin{abstract} ... -\end{abstract} - Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. -
- - - array - center - abstract - Environments -
- <code>array</code> - array environmentarrays, math Synopsis: - \begin{array}{template} +\end{abstract} + +Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. + + +
+ +array +center +abstract +Environments + +
+<code>array</code> +array environmentarrays, math +Synopsis: + +\begin{array}{template} col1 text&col1 text&coln}\\ ... -\end{array} - Math arrays are produced with the array environment, normally within an equation environment (see equation). It has a single mandatory template argument describing the number of columns and the alignment within them. Each column col is specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row should be formatted, as follows: - - - c - - centered - - - - l - - flush left - - - - r - - flush right - - -
- \\ (for array)Column entries are separated by &. Column entries may include other &latex; commands. Each row of the array is terminated with \\. - @{...}In the template, the construct @{text} puts text between columns in each row. - Here's an example: - \begin{equation} +\end{array} + +Math arrays are produced with the array environment, normally +within an equation environment (see equation). It has a +single mandatory template argument describing the number of +columns and the alignment within them. Each column col is +specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row should +be formatted, as follows: + +c +centered +l +flush left +r +flush right +
+ +\\ (for array)Column entries are separated by &. Column entries may include +other &latex; commands. Each row of the array is terminated with +\\. + +@{...}In the template, the construct @{text} puts text +between columns in each row. + +Here's an example: + +\begin{equation} \begin{array}{lrc} left1 & right1 & centered1 \\ left2 & right2 & centered2 \\ \end{array} -\end{equation} - \arraycolsepThe \arraycolsep parameter defines half the width of the space separating columns; the default is 5pt. See tabular, for other parameters which affect formatting in array environments, namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. - The array environment can only be used in math mode. -
-
- - center - description - array - Environments -
- <code>center</code> - center environmentcentering text, environment for Synopsis: - \begin{center} +\end{equation} + +\arraycolsepThe \arraycolsep parameter defines half the width of the space +separating columns; the default is 5pt. See tabular, for other +parameters which affect formatting in array environments, +namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. + +The array environment can only be used in math mode. + + +
+ +center +description +array +Environments + +
+<code>center</code> + +center environmentcentering text, environment for +Synopsis: + +\begin{center} line1 \\ line2 \\ -\end{center} - \\ (for center)The center environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the string \\. - - - \centering - \centering - Declaration form of the center environment. - - -
-
- - \centering - center - - <code>\centering</code> - \centeringcentering text, declaration for The \centering declaration corresponds to the center environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on the page by putting a \centering command at the beginning of the figure or table environment. - Unlike the center environment, the \centering command does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how &latex; formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command (of an environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit. - Here's an example: - \begin{quote} +\end{center} + +\\ (for center)The center environment allows you to create a paragraph +consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right +margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the +string \\. + + + +\centering +\centering + Declaration form of the center environment. + + + + + +\centering +center + + +<code>\centering</code> + +\centeringcentering text, declaration for +The \centering declaration corresponds to the center +environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such +as quote or in a parbox. Thus, the text of a figure or +table can be centered on the page by putting a \centering +command at the beginning of the figure or table environment. + +Unlike the center environment, the \centering command +does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how &latex; formats +paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of +the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command (of +an environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit. + +Here's an example: + +\begin{quote} \centering first line \\ second line \\ -\end{quote} - - - - description - displaymath - center - Environments -
- <code>description</code> - description environmentlabelled lists, creatingdescription lists, creating Synopsis: - \begin{description} +\end{quote} + + + +
+ +description +displaymath +center +Environments + +
+<code>description</code> + +description environmentlabelled lists, creatingdescription lists, creating +Synopsis: + +\begin{description} \item [label1] item1 \item [label2] item2 ... -\end{description} - \itemThe description environment is used to make labelled lists. Each label is typeset in bold, flush right. The item text may contain multiple paragraphs. - bold typewriter, avoidingtypewriter labels in listsAnother variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt, you'll get bold typewriter: \item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]. This may be too bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use \tt, which resets all other style variations: \item[{\tt plain typewriter}]. - For details about list spacing, see itemize. -
-
- - displaymath - document - description - Environments -
- <code>displaymath</code> - displaymath environment Synopsis: - \begin{displaymath} +\end{description} + +\itemThe description environment is used to make labelled lists. Each +label is typeset in bold, flush right. The item text may +contain multiple paragraphs. + +bold typewriter, avoidingtypewriter labels in listsAnother variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if +you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt, you'll get +bold typewriter: \item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]. This +may be too bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use +\tt, which resets all other style variations: \item[{\tt +plain typewriter}]. + +For details about list spacing, see itemize. + + +
+ +displaymath +document +description +Environments + +
+<code>displaymath</code> + +displaymath environment +Synopsis: + +\begin{displaymath} math -\end{displaymath} - or - \[math\] - The displaymath environment (\[...\] is a synonym) typesets the math text on its own line, centered by default. The global fleqn option makes equations flush left; see Document class options. - No equation number is added to displaymath text; to get an equation number, use the equation environment (see equation). -
-
- - document - enumerate - displaymath - Environments -
- <code>document</code> - document environment The document environment encloses the body of a document. It is required in every &latex; document. See Starting & ending. -
-
- - enumerate - eqnarray - document - Environments -
- <code>enumerate</code> - enumerate environmentlists of items, numbered Synopsis: - \begin{enumerate} +\end{displaymath} + +or + +\[math\] + +The displaymath environment (\[...\] is a synonym) +typesets the math text on its own line, centered by default. +The global fleqn option makes equations flush left; see +Document class options. + +No equation number is added to displaymath text; to get an +equation number, use the equation environment (see equation). + + +
+ +document +enumerate +displaymath +Environments + +
+<code>document</code> + +document environment +The document environment encloses the body of a document. +It is required in every &latex; document. See Starting & ending. + + +
+ +enumerate +eqnarray +document +Environments + +
+<code>enumerate</code> + +enumerate environmentlists of items, numbered +Synopsis: + +\begin{enumerate} \item item1 \item item2 ... -\end{enumerate} - The enumerate environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as itemize (see itemize) and description (see description). - \itemEach item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command. There must be at least one \item command within the environment. - By default, the numbering at each level is done like this: - - - 1., 2., &dots; - - - (a), (b), &dots; - - - i., ii., &dots; - - - A., B., &dots; - - - \enumi\enumii\enumiii\enumivThe enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi through \enumiv counters (see Counters). If the optional argument to \item is given, the counter is not incremented for that item. - \labelenumi\labelenumii\labelenumiii\labelenumivThe enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi through \labelenumiv to produce the default label. So, you can use \renewcommand to change the labels (see \newcommand & \renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase letters: - \Alph example - \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}} -
-
- - eqnarray - equation - enumerate - Environments -
- <code>eqnarray</code> - eqnarray environmentequations, aligningaligning Equations - \begin{eqnarray} (or eqnarray*) +\end{enumerate} + +The enumerate environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations +can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also +be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as +itemize (see itemize) and description +(see description). + +\itemEach item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command. +There must be at least one \item command within the environment. + +By default, the numbering at each level is done like this: + + 1., 2., &dots; + + (a), (b), &dots; + + i., ii., &dots; + + A., B., &dots; + + + +\enumi\enumii\enumiii\enumivThe enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi +through \enumiv counters (see Counters). If the optional +argument to \item is given, the counter is not incremented for +that item. + +\labelenumi\labelenumii\labelenumiii\labelenumivThe enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi +through \labelenumiv to produce the default label. So, you can +use \renewcommand to change the labels (see \newcommand & \renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase +letters: + +\Alph example\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}} + + + +
+ +eqnarray +equation +enumerate +Environments + +
+<code>eqnarray</code> + +eqnarray environmentequations, aligningaligning Equations +\begin{eqnarray} (or eqnarray*) formula1 \\ formula2 \\ ... -\end{eqnarray} - \\ (for eqnarray)The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ and consecutive items within a row separated by an &. - \\* (for eqnarray)\\* can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. - \nonumberequation numbers, omittingAn equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a \nonumber command. Alternatively, The *-form of the environment (\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}) will omit equation numbering entirely, while otherwise being the same as eqnarray. - \lefteqnThe command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of zero width. -
-
- - equation - figure - eqnarray - Environments -
- <code>equation</code> - equation environmentequations, environment forformulas, environment for Synopsis: - \begin{equation} +\end{eqnarray} + +\\ (for eqnarray)The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of +equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column +array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ +and consecutive items within a row separated by an &. + +\\* (for eqnarray)\\* can also be used to separate equations, with its normal +meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. + +\nonumberequation numbers, omittingAn equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a +\nonumber command. Alternatively, The *-form of the +environment (\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}) will +omit equation numbering entirely, while otherwise being the same as +eqnarray. + +\lefteqnThe command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across +lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of +zero width. + + +
+ +equation +figure +eqnarray +Environments + +
+<code>equation</code> + +equation environmentequations, environment forformulas, environment for +Synopsis: + +\begin{equation} math -\end{equation} - The equation environment starts a displaymath environment (see displaymath), e.g., centering the math text on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin. -
-
- - figure - flushleft - equation - Environments -
- <code>figure</code> - figureinserting figuresfigures, inserting - \begin{figure[*]}[placement] +\end{equation} + +The equation environment starts a displaymath +environment (see displaymath), e.g., centering the math text +on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin. + + +
+ +figure +flushleft +equation +Environments + +
+<code>figure</code> +figureinserting figuresfigures, inserting +\begin{figure[*]}[placement] figbody \label{label} \caption[loftitle]{text} -\end{figure} - Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are instead “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a page. Figures will not be split between two pages. - When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a full-width figure (across both columns). - The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try to place your figure. There are four places where &latex; can possibly put a float: - - - t - - (Top)—at the top of a text page. - - - - b - - (Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. However, b is not allowed for full-width floats (figure*) with double-column output. To ameliorate this, use the stfloats or dblfloatfix package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. - - - - hfloat package - - (Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, t is automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”, use the float and use its H placement letter. (That package also provides other options.) - - - - p - - (Page of floats)—on a separate float page, which is a page containing no text, only floats. - - -
- The standard report and article classes use the default placement tbp. - The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, etc. you wish. - \captionThe \caption command specifies caption text for the figure. The caption is numbered by default. If loftitle is present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text (see Tables of contents). +\end{figure} + +Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are +instead “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a page. +Figures will not be split between two pages. + +When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a +full-width figure (across both columns). + +The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try +to place your figure. There are four places where &latex; can possibly +put a float: + +t +(Top)—at the top of a text page. + +b +(Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. However, b is not +allowed for full-width floats (figure*) with double-column +output. To ameliorate this, use the stfloats or +dblfloatfix package, but see the discussion at caveats in the +FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. + +h +float package(Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment +appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, t is +automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”, +use the float and use its H placement letter. (That +package also provides other options.) + +p +(Page of floats)—on a separate float page, which is a page +containing no text, only floats. + +
+ +The standard report and article classes use the default placement +tbp. + +The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, etc. +you wish. + +\captionThe \caption command specifies caption text for the +figure. The caption is numbered by default. If loftitle is +present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text +(see Tables of contents). + - \bottomfractionThe maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats atthe bottom; default .3. - - \floatpagefraction\floatpagefraction - - The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; default .5. - - - - \floatsep\floatsep - - Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default 12pt plus2pt minus2pt. - - - - \intextsep\intextsep - - Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for 10pt and 11pt styles, 14pt plus4pt minus4pt for 12pt. - - - - \textfloatsep\textfloatsep - - Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. - - - - \textfraction\textfraction - - Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a different page. The default is .2. - - - - \topfraction\topfraction - - Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before floats; default is .7. - - -
-
-
- - flushleft - flushright - figure - Environments -
- <code>flushleft</code> - flushleft environmentleft-justifying text, environment forragged right text, environment for - \begin{flushleft} +\bottomfractionThe maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at +the bottom; default .3. + +\floatpagefraction\floatpagefraction +The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; +default .5. + +\floatsep\floatsep +Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default +12pt plus2pt minus2pt. + +\intextsep\intextsep +Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default +12pt plus2pt minus2pt for 10pt and 11pt styles, +14pt plus4pt minus4pt for 12pt. + +\textfloatsep\textfloatsep +Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; +default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. + +\textfraction\textfraction +Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too +much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a +different page. The default is .2. + +\topfraction\topfraction +Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before +floats; default is .7. + +
+ + +
+ +flushleft +flushright +figure +Environments + +
+<code>flushleft</code> +flushleft environmentleft-justifying text, environment forragged right text, environment for +\begin{flushleft} line1 \\ line2 \\ ... -\end{flushleft} - \\ for flushleftThe flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged right Each line must be terminated with the string \\. - - - \raggedright - \raggedright - Declaration form of the flushleft environment. - - -
-
- - \raggedright - flushleft - - <code>\raggedright</code> - \raggedrightragged right textleft-justifying textjustification, ragged right The \raggedright declaration corresponds to the flushleft environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. - Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit. - - - - flushright - itemize - flushleft - Environments -
- <code>flushright</code> - flushright environmentragged left text, environment forright-justifying text, environment for - \begin{flushright} +\end{flushleft} + +\\ for flushleftThe flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph +consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged +right Each line must be terminated with the string \\. + + + +\raggedright +\raggedright + Declaration form of the flushleft environment. + + + + + +\raggedright +flushleft + + +<code>\raggedright</code> +\raggedrightragged right textleft-justifying textjustification, ragged right +The \raggedright declaration corresponds to the +flushleft environment. This declaration can be used inside an +environment such as quote or in a parbox. + +Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright +command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; +formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the +scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end +command that ends the paragraph unit. + + + +
+ +flushright +itemize +flushleft +Environments + +
+<code>flushright</code> +flushright environmentragged left text, environment forright-justifying text, environment for +\begin{flushright} line1 \\ line2 \\ ... -\end{flushright} - \\ (for flushright)The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. - - - \raggedleft - \raggedleft - Declaration form of the flushright environment. - - -
-
- - \raggedleft - flushright - - <code>\raggedleft</code> - \raggedleftragged left textjustification, ragged leftright-justifying text The \raggedleft declaration corresponds to the flushright environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. - Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit. - - - - itemize - letter - flushright - Environments -
- <code>itemize</code> - itemize environment\itemlists of itemsunordered listsbulleted lists Synopsis: - \begin{itemize} +\end{flushright} + +\\ (for flushright)The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph +consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged +left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. + + + +\raggedleft +\raggedleft + Declaration form of the flushright environment. + + + + + +\raggedleft +flushright + + +<code>\raggedleft</code> +\raggedleftragged left textjustification, ragged leftright-justifying text +The \raggedleft declaration corresponds to the +flushright environment. This declaration can be used inside an +environment such as quote or in a parbox. + +Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft +command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; +formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the +scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end +command that ends the paragraph unit. + + + +
+ +itemize +letter +flushright +Environments + +
+<code>itemize</code> +itemize environment\itemlists of itemsunordered listsbulleted lists +Synopsis: + +\begin{itemize} \item item1 \item item2 ... -\end{itemize} - The itemize environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted” list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as enumerate (see enumerate). - Each item of an itemize list begins with an \item command. There must be at least one \item command within the environment. - By default, the marks at each level look like this: - - - • (bullet) - - - -- (bold en-dash) - - - * (asterisk) - - - . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) - - - \labelitemi\labelitemii\labelitemiii\labelitemivThe itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi through \labelitemiv to produce the default label. So, you can use \renewcommand to change the labels. For instance, to have the first level use diamonds: - \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$} - \leftmargin\leftmargini\leftmarginii\leftmarginiii\leftmarginiv\leftmarginv\leftmarginviThe \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi parameters define the distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the left margin of the list. By convention, \leftmargin is set to the appropriate \leftmarginN when a new level of nesting is entered. - The defaults vary from .5em (highest levels of nesting) to 2.5em (first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: - \setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em +\end{itemize} + +The itemize environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted” +list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four +levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making +environments, such as enumerate (see enumerate). + +Each item of an itemize list begins with an \item command. +There must be at least one \item command within the environment. + +By default, the marks at each level look like this: + + • (bullet) + + -- (bold en-dash) + + * (asterisk) + + . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) + + + +\labelitemi\labelitemii\labelitemiii\labelitemivThe itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi +through \labelitemiv to produce the default label. So, you can +use \renewcommand to change the labels. For instance, to have +the first level use diamonds: + +\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$} + +\leftmargin\leftmargini\leftmarginii\leftmarginiii\leftmarginiv\leftmarginv\leftmarginviThe \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi parameters define +the distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and +the left margin of the list. By convention, \leftmargin is set +to the appropriate \leftmarginN when a new level of +nesting is entered. + +The defaults vary from .5em (highest levels of nesting) to +2.5em (first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. +This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: + +\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em + - Some parameters that affect list formatting: - - - \itemindent\itemindent - - Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. - - - - \labelsep\labelsep - - Space between the label and text of an item; default .5em. - - - - \labelwidth\labelwidth - - Width of the label; default 2em, or 1.5em in two-column mode. - - - - \listparindent\listparindent - - Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a list item; default 0pt. - - - - \rightmargin\rightmargin - - Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the enclosing environment; default 0pt, except in the quote, quotation, and verse environments, where it is set equal to \leftmargin. - - -
- Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather loose, by default). - - - \itemsep\itemsep - - Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus2pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt for 12pt. - - - - \parsep\parsep - - Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults are the same as \itemsep. - - - - \topsep\topsep - - Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. For top-level lists, the default is 8pt plus2pt minus4pt for 10pt documents, 9pt plus3pt minus5pt for 11pt, and 10pt plus4pt minus6pt for 12pt. These are reduced for nested lists. - - - - \partopsep\partopsep - - Extra space added to \topsep when the list environment starts a paragraph. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus1pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 3pt plus2pt minus2pt for 12pt. - - -
- \parskip exampleEspecially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize* environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs within a single item (\parskip is not list-specific, see \parskip): - \newenvironment{itemize*}% +Some parameters that affect list formatting: + +\itemindent\itemindent +Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. + +\labelsep\labelsep +Space between the label and text of an item; default .5em. + +\labelwidth\labelwidth +Width of the label; default 2em, or 1.5em in two-column mode. + +\listparindent\listparindent +Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a +list item; default 0pt. + +\rightmargin\rightmargin +Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the +enclosing environment; default 0pt, except in the quote, +quotation, and verse environments, where it is set equal +to \leftmargin. + +
+ +Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather +loose, by default). + +\itemsep\itemsep +Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt +minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus2pt minus1pt for +11pt, and 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt for 12pt. + +\parsep\parsep +Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults +are the same as \itemsep. + +\topsep\topsep +Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. +For top-level lists, the default is 8pt plus2pt minus4pt for +10pt documents, 9pt plus3pt minus5pt for 11pt, +and 10pt plus4pt minus6pt for 12pt. These are reduced +for nested lists. + +\partopsep\partopsep +Extra space added to \topsep when the list environment starts a +paragraph. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt +documents, 3pt plus1pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 3pt +plus2pt minus2pt for 12pt. + +
+ +\parskip exampleEspecially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide +space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize* +environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs +within a single item (\parskip is not list-specific, +see \parskip): + +\newenvironment{itemize*}% {\begin{itemize}% \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}% \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}% \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}% - {\end{itemize}} -
-
- - letter - list - itemize - Environments -
- <code>letter</code> environment: writing letters - letter This environment is used for creating letters. See Letters. -
-
- - list - math - letter - Environments -
- <code>list</code> - listlists of items, generic The list environment is a generic environment which is used for defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in documents, but often in macros. - \begin{list}{labeling}{spacing} + {\end{itemize}} + + +
+ +letter +list +itemize +Environments + +
+<code>letter</code> environment: writing letters +letter +This environment is used for creating letters. See Letters. + + +
+ +list +math +letter +Environments + +
+<code>list</code> +listlists of items, generic +The list environment is a generic environment which is used for +defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in +documents, but often in macros. + +\begin{list}{labeling}{spacing} \item item1 \item item2 ... -\end{list} - The mandatory labeling argument specifies how items should be labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to \item). This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the label. It can and usually does contain other &latex; commands. - The mandatory spacing argument contains commands to change the spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. -
-
- - math - minipage - list - Environments -
- <code>math</code> - math environmentin-line formulas Synopsis: - \begin{math} +\end{list} + +The mandatory labeling argument specifies how items should be +labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to \item). +This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the +label. It can and usually does contain other &latex; commands. + +The mandatory spacing argument contains commands to change the +spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be +empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. + + +
+ +math +minipage +list +Environments + +
+<code>math</code> + +math environmentin-line formulas +Synopsis: + +\begin{math} math -\end{math} - The math environment inserts the given math within the running text. \(...\)) and $...$ are synonyms. See Math formulas. -
-
- - minipage - picture - math - Environments -
- <code>minipage</code> - minipage environmentminipage, creating a - \begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width} +\end{math} + +The math environment inserts the given math within the +running text. \(...\)) and $...$ are synonyms. +See Math formulas. + + +
+ +minipage +picture +math +Environments + +
+<code>minipage</code> + +minipage environmentminipage, creating a +\begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width} text -\end{minipage} - The minipage environment typesets its body text in a block that will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the \parbox command (see \parbox), but unlike \parbox, other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage. +\end{minipage} + +The minipage environment typesets its body text in a +block that will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the +\parbox command (see \parbox), but unlike \parbox, +other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage. + - The arguments are the same as for \parbox (see \parbox). - indentation of paragraphs, in minipageparagraph indentation, in minipage\parindentBy default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as \setlength{\parindent}{1pc} command. - footnotes in figuresfigures, footnotes inFootnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext command puts the footnote at the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the \mpfootnote counter instead of the ordinary footnote counter (see Counters). - However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. -
-
- - picture - quotation - minipage - Environments -
- <code>picture</code> - picturecreating picturespictures, creating - \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) +The arguments are the same as for \parbox (see \parbox). + +indentation of paragraphs, in minipageparagraph indentation, in minipage\parindentBy default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage +environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as +\setlength{\parindent}{1pc} command. + +footnotes in figuresfigures, footnotes inFootnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is +particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A +\footnote or \footnotetext command puts the footnote at +the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it +uses the \mpfootnote counter instead of the ordinary +footnote counter (see Counters). + +However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using +footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. + + +
+ +picture +quotation +minipage +Environments + +
+<code>picture</code> + +picturecreating picturespictures, creating +\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) &dots; picture commands &dots; -\end{picture} - \unitlengthThe picture environment allows you to create just about any kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell &latex; where to put things in the picture by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and a minus sign—a number like 5, 0.3 or -3.1416. A coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters. You should only change the value of \unitlength, using the \setlength command, outside of a picture environment. - A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5), specifying the point with x-coordinate 2.4 and y-coordinate -5. Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. - The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is a position. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this argument's x- and y-coordinates. - The picture environment also has an optional position argument, following the size argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin). For example, if \unitlength has been set to 1mm, the command - \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) - produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first draw a picture, you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate optional argument. - The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is; &latex; will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by &latex; in determining how much room to leave for it. - Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put command. The command - \put (11.3,-.3){...} - puts the object specified by ... in the picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various objects will be described below. - lR boxThe \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything that can go in an \mbox (see \mbox) in the text argument of the \put command. When you do this, the reference point will be the lower left corner of the box. - The picture commands are described in the following sections. - - - \circle - \circle - Draw a circle. - - - \makebox (picture) - \makebox (picture) - Draw a box of the specified size. - - - \framebox (picture) - \framebox (picture) - Draw a box with a frame around it. - - - \dashbox - \dashbox - Draw a dashed box. - - - \frame - \frame - Draw a frame around an object. - - - \line - \line - Draw a straight line. - - - \linethickness - \linethickness - Set the line thickness. - - - \thicklines - \thicklines - A heavier line thickness. - - - \thinlines - \thinlines - The default line thickness. - - - \multiput - \multiput - Draw multiple instances of an object. - - - \oval - \oval - Draw an ellipse. - - - \put - \put - Place an object at a specified place. - - - \shortstack - \shortstack - Make a pile of objects. - - - \vector - \vector - Draw a line with an arrow. - - -
-
- - \circle - \makebox (picture) - picture - - <code>\circle</code> - \circle - \circle[*]{diameter} - The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as close to the specified one as possible. The *-form of the command draws a solid circle. - Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. - - - - \makebox (picture) - \framebox (picture) - \circle - picture - - <code>\makebox</code> - \makebox (picture) \makebox(width,height)[position]{...} - The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to the normal \makebox command except that you must specify a width and height in multiples of \unitlength. - The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: - - - t - - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. - - - - b - - Moves the item to the bottom. - - - - l - - Moves the item to the left. - - - - r - - Moves the item to the right. - - -
- See \makebox. -
-
- - \framebox (picture) - \dashbox - \makebox (picture) - picture - - <code>\framebox</code> - \framebox Synopsis: - \framebox(width,height)[pos]{...} - The \framebox command is like \makebox (see previous section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it creates. - \fboxrule\fboxsepThe \framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule, and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the contents of the box. - - - - \dashbox - \frame - \framebox (picture) - picture - - <code>\dashbox</code> - \dashbox Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: - \dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text} - \dashbox creates a dashed rectangle around text in a picture environment. Dashes are dlen units long, and the rectangle has overall width rwidth and height rheight. The text is positioned at optional pos. - A dashed box looks best when the rwidth and rheight are multiples of the dlen. - - - - \frame - \line - \dashbox - picture - - <code>\frame</code> - \frame Synopsis: - \frame{text} - The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around text. The reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the object. - - - - \line - \linethickness - \frame - picture - - <code>\line</code> - \line Synopsis: - \line(xslope,yslope){length} - The \line command draws a line with the given length and slope xslope/yslope. - Standard &latex; can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x and y have integer values from −6 through 6. For lines of any slope, not to mention other shapes, see the curve2e and many many other packages on CTAN. - - - - \linethickness - \thicklines - \line - picture - - <code>\linethickness</code> - \linethickness The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be dim, which must be a positive length. - \linethickness does not affect the thickness of slanted lines, circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval. - - - - \thicklines - \thinlines - \linethickness - picture - - <code>\thicklines</code> - \thicklines The \thicklines command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. \linethickness and \thinlines. - - - - \thinlines - \multiput - \thicklines - picture - - <code>\thinlines</code> - \thinlines The \thinlines command is the default line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. \linethickness and \thicklines. - - - - \multiput - \oval - \thinlines - picture - - <code>\multiput</code> - \multiput Synopsis: - \multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj} - The \multiput command copies the object obj in a regular pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position (x,y), then at (x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, n times. - - - - \oval - \put - \multiput - picture - - <code>\oval</code> - \oval Synopsis: - \oval(width,height)[portion] - The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument portion allows you to select part of the oval via the following: - - - t - - selects the top portion; - - - - b - - selects the bottom portion; - - - - r - - selects the right portion; - - - - l - - selects the left portion. - - -
- The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a maximum radius of 20pt, so large “ovals” will look more like boxes with rounded corners. -
-
- - \put - \shortstack - \oval - picture - - <code>\put</code> - \put \put(x coord,y coord){ ... } - The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory argument at the given coordinates. - - - - \shortstack - \vector - \put - picture - - <code>\shortstack</code> - \shortstack Synopsis: - \shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...} - The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The valid positions are: - - - r - - Move the objects to the right of the stack. - - - - l - - Move the objects to the left of the stack - - - - c - - Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) - - -
- \\ (for \shortstack objects)Objects are separated with \\. -
-
- - \vector - \shortstack - picture - - <code>\vector</code> - \vector Synopsis: - \vector(x-slope,y-slope){length} - The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified length and slope. The x and y values must lie between −4 and +4, inclusive. - - - - quotation - quote - picture - Environments -
- <code>quotation</code> - quotationquoted text with paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text with paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text Synopsis: - \begin{quotation} +\end{picture} + +\unitlengthThe picture environment allows you to create just about any +kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. +You tell &latex; where to put things in the picture by specifying +their coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal +point and a minus sign—a number like 5, 0.3 or +-3.1416. A coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the +unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength has been set +to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 +centimeters. You should only change the value of \unitlength, +using the \setlength command, outside of a picture +environment. + +A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5), specifying +the point with x-coordinate 2.4 and y-coordinate -5. +Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, +which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that +when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; +the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. + +The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is a +position. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment +produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this +argument's x- and y-coordinates. + +The picture environment also has an optional position +argument, following the size argument, that can change the +origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not +contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the +coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture +(thereby determining the origin). For example, if \unitlength +has been set to 1mm, the command + +\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) + +produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 +millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose +upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first +draw a picture, you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the +origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your +picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate +optional argument. + +The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the +picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is; +&latex; will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even +off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by &latex; in determining +how much room to leave for it. + +Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put +command. The command + +\put (11.3,-.3){...} + +puts the object specified by ... in the +picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). +The reference points for various objects will be described below. + +lR boxThe \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything +that can go in an \mbox (see \mbox) in the text argument of +the \put command. When you do this, the reference point will +be the lower left corner of the box. + +The picture commands are described in the following sections. + + + +\circle +\circle + Draw a circle. + + +\makebox (picture) +\makebox (picture) + Draw a box of the specified size. + + +\framebox (picture) +\framebox (picture) + Draw a box with a frame around it. + + +\dashbox +\dashbox + Draw a dashed box. + + +\frame +\frame + Draw a frame around an object. + + +\line +\line + Draw a straight line. + + +\linethickness +\linethickness + Set the line thickness. + + +\thicklines +\thicklines + A heavier line thickness. + + +\thinlines +\thinlines + The default line thickness. + + +\multiput +\multiput + Draw multiple instances of an object. + + +\oval +\oval + Draw an ellipse. + + +\put +\put + Place an object at a specified place. + + +\shortstack +\shortstack + Make a pile of objects. + + +\vector +\vector + Draw a line with an arrow. + + + + + +\circle +\makebox (picture) +picture + + +<code>\circle</code> +\circle +\circle[*]{diameter} + +The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as close +to the specified one as possible. The *-form of the command +draws a solid circle. + +Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. + + + + +\makebox (picture) +\framebox (picture) +\circle +picture + + +<code>\makebox</code> +\makebox (picture) +\makebox(width,height)[position]{...} + +The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to +the normal \makebox command except that you must specify a +width and height in multiples of \unitlength. + +The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that +your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: + +t +Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. + +b +Moves the item to the bottom. + +l +Moves the item to the left. + +r +Moves the item to the right. + +
+ +See \makebox. + + +
+ +\framebox (picture) +\dashbox +\makebox (picture) +picture + + +<code>\framebox</code> +\framebox +Synopsis: + +\framebox(width,height)[pos]{...} + +The \framebox command is like \makebox (see previous +section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box +that it creates. + +\fboxrule\fboxsepThe \framebox command produces a rule of thickness +\fboxrule, and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule +and the contents of the box. + + + + +\dashbox +\frame +\framebox (picture) +picture + + +<code>\dashbox</code> + +\dashbox +Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: + +\dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text} + +\dashbox creates a dashed rectangle around text in a +picture environment. Dashes are dlen units long, and the +rectangle has overall width rwidth and height rheight. +The text is positioned at optional pos. + +A dashed box looks best when the rwidth and rheight are +multiples of the dlen. + + + + +\frame +\line +\dashbox +picture + + +<code>\frame</code> +\frame +Synopsis: + +\frame{text} + +The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around text. +The reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra +space is put between the frame and the object. + + + + +\line +\linethickness +\frame +picture + + +<code>\line</code> +\line +Synopsis: + +\line(xslope,yslope){length} + +The \line command draws a line with the given length and +slope xslope/yslope. + +Standard &latex; can only draw lines with slope = x/y, +where x and y have integer values from −6 +through 6. For lines of any slope, not to mention other shapes, +see the curve2e and many many other packages on CTAN. + + + + +\linethickness +\thicklines +\line +picture + + +<code>\linethickness</code> +\linethickness +The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness +of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be +dim, which must be a positive length. + +\linethickness does not affect the thickness of slanted lines, +circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval. + + + + +\thicklines +\thinlines +\linethickness +picture + + +<code>\thicklines</code> +\thicklines +The \thicklines command is an alternate line thickness for +horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; +cf. \linethickness and \thinlines. + + + + +\thinlines +\multiput +\thicklines +picture + + +<code>\thinlines</code> +\thinlines +The \thinlines command is the default line thickness for +horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; +cf. \linethickness and \thicklines. + + + + +\multiput +\oval +\thinlines +picture + + +<code>\multiput</code> +\multiput +Synopsis: +\multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj} + +The \multiput command copies the object obj in a regular +pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position +(x,y), then at (x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, +n times. + + + + +\oval +\put +\multiput +picture + + +<code>\oval</code> +\oval +Synopsis: + +\oval(width,height)[portion] + +The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. +The optional argument portion allows you to select part of the +oval via the following: + +t +selects the top portion; +b +selects the bottom portion; +r +selects the right portion; +l +selects the left portion. +
+ +The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a +maximum radius of 20pt, so large “ovals” will look more like +boxes with rounded corners. + + +
+ +\put +\shortstack +\oval +picture + + +<code>\put</code> + +\put +\put(x coord,y coord){ ... } + +The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory +argument at the given coordinates. + + + + +\shortstack +\vector +\put +picture + + +<code>\shortstack</code> +\shortstack +Synopsis: + +\shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...} + +The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The valid +positions are: + +r +Move the objects to the right of the stack. +l +Move the objects to the left of the stack +c +Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) +
+ +\\ (for \shortstack objects)Objects are separated with \\. + + +
+ +\vector +\shortstack +picture + + +<code>\vector</code> +\vector +Synopsis: + +\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length} + +The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified +length and slope. The x and y values must lie between +−4 and +4, inclusive. + + + +
+ +quotation +quote +picture +Environments + +
+<code>quotation</code> + +quotationquoted text with paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text with paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text +Synopsis: + +\begin{quotation} text -\end{quotation} - The margins of the quotation environment are indented on both the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph. - Unlike the quote environment, each paragraph is indented normally. -
-
- - quote - tabbing - quotation - Environments -
- <code>quote</code> - quotequoted text without paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text without paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text, omitting Snyopsis: - \begin{quote} +\end{quotation} + +The margins of the quotation environment are indented on both +the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. +Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph. + +Unlike the quote environment, each paragraph is indented +normally. + + +
+ +quote +tabbing +quotation +Environments + +
+<code>quote</code> + +quotequoted text without paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text without paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text, omitting +Snyopsis: + +\begin{quote} text -\end{quote} - The margins of the quote environment are indented on both the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph. - Unlike the quotation environment, paragraphs are not indented. -
-
- - tabbing - table - quote - Environments -
- <code>tabbing</code> - tabbing environmenttab stops, usinglining text up in columns using tab stopsalignment via tabbing Synopsis: - \begin{tabbing} +\end{quote} + +The margins of the quote environment are indented on both the +left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a +blank line between text produces a new paragraph. + +Unlike the quotation environment, paragraphs are not indented. + + +
+ +tabbing +table +quote +Environments + +
+<code>tabbing</code> + +tabbing environmenttab stops, usinglining text up in columns using tab stopsalignment via tabbing +Synopsis: + +\begin{tabbing} row1col1 \= row1col2 \= row1col3 \= row1col4 \\ row2col1 \> \> row2col3 \\ ... -\end{tabbing} - The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on an ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant and known in advance. - This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular environment. - The following commands can be used inside a tabbing enviroment: - - - \\ tabbing\\ tabbing - - End a line. - - - - \= (tabbing)\= (tabbing) - - Sets a tab stop at the current position. - - - - \> (tabbing)\> (tabbing)\> - - Advances to the next tab stop. - - - - \<\< - - Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line. - - - - \+\+ - - Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary. - - - - \-\- - - Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary. - - - - \' (tabbing)\' (tabbing) - - Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\, or \kill command, to the right of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop. - - - - \` (tabbing)\` (tabbing) - - Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column because there's no tab stop there. The \` command moves all the text that follows it, up to the \\ or \end{tabbing} command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command between the \` and the command that ends the line. - - - - \a (tabbing)\a (tabbing)\a' (acute accent in tabbing)\a` (grave accent in tabbing)\a= (macron accent in tabbing) - - In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and \` do not produce accents as usual (see Accents). Instead, the commands \a=, \a' and \a` are used. - - - - \kill\kill - - Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ except that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \- commands in that line remain in effect. - - - - \poptabs\poptabs\poptabs - - Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. - - - - \pushtabs\pushtabs - - Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing environment. - - - - \tabbingsep\tabbingsep - - Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'. - - -
- This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: - \begin{tabbing} +\end{tabbing} + +The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in +columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as +was done on an ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where +the width of each column is constant and known in advance. + +This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular +environment. + +The following commands can be used inside a tabbing enviroment: + +\\ (tabbing)\\ (tabbing) +End a line. + +\= (tabbing)\= (tabbing) +Sets a tab stop at the current position. + +\> (tabbing)\> (tabbing) +\>Advances to the next tab stop. + +\<\< +Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing +the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line. + +\+\+ +Moves the left margin of the next and all the +following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if +necessary. + +\-\- +Moves the left margin of the next and all the +following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if +necessary. + +\' (tabbing)\' (tabbing) +Moves everything that you have typed so far in the +current column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, +\<, \', \\, or \kill command, to the right +of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop. + +\` (tabbing)\` (tabbing) +Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab +stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column +because there's no tab stop there. The \` command moves all the +text that follows it, up to the \\ or \end{tabbing} +command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing +environment. There must be no \> or \' command between +the \` and the command that ends the line. + +\a (tabbing)\a (tabbing) +\a' (acute accent in tabbing)\a` (grave accent in tabbing)\a= (macron accent in tabbing)In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and +\` do not produce accents as usual (see Accents). Instead, +the commands \a=, \a' and \a` are used. + +\kill\kill +Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ +except that it throws away the current line instead of producing +output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \- +commands in that line remain in effect. + +\poptabs\poptabs +\poptabsRestores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. + +\pushtabs\pushtabs +Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing +tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing environment. + +\tabbingsep\tabbingsep +Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'. + +
+ +This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: + +\begin{tabbing} function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ \> begin \= \+ \\ \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\ @@ -2237,5097 +2668,5055 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ else \+ \\ fact := 1; \-\- \\ end;\\ -\end{tabbing} -
-
- - table - tabular - tabbing - Environments -
- <code>table</code> - tabletables, creatingcreating tables Synopsis: - \begin{table}[placement] +\end{tabbing} + + +
+ +table +tabular +tabbing +Environments + +
+<code>table</code> + +tabletables, creatingcreating tables +Synopsis: + + \begin{table}[placement] body of the table \caption{table title} - \end{table} - Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. Tables will not be split between two pages. - The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try to place your table. There are four places where &latex; can possibly put a float; these are the same as that used with the figure environment, and described there (see figure). - The standard report and article classes use the default placement [tbp]. - The body of the table is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, etc., you wish. The \caption command allows you to title your table. -
-
- - tabular - thebibliography - table - Environments -
- <code>tabular</code> - tabular environmentlines in tableslining text up in tables Synopsis: - \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} + \end{table} + +Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are +usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. +Tables will not be split between two pages. + +The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try +to place your table. There are four places where &latex; can possibly put +a float; these are the same as that used with the figure +environment, and described there (see figure). + +The standard report and article classes use the default +placement [tbp]. + +The body of the table is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, etc., +you wish. The \caption command allows you to title your table. + + +
+ +tabular +thebibliography +table +Environments + +
+<code>tabular</code> +tabular environmentlines in tableslining text up in tables +Synopsis: + +\begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ ... -\end{tabular} - or - \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} +\end{tabular} + + or + +\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ ... -\end{tabular*} - These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. - \\ for tabular\\ must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except for the last, where it is optional—unless an \hline command (to put a rule below the table) follows. - The mandatory and optional arguments consist of: - - - width - - Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There must be rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified width. - - - - pos - - Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of the environment. -
- - t - - align on top row - - - - b - - align on bottom row - - -
- - - - cols - - Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and intercolumn material. - - - l - - A column of left-aligned items. - - - - r - - A column of right-aligned items. - - - - - - A column of centred items. - - - - | - - A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. - - - - @{text} - - This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in text. An \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression causes an extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An \extracolsep command can be used only in an @-expression in the cols argument. - - - - p{wd} - - Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width wd, as if it were the argument of a \parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not appear in the item, except in the following situations: - - - inside an environment like minipage, array, or tabular. - - - inside an explicit \parbox. - - - in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an environment when used in a p-column element. - - - - - - *{num}{cols} - - Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a positive integer and cols is any list of column-specifiers, which may contain another *-expression. - - -
-
-
- - Parameters that control formatting: - - - - \arrayrulewidth\arrayrulewidth - - Thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and \vline in the tabular and array environments; the default is .4pt. - - - - \arraystretch\arraystretch - - Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular and array environments; default is 1, for no scaling. - - - - \doublerulesep\doublerulesep - - Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by || in the tabular and array environments; default is 2pt. - - - - \tabcolsep\tabcolsep - - Half the width of the space between columns; default is 6pt. - - -
- These commands can be used inside a tabular environment: - - - \multicolumn - \multicolumn - Make an item spanning several columns. - - - \cline - \cline - Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns. - - - \hline - \hline - Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns. - - - \vline - \vline - Draw a vertical line. - - -
-
- - \multicolumn - \cline - tabular - - <code>\multicolumn</code> - \multicolumn Synopsis: - \multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text} - The \multicolumn command makes an entry that spans several columns. The first mandatory argument, cols, specifies the number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, pos, specifies the formatting of the entry; c for centered, l for flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument, text, specifies what text to put in the entry. - Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; \multicolumn is used for the heading: - \begin{tabular}{r@{--}l} +\end{tabular*} + +These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of +items, aligned vertically in columns. + +\\ for tabular\\ must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, +except for the last, where it is optional—unless an \hline +command (to put a rule below the table) follows. + +The mandatory and optional arguments consist of: + +width +Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There must be +rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified +width. + +pos +Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of +the environment. + +
t +align on top row +b +align on bottom row +
+ +cols +Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the +following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and +intercolumn material. + +l +A column of left-aligned items. + +r +A column of right-aligned items. + +c +A column of centered items. + +| +A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. + +@{text} +This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the +intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space +between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in +text. An \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression +causes an extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all +subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep +command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not +suppressed by an @-expression. An \extracolsep command can be +used only in an @-expression in the cols argument. + +p{wd} +Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width +wd, as if it were the argument of a +\parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not +appear in the item, except in the following situations: + + +inside an environment like minipage, array, or tabular. + + +inside an explicit \parbox. + + +in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft +declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an +environment when used in a p-column element. + + + +*{num}{cols} +Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a +positive integer and cols is any list of column-specifiers, +which may contain another *-expression. + +
+
+ +Parameters that control formatting: + + +\arrayrulewidth\arrayrulewidth +Thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and +\vline in the tabular and array environments; the +default is .4pt. + +\arraystretch\arraystretch +Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular and array +environments; default is 1, for no scaling. + +\doublerulesep\doublerulesep +Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by || +in the tabular and array environments; default is 2pt. + +\tabcolsep\tabcolsep +Half the width of the space between columns; default is 6pt. + +
+ +These commands can be used inside a tabular environment: + + + +\multicolumn +\multicolumn + Make an item spanning several columns. + + +\cline +\cline + Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns. + + +\hline +\hline + Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns. + + +\vline +\vline + Draw a vertical line. + + + + + +\multicolumn +\cline +tabular + + +<code>\multicolumn</code> +\multicolumn +Synopsis: +\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text} + +The \multicolumn command makes an entry that spans several +columns. The first mandatory argument, cols, specifies the +number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, pos, +specifies the formatting of the entry; c for centered, l +for flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument, +text, specifies what text to put in the entry. + +Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; +\multicolumn is used for the heading: + +\begin{tabular}{r@{--}l} \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr 0x80&0x7FF \cr 0x800&0xFFFF \cr 0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr -\end{tabular} - -
- - \cline - \hline - \multicolumn - tabular - - <code>\cline</code> - \cline Synopsis: - \cline{i-j} - The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j, which are specified in the mandatory argument. - - - - \hline - \vline - \cline - tabular - - <code>\hline</code> - \hline The \hline command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing tabular or array environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table. - - - - \vline - \hline - tabular - - <code>\vline</code> - \vline The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the full height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression. - - - - thebibliography - theorem - tabular - Environments -
- <code>thebibliography</code> - thebibliographybibliography, creating (manually) Synopsis: - \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} +\end{tabular} + + + + +\cline +\hline +\multicolumn +tabular + + +<code>\cline</code> +\cline +Synopsis: + +\cline{i-j} + +The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns +specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j, +which are specified in the mandatory argument. + + + + +\hline +\vline +\cline +tabular + + +<code>\hline</code> +\hline +The \hline command draws a horizontal line the width of the +enclosing tabular or array environment. It's most +commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows +of a table. + + + + +\vline +\hline +tabular + + +<code>\vline</code> +\vline +The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the full +height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be used to +move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an +@-expression. + + + +
+ +thebibliography +theorem +tabular +Environments + +
+<code>thebibliography</code> + +thebibliographybibliography, creating (manually) +Synopsis: + +\begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} \bibitem[label]{cite_key} ... -\end{thebibliography} - The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or reference list. - In the article class, this reference list is labelled “References”; in the report class, it is labelled “Bibliography”. You can change the label (in the standard classes) by redefining the command \refname. For instance, this eliminates it entirely: - \renewcommand{\refname}{} - The mandatory widest-label argument is text that, when typeset, is as wide as the widest item label produced by the \bibitem commands. It is typically given as 9 for bibliographies with less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. - - - \bibitem - \bibitem - Specify a bibliography item. - - - \cite - \cite - Refer to a bibliography item. - - - \nocite - \nocite - Include an item in the bibliography. - - - Using BibTeX - Using BibTeX - Automatic generation of bibliographies. - - -
-
- - \bibitem - \cite - thebibliography - - <code>\bibitem</code> - \bibitem Synopsis: - \bibitem[label]{cite_key} - The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by label. If the label argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using the enumi counter. The cite_key is any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma. - This command writes an entry to the .aux file containing the item's cite_key and label. When the .aux file is read by the \begin{document} command, the item's label is associated with cite_key, causing references to cite_key with a \cite command (see next section) to produce the associated label. - - - - \cite - \nocite - \bibitem - thebibliography - - <code>\cite</code> - \cite Synopsis: - \cite[subcite]{keys - The keys argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the references associated with keys by entries in the .aux file. - The text of the optional subcite argument appears after the citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might produce `[Knuth, p. 314]'. - - - - \nocite - Using BibTeX - \cite - thebibliography - - <code>\nocite</code> - \nocite \nocite{key_list} - The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list, which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the .aux file. - - - - Using BibTeX - \nocite - thebibliography - - Using Bib&tex; - using Bib&tex;bib&tex;, usingbibliography, creating (automatically)\bibliographystyle\bibliography If you use the Bib&tex; program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the thebibliography environment (see thebibliography). Instead, you include the lines - \bibliographystyle{bibstyle} -\bibliography{bibfile1,bibfile2} - The \bibliographystyle command does not produce any output of its own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will be produced: bibstyle refers to a file bibstyle.bst, which defines how your citations will look. The standard style names distributed with Bib&tex; are: - - - alpha - - Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication. - - - - plain - - Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. - - - - unsrt - - Like plain, but entries are in order of citation. - - - - abbrv - - Like plain, but more compact labels. - - -
- In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to the demands of various publications. See http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib. - The \bibliography command is what actually produces the bibliography. The argument to \bibliography refers to files named bibfile.bib, which should contain your database in Bib&tex; format. Only the entries referred to via \cite and \nocite will be listed in the bibliography. -
-
- - theorem - titlepage - thebibliography - Environments -
- <code>theorem</code> - theorem environmenttheorems, typesetting Synopsis: - \begin{theorem} +\end{thebibliography} + +The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or +reference list. + +In the article class, this reference list is labelled +“References”; in the report class, it is labelled +“Bibliography”. You can change the label (in the standard classes) +by redefining the command \refname. For instance, this +eliminates it entirely: + +\renewcommand{\refname}{} + +The mandatory widest-label argument is text that, when typeset, +is as wide as the widest item label produced by the \bibitem +commands. It is typically given as 9 for bibliographies with +less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. + + + +\bibitem +\bibitem + Specify a bibliography item. + + +\cite +\cite + Refer to a bibliography item. + + +\nocite +\nocite + Include an item in the bibliography. + + +Using BibTeX +Using BibTeX + Automatic generation of bibliographies. + + + + + +\bibitem +\cite +thebibliography + + +<code>\bibitem</code> + +\bibitem +Synopsis: +\bibitem[label]{cite_key} + +The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by +label. If the label argument is missing, a number is +automatically generated using the enumi counter. The +cite_key is any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation +symbols not containing a comma. + +This command writes an entry to the .aux file containing the +item's cite_key and label. When the .aux file is read by +the \begin{document} command, the item's label is +associated with cite_key, causing references to cite_key +with a \cite command (see next section) to produce the +associated label. + + + + +\cite +\nocite +\bibitem +thebibliography + + +<code>\cite</code> + +\cite +Synopsis: + +\cite[subcite]{keys + +The keys argument is a list of one or more citation keys, +separated by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to +the references associated with keys by entries in the +.aux file. + +The text of the optional subcite argument appears after the +citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might produce +`[Knuth, p. 314]'. + + + + +\nocite +Using BibTeX +\cite +thebibliography + + +<code>\nocite</code> +\nocite +\nocite{key_list} + +The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list, +which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the .aux file. + + + + +Using BibTeX +\nocite +thebibliography + + +Using Bib&tex; + +using Bib&tex;bib&tex;, usingbibliography, creating (automatically)\bibliographystyle\bibliography +If you use the Bib&tex; program by Oren Patashnik (highly +recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of +titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the +thebibliography environment (see thebibliography). Instead, +you include the lines + +\bibliographystyle{bibstyle} +\bibliography{bibfile1,bibfile2} + +The \bibliographystyle command does not produce any output of +its own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will +be produced: bibstyle refers to a file +bibstyle.bst, which defines how your citations will look. +The standard style names distributed with Bib&tex; are: + +alpha +Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of +publication. +plain +Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. +unsrt +Like plain, but entries are in order of citation. +abbrv +Like plain, but more compact labels. +
+ +In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to +the demands of various publications. See +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib. + +The \bibliography command is what actually produces the +bibliography. The argument to \bibliography refers to files +named bibfile.bib, which should contain your database in +Bib&tex; format. Only the entries referred to via \cite and +\nocite will be listed in the bibliography. + + +
+
+ +theorem +titlepage +thebibliography +Environments + +
+<code>theorem</code> + +theorem environmenttheorems, typesetting +Synopsis: + +\begin{theorem} theorem-text -\end{theorem} - The theorem environment produces “Theorem n” in boldface followed by theorem-text, where the numbering possibilities for n are described under \newtheorem (see \newtheorem). -
-
- - titlepage - verbatim - theorem - Environments -
- <code>titlepage</code> - titlepage environmentmaking a title pagetitle pages, creating Synopsis: - \begin{titlepage} +\end{theorem} + +The theorem environment produces “Theorem n” in +boldface followed by theorem-text, where the numbering +possibilities for n are described under \newtheorem +(see \newtheorem). + + +
+ +titlepage +verbatim +theorem +Environments + +
+<code>titlepage</code> + +titlepage environmentmaking a title pagetitle pages, creating +Synopsis: + +\begin{titlepage} text -\end{titlepage} - The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The \today command may be useful on title pages (see \today). - You can use the \maketitle command (see \maketitle) to produce a standard title page without a titlepage environment. -
-
- - verbatim - verse - titlepage - Environments -
- <code>verbatim</code> - verbatim environmentverbatim textsimulating typed texttyped text, simulatingcode, typesettingcomputer programs, typesetting Synopsis: - \begin{verbatim} +\end{titlepage} + +The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e., a page +with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following +page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to +you. The \today command may be useful on title pages +(see \today). + +You can use the \maketitle command (see \maketitle) to +produce a standard title page without a titlepage environment. + + +
+ +verbatim +verse +titlepage +Environments + +
+<code>verbatim</code> + +verbatim environmentverbatim textsimulating typed texttyped text, simulatingcode, typesettingcomputer programs, typesetting +Synopsis: + +\begin{verbatim} literal-text -\end{verbatim} - The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment in which &latex; produces exactly what you type in; for instance the \ character produces a printed \. It turns &latex; into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that they would on a typewriter. - The verbatim uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt). - - - \verb - \verb - The macro form of the verbatim environment. - - -
-
- - \verb - verbatim - - <code>\verb</code> - \verbverbatim text, inline Synopsis: - \verbcharliteral-textchar -\verb*charliteral-textchar - The \verb command typesets literal-text as it is input, including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter (\tt) font. No spaces are allowed between \verb or \verb* and the delimiter char, which begins and ends the verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. - visible spaceThe *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a “visible space” character. - - - - verse - verbatim - Environments -
- <code>verse</code> - verse environmentpoetry, an environment for Synopsis: - \begin{verse} +\end{verbatim} + +The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment in +which &latex; produces exactly what you type in; for instance the +\ character produces a printed \. It turns &latex; +into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same +effect that they would on a typewriter. + +The verbatim uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt). + + + +\verb +\verb + The macro form of the verbatim environment. + + + + +\verb +verbatim + + +<code>\verb</code> + +\verbverbatim text, inline +Synopsis: + +\verbcharliteral-textchar +\verb*charliteral-textchar + +The \verb command typesets literal-text as it is input, +including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter +(\tt) font. No spaces are allowed between \verb or +\verb* and the delimiter char, which begins and ends the +verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. + +visible spaceThe *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a +“visible space” character. + + + +
+ +verse +verbatim +Environments + +
+<code>verse</code> + +verse environmentpoetry, an environment for +Synopsis: + +\begin{verse} line1 \\ line2 \\ ... -\end{verse} - The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find other uses for it. - \\ for verseThe margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas. -
-
- - Line breaking - Page breaking - Environments - Top - - Line breaking - line breakingbreaking lines The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these lines must be broken into pages). - &latex; usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the \\ command, and you can always manually force breaks. - - - \\ - \\ - Start a new line. - - - \obeycr & \restorecr - \obeycr & \restorecr - Make each input line start a new output line. - - - \newline - \newline - Break the line - - - \- (hyphenation) - \- (hyphenation) - Insert explicit hyphenation. - - - \fussy - \fussy - Be fussy about line breaking. - - - \sloppy - \sloppy - Be sloppy about line breaking. - - - \hyphenation - \hyphenation - Tell &latex; how to hyphenate a word. - - - \linebreak & \nolinebreak - \linebreak & \nolinebreak - Forcing & avoiding line breaks. - - - - - - \\ - \obeycr & \restorecr - Line breaking -
- <code>\\</code>[*][<var>morespace</var>] - \\ force line breaknew line, startingline break, forcing The \\ command tells &latex; to start a new line. It has an optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount. - The \\* command is the same as the ordinary \\ command except that it tells &latex; not to start a new page after the line. -
-
- - \obeycr & \restorecr - \newline - \\ - Line breaking -
- <code>\obeycr</code> & <code>\restorecr</code> - \obeycr\restorecrnew line, output as input The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file (^^M, internally) the same as \\ (followed by \relax). So each new line in the input will also be a new line in the output. - \restorecr restores normal line-breaking behavior. -
-
- - \newline - \- (hyphenation) - \obeycr & \restorecr - Line breaking -
- <code>\newline</code> - \newlinenew line, starting (paragraph mode) The \newline command breaks the line at the present point, with no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph mode. -
-
- - \- (hyphenation) - \fussy - \newline - Line breaking -
- <code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen) - \- (hyphenation)hyphenation, forcing The \- command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point. &latex; is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an incorrect one. The \- command is used for the exceptional cases. - When you insert \- commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that &latex; might otherwise have chosen. -
-
- - \fussy - \sloppy - \- (hyphenation) - Line breaking -
- <code>\fussy</code> - \fussy The declaration \fussy (which is the default) makes &tex; picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. - This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command (see \sloppy. -
-
- - \sloppy - \hyphenation - \fussy - Line breaking -
- <code>\sloppy</code> - The declaration \sloppy makes &tex; less fussy about line breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. - Lasts until a \fussy command is issued (see \fussy). -
-
- - \hyphenation - \linebreak & \nolinebreak - \sloppy - Line breaking -
- <code>\hyphenation</code> - \hyphenationhyphenation, defining Synopsis: - \hyphenation{word-one word-two} - The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points with a - character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are tried. Multiple \hyphenation commands accumulate. Some examples (the default &tex; hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these words): - \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} -
-
- - \linebreak & \nolinebreak - \hyphenation - Line breaking -
- <code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code> - \linebreak\nolinebreakline breaks, forcingline breaks, preventing Synopses: - \linebreak[priority] -\nolinebreak[priority] - By default, the \linebreak (\nolinebreak) command forces (prevents) a line break at the current position. For \linebreak, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right margin as usual. - With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. -
-
- - Page breaking - Footnotes - Line breaking - Top - - Page breaking - page breakingbreaking pages &latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. - - - \cleardoublepage - \cleardoublepage - Start a new right-hand page. - - - \clearpage - \clearpage - Start a new page. - - - \newpage - \newpage - Start a new page. - - - \enlargethispage - \enlargethispage - Enlarge the current page a bit. - - - \pagebreak & \nopagebreak - \pagebreak & \nopagebreak - Forcing & avoiding page breaks. - - - - - - \cleardoublepage - \clearpage - Page breaking -
- <code>\cleardoublepage</code> - \cleardoublepagestarting on a right-hand page The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. -
-
- - \clearpage - \newpage - \cleardoublepage - Page breaking -
- <code>\clearpage</code> - \clearpageflushing floats and starting a pagestarting a new page and clearing floats The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. -
-
- - \newpage - \enlargethispage - \clearpage - Page breaking -
- <code>\newpage</code> - \newpagenew page, startingstarting a new page The \newpage command ends the current page, but does not clear floats (see \clearpage above). -
-
- - \enlargethispage - \pagebreak & \nopagebreak - \newpage - Page breaking -
- <code>\enlargethispage</code> - \enlargethispageenlarge current page \enlargethispage{size} - \enlargethispage*{size} - Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified amount; e.g. \enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one additional line. - The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit \pagebreak. -
-
- - \pagebreak & \nopagebreak - \enlargethispage - Page breaking -
- <code>\pagebreak</code> & <code>\nopagebreak</code> - \pagebreak\nopagebreakpage break, forcingpage break, preventing Synopses: - \pagebreak[priority] -\nopagebreak[priority] - By default, the \pagebreak (\nopagebreak) command forces (prevents) a page break at the current position. For \linebreak, the vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. - With the optional argument priority, you can convert the \pagebreak command from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request is. -
-
- - Footnotes - Definitions - Page breaking - Top - - Footnotes - footnotes, creating Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with one command, the \footnote command. They can also be produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the \footnotetext commands. - - - \footnote - \footnote - Insert a footnote. - - - \footnotemark - \footnotemark - Insert footnote mark only. - - - \footnotetext - \footnotetext - Insert footnote text only. - - - Symbolic footnotes - Symbolic footnotes - Using symbols instead of numbers for footnotes. - - - Footnote parameters - Footnote parameters - Parameters for footnote formatting. - - - - - - \footnote - \footnotemark - Footnotes -
- <code>\footnote</code> - \footnote Synopsis: - \footnote[number]{text} - The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text at the bottom of the current page. The optional argument number changes the default footnote number. - This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot use it in sectioning commands like \chapter, in figures, tables or in a tabular environment. (See following sections.) - -
-
- - \footnotemark - \footnotetext - \footnote - Footnotes -
- <code>\footnotemark</code> - \footnotemark With no optional argument, the \footnotemark command puts the current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, with the \footnotetext command. - This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote markers referring to the same footnote with - \footnotemark[\value{footnote}] - after the first \footnote command. -
-
- - \footnotetext - Symbolic footnotes - \footnotemark - Footnotes -
- <code>\footnotetext</code> - \footnotetext Synopsis: - \footnotetext[number]{text} - The \footnotetext command places text at the bottom of the page as a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the \footnotemark command. The \footnotetext command must appear in outer paragraph mode. - The optional argument number changes the default footnote number. -
-
- - Symbolic footnotes - Footnote parameters - \footnotetext - Footnotes -
- Symbolic footnotes - footnotes, symbolic instead of numberedIf you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing numbers, redefine \thefootnote like this: - \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}} - \fnsymbol, and footnotes\@fnsymbolThe \fnsymbol command produces a predefined series of symbols (see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). If you want to use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also redefine \@fnsymbol. -
-
- - Footnote parameters - Symbolic footnotes - Footnotes -
- Footnote parameters - footnote parametersparameters, for footnotes - - - \footnoterule\footnoterule - - Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's footnotes. Default dimensions: 0.4pt thick (or wide), and 0.4\columnwidth long in the standard document classes (except slides, where it does not appear). - - - - \footnotesep\footnotesep - - The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By default, this is set to the normal strut for \footnotesize fonts (see Font sizes), therefore there is no extra space between footnotes. This is 6.65pt for 10pt, 7.7pt for 11pt, and 8.4pt for 12pt. - - -
-
-
- - Definitions - Counters - Footnotes - Top - - Definitions - definitions &latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds. +\end{verse} + +The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find +other uses for it. + +\\ for verseThe margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not +indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each +stanza with \\, and use one or more blank lines to separate the +stanzas. + + +
+ + +Line breaking +Page breaking +Environments +Top + + +Line breaking +line breakingbreaking lines +The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to +translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To +produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines +(and these lines must be broken into pages). + +&latex; usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in +some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the +\\ command, and you can always manually force breaks. + + + +\\ +\\ + Start a new line. + + +\obeycr & \restorecr +\obeycr & \restorecr + Make each input line start a new output line. + + +\newline +\newline + Break the line + + +\- (hyphenation) +\- (hyphenation) + Insert explicit hyphenation. + + +\fussy +\fussy + Be fussy about line breaking. + + +\sloppy +\sloppy + Be sloppy about line breaking. + + +\hyphenation +\hyphenation + Tell &latex; how to hyphenate a word. + + +\linebreak & \nolinebreak +\linebreak & \nolinebreak + Forcing & avoiding line breaks. + + + + + +\\ +\obeycr & \restorecr +Line breaking + +
+<code>\\</code>[*][<var>morespace</var>] +\\ force line breaknew line, startingline break, forcing +The \\ command tells &latex; to start a new line. It has an +optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra +vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a +negative amount. + +The \\* command is the same as the ordinary \\ command +except that it tells &latex; not to start a new page after the line. + + +
+ +\obeycr & \restorecr +\newline +\\ +Line breaking + +
+<code>\obeycr</code> & <code>\restorecr</code> +\obeycr\restorecrnew line, output as input +The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file +(^^M, internally) the same as \\ (followed by +\relax). So each new line in the input will also be a new line +in the output. + +\restorecr restores normal line-breaking behavior. + + +
+ +\newline +\- (hyphenation) +\obeycr & \restorecr +Line breaking + +
+<code>\newline</code> +\newlinenew line, starting (paragraph mode) +The \newline command breaks the line at the present point, with +no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph +mode. + + +
+ +\- (hyphenation) +\fussy +\newline +Line breaking + +
+<code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen) +\- (hyphenation)hyphenation, forcing +The \- command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at +that point. &latex; is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually +find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an +incorrect one. The \- command is used for the exceptional +cases. + +When you insert \- commands in a word, the word will only be +hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points +that &latex; might otherwise have chosen. + + + +
+ +\fussy +\sloppy +\- (hyphenation) +Line breaking + +
+<code>\fussy</code> +\fussy +The declaration \fussy (which is the default) makes &tex; +picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between +words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. + +This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command +(see \sloppy. + + +
+ +\sloppy +\hyphenation +\fussy +Line breaking + +
+<code>\sloppy</code> + +The declaration \sloppy makes &tex; less fussy about line +breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose +interword spacing. + +Lasts until a \fussy command is issued (see \fussy). + + +
+ +\hyphenation +\linebreak & \nolinebreak +\sloppy +Line breaking + +
+<code>\hyphenation</code> +\hyphenationhyphenation, defining +Synopsis: + +\hyphenation{word-one word-two} + +The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points +with a - character in the given words. The words are separated +by spaces. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no +inflections are tried. Multiple \hyphenation commands +accumulate. Some examples (the default &tex; hyphenation patterns +misses the hyphenations in these words): + +\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} + + +
+ +\linebreak & \nolinebreak +\hyphenation +Line breaking + +
+<code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code> +\linebreak\nolinebreakline breaks, forcingline breaks, preventing +Synopses: + +\linebreak[priority] +\nolinebreak[priority] + +By default, the \linebreak (\nolinebreak) command forces +(prevents) a line break at the current position. For +\linebreak, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it +extends to the right margin as usual. + +With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command +from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from +0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. + + +
+
+ +Page breaking +Footnotes +Line breaking +Top + + +Page breaking +page breakingbreaking pages +&latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has +accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, +but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. + + + +\cleardoublepage +\cleardoublepage + Start a new right-hand page. + + +\clearpage +\clearpage + Start a new page. + + +\newpage +\newpage + Start a new page. + + +\enlargethispage +\enlargethispage + Enlarge the current page a bit. + + +\pagebreak & \nopagebreak +\pagebreak & \nopagebreak + Forcing & avoiding page breaks. + + + + + +\cleardoublepage +\clearpage +Page breaking + +
+<code>\cleardoublepage</code> + +\cleardoublepagestarting on a right-hand page +The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes all +figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. +In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand +(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. + + +
+ +\clearpage +\newpage +\cleardoublepage +Page breaking + +
+<code>\clearpage</code> +\clearpageflushing floats and starting a pagestarting a new page and clearing floats +The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all +figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. + + +
+ +\newpage +\enlargethispage +\clearpage +Page breaking + +
+<code>\newpage</code> +\newpagenew page, startingstarting a new page +The \newpage command ends the current page, but does not clear +floats (see \clearpage above). + + +
+ +\enlargethispage +\pagebreak & \nopagebreak +\newpage +Page breaking + +
+<code>\enlargethispage</code> +\enlargethispageenlarge current page +\enlargethispage{size} + +\enlargethispage*{size} + +Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified +amount; e.g. \enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one +additional line. + +The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as +much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit +\pagebreak. + + +
+ +\pagebreak & \nopagebreak +\enlargethispage +Page breaking + +
+<code>\pagebreak</code> & <code>\nopagebreak</code> +\pagebreak\nopagebreakpage break, forcingpage break, preventing +Synopses: + +\pagebreak[priority] +\nopagebreak[priority] + +By default, the \pagebreak (\nopagebreak) command forces +(prevents) a page break at the current position. For +\linebreak, the vertical space on the page is stretched out +where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. + +With the optional argument priority, you can convert the +\pagebreak command from a demand to a request. The number must +be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more +insistent the request is. + + +
+
+ +Footnotes +Definitions +Page breaking +Top + + +Footnotes +footnotes, creating +Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced +with one command, the \footnote command. They can also be +produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the +\footnotetext commands. + + + +\footnote +\footnote + Insert a footnote. + + +\footnotemark +\footnotemark + Insert footnote mark only. + + +\footnotetext +\footnotetext + Insert footnote text only. + + +Symbolic footnotes +Symbolic footnotes + Using symbols instead of numbers for footnotes. + + +Footnote parameters +Footnote parameters + Parameters for footnote formatting. + + + + + +\footnote +\footnotemark +Footnotes + +
+<code>\footnote</code> +\footnote +Synopsis: + +\footnote[number]{text} + +The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text +at the bottom of the current page. The optional argument number +changes the default footnote number. + +This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you +cannot use it in sectioning commands like \chapter, in figures, +tables or in a tabular environment. (See following sections.) + + + +
+ +\footnotemark +\footnotetext +\footnote +Footnotes + +
+<code>\footnotemark</code> +\footnotemark +With no optional argument, the \footnotemark command puts the +current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in +inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, +with the \footnotetext command. + +This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote +markers referring to the same footnote with + +\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] + +after the first \footnote command. + + +
+ +\footnotetext +Symbolic footnotes +\footnotemark +Footnotes + +
+<code>\footnotetext</code> +\footnotetext +Synopsis: + +\footnotetext[number]{text} + +The \footnotetext command places text at the bottom of +the page as a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the +\footnotemark command. The \footnotetext command must +appear in outer paragraph mode. + +The optional argument number changes the default footnote number. + + +
+ +Symbolic footnotes +Footnote parameters +\footnotetext +Footnotes + +
+Symbolic footnotes + +footnotes, symbolic instead of numberedIf you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing +numbers, redefine \thefootnote like this: + +\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}} + +\fnsymbol, and footnotes\@fnsymbolThe \fnsymbol command produces a predefined series of symbols +(see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). If you want to +use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also +redefine \@fnsymbol. + + +
+ +Footnote parameters +Symbolic footnotes +Footnotes + +
+Footnote parameters + +footnote parametersparameters, for footnotes +\footnoterule\footnoterule +Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's +footnotes. Default dimensions: 0.4pt thick (or wide), and +0.4\columnwidth long in the standard document classes (except +slides, where it does not appear). + +\footnotesep\footnotesep +The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By +default, this is set to the normal strut for \footnotesize +fonts (see Font sizes), therefore there is no extra space between +footnotes. This is 6.65pt for 10pt, 7.7pt for +11pt, and 8.4pt for 12pt. + +
+ + +
+
+ +Definitions +Counters +Footnotes +Top + + +Definitions +definitions +&latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds. + - - - \newcommand & \renewcommand - \newcommand & \renewcommand - (Re)define a new command. - - - \newcounter - \newcounter - Define a new counter. - - - \newlength - \newlength - Define a new length. - - - \newsavebox - \newsavebox - Define a new box. - - - \newenvironment & \renewenvironment - \newenvironment & \renewenvironment - Define a new environment. - - - \newtheorem - \newtheorem - Define a new theorem-like environment. - - - \newfont - \newfont - Define a new font name. - - - \protect - \protect - Using tricky commands. - - - -
- - \newcommand & \renewcommand - \newcounter - Definitions -
- <code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code> - \newcommandcommands, defining new onesdefining a new commandnew commands, defining \newcommand and \renewcommand define and redefine a command, respectively. Synopses: - \newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} + + + +\newcommand & \renewcommand +\newcommand & \renewcommand + (Re)define a new command. + + +\newcounter +\newcounter + Define a new counter. + + +\newlength +\newlength + Define a new length. + + +\newsavebox +\newsavebox + Define a new box. + + +\newenvironment & \renewenvironment +\newenvironment & \renewenvironment + Define a new environment. + + +\newtheorem +\newtheorem + Define a new theorem-like environment. + + +\newfont +\newfont + Define a new font name. + + +\protect +\protect + Using tricky commands. + + + + + +\newcommand & \renewcommand +\newcounter +Definitions + +
+<code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code> +\newcommandcommands, defining new onesdefining a new commandnew commands, defining +\newcommand and \renewcommand define and redefine a +command, respectively. Synopses: + + \newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} \renewcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} \newcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} -\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} - - - cmd - - The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it must not be already defined and must not begin with \end; for \renewcommand, it must already be defined. - - - - nargs - - An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no arguments. - - - - default - - If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not specified in the call) is the string def. - - - - defn - - The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a construct of the form #n in defn is replaced by the text of the nth argument. - - -
-
- - - \newcounter - \newlength - \newcommand & \renewcommand - Definitions -
- <code>\newcounter</code> - \newcountercounters, defining new Synopsis: - \newcounter{cnt}[countername] - The \newcounter command defines a new counter named cnt. The new counter is initialized to zero. - Given the optional argument [countername], cnt will be reset whenever countername is incremented. - See Counters, for more information about counters. -
-
- - \newlength - \newsavebox - \newcounter - Definitions -
- <code>\newlength</code> - \newlengthlengths, defining new Synopsis: - \newlength{\arg} - The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument as a length command with a value of 0in. The argument must be a control sequence, as in \newlength{\foo}. An error occurs if \foo is already defined. - See Lengths, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and for more information about lengths in general. -
-
- - \newsavebox - \newenvironment & \renewenvironment - \newlength - Definitions -
- <code>\newsavebox</code> - \newsavebox Synopsis: - \newsavebox{cmd} - Defines \cmd, which must be a command name not already defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. -
-
- - \newenvironment & \renewenvironment - \newtheorem - \newsavebox - Definitions -
- <code>\newenvironment</code> & <code>\renewenvironment</code> - \newenvironment\renewenvironmentenvironments, definingdefining new environmentsredefining environments Synopses: - \newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} +\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} + + +cmd +The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it +must not be already defined and must not begin with \end; for +\renewcommand, it must already be defined. + +nargs +An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments +that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no +arguments. + +default +If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's +first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the +default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not specified +in the call) is the string def. + +defn +The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a +construct of the form #n in defn is replaced by the +text of the nth argument. + +
+ + +
+ +\newcounter +\newlength +\newcommand & \renewcommand +Definitions + +
+<code>\newcounter</code> +\newcountercounters, defining new +Synopsis: + +\newcounter{cnt}[countername] + +The \newcounter command defines a new counter named cnt. +The new counter is initialized to zero. + +Given the optional argument [countername], cnt +will be reset whenever countername is incremented. + +See Counters, for more information about counters. + + +
+ +\newlength +\newsavebox +\newcounter +Definitions + +
+<code>\newlength</code> +\newlengthlengths, defining new +Synopsis: + +\newlength{\arg} + +The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument as a +length command with a value of 0in. The argument must +be a control sequence, as in \newlength{\foo}. An error +occurs if \foo is already defined. + +See Lengths, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and +for more information about lengths in general. + + +
+ +\newsavebox +\newenvironment & \renewenvironment +\newlength +Definitions + +
+<code>\newsavebox</code> +\newsavebox +Synopsis: + +\newsavebox{cmd} + +Defines \cmd, which must be a command name not already +defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. + + +
+ +\newenvironment & \renewenvironment +\newtheorem +\newsavebox +Definitions + +
+<code>\newenvironment</code> & <code>\renewenvironment</code> +\newenvironment\renewenvironmentenvironments, definingdefining new environmentsredefining environments +Synopses: + + \newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} \newenvironment{env}[nargs][default]{begdef}{enddef} -\renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} - These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is, \begin{env} &dots; \end{env}. - - - env - - The name of the environment. For \newenvironment, env must not be an existing environment, and the command \env must be undefined. For \renewenvironment, env must be the name of an existing environment. - - - - nargs - - An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. - - - - default - - If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default gives the default value for that argument. - - - - begdef - - The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}; a construct of the form #n in begdef is replaced by the text of the nth argument. - - - - enddef - - The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}. It may not contain any argument parameters. - - -
-
-
- - \newtheorem - \newfont - \newenvironment & \renewenvironment - Definitions -
- <code>\newtheorem</code> - \newtheoremtheorems, definingdefining new theorems - \newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within] -\newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label} - This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments: - - - newenv - - The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an existing environment or otherwise defined. - - - - label - - The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the number. For example, Theorem. - - - - numbered_like - - (Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; the new environment will be numbered just like numbered_like. - - - - within - - (Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as the within counter. - - -
- At most one of numbered_like and within can be specified, not both. -
-
- - \newfont - \protect - \newtheorem - Definitions -
- <code>\newfont</code> - \newfontfonts, new commands fordefining new fonts Synopsis: - \newfont{cmd}{fontname} - Defines a control sequence \cmd, which must not already be defined, to make fontname be the current font. The file looked for on the system is named fontname.tfm. - This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd files. -
-
- - \protect - \newfont - Definitions -
- <code>\protect</code> - \protect fragile commandsmoving argumentsFootnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and many more are so-called fragile commands. When a fragile command is used in certain contexts, called moving arguments, it must be preceded by \protect. In addition, any fragile commands within the arguments must have their own \protect. - Some examples of moving arguments are \caption (see figure), \thanks (see \maketitle), and expressions in tabular and array environments (see tabular). - robust commandsCommands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not be preceded by \protect. - See also: - http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect +\renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} + +These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is, +\begin{env} &dots; \end{env}. + +env +The name of the environment. For \newenvironment, env +must not be an existing environment, and the command \env +must be undefined. For \renewenvironment, env must be +the name of an existing environment. + +nargs +An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of +the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. + +default +If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default +gives the default value for that argument. + +begdef +The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}; a +construct of the form #n in begdef is replaced by +the text of the nth argument. + +enddef +The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}. It +may not contain any argument parameters. + +
+ + +
+ +\newtheorem +\newfont +\newenvironment & \renewenvironment +Definitions + +
+<code>\newtheorem</code> +\newtheoremtheorems, definingdefining new theorems +\newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within] +\newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label} + +This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments: + +newenv +The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an +existing environment or otherwise defined. + +label +The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the +number. For example, Theorem. + +numbered_like +(Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; +the new environment will be numbered just like numbered_like. + +within +(Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. +The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as the +within counter. + +
+ +At most one of numbered_like and within can be specified, +not both. + + +
+ +\newfont +\protect +\newtheorem +Definitions + +
+<code>\newfont</code> +\newfontfonts, new commands fordefining new fonts +Synopsis: + +\newfont{cmd}{fontname} + +Defines a control sequence \cmd, which must not already +be defined, to make fontname be the current font. The file +looked for on the system is named fontname.tfm. + +This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. +More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd files. + + +
+ +\protect +\newfont +Definitions + +
+<code>\protect</code> +\protect +fragile commandsmoving argumentsFootnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and +many more are so-called fragile commands. When a fragile +command is used in certain contexts, called moving arguments, it +must be preceded by \protect. In addition, any fragile +commands within the arguments must have their own \protect. + +Some examples of moving arguments are \caption +(see figure), \thanks (see \maketitle), and +expressions in tabular and array environments +(see tabular). + +robust commandsCommands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not +be preceded by \protect. + +See also: + +http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect + -
-
- - Counters - Lengths - Definitions - Top - - Counters - counters, a list ofvariables, a list of Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or command that produces the number, except with no \. (enumienumiv are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;'s standard document classes to control numbering. - part paragraph figure enumi + + +
+ + +Counters +Lengths +Definitions +Top + + +Counters +counters, a list ofvariables, a list of +Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with +it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment +or command that produces the number, except with no \. +(enumienumiv are used for the nested enumerate +environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;'s +standard document classes to control numbering. + +part paragraph figure enumi chapter subparagraph table enumii section page footnote enumiii subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv -subsubsection - - - \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol - \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol - Print value of a counter. - - - \usecounter - \usecounter - Use a specified counter in a list environment. - - - \value - \value - Use the value of a counter in an expression. - - - \setcounter - \setcounter - Set the value of a counter. - - - \addtocounter - \addtocounter - Add a quantity to a counter. - - - \refstepcounter - \refstepcounter - Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. - - - \stepcounter - \stepcounter - Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. - - - \day \month \year - \day \month \year - Numeric date values. - - - -
- - \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol - \usecounter - Counters -
- <code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters - All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for instance, \alph{enumi}. - - - \alph\alph - - prints counter using lowercase letters: `a', `b', &enddots; - - - - \Alph\Alph - - uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', &enddots; - - - - \arabic\arabic - - uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', &enddots; - - - - \roman\roman - - uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', &enddots; - - - - \roman\roman - - uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', &enddots; - - - - \fnsymbol\fnsymbol - - prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. - The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: - asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel -double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger - - -
-
-
- - \usecounter - \value - \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol - Counters -
- <code>\usecounter{<var>counter</var>}</code> - \usecounterlist items, specifying counternumbered items, specifying counter Synopsis: - \usecounter{counter} - The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the list environment to specify counter to be used to number the list items. -
-
- - \value - \setcounter - \usecounter - Counters -
- <code>\value{<var>counter</var>}</code> - \valuecounters, getting value of Synopsis: - \value{counter} - The \value command produces the value of counter. It can be used anywhere &latex; expects a number, for example: - \setcounter{myctr}{3} +subsubsection + + + +\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol +\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol + Print value of a counter. + + +\usecounter +\usecounter + Use a specified counter in a list environment. + + +\value +\value + Use the value of a counter in an expression. + + +\setcounter +\setcounter + Set the value of a counter. + + +\addtocounter +\addtocounter + Add a quantity to a counter. + + +\refstepcounter +\refstepcounter + Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. + + +\stepcounter +\stepcounter + Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. + + +\day \month \year +\day \month \year + Numeric date values. + + + + + +\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol +\usecounter +Counters + +
+<code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters + +All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for +instance, \alph{enumi}. + +\alph\alph +prints counter using lowercase letters: `a', `b', &enddots; + +\Alph\Alph +uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', &enddots; + +\arabic\arabic +uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', &enddots; + +\roman\roman +uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', &enddots; + +\roman\roman +uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', &enddots; + +\fnsymbol\fnsymbol +prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine +symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of +counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. + +The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: +asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel +double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger + +
+ + +
+ +\usecounter +\value +\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol +Counters + +
+<code>\usecounter{<var>counter</var>}</code> +\usecounterlist items, specifying counternumbered items, specifying counter +Synopsis: + +\usecounter{counter} + +The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the +list environment to specify counter to be used to number +the list items. + + +
+ +\value +\setcounter +\usecounter +Counters + +
+<code>\value{<var>counter</var>}</code> +\valuecounters, getting value of +Synopsis: + +\value{counter} + +The \value command produces the value of counter. It can +be used anywhere &latex; expects a number, for example: + +\setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1} -\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent} -
- - - \setcounter - \addtocounter - \value - Counters -
- <code>\setcounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code> - \setcountercounters, settingsetting counters Synopsis: - \setcounter{\counter}{value} - The \setcounter command sets the value of \counter to the value argument. -
-
- - \addtocounter - \refstepcounter - \setcounter - Counters -
- <code>\addtocounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code> - \addtocounter The \addtocounter command increments counter by the amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. -
-
- - \refstepcounter - \stepcounter - \addtocounter - Counters -
- <code>\refstepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code> - \refstepcounter The \refstepcounter command works in the same way as \stepcounter See \stepcounter, except it also defines the current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter. -
-
- - \stepcounter - \day \month \year - \refstepcounter - Counters -
- <code>\stepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code> - \stepcounter The \stepcounter command adds one to counter and resets all subsidiary counters. -
-
- - \day \month \year - \stepcounter - Counters -
- <code>\day \month \year</code>: Predefined counters - \day\month\year &latex; defines counters for the day of the month (\day, 1–31), month of the year (\month, 1–12), and year (\year, Common Era). When &tex; starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where &tex; is running. They are not updated as the job progresses. - The related command \today produces a string representing the current day (see \today). -
-
- - Lengths - Making paragraphs - Counters - Top - - Lengths - lengths, defining and using A length is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a length as an argument. - - - \setlength - \setlength - Set the value of a length. - - - \addtolength - \addtolength - Add a quantity to a length. - - - \settodepth - \settodepth - Set a length to the depth of something. - - - \settoheight - \settoheight - Set a length to the height of something. - - - \settowidth - \settowidth - Set a length to the width of something. - - - Predefined lengths - Predefined lengths - Lengths that are, like, predefined. - - - - - - \setlength - \addtolength - Lengths -
- <code>\setlength{\<var>len</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code> - \setlengthlengths, setting The \setlength sets the value of \len to the value argument, which can be expressed in any units that &latex; understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), points (pt), big points (bp, etc. -
-
- - \addtolength - \settodepth - \setlength - Lengths -
- \addtolength{<var>\len</var>}{<var>amount</var>} - \addtolengthlengths, adding to The \addtolength command increments a “length command” \len by the amount specified in the amount argument, which may be negative. -
-
- - \settodepth - \settoheight - \addtolength - Lengths -
- <code>\settodepth</code> - \settodepth \settodepth{\gnat}{text} - The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command equal to the depth of the text argument. -
-
- - \settoheight - \settowidth - \settodepth - Lengths -
- <code>\settoheight</code> - \settoheight \settoheight{\gnat}{text} - The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command equal to the height of the text argument. -
-
- - \settowidth - Predefined lengths - \settoheight - Lengths -
- <code>\settowidth{\<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code> - \settowidth The \settowidth command sets the value of the command \len to the width of the text argument. -
-
- - Predefined lengths - \settowidth - Lengths -
- Predefined lengths - lengths, predefinedpredefined lengths \width \width \height \height \depth \depth \totalheight \totalheight These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width etc. of the text in the box. \totalheight equals \height + \depth. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say - \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher} -
-
- - Making paragraphs - Math formulas - Lengths - Top - - Making paragraphs - making paragraphsparagraphs A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not containing even a %. A blank line should not appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of a sectioning command. - - - \indent - \indent - Indent this paragraph. - - - \noindent - \noindent - Do not indent this paragraph. - - - \parskip - \parskip - Space added before paragraphs. - - - Marginal notes - Marginal notes - Putting remarks in the margin. - - - - - - \indent - \noindent - Making paragraphs -
- <code>\indent</code> - \indent\parindentindent, forcing \indent produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the \parindent length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed. - The default value for \parindent is 1em in two-column mode, otherwise 15pt for 10pt documents, 17pt for 11pt, and 1.5em for 12pt. -
-
- - \noindent - \parskip - \indent - Making paragraphs -
- <code>\noindent</code> - \noindentindent, suppressing When used at the beginning of the paragraph, \noindent suppresses any paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph. -
-
- - \parskip - Marginal notes - \noindent - Making paragraphs -
- <code>\parskip</code> - \parskipvertical space before paragraphs \parskip is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. -
-
- - Marginal notes - \parskip - Making paragraphs -
- Marginal notes - marginal notesnotes in the marginremarks in the margin\marginpar Synopsis: - \marginpar[left]{right} - The \marginpar command creates a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text where the \marginpar occurs. - When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text will be placed - - - - in the right margin for one-sided layout; - - - in the outside margin for two-sided layout; - - - in the nearest margin for two-column layout. - - - \reversemarginpar\normalmarginparThe command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes in the opposite (inside) margin. \normalmarginpar places them in the default position. - When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left margin, and right is used for the right margin. - The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}. - These parameters affect the formatting of the note: - - - \marginparpush\marginparpush - - Minimum vertical space between notes; default 7pt for 12pt documents, 5pt else. - - - - \marginparsep\marginparsep - - Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default 11pt for 10pt documents, 10pt else. - - - - \marginparwidth\marginparwidth - - Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided 10pt document is 90pt, 83pt for 11pt, and 68pt for 12pt; 17pt more in each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the default is 48pt. - - -
-
-
- - Math formulas - Modes - Making paragraphs - Top - - Math formulas - math formulasformulas, mathmath mode, entering math environmentdisplaymath environmentequation environmentThere are three environments that put &latex; in math mode: - - - math - - For formulas that appear right in the text. - - - - displaymath - - For formulas that appear on their own line. - - - - equation - - The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation number in the right margin. - - -
- \(\)\[\]The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but the displaymath and equation environments can be used only in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: - \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} -\[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath} - $In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even shorter form: - $ ... $ instead of \(...\) - \boldmath\unboldmathThe \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in a bold font. It is used outside of math mode. Conversely, the \unboldmath command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too is used outside of math mode. +\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent} + + +
+ +\setcounter +\addtocounter +\value +Counters + +
+<code>\setcounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code> +\setcountercounters, settingsetting counters +Synopsis: + +\setcounter{\counter}{value} + +The \setcounter command sets the value of \counter to the +value argument. + + +
+ +\addtocounter +\refstepcounter +\setcounter +Counters + +
+<code>\addtocounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code> +\addtocounter +The \addtocounter command increments counter by the +amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. + + +
+ +\refstepcounter +\stepcounter +\addtocounter +Counters + +
+<code>\refstepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code> +\refstepcounter +The \refstepcounter command works in the same way as +\stepcounter See \stepcounter, except it also defines the +current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter. + + +
+ +\stepcounter +\day \month \year +\refstepcounter +Counters + +
+<code>\stepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code> +\stepcounter +The \stepcounter command adds one to counter and +resets all subsidiary counters. + + +
+ +\day \month \year +\stepcounter +Counters + +
+<code>\day \month \year</code>: Predefined counters +\day\month\year +&latex; defines counters for the day of the month (\day, +1–31), month of the year (\month, 1–12), and year +(\year, Common Era). When &tex; starts up, they are +set to the current values on the system where &tex; is running. They +are not updated as the job progresses. + +The related command \today produces a string representing the +current day (see \today). + + +
+ + +Lengths +Making paragraphs +Counters +Top + + +Lengths +lengths, defining and using +A length is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a +length as an argument. + + + +\setlength +\setlength + Set the value of a length. + + +\addtolength +\addtolength + Add a quantity to a length. + + +\settodepth +\settodepth + Set a length to the depth of something. + + +\settoheight +\settoheight + Set a length to the height of something. + + +\settowidth +\settowidth + Set a length to the width of something. + + +Predefined lengths +Predefined lengths + Lengths that are, like, predefined. + + + + + +\setlength +\addtolength +Lengths + +
+<code>\setlength{\<var>len</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code> +\setlengthlengths, setting +The \setlength sets the value of \len to the value +argument, which can be expressed in any units that &latex; +understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), points +(pt), big points (bp, etc. + + +
+ +\addtolength +\settodepth +\setlength +Lengths + +
+\addtolength{<var>\len</var>}{<var>amount</var>} +\addtolengthlengths, adding to +The \addtolength command increments a “length command” +\len by the amount specified in the amount argument, which +may be negative. + + +
+ +\settodepth +\settoheight +\addtolength +Lengths + +
+<code>\settodepth</code> +\settodepth +\settodepth{\gnat}{text} + +The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command +equal to the depth of the text argument. + + +
+ +\settoheight +\settowidth +\settodepth +Lengths + +
+<code>\settoheight</code> +\settoheight +\settoheight{\gnat}{text} + +The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command +equal to the height of the text argument. + + + +
+ +\settowidth +Predefined lengths +\settoheight +Lengths + +
+<code>\settowidth{\<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code> +\settowidth +The \settowidth command sets the value of the command \len +to the width of the text argument. + + + +
+ +Predefined lengths +\settowidth +Lengths + +
+Predefined lengths +lengths, predefinedpredefined lengths +\width +\width +\height +\height +\depth +\depth +\totalheight +\totalheight +These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making +commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width etc. of the +text in the box. \totalheight equals \height + +\depth. To make a box with the text stretched to double the +natural size, e.g., say + +\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher} + + +
+
+ +Making paragraphs +Math formulas +Lengths +Top + + +Making paragraphs +making paragraphsparagraphs +A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not +containing even a %. A blank line should not appear where a new +paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of +a sectioning command. + + + +\indent +\indent + Indent this paragraph. + + +\noindent +\noindent + Do not indent this paragraph. + + +\parskip +\parskip + Space added before paragraphs. + + +Marginal notes +Marginal notes + Putting remarks in the margin. + + + + + +\indent +\noindent +Making paragraphs + +
+<code>\indent</code> +\indent\parindentindent, forcing +\indent produces a horizontal space whose width equals the +width of the \parindent length, the normal paragraph +indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it would +otherwise be suppressed. + +The default value for \parindent is 1em in two-column +mode, otherwise 15pt for 10pt documents, 17pt for +11pt, and 1.5em for 12pt. + + +
+ +\noindent +\parskip +\indent +Making paragraphs + +
+<code>\noindent</code> +\noindentindent, suppressing +When used at the beginning of the paragraph, \noindent +suppresses any paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in +the middle of a paragraph. + + +
+ +\parskip +Marginal notes +\noindent +Making paragraphs + +
+<code>\parskip</code> +\parskipvertical space before paragraphs +\parskip is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added +before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. + + +
+ +Marginal notes +\parskip +Making paragraphs + +
+Marginal notes +marginal notesnotes in the marginremarks in the margin\marginpar +Synopsis: + +\marginpar[left]{right} + +The \marginpar command creates a note in the margin. The first +line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text +where the \marginpar occurs. + +When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text +will be placed + + +in the right margin for one-sided layout; + + +in the outside margin for two-sided layout; + + +in the nearest margin for two-column layout. + + + +\reversemarginpar\normalmarginparThe command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes +in the opposite (inside) margin. \normalmarginpar places them +in the default position. + +When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left +margin, and right is used for the right margin. + +The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable +hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}. + +These parameters affect the formatting of the note: + +\marginparpush\marginparpush +Minimum vertical space between notes; default 7pt for +12pt documents, 5pt else. + +\marginparsep\marginparsep +Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default +11pt for 10pt documents, 10pt else. + +\marginparwidth\marginparwidth +Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided 10pt document +is 90pt, 83pt for 11pt, and 68pt for +12pt; 17pt more in each case for a two-sided document. +In two column mode, the default is 48pt. + +
+ +The standard &latex; routine for marginal notes does not prevent +notes from falling off the bottom of the page. + + + + + +
+
+ +Math formulas +Modes +Making paragraphs +Top + + +Math formulas +math formulasformulas, mathmath mode, entering +math environmentdisplaymath environmentequation environmentThere are three environments that put &latex; in math mode: + +math +For formulas that appear right in the text. +displaymath +For formulas that appear on their own line. +equation +The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation +number in the right margin. +
+ +\(\)\[\]The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, +but the displaymath and equation environments can be used +only in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath +environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: + +\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} +\[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath} + +$In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even +shorter form: + +$ ... $ instead of \(...\) + +\boldmath\unboldmathThe \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in +a bold font. It is used outside of math mode. Conversely, the +\unboldmath command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; +it too is used outside of math mode. + - \displaystyleThe \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the formula to be that of displaymath, e.g., with limits above and below summations. For example - $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $ +\displaystyleThe \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the +formula to be that of displaymath, e.g., with limits above and +below summations. For example +$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $ + - - - Subscripts & superscripts - Subscripts & superscripts - Also known as exponent or index. - - - Math symbols - Math symbols - Various mathematical squiggles. - - - Math functions - Math functions - Math function names like sin and exp. - - - Math accents - Math accents - Accents in math. - - - Spacing in math mode - Spacing in math mode - Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces. - - - Math miscellany - Math miscellany - Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else. - - -
-
- - Subscripts & superscripts - Math symbols - Math formulas -
- Subscripts & superscripts - superscriptsubscriptexponent_^ To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type _{exp}. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type ^{exp}. &latex; handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a superscript. -
-
- - Math symbols - Math functions - Subscripts & superscripts - Math formulas -
- Math symbols - math symbolssymbols, mathgreek letters &latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, you will get the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. - - - \|\| - - \| - - - - \aleph\aleph - - \aleph - - - - \alpha\alpha - - \alpha - - - - \amalg\amalg - - \amalg (binary operation) - - - - \angle\angle - - \angle - - - - \approx\approx - - \approx (relation) - - - - \ast\ast - - \ast (binary operation) - - - - \asymp\asymp - - \asymp (relation) - - - - \backslash\backslash - - \ (delimiter) - - - - \beta\beta - - \beta - - - - \bigcap\bigcap - - \bigcap - - - - \bigcirc\bigcirc - - \bigcirc (binary operation) - - - - \bigcup\bigcup - - \bigcup - - - - \bigodot\bigodot - - \bigodot - - - - \bigoplus\bigoplus - - \bigoplus - - - - \bigotimes\bigotimes - - \bigotimes - - - - \bigtriangledown\bigtriangledown - - \bigtriangledown (binary operation) - - - - \bigtriangleup\bigtriangleup - - \bigtriangleup (binary operation) - - - - \bigsqcup\bigsqcup - - \bigsqcup - - - - \biguplus\biguplus - - \biguplus - - - - \bigcap\bigcap - - \bigvee - - - - \bigwedge\bigwedge - - \bigwedge - - - - \bot\bot - - \bot - - - - \bowtie\bowtie - - \bowtie (relation) - - - - \Box\Box - - (square open box symbol) - - - - - \bullet\bulletbullet symbol - - \bullet (binary operation) - - - - \cap\cap - - \cap (binary operation) - - - - \cdot\cdot - - \cdot (binary operation) - - - - \chi\chi - - \chi - - - - \circ\circ - - \circ (binary operation) - - - - \clubsuit\clubsuit - - \clubsuit - - - - \cong\cong - - \cong (relation) - - - - \coprod\coprod - - \coprod - - - - \cup\cup - - \cup (binary operation) - - - - \dagger\dagger - - \dagger (binary operation) - - - - \dashv\dashv - - \dashv (relation) - - - - \ddagger\ddagger - - \dagger (binary operation) - - - - \Delta\Delta - - \Delta - - - - \delta\delta - - \delta - - - - \Diamond\Diamond - - bigger \diamond - - - - - \diamond\diamond - - \diamond (binary operation) - - - - \diamondsuit\diamondsuit - - \diamondsuit - - - - \div\div - - \div (binary operation) - - - - \doteq\doteq - - \doteq (relation) - - - - \downarrow\downarrow - - \downarrow (delimiter) - - - - \Downarrow\Downarrow - - \Downarrow (delimiter) - - - - \ell\ell - - \ell - - - - \emptyset\emptyset - - \emptyset - - - - \epsilon\epsilon - - \epsilon - - - - \equiv\equiv - - \equiv (relation) - - - - \eta\eta - - \eta - - - - \exists\exists - - \exists - - - - \flat\flat - - \flat - - - - \forall\forall - - \forall - - - - \frown\frown - - \frown (relation) - - - - \Gamma\Gamma - - \Gamma - - - - \gamma\gamma - - \gamma - - - - \ge\ge - - \ge - - - - \geq\geq - - \geq (relation) - - - - \gets\gets - - \gets - - - - \gg\gg - - \gg (relation) - - - - \hbar\hbar - - \hbar - - - - \heartsuit\heartsuit - - \heartsuit - - - - \hookleftarrow\hookleftarrow - - \hookleftarrow - - - - \hookrightarrow\hookrightarrow - - \hookrightarrow - - - - \iff\iff - - \iff - - - - \Im\Im - - \Im - - - - \in\in - - \in (relation) - - - - \infty\infty - - \infty - - - - \int\int - - \int - - - - \iota\iota - - \iota - - - - \Join\Join - - condensed bowtie symbol (relation) - - - - - \kappa\kappa - - \kappa - - - - \Lambda\Lambda - - \Lambda - - - - \lambda\lambda - - \lambda - - - - \land\land - - \land - - - - \langle\langle - - \langle (delimiter) - - - - \lbrace\lbrace - - \lbrace (delimiter) - - - - \lbrack\lbrack - - \lbrack (delimiter) - - - - \lceil\lceil - - \lceil (delimiter) - - - - \le\le - - \le - - - - \leadsto\leadsto + + + +Subscripts & superscripts +Subscripts & superscripts + Also known as exponent or index. + + +Math symbols +Math symbols + Various mathematical squiggles. + + +Math functions +Math functions + Math function names like sin and exp. + + +Math accents +Math accents + Accents in math. + + +Spacing in math mode +Spacing in math mode + Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces. + + +Math miscellany +Math miscellany + Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else. + + + + + +Subscripts & superscripts +Math symbols +Math formulas + +
+Subscripts & superscripts +superscriptsubscriptexponent_^ +To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type +_{exp}. To get exp to appear as a +superscript, you type ^{exp}. &latex; handles +superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way. +It even does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a +superscript. + + +
+ +Math symbols +Math functions +Subscripts & superscripts +Math formulas + +
+Math symbols +math symbolssymbols, mathgreek letters +&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to +need. The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. +For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, you will get +the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. + +
\|\| +\| + +\aleph\aleph +\aleph + +\alpha\alpha +\alpha + +\amalg\amalg +\amalg (binary operation) + +\angle\angle +\angle + +\approx\approx +\approx (relation) + +\ast\ast +\ast (binary operation) + +\asymp\asymp +\asymp (relation) + +\backslash\backslash +\ (delimiter) + +\beta\beta +\beta + +\bigcap\bigcap +\bigcap + +\bigcirc\bigcirc +\bigcirc (binary operation) + +\bigcup\bigcup +\bigcup + +\bigodot\bigodot +\bigodot + +\bigoplus\bigoplus +\bigoplus + +\bigotimes\bigotimes +\bigotimes + +\bigtriangledown\bigtriangledown +\bigtriangledown (binary operation) + +\bigtriangleup\bigtriangleup +\bigtriangleup (binary operation) + +\bigsqcup\bigsqcup +\bigsqcup + +\biguplus\biguplus +\biguplus + +\bigcap\bigcap +\bigvee + +\bigwedge\bigwedge +\bigwedge + +\bot\bot +\bot + +\bowtie\bowtie +\bowtie (relation) + +\Box\Box +(square open box symbol) + +\bullet\bullet +bullet symbol\bullet (binary operation) + +\cap\cap +\cap (binary operation) + +\cdot\cdot +\cdot (binary operation) + +\chi\chi +\chi + +\circ\circ +\circ (binary operation) + +\clubsuit\clubsuit +\clubsuit + +\cong\cong +\cong (relation) + +\coprod\coprod +\coprod + +\cup\cup +\cup (binary operation) + +\dagger\dagger +\dagger (binary operation) + +\dashv\dashv +\dashv (relation) + +\ddagger\ddagger +\dagger (binary operation) + +\Delta\Delta +\Delta + +\delta\delta +\delta + +\Diamond\Diamond +bigger \diamond + +\diamond\diamond +\diamond (binary operation) + +\diamondsuit\diamondsuit +\diamondsuit + +\div\div +\div (binary operation) + +\doteq\doteq +\doteq (relation) + +\downarrow\downarrow +\downarrow (delimiter) + +\Downarrow\Downarrow +\Downarrow (delimiter) + +\ell\ell +\ell + +\emptyset\emptyset +\emptyset + +\epsilon\epsilon +\epsilon + +\equiv\equiv +\equiv (relation) + +\eta\eta +\eta + +\exists\exists +\exists + +\flat\flat +\flat + +\forall\forall +\forall + +\frown\frown +\frown (relation) + +\Gamma\Gamma +\Gamma + +\gamma\gamma +\gamma + +\ge\ge +\ge + +\geq\geq +\geq (relation) + +\gets\gets +\gets + +\gg\gg +\gg (relation) + +\hbar\hbar +\hbar + +\heartsuit\heartsuit +\heartsuit + +\hookleftarrow\hookleftarrow +\hookleftarrow + +\hookrightarrow\hookrightarrow +\hookrightarrow + +\iff\iff +\iff + +\Im\Im +\Im + +\in\in +\in (relation) + +\infty\infty +\infty + +\int\int +\int + +\iota\iota +\iota + +\Join\Join +condensed bowtie symbol (relation) + +\kappa\kappa +\kappa + +\Lambda\Lambda +\Lambda + +\lambda\lambda +\lambda + +\land\land +\land + +\langle\langle +\langle (delimiter) + +\lbrace\lbrace +\lbrace (delimiter) + +\lbrack\lbrack +\lbrack (delimiter) + +\lceil\lceil +\lceil (delimiter) + +\le\le +\le + +\leadsto\leadsto - - - - - \Leftarrow\Leftarrow - - \Leftarrow - - - - \leftarrow\leftarrow - - \leftarrow - - - - \leftharpoondown\leftharpoondown - - \leftharpoondown - - - - \leftharpoonup\leftharpoonup - - \leftharpoonup - - - - \Leftrightarrow\Leftrightarrow - - \Leftrightarrow - - - - \leftrightarrow\leftrightarrow - - \leftrightarrow - - - - \leq\leq - - \leq (relation) - - - - \lfloor\lfloor - - \lfloor (delimiter) - - - - \lhd\lhd - - (left-pointing arrow head) - - - - - \ll\ll - - \ll (relation) - - - - \lnot\lnot - - \lnot - - - - \longleftarrow\longleftarrow - - \longleftarrow - - - - \longleftrightarrow\longleftrightarrow - - \longleftrightarrow - - - - \longmapsto\longmapsto - - \longmapsto - - - - \longrightarrow\longrightarrow - - \longrightarrow - - - - \lor\lor - - \lor - - - - \mapsto\mapsto - - \mapsto - - - - \mho\mho + +\Leftarrow\Leftarrow +\Leftarrow + +\leftarrow\leftarrow +\leftarrow + +\leftharpoondown\leftharpoondown +\leftharpoondown + +\leftharpoonup\leftharpoonup +\leftharpoonup + +\Leftrightarrow\Leftrightarrow +\Leftrightarrow + +\leftrightarrow\leftrightarrow +\leftrightarrow + +\leq\leq +\leq (relation) + +\lfloor\lfloor +\lfloor (delimiter) + +\lhd\lhd +(left-pointing arrow head) + +\ll\ll +\ll (relation) + +\lnot\lnot +\lnot + +\longleftarrow\longleftarrow +\longleftarrow + +\longleftrightarrow\longleftrightarrow +\longleftrightarrow + +\longmapsto\longmapsto +\longmapsto + +\longrightarrow\longrightarrow +\longrightarrow + +\lor\lor +\lor + +\mapsto\mapsto +\mapsto + +\mho\mho - - - - - \mid\mid - - \mid (relation) - - - - \models\models - - \models (relation) - - - - \mp\mp - - \mp (binary operation) - - - - \mu\mu - - \mu - - - - \nabla\nabla - - \nabla - - - - \natural\natural - - \natural - - - - \ne\ne - - \ne - - - - \nearrow\nearrow - - \nearrow - - - - \neg\neg - - \neg - - - - \neq\neq - - \neq (relation) - - - - \ni\ni - - \ni (relation) - - - - \not\not - - Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. - - - - \notin\notin - - \ni - - - - \nu\nu - - \nu - - - - \nwarrow\nwarrow - - \nwarrow - - - - \odot\odot - - \odot (binary operation) - - - - \oint\oint - - \oint - - - - \Omega\Omega - - \Omega - - - - \omega\omega - - \omega - - - - \ominus\ominus - - \ominus (binary operation) - - - - \oplus\oplus - - \oplus (binary operation) - - - - \oslash\oslash - - \oslash (binary operation) - - - - \otimes\otimes - - \otimes (binary operation) - - - - \owns\owns - - \owns - - - - \parallel\parallel - - \parallel (relation) - - - - \partial\partial - - \partial - - - - \perp\perp - - \perp (relation) - - - - \phi\phi - - \phi - - - - \Pi\Pi - - \Pi - - - - \pi\pi - - \pi - - - - \pm\pm - - \pm (binary operation) - - - - \prec\prec - - \prec (relation) - - - - \preceq\preceq - - \preceq (relation) - - - - \prime\prime - - \prime - - - - \prod\prod - - \prod - - - - \propto\propto - - \propto (relation) - - - - \Psi\Psi - - \Psi - - - - \psi\psi - - \psi - - - - \rangle\rangle - - \rangle (delimiter) - - - - \rbrace\rbrace - - \rbrace (delimiter) - - - - \rbrack\rbrack - - \rbrack (delimiter) - - - - \rceil\rceil - - \rceil (delimiter) - - - - \Re\Re - - \Re - - - - \rfloor\rfloor - - \rfloor - - - - \rhd\rhd - - (binary operation) - - - - - \rho\rho - - \rho - - - - \Rightarrow\Rightarrow - - \Rightarrow - - - - \rightarrow\rightarrow - - \rightarrow - - - - \rightharpoondown\rightharpoondown - - \rightharpoondown - - - - \rightharpoonup\rightharpoonup - - \rightharpoonup - - - - \rightleftharpoons\rightleftharpoons - - \rightleftharpoons - - - - \searrow\searrow - - \searrow - - - - \setminus\setminus - - \setminus (binary operation) - - - - \sharp\sharp - - \sharp - - - - \Sigma\Sigma - - \Sigma - - - - \sigma\sigma - - \sigma - - - - \sim\sim - - \sim (relation) - - - - \simeq\simeq - - \simeq (relation) - - - - \smallint\smallint - - \smallint - - - - \smile\smile - - \smile (relation) - - - - \spadesuit\spadesuit - - \spadesuit - - - - \sqcap\sqcap - - \sqcap (binary operation) - - - - \sqcup\sqcup - - \sqcup (binary operation) - - - - \sqsubset\sqsubset - - (relation) - - - - - \sqsubseteq\sqsubseteq - - \sqsubseteq (relation) - - - - \sqsupset\sqsupset - - (relation) - - - - - \sqsupseteq\sqsupseteq - - \sqsupseteq (relation) - - - - \star\star - - \star (binary operation) - - - - \subset\subset - - \subset (relation) - - - - \subseteq\subseteq - - \subseteq (relation) - - - - \succ\succ - - \succ (relation) - - - - \succeq\succeq - - \succeq (relation) - - - - \sum\sum - - \sum - - - - \supset\supset - - \supset (relation) - - - - \supseteq\supseteq - - \supseteq (relation) - - - - \surd\surd - - \surd - - - - \swarrow\swarrow - - \swarrow - - - - \tau\tau - - \tau - - - - \theta\theta - - \theta - - - - \times\times - - \times (binary operation) - - - - \to\to - - \to - - - - \top\top - - \top - - - - \triangle\triangle - - \triangle - - - - \triangleleft\triangleleft - - \triangleleft (binary operation) - - - - \triangleright\triangleright - - \triangleright (binary operation) - - - - \unlhd\unlhd - - left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) - - - - - \unrhd\unrhd - - right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) - - - - - \Uparrow\Uparrow - - \Uparrow (delimiter) - - - - \uparrow\uparrow - - \uparrow (delimiter) - - - - \Updownarrow\Updownarrow - - \Updownarrow (delimiter) - - - - \updownarrow\updownarrow - - \updownarrow (delimiter) - - - - \uplus\uplus - - \uplus (binary operation) - - - - \Upsilon\Upsilon - - \Upsilon - - - - \upsilon\upsilon - - \upsilon - - - - \varepsilon\varepsilon - - \varepsilon - - - - \varphi\varphi - - \varphi - - - - \varpi\varpi - - \varpi - - - - \varrho\varrho - - \varrho - - - - \varsigma\varsigma - - \varsigma - - - - \vartheta\vartheta - - \vartheta - - - - \vdash\vdash - - \vdash (relation) - - - - \vee\vee - - \vee (binary operation) - - - - \Vert\Vert - - \Vert (delimiter) - - - - \vert\vert - - \vert (delimiter) - - - - \wedge\wedge - - \wedge (binary operation) - - - - \wp\wp - - \wp - - - - \wr\wr - - \wr (binary operation) - - - - \Xi\Xi - - \Xi - - - - \xi\xi - - \xi - - - - \zeta\zeta - - \zeta - - -
-
-
- - Math functions - Math accents - Math symbols - Math formulas -
- Math functions - math functionsfunctions, math These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper spacing. - - - \arccos\arccos - - \arccos - - - - \arcsin\arcsin - - \arcsin - - - - \arctan\arctan - - \arctan - - - - \arg\arg - - \arg - - - - \bmod\bmod - - Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) - - - - \cos\cos - - \cos - - - - \cosh\cosh - - \cosh - - - - \cot\cot - - \cos - - - - \coth\coth - - \cosh - - - - \csc\csc - - \csc - - - - \deg\deg - - \deg - - - - \det\det - - \deg - - - - \dim\dim - - \dim - - - - \exp\exp - - \exp - - - - \gcd\gcd - - \gcd - - - - \hom\hom - - \hom - - - - \inf\inf - - \inf - - - - \ker\ker - - \ker - - - - \lg\lg - - \lg - - - - \lim\lim - - \lim - - - - \liminf\liminf - - \liminf - - - - \limsup\limsup - - \limsup - - - - \ln\ln - - \ln - - - - \log\log - - \log - - - - \max\max - - \max - - - - \min\min - - \min - - - - \pmod\pmod - - parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) - - - - \Pr\Pr - - \Pr - - - - \sec\sec - - \sec - - - - \sin\sin - - \sin - - - - \sinh\sinh - - \sinh - - - - \sup\sup - - \sup - - - - \tan\tan - - \tan - - - - \tanh\tanh - - \tanh - - -
-
-
- - Math accents - Spacing in math mode - Math functions - Math formulas -
- Math accents - math accentsaccents, mathematical &latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in math. These are different from accents in normal text (see Accents). - - - \acute\acuteacute accent, math - - Math acute accent: \acutex. - - - - \bar\barbar-over accent, mathmacron accent, math - - Math bar-over accent: \barx. - - - - \breve\brevebreve accent, math - - Math breve accent: \brevex. - - - - \check\checkcheck accent, mathhác<ek accent, math - - Math hác<ek (check) accent: \checkx. - - - - \ddot\ddotdouble dot accent, math - - Math dieresis accent: \ddotx. - - - - \dot\dotoverdot accent, mathdot over accent, math - - Math dot accent: \dotx. - - - - \grave\gravegrave accent, math - - Math grave accent: \gravex. - - - - \hat\hathat accent, mathcircumflex accent, math - - Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hatx. - - - - \imath\imathdotless i, math - - Math dotless i. - - - - \jmath\jmathdotless j, math - - Math dotless j. - - - - \tilde\tildetilde accent, math - - Math tilde accent: \tildex. - - - - \vec\vecvector symbol, math - - Math vector symbol: \vecx. - - - - \widehat\widehatwide hat accent, math - - Math wide hat accent: \widehatx+y. - - - - \widehat\widehatwide tile accent, math - - Math wide tilde accent: \widetildex+y. - - -
-
-
- - Spacing in math mode - Math miscellany - Math accents - Math formulas -
- Spacing in math mode - spacing within math modemath mode, spacing In a math environment, &latex; ignores the spaces you type and puts in the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, &latex; provides the following commands for use in math mode: - - - \;\; - - A thick space (5\over18\,quad). - - - - \: - \>\:\> - - Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). - - - - \,\, - - A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. - - - - \! - - A negative thin space (-1\over6\,quad). - - -
-
-
- - Math miscellany - Spacing in math mode - Math formulas -
- Math miscellany - math miscellany - - - \*\*discretionary multiplicationmultiplication symbol, discretionary line break - - A “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is allowed. - - - - \cdots\cdots - - A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. - - - - \ddots\ddots - - A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. - - - - \frac{num}{den}\frac{num}{den}\frac - - Produces the fraction num divided by den. - - - - \left delim1 ... \right delim2\left delim1 ... \right delim2\rightnull delimiter - - The two delimiters need not match; . acts as a null delimiter, producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math in between. Example: \left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]. - - - - \overbrace{text}\overbrace{text} - - Generates a brace over text. For example, \overbracex+\cdots+x^k \rm\;times. - - - - \overline{text}\overline{text} - - Generates a horizontal line over tex. For exampe, \overlinex+y. - - - - \sqrt[root]{arg}\sqrt[root]{arg} - - Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The optional argument root determines what root to produce. For example, the cube root of x+y would be typed as $\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. - - - - \stackrel{text}{relation}\stackrel{text}{relation} - - Puts text above relation. For example, \stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}. - - - - \underbrace{math}\underbrace{math} - - Generates math with a brace underneath. - - - - \underline{text}\underline{text} - - Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of descenders. - - - - \vdots\vdots\vdots - - Produces a vertical ellipsis. - - -
-
-
- - Modes - Page styles - Math formulas - Top - - Modes - modesparagraph modemath modeleft-to-right modelR mode - When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three modes: - - - - Paragraph mode - - - Math mode - - - Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short - - - &latex; changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when &latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. - “Paragraph mode” is the most common; it's the one &latex; is in when processing ordinary text. In that mode, &latex; breaks your text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. &latex; is in “math mode” when it's generating a mathematical formula. In “LR mode”, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words into an \mbox, &latex; would keep typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line. - &latex; is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. There are also several text-producing commands and environments for making a box that put &latex; in paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or environments will be called a parbox. When &latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in “inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. - - - - Page styles - Spaces - Modes - Top - - Page styles - styles, pagepage styles The \documentclass command determines the size and position of the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. - - - \maketitle - \maketitle - Generate a title page. - - - \pagenumbering - \pagenumbering - Set the style used for page numbers. - - - \pagestyle - \pagestyle - Change the headings/footings style. - - - \thispagestyle - \thispagestyle - Change the headings/footings style for this page. - - - - - - \maketitle - \pagenumbering - Page styles -
- <code>\maketitle</code> - titles, making\maketitle The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title page—except in the article class, where the title is placed at the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is obtained from the following declarations: - - - \author{name \and name2}\author{name \and name2}author, for titlepage\\ for \author\and for \author - - The \author command declares the document author(s), where the argument is a list of authors separated by \and commands. Use \\ to separate lines within a single author's entry—for example, to give the author's institution or address. - - - - \date{text}\date{text}date, for titlepage - - The \date command declares text to be the document's date. With no \date command, the current date (see \today) is used. - - - - \thanks{text}\thanks{text}thanks, for titlepagecredit footnote - - The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, usually used for credit acknowledgements. - - - - \title{text}\title{text}title, for titlepage\\ for \title - - The \title command declares text to be the title of the document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. - - -
-
-
- - \pagenumbering - \pagestyle - \maketitle - Page styles -
- <code>\pagenumbering</code> - \pagenumberingpage numbering style Synopsis: - \pagenumbering{style} - Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style: - - - arabic - - arabic numerals - - - - roman - - lowercase Roman numerals - - - - Roman - - uppercase Roman numerals - - - - alph - - lowercase letters - - - - Alph - - uppercase letters - - -
-
-
- - \pagestyle - \thispagestyle - \pagenumbering - Page styles -
- <code>\pagestyle</code> - \pagestyleheader stylefooter stylerunning header and footer style Synopsis: - \pagestyle{style} - The \pagestyle command specifies how the headers and footers are typeset from the current page onwards. Values for style: - - - plain - - Just a plain page number. - - - - empty - - Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. - - - - headings - - Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what goes in the headers. - - - - myheadings - - Custom headers, specified via the \markboth or the \markright commands. - - -
- Here are the descriptions of \markboth and \markright: - - - \markboth{left}{right}\markboth{left}{right} - - Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” (left) is generated by the last \markboth command before the end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” (right is generated by the first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page. - - - - \markright{right}\markright{right} - - Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. - - -
-
-
- - \thispagestyle - \pagestyle - Page styles -
- <code>\thispagestyle{<var>style</var>}</code> - \thispagestyle The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the \pagestyle command (see previous section) except that it changes to style for the current page only. -
-
- - Spaces - Boxes - Page styles - Top - - Spaces - spaces &latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. - Another space-producing command is \, to produce a “thin” space (usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is more often useful in math mode (see Spacing in math mode). - - Horizontal space - - \hspace - \hspace - Fixed horizontal space. - - - \hfill - \hfill - Stretchable horizontal space. - - - \SPACE - \SPACE - Normal interword space. - - - \AT - \AT - Ending a sentence. - - - \thinspace - \thinspace - One-sixth of an em. - - - \/ - \/ - Per-character italic correction. - - - \hrulefill - \hrulefill - Stretchable horizontal rule. - - - \dotfill - \dotfill - Stretchable horizontal dots. - - Vertical space - - \addvspace - \addvspace - Add arbitrary vertical space if needed. - - - \bigskip \medskip \smallskip - \bigskip \medskip \smallskip - Fixed vertical spaces. - - - \vfill - \vfill - Infinitely stretchable vertical space. - - - \vspace - \vspace - Add arbitrary vertical space. - - - - - - \hspace - \hfill - Spaces -
- <code>\hspace</code> - \hspace Synopsis: - \hspace[*]{length} - The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length argument can be expressed in any terms that &latex; understands: points, inches, etc. It is a rubber length. You can add both negative and positive space with an \hspace command; adding negative space is like backspacing. - &latex; normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional * form. -
-
- - \hfill - \SPACE - \hspace - Spaces -
- <code>\hfill</code> - \hfillThe \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. - \fillThe \fill parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the glue value 0pt plus1fill); thus, \hspace\fill is equivalent to \hfill. -
-
- - \SPACE - \AT - \hfill - Spaces -
- <code>\SPACE</code> - \SPACE\TAB\NEWLINE The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. It is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a nice system. - In normal circumstances, \tab and \newline are equivalent to \ . -
-
- - \AT - \thinspace - \SPACE - Spaces -
- <code>\@</code> - \@ The \@ command makes the following punctuation character end a sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without \@: - &dots; in C\@. Pascal, though &dots; -&dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots; - produces + +\mid\mid +\mid (relation) + +\models\models +\models (relation) + +\mp\mp +\mp (binary operation) + +\mu\mu +\mu + +\nabla\nabla +\nabla + +\natural\natural +\natural + +\ne\ne +\ne + +\nearrow\nearrow +\nearrow + +\neg\neg +\neg + +\neq\neq +\neq (relation) + +\ni\ni +\ni (relation) + +\not\not +Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. + +\notin\notin +\ni + +\nu\nu +\nu + +\nwarrow\nwarrow +\nwarrow + +\odot\odot +\odot (binary operation) + +\oint\oint +\oint + +\Omega\Omega +\Omega + +\omega\omega +\omega + +\ominus\ominus +\ominus (binary operation) + +\oplus\oplus +\oplus (binary operation) + +\oslash\oslash +\oslash (binary operation) + +\otimes\otimes +\otimes (binary operation) + +\owns\owns +\owns + +\parallel\parallel +\parallel (relation) + +\partial\partial +\partial + +\perp\perp +\perp (relation) + +\phi\phi +\phi + +\Pi\Pi +\Pi + +\pi\pi +\pi + +\pm\pm +\pm (binary operation) + +\prec\prec +\prec (relation) + +\preceq\preceq +\preceq (relation) + +\prime\prime +\prime + +\prod\prod +\prod + +\propto\propto +\propto (relation) + +\Psi\Psi +\Psi + +\psi\psi +\psi + +\rangle\rangle +\rangle (delimiter) + +\rbrace\rbrace +\rbrace (delimiter) + +\rbrack\rbrack +\rbrack (delimiter) + +\rceil\rceil +\rceil (delimiter) + +\Re\Re +\Re + +\rfloor\rfloor +\rfloor + +\rhd\rhd +(binary operation) + +\rho\rho +\rho + +\Rightarrow\Rightarrow +\Rightarrow + +\rightarrow\rightarrow +\rightarrow + +\rightharpoondown\rightharpoondown +\rightharpoondown + +\rightharpoonup\rightharpoonup +\rightharpoonup + +\rightleftharpoons\rightleftharpoons +\rightleftharpoons + +\searrow\searrow +\searrow + +\setminus\setminus +\setminus (binary operation) + +\sharp\sharp +\sharp + +\Sigma\Sigma +\Sigma + +\sigma\sigma +\sigma + +\sim\sim +\sim (relation) + +\simeq\simeq +\simeq (relation) + +\smallint\smallint +\smallint + +\smile\smile +\smile (relation) + +\spadesuit\spadesuit +\spadesuit + +\sqcap\sqcap +\sqcap (binary operation) + +\sqcup\sqcup +\sqcup (binary operation) + +\sqsubset\sqsubset +(relation) + +\sqsubseteq\sqsubseteq +\sqsubseteq (relation) + +\sqsupset\sqsupset +(relation) + +\sqsupseteq\sqsupseteq +\sqsupseteq (relation) + +\star\star +\star (binary operation) + +\subset\subset +\subset (relation) + +\subseteq\subseteq +\subseteq (relation) + +\succ\succ +\succ (relation) + +\succeq\succeq +\succeq (relation) + +\sum\sum +\sum + +\supset\supset +\supset (relation) + +\supseteq\supseteq +\supseteq (relation) + +\surd\surd +\surd + +\swarrow\swarrow +\swarrow + +\tau\tau +\tau + +\theta\theta +\theta + +\times\times +\times (binary operation) + +\to\to +\to + +\top\top +\top + +\triangle\triangle +\triangle + +\triangleleft\triangleleft +\triangleleft (binary operation) + +\triangleright\triangleright +\triangleright (binary operation) + +\unlhd\unlhd +left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) + +\unrhd\unrhd +right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) + +\Uparrow\Uparrow +\Uparrow (delimiter) + +\uparrow\uparrow +\uparrow (delimiter) + +\Updownarrow\Updownarrow +\Updownarrow (delimiter) + +\updownarrow\updownarrow +\updownarrow (delimiter) + +\uplus\uplus +\uplus (binary operation) + +\Upsilon\Upsilon +\Upsilon + +\upsilon\upsilon +\upsilon + +\varepsilon\varepsilon +\varepsilon + +\varphi\varphi +\varphi + +\varpi\varpi +\varpi + +\varrho\varrho +\varrho + +\varsigma\varsigma +\varsigma + +\vartheta\vartheta +\vartheta + +\vdash\vdash +\vdash (relation) + +\vee\vee +\vee (binary operation) + +\Vert\Vert +\Vert (delimiter) + +\vert\vert +\vert (delimiter) + +\wedge\wedge +\wedge (binary operation) + +\wp\wp +\wp + +\wr\wr +\wr (binary operation) + +\Xi\Xi +\Xi + +\xi\xi +\xi + +\zeta\zeta +\zeta + + + + +
+ +Math functions +Math accents +Math symbols +Math formulas + +
+Math functions +math functionsfunctions, math +These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper +spacing. + +\arccos\arccos +\arccos + +\arcsin\arcsin +\arcsin + +\arctan\arctan +\arctan + +\arg\arg +\arg + +\bmod\bmod +Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) + +\cos\cos +\cos + +\cosh\cosh +\cosh + +\cot\cot +\cos + +\coth\coth +\cosh + +\csc\csc +\csc + +\deg\deg +\deg + +\det\det +\deg + +\dim\dim +\dim + +\exp\exp +\exp + +\gcd\gcd +\gcd + +\hom\hom +\hom + +\inf\inf +\inf + +\ker\ker +\ker + +\lg\lg +\lg + +\lim\lim +\lim + +\liminf\liminf +\liminf + +\limsup\limsup +\limsup + +\ln\ln +\ln + +\log\log +\log + +\max\max +\max + +\min\min +\min + +\pmod\pmod +parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) + +\Pr\Pr +\Pr + +\sec\sec +\sec + +\sin\sin +\sin + +\sinh\sinh +\sinh + +\sup\sup +\sup + +\tan\tan +\tan + +\tanh\tanh +\tanh + +
+ + +
+ +Math accents +Spacing in math mode +Math functions +Math formulas + +
+Math accents +math accentsaccents, mathematical +&latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters +in math. These are different from accents in normal text +(see Accents). + +\acute\acute +acute accent, mathMath acute accent: \acute{x}. + +\bar\bar +bar-over accent, mathmacron accent, mathMath bar-over accent: \bar{x}. + +\breve\breve +breve accent, mathMath breve accent: \breve{x}. + +\check\check +check accent, mathhác<ek accent, mathMath hác<ek (check) accent: \check{x}. + +\ddot\ddot +double dot accent, mathMath dieresis accent: \ddot{x}. + +\dot\dot +overdot accent, mathdot over accent, mathMath dot accent: \dot{x}. + +\grave\grave +grave accent, mathMath grave accent: \grave{x}. + +\hat\hat +hat accent, mathcircumflex accent, mathMath hat (circumflex) accent: \hat{x}. + +\imath\imath +dotless i, mathMath dotless i. + +\jmath\jmath +dotless j, mathMath dotless j. + +\tilde\tilde +tilde accent, mathMath tilde accent: \tilde{x}. + +\vec\vec +vector symbol, mathMath vector symbol: \vec{x}. + +\widehat\widehat +wide hat accent, mathMath wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}. + +\widehat\widehat +wide tile accent, mathMath wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}. + +
+ + +
+ +Spacing in math mode +Math miscellany +Math accents +Math formulas + +
+Spacing in math mode +spacing within math modemath mode, spacing +In a math environment, &latex; ignores the spaces you type and +puts in the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics +texts. If you want different spacing, &latex; provides the following +commands for use in math mode: + +\; +\;A thick space (5\over18\,quad). +\: +\> +\:\>Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). +\, +\,A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. +\! +A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad). +
+ + +
+ +Math miscellany +Spacing in math mode +Math formulas + +
+Math miscellany +math miscellany +\*\* +discretionary multiplicationmultiplication symbol, discretionary line breakA “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is +allowed. + +\cdots\cdots +A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. + +\ddots\ddots +A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. + +\frac{num}{den}\frac{num}{den} +\fracProduces the fraction num divided by den. + + +\left delim1 ... \right delim2\left delim1 ... \right delim2 +\rightnull delimiterThe two delimiters need not match; . acts as a null delimiter, +producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math +in between. Example: \left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]. + +\overbrace{text}\overbrace{text} +Generates a brace over text. +For example, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}. + +\overline{text}\overline{text} +Generates a horizontal line over tex. +For exampe, \overline{x+y}. + +\sqrt[root]{arg}\sqrt[root]{arg} +Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The +optional argument root determines what root to produce. For +example, the cube root of x+y would be typed as +$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. + +\stackrel{text}{relation}\stackrel{text}{relation} +Puts text above relation. For example, +\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}. + +\underbrace{math}\underbrace{math} +Generates math with a brace underneath. + +\underline{text}\underline{text} +Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be +underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of +descenders. + +\vdots\vdots +\vdotsProduces a vertical ellipsis. + +
+ + +
+ + +Modes +Page styles +Math formulas +Top + + +Modes +modesparagraph modemath modeleft-to-right modelR mode + +When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three +modes: + + +Paragraph mode + + +Math mode + + +Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short + + + +&latex; changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a +different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. +Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when +&latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. + +“Paragraph mode” is the most common; it's the one &latex; is in +when processing ordinary text. In that mode, &latex; breaks your +text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. &latex; is in +“math mode” when it's generating a mathematical formula. In “LR +mode”, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output that it +produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However, +unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to right; it +never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words +into an \mbox, &latex; would keep typesetting them from left +to right inside a single box, and then complain because the resulting +box was too wide to fit on the line. + +&latex; is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox +command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for +example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. +There are also several text-producing commands and environments for +making a box that put &latex; in paragraph mode. The box make by one of +these commands or environments will be called a parbox. When +&latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in +“inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out +in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. + + + + +Page styles +Spaces +Modes +Top + + +Page styles +styles, pagepage styles +The \documentclass command determines the size and position of +the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. + + + +\maketitle +\maketitle + Generate a title page. + + +\pagenumbering +\pagenumbering + Set the style used for page numbers. + + +\pagestyle +\pagestyle + Change the headings/footings style. + + +\thispagestyle +\thispagestyle + Change the headings/footings style for this page. + + + + + +\maketitle +\pagenumbering +Page styles + +
+<code>\maketitle</code> +titles, making\maketitle +The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title +page—except in the article class, where the title is placed +at the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title +is obtained from the following declarations: + +\author{name \and name2}\author{name \and name2} +author, for titlepage\\ for \author\and for \authorThe \author command declares the document author(s), where the +argument is a list of authors separated by \and commands. Use +\\ to separate lines within a single author's entry—for +example, to give the author's institution or address. + +\date{text}\date{text} +date, for titlepageThe \date command declares text to be the document's +date. With no \date command, the current date (see \today) +is used. + +\thanks{text}\thanks{text} +thanks, for titlepagecredit footnoteThe \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, +usually used for credit acknowledgements. + +\title{text}\title{text} +title, for titlepage\\ for \titleThe \title command declares text to be the title of the +document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. + +
+ + +
+ +\pagenumbering +\pagestyle +\maketitle +Page styles + +
+<code>\pagenumbering</code> +\pagenumberingpage numbering style +Synopsis: + +\pagenumbering{style} + +Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style: + +arabic +arabic numerals +roman +lowercase Roman numerals +Roman +uppercase Roman numerals +alph +lowercase letters +Alph +uppercase letters +
+ + +
+ +\pagestyle +\thispagestyle +\pagenumbering +Page styles + +
+<code>\pagestyle</code> +\pagestyleheader stylefooter stylerunning header and footer style +Synopsis: + +\pagestyle{style} + +The \pagestyle command specifies how the headers and footers +are typeset from the current page onwards. Values for style: + +plain +Just a plain page number. + +empty +Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. + +headings +Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what +goes in the headers. + +myheadings +Custom headers, specified via the \markboth or the +\markright commands. + +
+ +Here are the descriptions of \markboth and \markright: + +\markboth{left}{right}\markboth{left}{right} +Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” +(left) is generated by the last \markboth command before +the end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” (right is +generated by the first \markboth or \markright that +comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before +the page. + +\markright{right}\markright{right} +Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. + +
+ + +
+ +\thispagestyle +\pagestyle +Page styles + +
+<code>\thispagestyle{<var>style</var>}</code> +\thispagestyle +The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the +\pagestyle command (see previous section) except that it +changes to style for the current page only. + + +
+
+ +Spaces +Boxes +Page styles +Top + + +Spaces +spaces +&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. + +Another space-producing command is \, to produce a “thin” +space (usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is +more often useful in math mode (see Spacing in math mode). + + +Horizontal space + +\hspace +\hspace + Fixed horizontal space. + + +\hfill +\hfill + Stretchable horizontal space. + + +\SPACE +\SPACE + Normal interword space. + + +\AT +\AT + Ending a sentence. + + +\thinspace +\thinspace + One-sixth of an em. + + +\/ +\/ + Per-character italic correction. + + +\hrulefill +\hrulefill + Stretchable horizontal rule. + + +\dotfill +\dotfill + Stretchable horizontal dots. + + +Vertical space + +\addvspace +\addvspace + Add arbitrary vertical space if needed. + + +\bigskip \medskip \smallskip +\bigskip \medskip \smallskip + Fixed vertical spaces. + + +\vfill +\vfill + Infinitely stretchable vertical space. + + +\vspace +\vspace + Add arbitrary vertical space. + + + + + +\hspace +\hfill +Spaces + +
+<code>\hspace</code> +\hspace +Synopsis: + +\hspace[*]{length} + +The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length +argument can be expressed in any terms that &latex; understands: +points, inches, etc. It is a rubber length. You can add both +negative and positive space with an \hspace command; adding +negative space is like backspacing. + +&latex; normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning +or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional * +form. + + +
+ +\hfill +\SPACE +\hspace +Spaces + +
+<code>\hfill</code> + +\hfillThe \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has +no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as +needed. + +\fillThe \fill parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, +the glue value 0pt plus1fill); thus, \hspace\fill is +equivalent to \hfill. + + +
+ +\SPACE +\AT +\hfill +Spaces + +
+<code>\SPACE</code> +\SPACE\TAB\NEWLINE +The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's +useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example +Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. +It is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a +nice system. + +In normal circumstances, \tab and \newline +are equivalent to \ . + + +
+ +\AT +\thinspace +\SPACE +Spaces + +
+<code>\@</code> +\@ +The \@ command makes the following punctuation character end a +sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after +a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without +\@: + +&dots; in C\@. Pascal, though &dots; +&dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots; + +produces + - - &dots; in C&eosperiod; Pascal, though &dots; &dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots; - -
-
- - \thinspace - \/ - \AT - Spaces -
- <code>\thinspace</code> - \thinspace \thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as in '. -
-
- - \/ - \hrulefill - \thinspace - Spaces -
- <code>\/</code> - \/ The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a small space defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows. The italic f character typically has a large italic correction value. - If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary to insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the &tex; output, the `f's are nicely separated) with f: f;. - Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic correction. Compare pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the `f') with pdf&tex;. -
-
- - \hrulefill - \dotfill - \/ - Spaces -
- <code>\hrulefill</code> - \hrulefill The \hrulefill fill command produces a “rubber length” which can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal rule. -
-
- - \dotfill - \addvspace - \hrulefill - Spaces -
- <code>\dotfill</code> - \dotfill The \dotfill command produces a “rubber length” that fills with dots instead of just white space. + +&dots; in C&eosperiod; Pascal, though &dots; +&dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots; + + + +
+ +\thinspace +\/ +\AT +Spaces + +
+<code>\thinspace</code> +\thinspace +\thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that +is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as +in '. + + +
+ +\/ +\hrulefill +\thinspace +Spaces + +
+<code>\/</code> +\/ +The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a +small space defined by the font designer for a given character, +to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows. The italic +f character typically has a large italic correction value. + +If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary to +insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a +very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as +normal letters, it can help. Compare +f: f; (in the &tex; output, the `f's are nicely separated) +with f: f;. + +Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic +correction. Compare +pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the `f') +with pdf&tex;. + + +
+ +\hrulefill +\dotfill +\/ +Spaces + +
+<code>\hrulefill</code> +\hrulefill +The \hrulefill fill command produces a “rubber length” which can +stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal +rule. + + +
+ +\dotfill +\addvspace +\hrulefill +Spaces + +
+<code>\dotfill</code> + +\dotfill +The \dotfill command produces a “rubber length” that fills +with dots instead of just white space. + + -
-
- - \addvspace - \bigskip \medskip \smallskip - \dotfill - Spaces -
- <code>\addvspace</code> - \addvspacevertical spacespace, inserting vertical \addvspace{length} - The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of height length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same point in the output by a previous \addvspace command, then this command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length of the total vertical space equal to length. -
-
- - \bigskip \medskip \smallskip - \vfill - \addvspace - Spaces -
- <code>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</code> - These commands produce a given amount of space. - - - \bigskip\bigskip\bigskipamount - - The same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line space (with stretch and shrink). - - - - \medskip\medskip\medskipamount - - The same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). - - - - \smallskip\smallskip\smallskipamount - - The same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). - - -
- The \...amount parameters are determined by the document class. -
-
- - \vfill - \vspace - \bigskip \medskip \smallskip - Spaces -
- <code>\vfill</code> - \vfill The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to \vspace{\fill} (see \hfill). -
-
- - \vspace - \vfill - Spaces -
- <code>\vspace[*]{<var>length</var>}</code> - \vspace Synopsis: - \vspace[*]{length} - The \vspace command adds the vertical space length, i.e., a rubber length. length can be negative or positive. - Ordinarily, &latex; removes vertical space added by \vspace at the top or bottom of a page. With the optional * argument, the space is not removed. -
-
- - Boxes - Special insertions - Spaces - Top - - Boxes - boxes All the predefined length parameters (see Predefined lengths) can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands. - - - \mbox - \mbox - Horizontal boxes. - - - \fbox and \framebox - \fbox and \framebox - Put a frame around a box. - - - lrbox - lrbox - An environment like \sbox. - - - \makebox - \makebox - Box, adjustable position. - - - \parbox - \parbox - Box with text in paragraph mode. - - - \raisebox - \raisebox - Raise or lower text. - - - \savebox - \savebox - Like \makebox, but save the text for later use. - - - \sbox - \sbox - Like \mbox, but save the text for later use. - - - \usebox - \usebox - Print saved text. - - - - - - \mbox - \fbox and \framebox - Boxes -
- <code>\mbox{<var>text}</var></code> - \mbox hyphenation, preventingThe \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text created by its argument. The text is not broken into lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. -
-
- - \fbox and \framebox - lrbox - \mbox - Boxes -
- <code>\fbox</code> and <code>\framebox</code> - \fbox\framebox Synopses: - \fbox{text} -\framebox[width][position]{text} - The \fbox and \framebox commands are like \mbox, except that they put a frame around the outside of the box being created. - In addition, the \framebox command allows for explicit specification of the box width with the optional width argument (a dimension), and positioning with the optional position argument. - \fboxrule\fboxsepBoth commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default .4pt), and leave a space of \fboxsep (default 3pt) between the rule and the contents of the box. - See \framebox (picture), for the \framebox command in the picture environment. -
-
- - lrbox - \makebox - \fbox and \framebox - Boxes -
- <code>lrbox</code> - lrbox \begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} - This is the environment form of \sbox. - The text inside the environment is saved in the box cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox. -
-
- - \makebox - \parbox - lrbox - Boxes -
- <code>\makebox</code> - \makebox Synopsis: - \makebox[width][position]{text} - The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain the text specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional width argument. The position of the text within the box is determined by the optional position argument, which may take the following values: - - - c - - Centered (default). - - - - l - - Flush left. - - - - r - - Flush right. - - - - s - - Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain stretchable space for this to work. - - -
- \makebox is also used within the picture environment see \makebox (picture). -
-
- - \parbox - \raisebox - \makebox - Boxes -
- <code>\parbox</code> - \parbox Synopsis: - \parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text} - The \parbox command produces a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any paragraph-making environments inside a \parbox argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a minipage environment (see minipage). - \parbox has two mandatory arguments: - - - width - - the width of the parbox; - - - - text - - the text that goes inside the parbox. - - -
- The optional position argument allows you to align either the top or bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text (default is top). - The optional height argument overrides the natural height of the box. - The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside the box, as follows; if it is not specified, position is used. - - - t - - text is placed at the top of the box. - - - - c - - text is centered in the box. - - - - b - - text is placed at the bottom of the box. - - - - s - - stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space for this to work. - - -
-
-
- - \raisebox - \savebox - \parbox - Boxes -
- <code>\raisebox</code> - \raisebox Synopsis: - \raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text} - The \raisebox command raises or lowers text. The first mandatory argument specifies how high text is to be raised (or lowered if it is a negative amount). text itself is processed in LR mode. - The optional arguments height and depth are dimensions. If they are specified, &latex; treats text as extending a certain distance above the baseline (height) or below (depth), ignoring its natural height and depth. -
-
- - \savebox - \sbox - \raisebox - Boxes -
- <code>\savebox</code> - \savebox Synopsis: - \savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text} - This command typeset text in a box just as with \makebox (see \makebox), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in the box labeled \boxcmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox (see \newsavebox). -
-
- - \sbox - \usebox - \savebox - Boxes -
- <code>\sbox{<var>\boxcmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code> - \sbox Synopsis: - \sbox{\boxcmd}{text} - \sbox types text in a box just as with \mbox (see \mbox) except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled \boxcmd. \boxcmd must have been previously declared with \newsavebox (see \newsavebox). -
-
- - \usebox - \sbox - Boxes -
- <code>\usebox{<var>\boxcmd</var></code> - \usebox Synopsis: - \usebox{\boxcmd} - \usebox producesthe box most recently saved in the bin \boxcmd by a \savebox command (see \savebox). -
-
- - Special insertions - Splitting the input - Boxes - Top - - Special insertions - &latex; provides commands for inserting characters that have a special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. - - - Reserved characters - Reserved characters - Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } - - - Text symbols - Text symbols - Inserting other non-letter symbols in text. - - - Accents - Accents - Inserting accents. - - - Non-English characters - Non-English characters - Inserting other non-English characters. - - - \rule - \rule - Inserting lines and rectangles. - - - \today - \today - Inserting today's date. - - - - - - Reserved characters - Text symbols - Special insertions -
- Reserved characters - reserved characterscharacters, reserved The following characters play a special role in &latex; and are called “reserved characters” or “special characters”. - # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } - \#\$\%\&\_\{\}Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex; will do something special. If you simply want the character to be printed as itself, include a \ in front of the character. For example, \$ will produce $ in your output. - \backslashOne exception to this rule is \ itself, because \\ has its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing $\backslash$ in your file, and a typewriter \ is produced by using \ in a verbatim command (see verbatim). - \~\^Also, \~ and \^ place tilde and circumflex accents over the following letter, as in õ and ô (see Accents); to get a standalone ~ or ^, you can again use a verbatim command. - \symbolaccessing any character of a font Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you know its number by using the \symbol command. For example, the visible space character used in the \verb* command has the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as \symbol{32}. - You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal numbers with ", so the previous example could also be written as \symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}. -
-
- - Text symbols - Accents - Reserved characters - Special insertions -
- Text symbols - text symbolstextcomp package&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp package. - - - \copyright\copyright - \textcopyright\textcopyrightcopyright symbol - - The copyright symbol, ©right;. - - - - \dag\dagdagger, in text - - The dagger symbol (in text). - - - - \ddag\ddagdouble dagger, in text - - The double dagger symbol (in text). - - - - \LaTeX\LaTeX&latex; logologo, &latex; - - The &latex; logo. - - - - \guillemotleft («)\guillemotleft («) - \guillemotright (»)\guillemotright (») - \guilsinglleft (‹)\guilsinglleft (‹) - \guilsinglright (›)\guilsinglright (›)double guillemetssingle guillemetsleft angle quotation marksright angle quotation marksdouble angle quotation markssingle angle quotation marksFrench quotation marksquotation marks, French - - Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: «, », ‹, ›. - - - - \ldots\ldots - \dots\dots - \textellipsis\textellipsisellipsis - - An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `&dots;'. \ldots and \dots also work in math mode. - - - - \lq\lqleft quoteopening quote - - Left (opening) quote: `. - - - - \P\P - \textparagraph\textparagraphparagraph symbolpilcrow - - Paragraph sign (pilcrow). - - - - \pounds\pounds - \textsterling\textsterlingpounds symbolsterling symbol - - English pounds sterling: £. - - - - \quotedblbase („)\quotedblbase („) - \quotesinglbase (‚)\quotesinglbase (‚)double low-9 quotation marksingle low-9 quotation marklow-9 quotation marks, single and double - - Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: „ and ‚. - - - - \rq\rqright quoteclosing quote - - Right (closing) quote: '. - - - - \S\Ssection symbol - - Section symbol. - - - - \TeX\TeX&tex; logologo, &tex; - - The &tex; logo. - - - - \textasciicircum\textasciicircumcircumflex, ASCII, in textASCII circumflex, in text - - ASCII circumflex: ^. - - - - \textasciitilde\textasciitildetilde, ASCII, in textASCII tilde, in text - - ASCII tilde: ~. - - - - \textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcenteredasterisk, centered, in textcentered asterisk, in text - - Centered asterisk: *. - - - - \textbackslash\textbackslashbackslash, in text - - Backslash: \. - - - - \textbar\textbarvertical bar, in textbar, vertical, in text - - Vertical bar: |. - - - - \textbardbl\textbardblvertical bar, double, in textbar, double vertical, in textdouble vertical bar, in text - - Double vertical bar. - - - - \textbigcircle\textbigcirclebig circle symbols, in textcircle symbol, big, in text - - Big circle symbol. - - - - \textbraceleft\textbraceleftleft brace, in textbrace, left, in text - - Left brace: {. - - - - \textbraceright\textbracerightright brace, in textbrace, right, in text - - Right brace: }. - - - - \textbullet\textbulletbullet, in text - - Bullet: •. - - - - \textcircled{letter}\textcircled{letter}circled letter, in text - - letter in a circle, as in ®istered;. - - - - \textcompwordmark\textcompwordmark - \textcapitalwordmark\textcapitalwordmark - \textascenderwordmark\textascenderwordmarkcomposite word mark, in textcap heightascender height - - Composite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form has the cap height of the font, while the \textascender... form has the ascender height. - - - - \textdagger\textdaggerdagger, in text - - Dagger: \dag. - - - - \textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbldagger, double, in textdouble dagger, in text - - Double dagger: \ddag. - - - - \textdollar (or $)\textdollar (or $)dollar signcurrency, dollar - - Dollar sign: $. - - - - \textemdash (or ---)\textemdash (or ---)em-dash - - Em-dash: — (for punctuation). - - - - \textendash (or --)\textendash (or --)e-dash - - En-dash: — (for ranges). - - - - \texteuro\texteuroeuro symbolcurrency, euro - - The Euro symbol: €. - - - - \textexclamdown (or !`)\textexclamdown (or !`)exclamation point, upside-down - - Upside down exclamation point: ¡. - - - - \textgreater\textgreatergreater than symbol, in text - - Greater than: >. - - - - \textless\textlessless than symbol, in text - - Less than: <. - - - - \textleftarrow\textleftarrowarrow, left, in textleft arrow, in text - - Left arrow. - - - - \textordfeminine\textordfeminine - \textordmasculine\textordmasculinefeminine ordinal symbolmasculine ordinal symbolordinals, feminine and masculineSpanish ordinals, feminine and masculine - - Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. - - - - \textordfeminine\textordfemininefeminine ordinal symbol - - Feminine ordinal symbol: ®istered;. - - - - \textperiodcentered\textperiodcenteredperiod, centered, in textcentered period, in text - - Centered period: \cdot. - - - - \textquestiondown (or ?`)\textquestiondown (or ?`)questionation point, upside-down - - Upside down questionation point: ¿. - - - - \textquotedblleft (or ``)\textquotedblleft (or ``)left quote, doubledouble left quote - - Double left quote: “. - - - - \textquotedblright (or ')\textquotedblright (or ')right quote, doubledouble right quote - - Double right quote: ”. - - - - \textquoteleft (or `)\textquoteleft (or `)left quote, singlesingle left quote - - Single left quote: `. - - - - \textquoteright (or ')\textquoteright (or ')right quote, singlesingle right quote - - Single right quote: '. - - - - \textquotestraightbase\textquotestraightbase - \textquotestraightdblbase\textquotestraightdblbasequote, straight basestraight quote, basedouble quote, straight basestraight double quote, base - - Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. - - - - \textregistered\textregisteredregistered symbol - - Registered symbol: ®istered;. - - - - \textrightarrow\textrightarrowarrow, right, in textright arrow, in text - - Right arrow. - - - - \textthreequartersemdash\textthreequartersemdashthree-quarters em-dashem-dash, three-quarters - - “Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. - - - - \texttrademark\texttrademarktrademark symbol - - Trademark symbol: ^\hboxTM. - - - - \texttwelveudash\texttwelveudash - - Xx 12u-. - - - - \textunderscore\textunderscoreunderscore, in text - - Underscore: _. - - - - \textvisiblespace\textvisiblespacevisible space symbol, in text - - Visible space symbol. - - -
-
-
- - Accents - Non-English characters - Text symbols - Special insertions -
- Accents - accentscharacters, accentedletters, accented &latex; has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages, through the babel package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. - The \capital... commands produce alternative forms for use with capital letters. These are not available with OT1. - - - \" - \capitaldieresis\" (umlaut accent)\capitaldieresisumlaut accentdieresis accent - - Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. - - - - \' - \capitalacute\' (acute accent)\capitalacuteacute accent - - Produces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column (see tabbing). - - - - \.\. (dot-over accent)dot accentdot-over accent - - Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. - - - - \= - \capitalmacron\= (macron accent)\capitalmacronmacron accentoverbar accentbar-over accent - - Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o¯. - - - - \^ - \capitalcircumflex\^ (circumflex accent)\capitalcircumflexcircumflex accenthat accent - - Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. - - - - \` - \capitalgrave\` (grave accent)\capitalgravegrave accent - - Produces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the tabbing environment, move following text to the right margin (see tabbing). - - - - \~ - \capitaltilde\~ (tilde accent)\capitaltildetilde accent - - Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. - - - - \b\b (bar-under accent)bar-under accent - - Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. - - - - \c - \capitalcedilla\c (cedilla accent)\capitalcedillacedilla accent - - Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. - - - - \d - \capitaldotaccent\d (dot-under accent)\capitaldotaccentdot-under accent - - Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. - - - - \H - \capitalhungarumlaut\H (Hungarian umlaut accent)\capitalhungarumlauthungarian umlaut accent - - Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. - - - - \i\i (dotless i)dotless i - - Produces a dotless i, as in `i'. - - - - \j\j (dotless j)dotless j - - Produces a dotless j, as in `j'. - - - - \k - \capitalogonek\k (ogonek)\capitalogonekogonek - - Produces a letter with ogonek, as in `o'. Not available in the OT1 encoding. - - - - \r - \capitalring\r (ring accent)\capitalringring accent - - Produces a ring accent, as in `o*'. - - - - \t - \capitaltie - \newtie - \capitalnewtie\t (tie-after accent)\capitaltie\newtie\capitalnewtietie-after accent - - Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The \newtie form is centered in its box. - - - - \u - \capitalbreve\u (breve accent)\capitalbrevebreve accent - - Produces a breve accent, as in `o('. - - - - \underbar\underbarunderbar - - Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through descenders. See also \underline in Math miscellany. - - - - \v - \capitalcaron\v (breve accent)\capitalcaronhacek accentcheck accentcaron accent - - Produces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in `o<'. - - -
-
-
- - Non-English characters - \rule - Accents - Special insertions -
- Non-English characters - special charactersnon-English characterscharacters, non-Englishletters, non-English Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting characters commonly used in languages other than English. - - - \aa - \AA\aa (å)\AA (Å)aring - - å and Å. - - - - \ae - \AE\ae (æ)\AE (Æ)ae ligature - - æ and Æ. - - - - \dh - \DH\dh (æ)\DH (Æ)Icelandic etheth, Icelandic letter - - Icelandic letter eth: and . - - - - \dj - \DJ\dj\DJ - - xxxx - - - - \ij - \IJ\ij (ij)\IJ (IJ)ij letter, Dutch - - ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). - - - - \l - \L\l (/l)\L (/L)polish l - - /l and /L. - - - - \ng - \NG\ng\NG - - xxxx - - - - \o - \O\o (ø)\O (Ø)oslash - - ø and Ø. - - - - \oe - \OE\oe (œ)\OE (Œ)oe ligature - - œ and Œ. - - - - \ss - \SS\ss (ß)\SS (SS)es-zet German lettersharp S letters - - ß and SS. - - - - \th - \TH\th ()\TH ()Icelandic thornthorn, Icelandic letter - - Icelandic letter thorn: and . - - -
-
-
- - \rule - \today - Non-English characters - Special insertions -
- <code>\rule</code> - \rule Synopsis: - \rule[raise]{width}{thickness} - The \rule command produces rules, that is, lines or rectangles. The arguments are: - - - raise - - How high to raise the rule (optional). - - - - width - - The length of the rule (mandatory). - - - - thickness - - The thickness of the rule (mandatory). - - -
-
-
- - \today - \rule - Special insertions -
- <code>\today</code> - \today The \today command produces today's date, in the format month dd, yyyy; for example, `July 4, 1976'. It uses the predefined counters \day, \month, and \year (see \day \month \year) to do this. It is not updated as the program runs. - datetime packageThe datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety of other date formats. -
-
- - Splitting the input - Front/back matter - Special insertions - Top - - Splitting the input - splitting the input fileinput file A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type when you run &latex;. - - - \include - \include - Conditionally include a file. - - - \includeonly - \includeonly - Determine which files are included. - - - \input - \input - Unconditionally include a file. - - - - - - \include - \includeonly - Splitting the input -
- <code>\include</code> - \include Synopsis: - \include{file} - If no \includeonly command is present, the \include command executes \clearpage to start a new page (see \clearpage), then reads file, then does another \clearpage. - Given an \includeonly command, the \include actions are only run if file is listed as an argument to \includeonly. See the next section. - nested \include, not allowedThe \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file read by another \include command. -
-
- - \includeonly - \input - \include - Splitting the input -
- \<code>includeonly</code> - \includeonly Synopsis: - \includeonly{file1,file2,...} - The \includeonly command controls which files will be read by subsequent \include commands. The list of filenames is comma-separated. Each file must exactly match a filename specified in a \include command for the selection to be effective. - This command can only appear in the preamble. -
-
- - \input - \includeonly - Splitting the input -
- \input - \input Synopsis: - \input{file} - The \input command causes the specified file to be read and processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at that point. - If file does not end in .tex (e.g., foo or foo.bar), it is first tried with that extension (foo.tex or foo.bar.tex). If that is not found, the original file is tried (foo or foo.bar). -
-
- - Front/back matter - Letters - Splitting the input - Top - - Front/back matter - - - Tables of contents - Tables of contents - - - - Glossaries - Glossaries - - - - Indexes - Indexes - - - - - - - Tables of contents - Glossaries - Front/back matter -
- Tables of contents - table of contents, creating \tableofcontentsA table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents command. You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; &latex; does the rest for you. A previous run must have generated a .toc file. - The \tableofcontents command produces a heading, but it does not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the table of contents, write a \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command. - \listoffigures\listoftablesThe analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. - \nofilesThe command \nofiles overrides these commands, and prevents any of these lists from being generated. - - - \addcontentsline - \addcontentsline - Add an entry to table of contents etc. - - - \addtocontents - \addtocontents - Add text directly to table of contents file etc. - - -
-
- - \addcontentsline - \addtocontents - Tables of contents - - \addcontentsline - \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text}table of contents entry, manually adding The \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} command adds an entry to the specified list or table where: - - - ext - - The extension of the file on which information is to be written, typically one of: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables). - - - - unit - - The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the following, matching the value of the ext argument: -
- - toc - - The name of the sectional unit: part, chapter, section, subsection, subsubsection. - - - - lof - - For the list of figures. - - - - lot - - For the list of tables. - - -
- - - - entry - - The actual text of the entry. - - - - \contentslineWhat is written to the .ext file is the command \contentsline{unit}{name}. + + +\addvspace +\bigskip \medskip \smallskip +\dotfill +Spaces + +
+<code>\addvspace</code> +\addvspacevertical spacespace, inserting vertical +\addvspace{length} + +The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of height +length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same +point in the output by a previous \addvspace command, then this +command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length +of the total vertical space equal to length. + + +
+ +\bigskip \medskip \smallskip +\vfill +\addvspace +Spaces + +
+<code>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</code> + +These commands produce a given amount of space. + +\bigskip +\bigskip\bigskipamountThe same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line +space (with stretch and shrink). + +\medskip +\medskip\medskipamountThe same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily +about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). + +\smallskip +\smallskip\smallskipamountThe same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a +quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). + +
+ +The \...amount parameters are determined by the document class. + + +
+ +\vfill +\vspace +\bigskip \medskip \smallskip +Spaces + +
+<code>\vfill</code> +\vfill +The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which +can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to +\vspace{\fill} (see \hfill). + + +
+ +\vspace +\vfill +Spaces + +
+<code>\vspace[*]{<var>length</var>}</code> +\vspace +Synopsis: + +\vspace[*]{length} + +The \vspace command adds the vertical space length, i.e., +a rubber length. length can be negative or positive. + +Ordinarily, &latex; removes vertical space added by \vspace at +the top or bottom of a page. With the optional * argument, the +space is not removed. + + +
+ + +Boxes +Special insertions +Spaces +Top + + +Boxes + +boxes +All the predefined length parameters (see Predefined lengths) can be +used in the arguments of the box-making commands. + + + +\mbox +\mbox + Horizontal boxes. + + +\fbox and \framebox +\fbox and \framebox + Put a frame around a box. + + +lrbox +lrbox + An environment like \sbox. + + +\makebox +\makebox + Box, adjustable position. + + +\parbox +\parbox + Box with text in paragraph mode. + + +\raisebox +\raisebox + Raise or lower text. + + +\savebox +\savebox + Like \makebox, but save the text for later use. + + +\sbox +\sbox + Like \mbox, but save the text for later use. + + +\usebox +\usebox + Print saved text. + + + + + +\mbox +\fbox and \framebox +Boxes + +
+<code>\mbox{<var>text}</var></code> +\mbox +hyphenation, preventingThe \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the +text created by its argument. The text is not broken into +lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. + + +
+ +\fbox and \framebox +lrbox +\mbox +Boxes + +
+<code>\fbox</code> and <code>\framebox</code> + +\fbox\framebox +Synopses: + +\fbox{text} +\framebox[width][position]{text} + +The \fbox and \framebox commands are like \mbox, +except that they put a frame around the outside of the box being created. + +In addition, the \framebox command allows for explicit +specification of the box width with the optional width argument +(a dimension), and positioning with the optional position +argument. + +\fboxrule\fboxsepBoth commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default +.4pt), and leave a space of \fboxsep (default +3pt) between the rule and the contents of the box. + +See \framebox (picture), for the \framebox command in the +picture environment. + + +
+ +lrbox +\makebox +\fbox and \framebox +Boxes + +
+<code>lrbox</code> +lrbox +\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} + +This is the environment form of \sbox. + +The text inside the environment is saved in the box cmd, which +must have been declared with \newsavebox. + + +
+ +\makebox +\parbox +lrbox +Boxes + +
+<code>\makebox</code> +\makebox +Synopsis: + +\makebox[width][position]{text} + +The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain +the text specified. The width of the box is specified by the +optional width argument. The position of the text within the box +is determined by the optional position argument, which may take +the following values: + +c +Centered (default). +l +Flush left. +r +Flush right. +s +Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain +stretchable space for this to work. +
+ +\makebox is also used within the picture environment +see \makebox (picture). + + +
+ +\parbox +\raisebox +\makebox +Boxes + +
+<code>\parbox</code> +\parbox +Synopsis: + +\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text} + +The \parbox command produces a box whose contents are created +in paragraph mode. It should be used to make a box small +pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you +shouldn't use any paragraph-making environments inside a +\parbox argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones +containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a +minipage environment (see minipage). + +\parbox has two mandatory arguments: + +width +the width of the parbox; +text +the text that goes inside the parbox. +
+ +The optional position argument allows you to align either the +top or bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding +text (default is top). + +The optional height argument overrides the natural height of the box. + +The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside +the box, as follows; if it is not specified, position is used. + +t +text is placed at the top of the box. +c +text is centered in the box. +b +text is placed at the bottom of the box. +s +stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space +for this to work. +
+ + +
+ +\raisebox +\savebox +\parbox +Boxes + +
+<code>\raisebox</code> +\raisebox +Synopsis: + +\raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text} + +The \raisebox command raises or lowers text. The first +mandatory argument specifies how high text is to be raised (or +lowered if it is a negative amount). text itself is processed +in LR mode. + +The optional arguments height and depth are dimensions. +If they are specified, &latex; treats text as extending a +certain distance above the baseline (height) or below (depth), +ignoring its natural height and depth. + + +
+ +\savebox +\sbox +\raisebox +Boxes + +
+<code>\savebox</code> +\savebox +Synopsis: + +\savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text} + +This command typeset text in a box just as with \makebox +(see \makebox), except that instead of printing the resulting box, +it saves it in the box labeled \boxcmd, which must have been +declared with \newsavebox (see \newsavebox). + + +
+ +\sbox +\usebox +\savebox +Boxes + +
+<code>\sbox{<var>\boxcmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code> +\sbox +Synopsis: + +\sbox{\boxcmd}{text} + +\sbox types text in a box just as with \mbox +(see \mbox) except that instead of the resulting box being +included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled +\boxcmd. \boxcmd must have been previously declared with +\newsavebox (see \newsavebox). + + +
+ +\usebox +\sbox +Boxes + +
+<code>\usebox{<var>\boxcmd</var></code> +\usebox +Synopsis: + +\usebox{\boxcmd} + +\usebox producesthe box most recently saved in the bin +\boxcmd by a \savebox command (see \savebox). + + +
+
+ +Special insertions +Splitting the input +Boxes +Top + + +Special insertions + +&latex; provides commands for inserting characters that have a +special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. + + + +Reserved characters +Reserved characters + Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } + + +Text symbols +Text symbols + Inserting other non-letter symbols in text. + + +Accents +Accents + Inserting accents. + + +Non-English characters +Non-English characters + Inserting other non-English characters. + + +\rule +\rule + Inserting lines and rectangles. + + +\today +\today + Inserting today's date. + + + + + +Reserved characters +Text symbols +Special insertions + +
+Reserved characters +reserved characterscharacters, reserved +The following characters play a special role in &latex; and are called +“reserved characters” or “special characters”. + +# $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } + +\#\$\%\&\_\{\}Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex; +will do something special. If you simply want the character to be +printed as itself, include a \ in front of the character. For +example, \$ will produce $ in your output. + +\backslashOne exception to this rule is \ itself, because \\ has +its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by +typing $\backslash$ in your file, and a typewriter \ is +produced by using \ in a verbatim command (see verbatim). + +\~\^Also, \~ and \^ place tilde and circumflex accents over +the following letter, as in õ and ô (see Accents); to get +a standalone ~ or ^, you can again use a verbatim +command. + +\symbolaccessing any character of a font +Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you +know its number by using the \symbol command. For example, the +visible space character used in the \verb* command has the code +decimal 32, so it can be typed as \symbol{32}. + +You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal numbers +with ", so the previous example could also be written as +\symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}. + + +
+ +Text symbols +Accents +Reserved characters +Special insertions + +
+Text symbols + +text symbolstextcomp package&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols +in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are +not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp package. + +\copyright\copyright +\textcopyright\textcopyright +copyright symbolThe copyright symbol, ©right;. + +\dag\dag +dagger, in textThe dagger symbol (in text). + +\ddag\ddag +double dagger, in textThe double dagger symbol (in text). + +\LaTeX\LaTeX +&latex; logologo, &latex;The &latex; logo. + +\guillemotleft («)\guillemotleft («) +\guillemotright (»)\guillemotright (») +\guilsinglleft (‹)\guilsinglleft (‹) +\guilsinglright (›)\guilsinglright (›) +double guillemetssingle guillemetsleft angle quotation marksright angle quotation marksdouble angle quotation markssingle angle quotation marksFrench quotation marksquotation marks, FrenchDouble and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: +«, », ‹, ›. + +\ldots\ldots +\dots\dots +\textellipsis\textellipsis +ellipsisAn ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `&dots;'. \ldots +and \dots also work in math mode. + +\lq\lq +left quoteopening quoteLeft (opening) quote: `. + +\P\P +\textparagraph\textparagraph +paragraph symbolpilcrowParagraph sign (pilcrow). + +\pounds\pounds +\textsterling\textsterling +pounds symbolsterling symbolEnglish pounds sterling: £. + +\quotedblbase („)\quotedblbase („) +\quotesinglbase (‚)\quotesinglbase (‚) +double low-9 quotation marksingle low-9 quotation marklow-9 quotation marks, single and doubleDouble and single quotation marks on the baseline: +„ and ‚. + +\rq\rq +right quoteclosing quoteRight (closing) quote: '. + +\S\S +section symbolSection symbol. + +\TeX\TeX +&tex; logologo, &tex;The &tex; logo. + +\textasciicircum\textasciicircum +circumflex, ASCII, in textASCII circumflex, in textASCII circumflex: ^. + +\textasciitilde\textasciitilde +tilde, ASCII, in textASCII tilde, in textASCII tilde: ~. + +\textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered +asterisk, centered, in textcentered asterisk, in textCentered asterisk: *. + +\textbackslash\textbackslash +backslash, in textBackslash: \. + +\textbar\textbar +vertical bar, in textbar, vertical, in textVertical bar: |. + +\textbardbl\textbardbl +vertical bar, double, in textbar, double vertical, in textdouble vertical bar, in textDouble vertical bar. + +\textbigcircle\textbigcircle +big circle symbols, in textcircle symbol, big, in textBig circle symbol. + +\textbraceleft\textbraceleft +left brace, in textbrace, left, in textLeft brace: {. + +\textbraceright\textbraceright +right brace, in textbrace, right, in textRight brace: }. + +\textbullet\textbullet +bullet, in textBullet: •. + +\textcircled{letter}\textcircled{letter} +circled letter, in textletter in a circle, as in ®istered;. + +\textcompwordmark\textcompwordmark +\textcapitalwordmark\textcapitalwordmark +\textascenderwordmark\textascenderwordmark +composite word mark, in textcap heightascender heightComposite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form +has the cap height of the font, while the \textascender... form +has the ascender height. + +\textdagger\textdagger +dagger, in textDagger: \dag. + +\textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl +dagger, double, in textdouble dagger, in textDouble dagger: \ddag. + +\textdollar (or $)\textdollar (or $) +dollar signcurrency, dollarDollar sign: $. + +\textemdash (or ---)\textemdash (or ---) +em-dashEm-dash: — (for punctuation). + +\textendash (or --)\textendash (or --) +e-dashEn-dash: — (for ranges). + +\texteuro\texteuro +euro symbolcurrency, euroThe Euro symbol: €. + +\textexclamdown (or !`)\textexclamdown (or !`) +exclamation point, upside-downUpside down exclamation point: ¡. + +\textgreater\textgreater +greater than symbol, in textGreater than: >. + +\textless\textless +less than symbol, in textLess than: <. + +\textleftarrow\textleftarrow +arrow, left, in textleft arrow, in textLeft arrow. + +\textordfeminine\textordfeminine +\textordmasculine\textordmasculine +feminine ordinal symbolmasculine ordinal symbolordinals, feminine and masculineSpanish ordinals, feminine and masculineFeminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. + +\textordfeminine\textordfeminine +feminine ordinal symbolFeminine ordinal symbol: ®istered;. + +\textperiodcentered\textperiodcentered +period, centered, in textcentered period, in textCentered period: \cdot. + +\textquestiondown (or ?`)\textquestiondown (or ?`) +questionation point, upside-downUpside down questionation point: ¿. + +\textquotedblleft (or ``)\textquotedblleft (or ``) +left quote, doubledouble left quoteDouble left quote: “. + +\textquotedblright (or ')\textquotedblright (or ') +right quote, doubledouble right quoteDouble right quote: ”. + +\textquoteleft (or `)\textquoteleft (or `) +left quote, singlesingle left quoteSingle left quote: `. + +\textquoteright (or ')\textquoteright (or ') +right quote, singlesingle right quoteSingle right quote: '. + +\textquotestraightbase\textquotestraightbase +\textquotestraightdblbase\textquotestraightdblbase +quote, straight basestraight quote, basedouble quote, straight basestraight double quote, baseSingle and double straight quotes on the baseline. + +\textregistered\textregistered +registered symbolRegistered symbol: ®istered;. + +\textrightarrow\textrightarrow +arrow, right, in textright arrow, in textRight arrow. + +\textthreequartersemdash\textthreequartersemdash +three-quarters em-dashem-dash, three-quarters“Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. + +\texttrademark\texttrademark +trademark symbolTrademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}. + +\texttwelveudash\texttwelveudash +Xx 12u-. + +\textunderscore\textunderscore +underscore, in textUnderscore: _. + +\textvisiblespace\textvisiblespace +visible space symbol, in textVisible space symbol. + +
+ + +
+ +Accents +Non-English characters +Text symbols +Special insertions + +
+Accents + +accentscharacters, accentedletters, accented +&latex; has wide support for many of the world's scripts and +languages, through the babel package and related support. This +section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists +the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. + +The \capital... commands produce alternative forms for use with +capital letters. These are not available with OT1. + +\" +\capitaldieresis +\" (umlaut accent)\capitaldieresisumlaut accentdieresis accentProduces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. + +\' +\capitalacute +\' (acute accent)\capitalacuteacute accentProduces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing +environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column +(see tabbing). + +\. +\. (dot-over accent)dot accentdot-over accentProduces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. + +\= +\capitalmacron +\= (macron accent)\capitalmacronmacron accentoverbar accentbar-over accentProduces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o¯. + +\^ +\capitalcircumflex +\^ (circumflex accent)\capitalcircumflexcircumflex accenthat accentProduces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. + +\` +\capitalgrave +\` (grave accent)\capitalgravegrave accentProduces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the +tabbing environment, move following text to the right margin +(see tabbing). + +\~ +\capitaltilde +\~ (tilde accent)\capitaltildetilde accentProduces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. + +\b +\b (bar-under accent)bar-under accentProduces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. + +\c +\capitalcedilla +\c (cedilla accent)\capitalcedillacedilla accentProduces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. + +\d +\capitaldotaccent +\d (dot-under accent)\capitaldotaccentdot-under accentProduces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. + +\H +\capitalhungarumlaut +\H (Hungarian umlaut accent)\capitalhungarumlauthungarian umlaut accentProduces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. + +\i +\i (dotless i)dotless iProduces a dotless i, as in `i'. + +\j +\j (dotless j)dotless jProduces a dotless j, as in `j'. + +\k +\capitalogonek +\k (ogonek)\capitalogonekogonekProduces a letter with ogonek, as in `o;'. Not available in +the OT1 encoding. + +\r +\capitalring +\r (ring accent)\capitalringring accentProduces a ring accent, as in `o*'. + +\t +\capitaltie +\newtie +\capitalnewtie +\t (tie-after accent)\capitaltie\newtie\capitalnewtietie-after accentProduces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The +\newtie form is centered in its box. + +\u +\capitalbreve +\u (breve accent)\capitalbrevebreve accentProduces a breve accent, as in `o('. + +\underbar +\underbarunderbarNot exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. +The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is +always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through +descenders. See also \underline in Math miscellany. + +\v +\capitalcaron +\v (breve accent)\capitalcaronhacek accentcheck accentcaron accentProduces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in `o<'. + +
+ + +
+ +Non-English characters +\rule +Accents +Special insertions + +
+Non-English characters + +special charactersnon-English characterscharacters, non-Englishletters, non-English +Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting characters commonly +used in languages other than English. + +\aa +\AA +\aa (å)\AA (Å)aringå and Å. + +\ae +\AE +\ae (æ)\AE (Æ)ae ligatureæ and Æ. + +\dh +\DH +\dh (æ)\DH (Æ)Icelandic etheth, Icelandic letterIcelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. + +\dj +\DJ +\dj\DJxxxx + +\ij +\IJ +\ij (ij)\IJ (IJ)ij letter, Dutchij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). + +\l +\L +\l (/l)\L (/L)polish l/l and /L. + +\ng +\NG +\ng\NGxxxx + +\o +\O +\o (ø)\O (Ø)oslashø and Ø. + +\oe +\OE +\oe (œ)\OE (Œ)oe ligatureœ and Œ. + +\ss +\SS +\ss (ß)\SS (SS)es-zet German lettersharp S lettersß and SS. + +\th +\TH +\th (þ)\TH (Þ)Icelandic thornthorn, Icelandic letterIcelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. + +
+ + +
+ +\rule +\today +Non-English characters +Special insertions + +
+<code>\rule</code> +\rule +Synopsis: + +\rule[raise]{width}{thickness} + +The \rule command produces rules, that is, lines or +rectangles. The arguments are: + +raise +How high to raise the rule (optional). + +width +The length of the rule (mandatory). + +thickness +The thickness of the rule (mandatory). +
+ + +
+ +\today +\rule +Special insertions + +
+<code>\today</code> +\today +The \today command produces today's date, in the format +month dd, yyyy; for example, `July 4, 1976'. +It uses the predefined counters \day, \month, and +\year (see \day \month \year) to do this. It is not +updated as the program runs. + +datetime packageThe datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety +of other date formats. + + +
+
+ +Splitting the input +Front/back matter +Special insertions +Top + + +Splitting the input +splitting the input fileinput file +A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole +input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into +several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, +there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type +when you run &latex;. + + + +\include +\include + Conditionally include a file. + + +\includeonly +\includeonly + Determine which files are included. + + +\input +\input + Unconditionally include a file. + + + + + +\include +\includeonly +Splitting the input + +
+<code>\include</code> +\include +Synopsis: + +\include{file} + +If no \includeonly command is present, the \include +command executes \clearpage to start a new page +(see \clearpage), then reads file, then does another +\clearpage. + +Given an \includeonly command, the \include actions are +only run if file is listed as an argument to +\includeonly. See the next section. + +nested \include, not allowedThe \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file +read by another \include command. + + +
+ +\includeonly +\input +\include +Splitting the input + +
+\<code>includeonly</code> +\includeonly +Synopsis: + +\includeonly{file1,file2,...} + +The \includeonly command controls which files will be read by +subsequent \include commands. The list of filenames is +comma-separated. Each file must exactly match a filename +specified in a \include command for the selection to be +effective. + +This command can only appear in the preamble. + + +
+ +\input +\includeonly +Splitting the input + +
+\input +\input +Synopsis: + +\input{file} + +The \input command causes the specified file to be read +and processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current +file at that point. + +If file does not end in .tex (e.g., foo or +foo.bar), it is first tried with that extension (foo.tex +or foo.bar.tex). If that is not found, the original file +is tried (foo or foo.bar). + + +
+
+ +Front/back matter +Letters +Splitting the input +Top + + +Front/back matter + + + +Tables of contents +Tables of contents + + + +Glossaries +Glossaries + + + +Indexes +Indexes + + + + + + +Tables of contents +Glossaries +Front/back matter + +
+Tables of contents + +table of contents, creating +\tableofcontentsA table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents +command. You put the command right where you want the table of +contents to go; &latex; does the rest for you. A previous run must +have generated a .toc file. + +The \tableofcontents command produces a heading, but it does +not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the +table of contents, write a \newpage command after the +\tableofcontents command. + +\listoffigures\listoftablesThe analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables +produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. +Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. + +\nofilesThe command \nofiles overrides these commands, and +prevents any of these lists from being generated. + + + +\addcontentsline +\addcontentsline + Add an entry to table of contents etc. + + +\addtocontents +\addtocontents + Add text directly to table of contents file etc. + + + + + +\addcontentsline +\addtocontents +Tables of contents + + +\addcontentsline +\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text}table of contents entry, manually adding +The \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} +command adds an entry to the specified list or table where: + +ext +The extension of the file on which information is to be written, +typically one of: toc (table of contents), lof (list of +figures), or lot (list of tables). + +unit +The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the +following, matching the value of the ext argument: + +
toc +The name of the sectional unit: part, chapter, +section, subsection, subsubsection. +lof +For the list of figures. +lot +For the list of tables. +
+ +entry +The actual text of the entry. + + +\contentslineWhat is written to the .ext file is the +command \contentsline{unit}{name}. + -
- - - \addtocontents - \addcontentsline - Tables of contents - - \addtocontents - \addtocontents{ext}{text} The \addtocontents{ext}{text} command adds text (or formatting commands) directly to the .ext file that generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. - - - ext - - The extension of the file on which information is to be written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables). - - - - text - - The text to be written. - - -
-
-
- - Glossaries - Indexes - Tables of contents - Front/back matter -
- Glossaries - glossaries \makeglossaryThe command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. - \glossary.glo fileThe command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for text to an auxiliary file with the .glo extension. - \glossaryentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command \glossaryentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno is the current \thepage value. - The glossary package on CTAN provides support for fancier glossaries. -
-
- - Indexes - Glossaries - Front/back matter -
- Indexes - indexes \makeindexThe command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in the preamble. - \index.idx fileThe command \index{text} writes an index entry for text to an auxiliary file with the .idx extension. - \indexentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command \indexentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno is the current \thepage value. - `see' and `see also' index entriesTo generate a index entry for `bar' that says `See foo', use a vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}. Use seealso instead of see to make a `See also' entry. - \seename\alsonameThe text `See' is defined by the macro \seename, and `See also' by the macro \alsoname. These can be redefined for other languages. - makeindex programxindy program.ind fileThe generated .idx file is then sorted with an external command, usually either makeindex (http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex) or (the multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge.net). This results in a .ind file, which can then be read to typeset the index. - printindexmakeidx packageThe index is usually generated with the \printindex command. This is defined in the makeidx package, so \usepackage{makeidx} needs to be in the preamble. - indexspaceThe rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new letter in the printed index; its default value is 10pt plus5pt minus3pt. - showidx packageThe showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index. - multind packageThe multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic, http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. -
-
- - Letters - Terminal input/output - Front/back matter - Top - - Letters - letterscreating letters You can use &latex; to typeset letters, both personal and business. The letter document class is designed to make a number of letters at once, although you can make just one if you so desire. - Your .tex source file has the same minimum commands as the other document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a minimum: - \documentclass{letter} + + + + +\addtocontents +\addcontentsline +Tables of contents + + +\addtocontents +\addtocontents{ext}{text} +The \addtocontents{ext}{text} command adds text +(or formatting commands) directly to the .ext file that +generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. + +ext +The extension of the file on which information is to be written: +toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or +lot (list of tables). + +text +The text to be written. +
+ + +
+
+ +Glossaries +Indexes +Tables of contents +Front/back matter + +
+Glossaries +glossaries +\makeglossaryThe command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. + +\glossary.glo fileThe command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for +text to an auxiliary file with the .glo extension. + +\glossaryentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command +\glossaryentry{text}{pageno}, where +pageno is the current \thepage value. + +The glossary package on CTAN provides support for fancier +glossaries. + + +
+ +Indexes +Glossaries +Front/back matter + +
+Indexes +indexes +\makeindexThe command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in +the preamble. + +\index.idx fileThe command \index{text} writes an index entry for +text to an auxiliary file with the .idx extension. + +\indexentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command +\indexentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno +is the current \thepage value. + +`see' and `see also' index entriesTo generate a index entry for `bar' that says `See foo', use a +vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}. Use seealso +instead of see to make a `See also' entry. + +\seename\alsonameThe text `See' is defined by the macro \seename, and `See also' +by the macro \alsoname. These can be redefined for other +languages. + +makeindex programxindy program.ind fileThe generated .idx file is then sorted with an external +command, usually either makeindex +(http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex) or (the +multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge.net). +This results in a .ind file, which can then be read to typeset +the index. + +printindexmakeidx packageThe index is usually generated with the \printindex command. +This is defined in the makeidx package, so +\usepackage{makeidx} needs to be in the preamble. + +indexspaceThe rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new +letter in the printed index; its default value is 10pt plus5pt +minus3pt. + +showidx packageThe showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in +the margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in +preparing the index. + +multind packageThe multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the +&tex; FAQ entry on this topic, +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. + + +
+
+ +Letters +Terminal input/output +Front/back matter +Top + + +Letters +letterscreating letters +You can use &latex; to typeset letters, both personal and business. The +letter document class is designed to make a number of letters at +once, although you can make just one if you so desire. + +Your .tex source file has the same minimum commands as the other +document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a +minimum: + + \documentclass{letter} \begin{document} ... letters ... - \end{document} - Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the name and address of the recipient. For example, you might have: - \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St. + \end{document} + +Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the name +and address of the recipient. For example, you might have: + + \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St. \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA} ... - \end{letter} - The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text of the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary &latex; input. Commands that make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not work. The letter closes with a \closing command. - \\ for lettersAfter the closing, you can have additional material. The \cc command produces the usual “cc: &dots;”. There's also a similar \encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, use \\ to separate the items. - These commands are used with the letter class. - - - \address - \address - Your return address. - - - \cc - \cc - Cc list. - - - \closing - \closing - Saying goodbye. - - - \encl - \encl - List of enclosed material. - - - \location - \location - Your organisation's address. - - - \makelabels - \makelabels - Making address labels. - - - \name - \name - Your name, for the return address. - - - \opening - \opening - Saying hello. - - - \ps - \ps - Adding a postscript. - - - \signature - \signature - Your signature. - - - \startbreaks - \startbreaks - Allow page breaks. - - - \stopbreaks - \stopbreaks - Disallow page breaks. - - - \telephone - \telephone - Your phone number. - - - -
- - \address - \cc - Letters -
- \address{<var>return-address}</var> - \address The \address specifies the return address of a letter, as it should appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by \\ commands. - If you do not make an \address declaration, then the letter will be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard letterhead. (See Overview, for details on your local implementation). If you give an \address declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a personal letter. -
-
- - \cc - \closing - \address - Letters -
- <code>\cc</code> - \cccc list, in letters Synopsis: - \cc{name1\\name2} - Produce a list of names the letter was copied to. Each name is printed on a separate line. -
-
- - \closing - \encl - \cc - Letters -
- <code>\closing</code> - \closingletters, endingclosing letters Synopsis: - \closing{text} - A letter closes with a \closing command, for example, - \closing{Best Regards,} -
-
- - \encl - \location - \closing - Letters -
- <code>\encl</code> - \enclenclosure list Synopsis: - \encl{line1\\line2} - Declare a list of one more enclosures. -
-
- - \location - \makelabels - \encl - Letters -
- <code>\location</code> - \location \location{address} - This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. -
-
- - \makelabels - \name - \location - Letters -
- <code>\makelabels</code> - \makelabels \makelabels{number} - If you issue this command in the preamble, &latex; will create a sheet of address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. -
-
- - \name - \opening - \makelabels - Letters -
- <code>\name</code> - \name \name{June Davenport} - Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return address. -
-
- - \opening - \ps - \name - Letters -
- <code>\opening{<var>text</var>}</code> - \openingletters, starting Synopsis: - \opening{text} - A letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your letter. For instance: - \opening{Dear Joe,} -
-
- - \ps - \signature - \opening - Letters -
- <code>\ps</code> - \pspostscript, in letters Use the \ps command to start a postscript in a letter, after \closing. -
-
- - \signature - \startbreaks - \ps - Letters -
- <code>\signature{<var>text</var>}</code> - \signature Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within text as usual. -
-
- - \startbreaks - \stopbreaks - \signature - Letters -
- <code>\startbreaks</code> - \startbreaks \startbreaks - Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again. -
-
- - \stopbreaks - \telephone - \startbreaks - Letters -
- <code>\stopbreaks</code> - \stopbreaks \stopbreaks - Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs. -
-
- - \telephone - \stopbreaks - Letters -
- <code>\telephone</code> - \telephone \telephone{number} - This is your telephone number. This only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. -
-
- - Terminal input/output - Command line - Letters - Top - - Terminal input/output - input/outputterminal input/output - - - \typein - \typein - Read text from the terminal. - - - \typeout - \typeout - Write text to the terminal. - - - - - - \typein - \typeout - Terminal input/output -
- <code>\typein[<var>cmd</var>]{<var>msg</var>}</code> - \typein Synopsis: - \typein[\cmd]{msg} - \typein prints msg on the terminal and causes &latex; to stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the optional \cmd argument is omitted, the typed input is processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the \typein command. If the \cmd argument is present, it must be a command name. This command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input. -
-
- - \typeout - \typein - Terminal input/output -
- <code>\typeout{<var>msg</var>}</code> - \typeout Synopsis: - \typeout{msg} - Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in msg that are defined with \newcommand or \renewcommand (among others) are replaced by their definitions before being printed. - &latex;'s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg. A \space command in msg causes a single space to be printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in msg prints a newline. -
-
- - Command line - Document templates - Terminal input/output - Top - - Command line - command line The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; &tex; uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal. You specify command options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g. - latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex' - will process foo.tex without pausing after every error. - * promptprompt, *\stopIf &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a * prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop (and return) and it will prematurely end the document. - - - - Document templates - Concept Index - Command line - Top - - Document templates - document templates Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will be useful. - - - book template - book template - - - - beamer template - beamer template - - - - tugboat template - tugboat template - - - - - - - book template - beamer template - Document templates -
- <code>book</code> template - \documentclass{book} + \end{letter} + +The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text of +the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary &latex; input. Commands that +make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not work. The letter +closes with a \closing command. + +\\ for lettersAfter the closing, you can have additional material. The +\cc command produces the usual “cc: &dots;”. There's also a +similar \encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these +commands, use \\ to separate the items. + +These commands are used with the letter class. + + + +\address +\address + Your return address. + + +\cc +\cc + Cc list. + + +\closing +\closing + Saying goodbye. + + +\encl +\encl + List of enclosed material. + + +\location +\location + Your organisation's address. + + +\makelabels +\makelabels + Making address labels. + + +\name +\name + Your name, for the return address. + + +\opening +\opening + Saying hello. + + +\ps +\ps + Adding a postscript. + + +\signature +\signature + Your signature. + + +\startbreaks +\startbreaks + Allow page breaks. + + +\stopbreaks +\stopbreaks + Disallow page breaks. + + +\telephone +\telephone + Your phone number. + + + + + +\address +\cc +Letters + +
+\address{<var>return-address}</var> +\address +The \address specifies the return address of a letter, as it +should appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the +address should be separated by \\ commands. + +If you do not make an \address declaration, then the letter +will be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard +letterhead. (See Overview, for details on your local +implementation). If you give an \address declaration, then the +letter will be formatted as a personal letter. + + +
+ +\cc +\closing +\address +Letters + +
+<code>\cc</code> + +\cccc list, in letters +Synopsis: + +\cc{name1\\name2} + +Produce a list of names the letter was copied to. Each name is +printed on a separate line. + + +
+ +\closing +\encl +\cc +Letters + +
+<code>\closing</code> + +\closingletters, endingclosing letters +Synopsis: + +\closing{text} + +A letter closes with a \closing command, for example, +\closing{Best Regards,} + + +
+ +\encl +\location +\closing +Letters + +
+<code>\encl</code> + +\enclenclosure list +Synopsis: + +\encl{line1\\line2} + +Declare a list of one more enclosures. + + +
+ +\location +\makelabels +\encl +Letters + +
+<code>\location</code> +\location +\location{address} + +This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears +if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. + + +
+ +\makelabels +\name +\location +Letters + +
+<code>\makelabels</code> +\makelabels +\makelabels{number} + +If you issue this command in the preamble, &latex; will create a sheet of +address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. + + + +
+ +\name +\opening +\makelabels +Letters + +
+<code>\name</code> +\name +\name{June Davenport} + +Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return +address. + + +
+ +\opening +\ps +\name +Letters + +
+<code>\opening{<var>text</var>}</code> +\openingletters, starting +Synopsis: + +\opening{text} + +A letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory +argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your letter. +For instance: + +\opening{Dear Joe,} + + +
+ +\ps +\signature +\opening +Letters + +
+<code>\ps</code> +\pspostscript, in letters +Use the \ps command to start a postscript in a letter, after +\closing. + + +
+ +\signature +\startbreaks +\ps +Letters + +
+<code>\signature{<var>text</var>}</code> +\signature +Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the +space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within +text as usual. + + +
+ +\startbreaks +\stopbreaks +\signature +Letters + +
+<code>\startbreaks</code> +\startbreaks +\startbreaks + +Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again. + + + +
+ +\stopbreaks +\telephone +\startbreaks +Letters + +
+<code>\stopbreaks</code> +\stopbreaks +\stopbreaks + +Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs. + + + +
+ +\telephone +\stopbreaks +Letters + +
+<code>\telephone</code> +\telephone +\telephone{number} + +This is your telephone number. This only appears if the +firstpage pagestyle is selected. + + +
+ + +Terminal input/output +Command line +Letters +Top + + +Terminal input/output +input/outputterminal input/output + + +\typein +\typein + Read text from the terminal. + + +\typeout +\typeout + Write text to the terminal. + + + + + +\typein +\typeout +Terminal input/output + +
+<code>\typein[<var>cmd</var>]{<var>msg</var>}</code> +\typein +Synopsis: + +\typein[\cmd]{msg} + +\typein prints msg on the terminal and causes &latex; to +stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If +the optional \cmd argument is omitted, the typed input is +processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the +\typein command. If the \cmd argument is present, it +must be a command name. This command name is then defined or +redefined to be the typed input. + + +
+ +\typeout +\typein +Terminal input/output + +
+<code>\typeout{<var>msg</var>}</code> +\typeout +Synopsis: + +\typeout{msg} + +Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. +Commands in msg that are defined with \newcommand or +\renewcommand (among others) are replaced by their definitions +before being printed. + +&latex;'s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space +and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg. A +\space command in msg causes a single space to be +printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in +msg prints a newline. + + +
+
+ +Command line +Document templates +Terminal input/output +Top + + +Command line +command line +The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; +&tex; uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the +input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal. You +specify command options by supplying a string as a parameter to the +command; e.g. + +latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex' + +will process foo.tex without pausing after every error. + +* promptprompt, *\stopIf &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a +* prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop +(and return) and it will prematurely end the document. + + + + + +Document templates +Concept Index +Command line +Top + + +Document templates +document templates +Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will +be useful. + + + +book template +book template + + + +beamer template +beamer template + + + +tugboat template +tugboat template + + + + + + +book template +beamer template +Document templates + +
+<code>book</code> template + +\documentclass{book} \title{Book Class Template} \author{Alex Author} @@ -7342,18 +7731,22 @@ Some other text. \section{A subtopic} The end. -\end{document} -
- - - beamer template - tugboat template - book template - Document templates -
- <code>beamer</code> template - The beamer class creates slides presentations. - \documentclass{beamer} +\end{document} + + +
+ +beamer template +tugboat template +book template +Document templates + +
+<code>beamer</code> template + +The beamer class creates slides presentations. + +\documentclass{beamer} \title{Beamer Class template} \author{Alex Author} @@ -7374,18 +7767,22 @@ The end. \end{frame} \end{document} + -
-
- - tugboat template - beamer template - Document templates -
- <code>tugboat</code> template - TUGboat is the journal of the &tex; Users Group, http://tug.org/TUGboat. - \documentclass{ltugboat} % ltugproc for proceedings +
+ +tugboat template +beamer template +Document templates + +
+<code>tugboat</code> template + +TUGboat is the journal of the &tex; Users Group, +http://tug.org/TUGboat. + +\documentclass{ltugboat} \usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{ifpdf} \ifpdf @@ -7395,9 +7792,7 @@ The end. \usepackage{url} \fi -\begin{document} - -\title{Example \TUB\ Regular Article} +\title{Example \TUB\ Article} % repeat info for each author. \author{First Last} @@ -7407,7 +7802,8 @@ The end. \maketitle -% The abstract comes after \maketitle in ltugboat. +\begin{document} + \begin{abstract} This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue. \end{abstract} @@ -7417,26 +7813,26 @@ This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue. This is an example article for \TUB, from \url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}. -We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the hyperref -package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). \TUB\ is produced -using \acro{PDF} files exclusively, nowadays. +We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the +hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). +Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others: {\small \begin{verbatim} \AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW -\BibTeX \CandT \CTAN \DTD \DVItoVDU \HTML -\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \JoT \LAMSTeX \LaTeXe -\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \pcMF \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas +\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML +\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \LaTeXe +\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas \PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS -\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG -\tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \VorTeX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE +\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG \tug +\UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE \Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag \careof \thinskip -\acro{FRED} -> {\sc fred} % please use! +\acro{FRED} -> {\small fred} % please use! \cs{fred} -> \fred \env{fred} -> \begin{fred} \meta{fred} -> <fred> @@ -7456,36 +7852,34 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. \nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty \bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX +\makesignature +\end{document} + + +
+
+ +Concept Index +Command Index +Document templates +Top + + +Concept Index + +cp -\makesignature % not in ltugproc -\end{document}
-
-
- - Concept Index - Command Index - Document templates - Top - - Concept Index - cp - - - - Command Index - Concept Index - Top - - Command Index - fn - - + + +Command Index +Concept Index +Top + + +Command Index + +fn + +
- -- cgit v1.2.3